Solar Turbines: Liquid Fuel Oil Treatment System System Operation and Maintenance Manual

Liquid Fuel Oil Treatment System
System Operation and Maintenance Manual
SOLAR TURBINES
SAN DIEGO, CA - USA
Gas Turbine Model: Titan 130
CUSTOMER PURCHASE ORDER NO:

ECP003014, ECP003015, ECP003016, ECP003030,
ECP003088, ECP003089, ECP003108, ECP003113
ALFA LAVAL CO NO: 393052

Separator Model: PU 635
WARNING
The centrifuge must spin at operating speed for an
hour every 2 weeks. The date, start, and stop time
must be logged. Failure to follow this instruction
voids the manufacturer warranty.
Failure to follow the centrifuge maintenance schedule

voids the manufacturer warranty
Parts & Service

Venezuela: +58 212 701 05 00
USA: +1 215-443-4000
ALFA LAVAL INC. USA

www.alfalaval.us
September 2010
POWER BUSINESS UNIT
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Concerns: Job No. :
Table of Contents and Revision Status CO 393052

Page: 1 of 1 Rev. : 0
Reviewed and Approved By: Position: Date:
Pradeep Shah Project Manager 09/01/10

It is hereby certified that the Technical Manual prepared for the above job number has been reviewed and approved by the responsible Project Engineer.
SECTION 1: Safety
SECTION 2: System Description
SECTION 3: Operating Instructions
SECTION 4: Parameter List
SECTION 5: Alarms and Fault Finding
SECTION 6: Installation System Reference & Drawings
SECTION 7: Service Manual

A) Separator, CG-1
B) Pump, P-1A & P-1B
C) Valve Block, Water
D) Flow Control Valve, FCV-1
SECTION 8: Spare Parts Catalog

A) Recommended Spare Parts List
B) Separator, CG-1
C) Ancillary Equipment
D) Pump, P-1A & P-1B
E) Flow Control Valve, FCV-1
SECTION 9: Bill of Materials / Catalog - Auxiliary Equipment
Requests for changes to this Technical Manual must be made in writing to the issuing and approving authority together with documentation on which to base the review and approval.
Listed below is the record of changes for this Technical Manual. Revision level and approval of revisions are recorded above.
Rev Date Page Paragraph Nature of change
0 09/01/10 Original Issue.

PA Purifier System
Safety
Printed Oct 2005
Book No. 1810894-02 V 3
Alfa Laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Any comments regarding possible errors and omissions or
suggestions for improvement of this publication would be
gratefully appreciated.
Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local
Alfa Laval company.
Published by: Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Marine & Diesel Equipment
SE - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2005.
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SAFETY 1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1 Safety Instructions
Important – read this!
The centrifugal separator includes parts

that rotate at very high speeds, generating
huge forces. It is therefore essential for the
safe operation of this separator system that
you read and understand this manual,
including the warning signs and safety
P003702A
precautions presented in this manual.
Failure to do so may cause a fatal accident.
1.1 Key Factors for Safe

Operation
The purifier system is designed and supplied for
a specific function (type of liquid, rotational
speed, temperature, density, etc.). The system
P0 0 3 6 2 3 A
must be used for this function only, and strictly
within Alfa Laval´s specifications.
Incorrect operation or maintenance may result
in a heavy unbalance, reduction of material
strength, etc. that could lead to serious
breakdown with fatal injury or damage to
property.
For safe operation, strictly follow the
instructions for installation, operation and
maintenance in this manual.
1810894-02 1
1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SAFETY
The following is compulsory for safe

operation:
1 Never start up a separator before the bowl is
completely assembled, and all fastenings
securely tightened.
2 Never discharge a vibrating separator. Always
stop with the emergency stop button.
3 Never begin to disassemble a separator
before it has come to a complete standstill.
4 Always set the discharge intervals according
to instructions in the instruction book.
5 Never ignore alarms. Always eliminate the
cause before resuming operation.
6 Never use the separator for other liquids than
those specified by Alfa Laval.
7 Never operate a separator with a different
power supply frequency than stated on the
machine plate.
8 Ensure that enough conditioning water is
added before discharge, as described in the
instruction book.
9 Clean the operating system regularly to avoid
sludge discharge malfunction.
10 Ensure that personnel are fully trained and
competent in installation, operation,
maintenance, and emergency procedures.
11 Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts and
the special tools supplied.
2 1810894-02
1.2 Warning Sign Definitions

Below are definitions of the warning signs used.
Danger – serious injury or death Example:
This type of safety sign or instruction

R
indicates an imminently hazardous
! DANGE
situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
Entrapment hazard
Make sure that rotating parts have come to a
complete standstill before starting any
dismantling work.
Warning – serious injury or death Example:
This type of safety sign or instruction indicates

ING
a potentially hazardous situation which, if not WARN
!
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Breakdown hazard
Check that the power frequency is in agreement
with the machine plate. If incorrect, resulting
overspeed may cause breakdown.
Caution – minor or moderate injury Example:
This type of safety sign or instruction indicates

ON
a situation which, if not avoided, could result in CAUTI
!
minor or moderate injury.
‘CAUTION’ used without the safety alert Burn hazard

symbol indicates a potentially hazardous Various machine surfaces can be hot and cause
situation which, if not avoided, could result in burns.
equipment damage.
1810894-02 3
1.3 Summary of Safety Hazards

Below follows a selection of the warnings which
have been used in the text of this instruction
manual to ensure safe installation, start-up,
operation, stop, and maintenance. Further
warnings are to be found in the appropriate
places throughout the manual.
Installation
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazards
Use only the two special lifting eyes (M12) for lifting
the machine. They are to be screwed into the
special threaded holes.
Other holes are not dimensioned for lifting the
machine.
A falling separator can cause accidents resulting in
serious injury and damage.
Start-up
Be especially observant during start-up. If
there is any abnormal vibration, immediately
stop the separator and investigate the cause.
Clean the bowl if it contains sediment.
ING
WARN
!
Breakdown hazard
Assemble the separator completely before start. All
couplings, covers, and guards must be in place and
properly tightened. Non-compliance may lead to
breakdown.
X023714B
Continued on next page
4 1810894-02
ING
WARN
!
Electrical hazard
Follow local regulations for electrical installation
and earthing (grounding).
Breakdown hazard
Check that the power frequency is in agreement
with the machine plate. If incorrect, resulting
overspeed may cause breakdown.
Breakdown hazard
Use the separation system for the purpose, and
within the limits, specified by Alfa Laval. Failure to
do so could cause a violent breakdown.
Breakdown hazard
Always observe the separator during start-up after
assembly. If strong vibration occurs, stop by using
P003992A
the Emergency Stop button and evacuate the room.
ON
CAUTI
!
If power cable polarity has been reversed, the

separator will rotate in reverse, and vital rotating
parts can loosen.
1810894-02 5
Operation
ING
WARN
!
Breakdown hazard
If strong vibration occurs, press the emergency
stop button and evacuate the room.
Never discharge a vibrating separator. Vibration
may then become violent and result in breakdown.
P003992A
ING
WARN
!
Noise hazard
Use ear protection if noise levels are high.
ING
WARN
!
Breakdown hazard
Never reset an alarm without first finding and
remedying the cause.
N
CAUTIO
!
Burn hazard
X023716A
Avoid contact with hot surfaces. Process pipes,
various machine surfaces, and processed liquid can
be hot and cause burns.
ON
CAUTI
!
Slip hazard
Check all connections for leakage.
Oil leakage may make the floor slippery.
6 1810894-02
Stop
ON
CAUTI
!
Breakdown hazard
Stop the separator by means of the control unit, and
not by turning off the motor.
Never attempt to clean the bowl by manual discharge

in connection with stop.
Emergency stop
ING
WARN
!
Disintegration hazard
P0 0 3 9 9 2 A
If unusually strong vibration occurs, press the
Emergency Stop button and leave the room
Do not enter the room after an emergency stop
while the separator is still rotating.
ING
WARN
!
Do not start the separator after an emergency stop
without first remedying the cause of the emergency.
Make sure that the bowl is clean before restart.
1810894-02 7
Maintenance
R
! DANGE
Entrapment hazard
complete standstill before starting any dismantling
work. The rotation indicator lamp, where applicable,
must be off.
Disintegration hazards
Inspect regularly for erosion damage. Inspect
frequently if the process liquid is erosive.
Pits and spots forming a line may indicate cracks
beneath the surface.
All forms of cracks are a potential danger and are
totally unacceptable.
Replace the part if corrosion can be suspected of
affecting its strength or function.
All forms of cracks are potentially dangerous as
they reduce the strength and functional ability of
components.
Always replace a part if cracks are present.
The assembly mark on the bowl hood must never
pass the mark on the bowl body by more than 25°.
8 1810894-02
ING
WARN
!
Entrapment hazard
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock power
I002933A
supply before starting any dismantling work.
Make sure that the separator has come to a
work.
Separator parts that are either missing, worn
beyond their safe limits, or incorrectly assembled,
may cause severe damage or fatal injury.
I002935A
Do not weld nor heat parts that are subject to high-
speed rotation.
I0 0 2 9 3 B A
Cut hazards
The discs have sharp edges that can cause cuts.
G0065841
Breakdown hazard
Assemble the separator completely before restart.
All couplings, covers, and guards must be in place
and properly tightened. Non compliance may lead
to breakdown.
X023714B
1810894-02 9
10 1810894-02
PA Purifier System
System Description
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
SE-147 80 Tumba, Sweden
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00
Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40
© Alfa Laval Tumba AB 26 October 2005

This publication or any part there of may not be reproduced or
transmitted by any process or means without prior written
permission of Alfa Laval Tumba AB.
Contents
1 System Overview
1.1 The Oil Flow
1.2 System Layout
1.5 System Components,
PA 625/635........................................10
2 The Process
2.1 Purifying
2.2 Definition of Terms
1810895-02
1810895-02
1 System Overview
The PA Purifier System is designed for cleaning The system comprises:

of lubricating and fuel oils in marine and power
• A separator.
applications and can handle the following types
of oil: • Ancillary equipment including a control unit.
• distillate • Optional equipment such as oil feed pump,
oil heating system, sludge removal kit, etc.
• marine diesel oil
The separating systems can be operated as
• intermediate fuel oil
single, parallel or serial systems.
• heavy fuel oil with a maximum viscosity of
During the process, the cleaned oil leaves the
600 cSt
separator through the oil outlet, separated
• detergent lubricating oil water leaves through the water outlet, and
sludge accumulates at the periphery of the
• R&O lubricating oil
separator bowl.
In the purifier process, heated oil is fed through
The control unit initiates a sludge discharge at
the separator to clean the oil from solid
preset intervals.
particles and water.
Sludge and water are then discharged through
sludge ports at the periphery of the bowl and
collected in a sludge tank.
1.1 The Oil Flow Backpressure

Settling tank Change-over
valve regulating
The unprocessed oil is fed by a positive valve
displacement pump, operating at a constant flow.
Depending on the oil type, the oil may need to be
heated.
After the heater the change over valve directs
the oil to the separator. The separated oil passes
the manually operated back-pressure regulating
valve to the receiving tank.
The oil can also be directed back to the tank,
bypassing the separator. This is the case when
the oil temperature is outside the preset range,
during separator start and stop procedures, and Pump Heater Separator Daily
service tank
P0 0 3 7 1 6 A
during alarm conditions.
1810895-02 5
1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.2 System Layout
Heater Temperature Pressure transmitter, Pneumatically controlled Separator

transmitter (TT1, oil (PT1) change-over valve (V1)
Heats unprocessed Cleans the oil by
oil to separation TT2) removing water
Measures the pressure Directs the unprocessed oil to
temperature. Measures the oil in the oil inlet, and the separator, or back to the and solid
temperature and signals the control unit. settling tank (recirculation – particles.
signals the control fuel oil only).
unit.
Feed pump
Feeds The position of PT
unprocessed oil to the
separator.
depends on separator
size and design.
PT
Unprocessed oil
inlet TT
Oil return
Displacement water
Opening water
Water inlet
Closing water
Solenoid valve block, water Sludge outlet
Distributes separator opening/

Additional equipment closing water, and conditioning water.
not part of the PA
6 1810895-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Control unit Pressure transmitter, oil Regulating valve (RV4)

(PT4) Regulates the back-
Supervises the separation
system. Measures the pressure in pressure in the clean oil
the oil outlet, and signals the outlet.
control unit.
EPC-50
PT Clean oil outlet

to service tank
1810895-02 7
1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.5 System Components, PA 625/635
Control unit
EPC 50
Operating water
Pressure Regulating
Oil in transmitters valve
Oil out
Pneumatic
3-way valve
Temperature
sensor
Clean oil outlet
Sludge and
water outlet
Oil inlet
Oil recirculation
X023718A
10 1810895-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2 THE PROCESS
2 The Process
The terms used in this process description are
explained in section ‘‘2.2 Definition of Terms’’ on
page 12.
2.1 Purifying
A water seal is added to the separator bowl
through the water inlet.
The separator is equipped with a gravity disc,
chosen according to factors such as oil
temperature, density, and feed rate. This choice
decides the position of the interface between oil
and water seal.
The separator does not use a paring disc to pump
out the separated water. Instead, the water
leaves the bowl via the gravity disc, and leaves
the separator through the water/sludge outlet.
Process Cycle
1 A specific amount of water is added to the
separator bowl to form a water seal.
2 The feeding of unprocessed oil to the centre
of the separator bowl starts.
3 During the separation process sludge and
water accumulate at the periphery of the
separator bowl. Cleaned oil is fed from the
separator by the integrated paring disc.
Excessive water leaves the bowl through the
water/sludge outlet to the sludge tank.
4 After the preset time between discharge
sequences, the oil feeding stops.
5 Displacement water is added to the bowl. The
displacement water reduces the oil loss at the
following sludge discharge.
6 A sludge discharge is initiated while the
displacement water is still flowing.
The next process cycle starts with adding of
water for a new water seal.
1810895-02 11
2 THE PROCESS PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.2 Definition of Terms

Preset time between sludge discharge When this time has elapsed after a sludge
sequences discharge, the next discharge is initiated.
(Parameter value)
Water seal Water, added to the separator bowl to prevent oil
(Parameter value) from escaping at the water outlet.
Displacement water Water, added to the separator bowl to displace
the oil and ensure there is reduced loss of oil at
sludge discharge.
Purifier A separator that cleans the oil from water and
sludge with continuous evacuating of separated
water.
12 1810895-02
PA Purifier System
Operating Instructions
prior notice.
Alfa Laval company.
SE - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
Contents
1 Operating
1.1 Before Startup
1.2 Operator Panel
1.3 Startup
1.4 During operation
1.5 Stop
1.6 Emergency Stop
1.7 After Emergency Stop
1.8 Intervals Between
Sludge Discharges
1810896-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
2 1810896-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 OPERATING
1 Operating
1.1 Before Startup
The correct gravity disc must be installed in the
separator. See chapter 4.3.3 Selection of gravity
disc in the Separator Manual.
1 Check that the separator is correctly

assembled and connected to power supply of
correct voltage and frequency.
ING
WARN
!
Breakdown hazard
couplings, covers, and guards must be in place and
properly tightened. Non compliance may lead to
breakdown.
ING
WARN
!
X0 23 71 4B
Electrical hazard
Follow local regulations for electrical installation and
earthing (grounding).
ING
WARN
!
50 Hz?
60 Hz?
Breakdown hazard
Check that the power frequency is in agreement with
P00 3 99 2A
the machine plate. If incorrect, resulting overspeed
may cause breakdown.
ING
WARN
!
Use the separation system for the purpose, and

within the limits, specified by Alfa Laval. Failure to do
so could cause a violent breakdown.
1810896-02 3
1 OPERATING PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
2 Check the oil sump level and top up if

necessary.
• For P 600, P 605, P 610, and P 615:

The oil level should be slightly above middle
of the sight glass.
NOTE
Too much or too little oil can damage the separator

bearings.
G 08 68 5 43 A
• For P 625/P 635:
Remove the oil pin and make sure that the oil
level is above the lower end of the pin.
G 0 86 8 7K 1
4 1810896-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 OPERATING
Rotation Direction
Check the rotation of the bowl by doing a quick

start/stop. The motor fan must rotate in a clockwise
direction.
ON
CAUTI
!
If power cable polarity has been reversed, the

X0 23 71 9B
parts can loosen.
Air Valve Block (PA 600, 610)
Use the pressure gauge situated in the air valve

block to check that the air supply is correct.
See the Installation System Reference booklet.
P0 03 68 3 A
1810896-02 5
1 OPERATING PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1.2 Operator Panel
6 1810896-02
Issued by Date Ref. Page
ABB Automation Products Inc. 09/12/10 (1) Of (22)

Subject Document type
Liquid Fuel Treatment System Operating Descriptions

Approved by
Operator Instruction Manual
Turbine Model: Titan 130

Separator Model: PU 635
Basic Operating Instructions
Filename: SECTION 3 Operator Interface Manual.doc ABB Revised: 8/13/2010 1:49:00 PM



Approved by
Index
OPERATING SCREENS ................................................................................................................................. 4
Main Screen .................................................................................................................................................. 5
Status Indication ........................................................................................................................................ 6
Local Pushbuttons ...................................................................................................................................... 6
Manual Screen.............................................................................................................................................. 7
Local Pushbuttons ...................................................................................................................................... 8
Alarm Screen ................................................................................................................................................ 9
Login Screen ............................................................................................................................................... 10
Local Pushbuttons .................................................................................................................................... 10
Maintenance Screen ................................................................................................................................... 11
Vibration Setup Screen.............................................................................................................................. 12
Vibration Sensor Installation Proceedure ................................................................................................ 13
Timer Screen .............................................................................................................................................. 14
Factory Parameter Screen......................................................................................................................... 15
Process Parameter Screen ......................................................................................................................... 16
PID Screen .................................................................................................................................................. 17
System Auto Start / Auto Stop......................................................................................................................... 18
System Remote Start / Remote Stop ................................................................................................................ 18
Tanker/Air Compressor Screen ................................................................................................................ 20



Approved by

GENERAL
All centrifuge control and system monitoring is accomplished through the operator interface unit
(OIU) with the exception of emergency stop pushbuttons, which are hard wired to the front of
the control panel and the outside of the skid enclosure.
The OIU is an Allen Bradley PanelView Plus 700. Refer to Allen Bradley User Manual, Catalog
Number 2711P for detailed information on the unit.



Approved by
OPERATING SCREENS
Information is provided to the operator through a series of process operating screens. These
screens provide the operator with all of the necessary system status and performance
information. Below is a list of the available screens:
1. Main Screen
2. Manual Screen
3. Alarm Screen
4. Login Screen
5. Maintenance Screen
6. Vibration Setup Screen
7. Timer Screen
8. Factory Parameter Screen
9. Process Parameter Screen
10. PID Screen
11. Tanker/Air Compressor



Approved by

Main Screen
The Main Screen is the default screen that appears when power is turned on. The main screen
provides an overview of the skid and auxiliaries.



Approved by

Status Indication
1. P-1A – Primary Feed Pump - On/Off status: Green=On, Red=Off.
2. P-1B – Primary Feed Pump - On/Off status: Green=On, Red=Off.
3. TT-1 - Fuel Inlet Temperature – Readout in degrees Fahrenheit.
4. PT-1 - Fuel Inlet Pressure – Readout in PSI.
5. V1 - Feed Inlet Valve – On/Off status and Auto/Man status.
6. PT-4 - Fuel Outlet Pressure – Readout in PSI.
7. Treated Tank Level – Treated fuel tank level displayed in percent.
8. Centrifuge Drive Motor – On/Off status.
9. Centrifuge Speed – Readout in RPM.
10. Vibration – Readout in millimeters.
11. Pneumatic Sludge Pump – On/Off status.
12. Sludge Tank Level – High level indication. Digital float switch.
13. Water Valves – On/Off status, and Auto/Man status indication of valve SV10, SV15, and
SV16.
14. Next Discharge – Displays the time remaining before the next discharge cleaning cycle.
15. Next Maintenance – Displays the time remaining before the next required machine
maintenance.
Local Pushbuttons
K7: Start Pushbutton – Press to start the liquid fuel treatment skid.
K8: Immediate Stop Pushbutton – Press to stop the liquid fuel treatment skid.
K9: System Shutdown – Press to stop the machine after the Treated fuel Tank has been
brought up to capacity.
K10: Settings Screen – Press this button to gain access to the timer screen, factory
parameter screen, process parameter screen, PID screen, or maintenance screen.
K11: Manual Screen – Screen jump to the manual screen.
K12: Alarm Screen – Screen jump to the alarm screen.
Production- Press this button while in operation to toggle between offline and online. While
in offline mode, feed inlet valve V1 is off, diverting oil from the centrifuge.
System in Local/Remote – Press this button to toggle between local control mode and
remote control mode. In remote control mode, the system can only be started via the
remote start input.



Approved by

Manual Screen
The manual screen provides control for skid related devices. Pressing the function key labeled
“Manual Screen” will produce the following screen.
The Manual Screen provides on/off and auto/manual control for the devices listed above. To
place a device into auto/manual, press the appropriate pushbutton located next to the tag name
of the desired device. Once the device is placed into manual, press the on/off pushbutton to
activate or deactivate the device.



Approved by

Local Pushbuttons
Manual/Auto Control Pushbuttons: These pushbuttons allow the operator to troubleshoot
problems in the system by placing each of the listed valves and pumps in a manual state
whereby the valve or pump can be turned on and off. The normal situation is Auto.
Centrifuge Local Start/Stop – If the centrifuge is placed into manual control (as shown above),
local start and stop pushbuttons become visible. Initiating a local start will start the
centrifuge, but will not go on-line with feed. Local control is provided for maintenance
troubleshooting.
F6: Goto Main Screen – Press to return to the main operational screen.
F8: Settings Screen – Press this button to gain access to the timer screen, factory parameter
screen, process parameter screen, PID screen, or maintenance screen.
All Devices to Auto Control – This is a conveinience pushbutton to place all devices in
Automatic Mode.
Manual Discharge – Press this button while the system is in operation to initiate a cleaning
cycle.



Approved by

Alarm Screen
Press the Alarm Screen pushbutton to view active alarms or alarm history.
The top window displays active alarms, and the bottom window displays the alarm history. To
clear an active alarm, press the “Alarm Reset” pushbutton. To acknowledge the alarm on the
screen, press the “Alarm Acknowledge” pushbutton. If the alarm is no longer active and has
been acknowledged, the alarm text in the top window will disappear.



Approved by

Login Screen
The login screen contains links to the maintenance screen and password protected screens.
The screen links for the timer screen, factory parameter screen, process parameter screen,
vibration setup screen and PID screen are not visible on this screen until the operator logs into
the system.
A login pushbutton is provided to gain access to the password protected screens. Press the
Login pushbutton and enter the password <1111> using the keypad. Contact Alfa Laval prior to
making any changes to the settings.
Local Pushbuttons
Tanker Trailer Selected – This pushbutton controls the display on the Tanker Trailer Screen as
well as local Fuel Tanker related alarms



Approved by

Maintenance Screen
The maintenance screen provides information and acess to program shutdown. Pressing the
function key labeled “Maintenance Screen” will produce the following screen.
The Maintenance Screen provides as settable alarm delay as well as a service time setting and
an indication as to when the next service is due. Also, there is a program shutdown pushbutton
that will take the PanelView out of it’s normal program and revert to the base screen for service
purposes.
Local Pushbuttons
F8: Settings Screen – Press this button to gain access to the timer screen, factory parameter
screen, process parameter screen, PID screen, or maintenance screen.



Approved by

Vibration Setup Screen
The vibration setup screen allows the operator to set the vibration sensor and adjust it for
optimal performance.



Approved by

Vibration Sensor Installation Proceedure
1. Touch the Fa18 – Vibration Sensor Adjustment Zero reading to bring up the numeric
touchpad and enter “Zero” (0).
2. Insert the sensor into it’s mounting hole.
3. As the sensor is inserted the indication of the screen, Vibration Sensor True Depth or
the Vibration Sensor Depth will show the position of the sensor relative to the shaft.
4. Adjust the sensor till the Vibration Sensor Depth reads approximately 1.5 mm and lock it
in place..
5. The Vibration Sensor Position display should read at or near 0 mm.
6. Touch the Fa18 – Vibration Sensor Adjustment Zero display again to bring up the
numeric diplay and enter the value shown in the Vibration Sensor Position display. This
will zero out the Vibration Sensor display which is also on the main display panel.
Local Pushbuttons
F8: Settings Screen – Screen jump to the settings screen.



Approved by

Timer Screen
The timer screen contains a list of timers that are adjustable to help meet process requirements.
Refer to the sequence of operation for descriptions of the timers. To change a timer value,
touch the appropriate data field. Enter the desired value using the numeric keypad.
Local Pushbuttons



Approved by

Factory Parameter Screen
The factory parameter screen contains a list of parameters that are adjustable to ensure safety
and performance requirements are met. Refer to the sequence of operation for descriptions of
the parameters. To change a parameter value, touch the appropriate data field. Enter the
desired value using the numeric keypad.
Local Pushbuttons
F6: Goto Main Screen – Press to return toi the main operational screen.



Approved by

Process Parameter Screen
The process parameter screen contains a list of parameters that are adjustable to help meet
process requirements. Refer to the sequence of operation for descriptions of the parameters. o
change a parameter value, touch the appropriate data field. Enter the desired value using the
numeric keypad.
Local Pushbuttons
F6: Goto Main Screen – Press to return toi the main operational screen.



Approved by

PID Screen
The PID screen provides a graphical interface to the treated fuel tank control loop. The function
of the control loop is to maintain a setpoint level in the treated fuel tank.
The trend window displays the Setpoint (green line), Process (pink), and Output (blue) values.
Standard PID tuning parameters, Gain, Integral, and Derivative are provided. Auto/Manual
control is also provided, but manual mode should only be used as a troubleshooting tool. If
manual is selected, the output must be set by entering a value directly in the output field (0 –
100). Set the operating mode to “Auto” for normal operation.
Local Pushbuttons
F7: Settings Screen – Screen jump to the login screen.
F6: Main Screen – Screen jump to the Main screen.



Approved by

System Auto Start / Auto Stop
To perform a system auto start:

1. From the Main Screen, set the system
operating mode to “Local.”
2. Place all devices to auto mode.
3. Press the function key labeled “Start.”
To perform a system auto stop:

1. From the Main Screen, press the function
key labeled “Stop.”



Approved by

System Remote Start / Remote Stop
To perform a system auto start:

4. From the Main Screen, set the system
operating mode to “Remote.”
5. Place all devices to auto mode.
6. The system will be started via a Modbus

remote start bit or from the turbine panel.
To perform a system auto stop:

2. The system will be stopped via a Modbus
remote stop bit or from the turbine panel.



Approved by

Tanker/Air Compressor Screen
The Tanker Screen displays the the “off skid” Air compressor Status, ON/OFF and the current
air pressure. Also there is a minimum level setpoint that allows the operator to set where a
warning will be generated. If the “tankers” are not used a picture of a two stage Air compressor
is shown. (See below)
The Tanker Screen also displays the tanker setup when utilized. Individual tanks show % level
and which is on-line. There is also a tanker minimum level setpoint that will warn the operator
that a tank needs to be switched out and this function will also automatically switch the Transfer
Valve so that the system is drawing from the full tank after the minimum level is reached on the
original tank. A screen depicting a tanker decoupled for refilling is shown below.
Local Pushbuttons
F6: Main Screen – Screen jump to the Main screen.
Transfer Valve Auto/Manual – allows the operator to cycle the transfer valve manuall..


Approved by
This screen shows a tanker decoupled for refilling. When a tanker is decoupled the low level on
the other tanker will not switch the valve.



Approved by
This screen shows a depition of a two stage air compressor. It will only appear when the
tankers are not selected.

P-type Separation System
Parameter List
Printed Sep 2008
Book No. 1810897-02 V 4
prior notice.
Alfa Laval company.
SE - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
Contents
1 Parameter Setting ............................... 3
2 Installation Parameters .................. 7
3 Process Parameters ....................... 11
4 Factory Set Parameters ............... 15
5 Sequence Diagram .......................... 18

5.1 Separation Sequence....................20
1810897-02
1810897-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 1 PARAMETER SETTING
1 Parameter Setting
The parameters are set in the operator

panel for the different separator systems,
and for different conditions within the
systems.
There are three parameter types: Installation,

Process, and Factory Set parameters.
The parameters are initially set at installation.
The process parameters can also be set as
required during operation.
Parameters not in use are not displayed.
The parameter list in this booklet is valid for
PA and PU systems.
General principle
The ‘ENTER’ button is used to:
– enter into a parameter list
– enter into a parameter
– accept/store a new parameter value.
The ‘+’ or the ‘–’ buttons are used to change the
value flashing in the display window.
1810897-02 3
1 PARAMETER SETTING P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST
P0 04 21 DB
4 1810897-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 1 PARAMETER SETTING
The following lists are available for viewing

from a menu in the EPC-50 control unit:
• Install (parameters)
• Factory (parameters)
• Alarms
• Test
For detailed information see each list.
To open the menu and select a list, proceed as
follows:
1 Push the ‘ENTER’ button. The process
parameter list is now open.
2 Push the ‘+’ button until ‘End’ is displayed.
3 Push the ‘ENTER’ button and the ‘+’ button at
the same time. ‘Install’ will show flashing on
the display.
4 Use the ‘+’ button to select a list.
5 Use the ‘Enter’ button to enter into the
selected list.
6 To leave the list, push the ‘+’ and the ‘–’
buttons at the same time.
7 To leave the menu, press the ‘+’ button
repeatedly until ‘Exit’ is displayed. Push the
‘ENTER’ button.
1810897-02 5
1 PARAMETER SETTING P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST
6 1810897-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 2 INSTALLATION PARAMETERS
2 Installation Parameters
The installation parameters must be set before
the initial start-up and before process
parameters are set. These parameters rarely
need to be adjusted again. If a new parameter
value is to be stored, it is necessary to go through
the whole list, and confirm at the end.
NOTE
Alfa Laval cannot be held responsible for injuries

and damage caused by usage of parameter values
which are not in proximity to the factory values set
by Alfa Laval.
Parameter Factory set Plant set Range Description

value value
In 1 GB/US GB/US = English Language. All information displayed
DE = German on the operators panel is shown in
the selected language.
ES = Spanish
FR = French
IT = Italian
PT = Portuguese
FI = Finnish
SE = Swedish
In 2 50 Disabled (Dis) Power supply frequency
50 Hz
60 Hz
In 3 Pur Clarifier (Clar) Separation mode
Purifier (Pur)
In 4 625 100, 150
600, 605
610, 615
625, 635
1810897-02 7
2 INSTALLATION PARAMETERS P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST

value value
In 5 1 1–9 Separator identity
If more than one EPC on If more than one separator system is
same Sattbus connected to the internal Sattbus
communication, each system must
be given its own identity (1 or 2 or 3
etc.).
In 6 No No Speed sensor
Yes
In 7 No No Vibration sensor
Yes
In 8 No No OP remote
Yes
In 15 No No Sludge pump used
Yes
In 16 No No I/O expansion board used
Yes
In 17 °C °C Celsius or Fahrenheit
°F
In 18 No No (no heater) Heater type
El. (electrical heater)
Steam (steam heater)
In 19 56 7, 8, 14, 16, 22, 24, 36, 40, El heater size
50, 56, 65, 72, 86, 96, 98, Activated when El. is selected in
100, 110, 112, 126, 128, In 18
130, 144 Kw
In 20 120 0 – 999 seconds Steam-valve run time
Activated when Steam is selected in
In 18
8 1810897-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 2 INSTALLATION PARAMETERS

value value
In 22 15 0 – 30 seconds Alarm delay time
In 23 15 0 – 240 seconds Change-over valve V1 temp. alarm
delay
Prevents false alarm due to any
fluctuations in temperature caused
by valve actions.
In 24 No No Change-over valve V1 off at extra
Yes alarm
When the extra alarm input is used,
action at alarm can be none (No) or
feed off (Yes).
In 25 Yes No Power fail alarm used
Yes If this alarm is not required, set the
parameter to ‘No’.
In 26 No No Type of computer communication
ExtPC = Fieldbus board used
I-Net = Internet
In 27 0 0 – 255 Internet IP address, part 1
3 3
In 32 m /h m /h Flow rate in m3/h per hour or
USG/h US gallons per hour.
The feed flow measurement, based
on inlet pressure, can be displayed in
one of these ways.
1810897-02 9
2 INSTALLATION PARAMETERS P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST
10 1810897-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 3 PROCESS PARAMETERS
3 Process Parameters
The process parameters can be adjusted easily
and as often as required, even during operation,
to meet changes in the operating conditions, e.g.
time between sludge discharges, oil temperature,
alarm points.
NOTE
Regularly check the condition of the bowl. If there is

no noticeable amount of hard sludge in the sludge
space, the discharge interval may be increased by 30
minutes at a time. The total discharge interval must
not exceed three times the factory set value in order
to avoid an uneven build-up of sludge.
Parameter Factory set Plant Range Description

value set
value
Pr 1 See table on 1 – 999 minutes Time to discharge
page 15
Pr 2 HF380 MDO = Marine Diesel Oil Oil type
GO = Gas Oil
IFxxx = Intermediate Fuel Oil (xxx represents viscosity in Cst at
HFxxx= Heavy Fuel Oil 50°C)
LO TP = Lubricating Oil for Trunk

Piston Engines
LO CH = Lubricating Oil for Cross
Head Engines
Pr 3 OPloc OPloc = Local OP in control Control location
OPrem = Remote OP OPloc is standard. OPrem, ExtPC
Rmind = Remind using Sattbus and RemSW are shown only when
installed.
ExtPC = Extern Computer Board
RemSw = Remote switches
Pr 5 0.0 0.0 = Not used Countdown service timer
0.1 to 10.0x1000 hours Action is to be taken when the timer
reaches 0.
1810897-02 11
3 PROCESS PARAMETERS P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST

value set
value
Pr 6 0 0 = service time elapsed Type of service
1 – 9 = Service text 1...9 When service timer Pr5 reaches 0,
an alarm is given and a message
shown
Pr 7 0 Information Keys to special functions used by
1 = timers shown service engineer
2 = service mode When Pr7 is set to 1 during normal

operation, the actual timer is
displayed if the ‘+’ button is pressed
once.
Pr 10 3.0 0.0 – 5.0 bar High oil pressure limit
0.0 = oil pressure sensor disabled (cleaned oil outlet)
Pr 11 0.8 0.0 – 5.0 bar Low oil pressure limit
Pr 14 3.0 0.0 – 5.0 bar High feed pressure limit
0.0 = feed pressure sensor
disabled
Pr 15 0.1 0.00 – 5.00 bar Low feed pressure limit
Low pressure indicates insufficient
flow. The low pressure limit must be
higher than any static pressure and
lower than normal pressure.
Pr 16 105 °C 0 – 115 °C or HFO/LO high temp. limit
0 – 255 °F
0 = Temp sensor disabled
Pr 17 85 °C 0 – 115 °C or HFO/LO low temp. limit
0 – 255 °F
12 1810897-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 3 PROCESS PARAMETERS

value set
value
Pr 18 95 °C 0 – 110 °C or HFO/LO setpoint1)
0 – 240 °F Setpoint for feed temperature is valid
0 = Temp sensor disabled only when a temperature controller is
installed in the EPC.
Pr 19 40 °C 0 – 115 °C or DO high temp. limit
0 – 255 °F
Pr 20 20 °C 0 – 115 °C or DO low temp. limit
0 – 255 °F
Pr 21 30 °C 0 – 110 °C or DO setpoint1)
0 – 240 °F Setpoint for feed temperature is valid
only when a temperature controller is
installed in the EPC.
Pr 22 40 10 – 500 % P-constant1)
Preset value based on experience
with Alfa Laval Heatpac heaters.
Pr 23 1.2 0.1 – 10.0 minutes I-constant1)
Preset value based on experience
with Alfa Laval Heatpac heaters.
Pr 25 2 0 – 240 seconds Sludge tank alarm delay (during Ti
68)
Pr 27 0 0–9 Separators in series. Purifier and
Clarifier.
The value is taken from In5 for
clarifier. Must be the same value in
both clarifier and purifier.
Pr 28 2 1–4 Sludge discharge signal from purifier
to clarifier.
0 = No discharge signal to clarifier
1 = Every purifier discharge
2 = Every 2nd purifier discharge
3 = Every 3rd purifier discharge
4 = Every 4th purifier discharge
Pr 31 -0.05 + 1.00 bar PT1 decrease at discharge
Alarm limit if In6 = No
1) Parameter appears only when heater board installed.
1810897-02 13
3 PROCESS PARAMETERS P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST
14 1810897-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 4 FACTORY SET PARAMETERS
4 Factory Set Parameters

value value
Fa 10 See table page 0 – 13 300 rpm High speed
17 0 = sensor disabled
Fa 11 See table page 0 – 12 000 rpm Low speed
17
Fa 12 300 0 – 2 000 rpm Speed decrease during discharge
Alarm limit if In6 = Yes
Fa 16 0.30 0.00 – 2.50 Shutdown limit for separator spindle
0.00 = sensor disabled amplitude
Fa 17 0.20 0.00 – 2.50 Vibration prewarning
Fa 18 0.5 0.00 – 2.50 Vibration sensor adjustment zero
point. Zero point should be within 1.5
+ Fa 18
When expected feedback from a timer is given,

the timer is interrupted and the next timer
starts.
If feedback is not received within the preset
time, an alarm is given.
Timers for start are 50 - 59.
Timers for operation are 60 - 69.
Timers for discharge are 70 - 79.
Timers for stop are 80 - 89.
If pump is started independent of Alfa Laval
starter, X6:4 - X40 must be connected to a free
closing contact at the external pump contactor.
1810897-02 15
4 FACTORY SET PARAMETERS P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST

value value
Ti 50 60 2 – 300 seconds Feed pump on
Ti 52 4 0 – 60 minutes Separator start-up
Ti 53 15 0 – 60 minutes Heater on (temp. feedback)
Temperature above low limit (Pr 17,
Pr 20) expected to confirm that the
heater works normally.
Ti 55 See table on 0 – 120 minutes Max. time for ‘Standby‘ mode. During
page 17 0 = no standby ‘Standby‘ mode, the system is
waiting for an order to start the
process sequence. The process
sequence is started with a push of
the start button.
When Ti 55 = 0 the process starts
without delay.
Ti 60 5.0 0.1 – 30 seconds Discharge – after a power blackout to
prevent a period between discharges
greater than Pr 1. (This is not a
proper discharge, since the bowl is
empty.)
Ti 61 15 0 – 30 seconds Pause = Draining of operating
system
Ti 62 See table on 0 – 60 seconds Close bowl
page 17
Ti 63 See table on 0 – 60 seconds Sealing water added (does not apply
page 17 in clarifier mode)
Ti 64 30 0 – 60 seconds Oil feed on. Max 60 secs. Interrupted
by PT4
Ti 66 10 0 – 30 seconds Tank draining
Ti 68 See Pr1 0 – 300 minutes Time between discharges. This is the
page 17 same as Pr 1. If one is changed, the
other one is automatically changed.
Ti 70 15 0 – 30 seconds Oil feed off. Oil outlet pressure below
low limit (Pr 11) expected.
Ti 72 See table on 0 – 300 Seconds Displacement of oil
page 17
Ti 73 10 0 – 30 Seconds Tank draining
Ti 74 3.0 0.1 – 5.0 seconds Discharge
Ti 75 15 0 – 30 seconds Pause = Draining of operating
system
Ti 76 15 0 – 60 seconds Closing water
Ti 77 See table on 0 – 60 seconds Sealing water (does not apply in
page 17 clarifier mode)
Ti 79 30 0 – 60 seconds Feed on (not when STOP is ordered)
Ti 80 10 0 – 30 seconds Tank draining
16 1810897-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 4 FACTORY SET PARAMETERS

value value
Ti 82 5 0 – 300 seconds Heater off.
Addition of water. This is so that the
bowl is kept filled during stop
sequence (does not apply in clarifier
mode).
Ti 85 5 0 – 30 minutes Temperature decrease
The EPC switches the separator
motor off.
Decreasing oil feed temperature
greater than 5 °C expected.
If Ti 85 = 0, no temperature control.
Ti 86 3 0 – 30 minutes Check motor off
Ti 87 60 0 – 300 seconds Pump off. Timer interrupted by
feedback signal.
Ti 89 30 0 – 60 minutes Waiting for zero speed.
Parameters depending on separator size
Separator size Pr 1 Ti 55 Ti 62 Ti 63 Ti 72 Ti 77 Fa 10 Fa 11
P 100, 150 30 60 40 20 10 10 - -
P 600, 605, 610, 615
P 625 60 0 15 5 6 5 13300 11000
P 635 60 0 15 9 10 9 11000 9900
1810897-02 17
5 SEQUENCE DIAGRAM P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST
5 Sequence Diagram
Preparation for start Start Separation

Timer 50 1) 52 2) 53 3) 55 60 61 62 63 4) 64 66 5) 68
Time 60 s 4m 15 m 0/60 s 5.0/1.0 s 15 s 15/40 s s6) 30 s 10 s 60 m
Feed pump motor
Separator motor
SV 15
SV 16 7)
SV 10
V1
8)
Sludge pump
1)
Interrupted by Contactor feedback signal
2)
Interrupted when speed > low limit (if speed sensor is present)
3) Temperature should increase with 5°C or above low limit. Alarm is activated if not so within the timer
4)
Not used for Clarifier
5) Only if In15 = yes
6)
Depending on separtor size. See table on page 17.
7) 1 second every 5 minutes
8) Sludge pump activated for 5 seconds every 30 minutes
NOTE
Note! This diagram is valid for normal operation only.

See the flow chart on page 22 for a more detailed
sequence description.
18 1810897-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 5 SEQUENCE DIAGRAM
Discharge Stop
Timer 70 1) 72 2) 73 3) 74 75 76 77 2) 79 1) 80 3) 82 2) 85 4) 86 5) 87 6) 89 7)
Time 15 s s 8) 10 s 3.0 s 15 s 15 s s 8) 10 s 10 s 5s 5m 3m 60 s 30 m
Feed pump motor
Separator motor
SV 15
SV 16 9)
SV 10
V1
Sludge pump
1)
Ti 70 is interrupted by feedback signal (low pressure on PT4)
Ti 79 is not used in stop sequence discharge if Purifier
2)
Not used for clarifier
3)
Only if In15 = yes
4)
Interrupted by decreasing temperature
5) Interrupted by decreasing speed (if speed sensor is present)
6)
Interrupted by feedback signal (Feed Pump Motor)
7)
Interrupted by Zero speed (if speed sensor is present)
8) Depending on separtor size. See table on page 17.
9)
5 minutes after separator motor is stopped, SV16 is activated for 1 second
Flow rates for P 100, P 150, P 600, P 605, P 610, P 615

SV10: 8.0 l/m
SV15: 18 l/m
SV16: 0.9 l/m
Flow rates for P 625, P 635

SV10: 15.0 l/m
SV15: 11.0 l/m
SV16: 2.8 l/m
1810897-02 19
5.1 Separation Sequence

Timer Action Alarms
Ti 60 = 5 sec. Discharge
Start
SV 15 To ensure that the operating system gets sufficient

water before closing.
Ti 61 = 15 sec. Draining of operating water
Ti 62 = 15 or 40 sec. Bowl closing

SV 16
Ti 63 = 5 or 20 sec. Filling of sealing water

SV 10
Ti 64 = 30 sec. Feed on to separator ‘Oil backpressure PT4 – LOW‘

Separation
V1 Alarm is given if no pressure

response in oil outlet within
Ti 64.
Ti 68 = 60 or 30 min. Separation During separation all necessary

functions are supervised.
V1 (SV16) Closing water is fed for 1 sec. every 5 minutes.
20 1810897-02
Timer Action Alarms
Ti 70 = 15 sec. Feed off. ‘OIL PRESSURE PT4 HIGH

Discharge
DURING Ti70‘.
Oil outlet pressure decreases.
Alarm given if no pressure
feedback.
Ti 72 = 6 sec. Displacement water

SV10
Ti 74 = 3.0 sec. Discharge

SV15
Ti75 = 15 sec. Pause
Ti 76 = 15 sec. Closing water

SV16
Ti77 = 5 or 10 sec. Sealing water (only in purifier mode)
Ti 79 = 10 sec. Feed on.

V1 Stabilizing of flow and pressure
Ti 80 = 10 sec. Drain of sludge tank (if used)
Ti 82 = 5 sec. Water to the bowl (only in purifier mode)

Stop
SV10
Heater off
Ti 85 = 5 min. Waiting for oil feed temp. decrease. ‘Temperature - NOT

DECREASING‘
Separator motor off Timer is interrupted when temp. decrease below low
limit. If temp. not decreased within Ti
85.
Ti 86 = 3 min. Check motor off
Ti 87 = 60 sec. Timer is interrupted by pump off feedback

(contactor response)
Feed pump off
Ti 89 = 30 min. Waiting for zero speed
1810897-02 21
EPC 50 Sequences Process Start
Push
Separation
Assembled No
according to Standst.
manual?
Yes
Ti50-53 Sep.
start and temp
check
Ti55 Standby.
Push
Separation to
continue
Ti 60 Discharge
Ti62 Bowl
closing
Ti63 Sealing
water (Not as clarifier)
Separation Ti64 Feed on
Yes
Ti68 Time to No
discharge Stop?
No
Ti68 No
elapsed? Man.
discharge?
Yes
Yes
Discharge
22 1810897-02
Discharge Stop
Ti70 Feed off Ti82 Water into

bowl.Heater off
Ti 72
Displacement Ti85 Sep. motor
of oil off. Check
decreasing temp
Ti74 Discharge
Ti86 Heater
cooling. Check
Ti76 Closing
motor off
water
Ti87 Pump off
No
Stop? Ti79 Feed Ti66
Ti89 Waiting for
on
0-speed
Yes
Standst.
Stop
1810897-02 23
24 1810897-02
P-type Separation System
Alarms and Fault Finding

Printed Sep 2008
Book No. 1810898-02 V 4
prior notice.
Alfa Laval company.
SE - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
Contents
1 Alarms ......................................................... 2
1.1 Alarm Functions ...............................2
1.2 Reading Alarm History List ...........2
1.2.1 Alarm message explanation: ..................3
1.3 Alarm Reset .......................................3
1.4 Abnormalities not displayed.........4
2 Display Alarms and Actions ......... 5
3 Alarm Tests .......................................... 18
1810898-02
1 ALARMS P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING
1 Alarms
1.1 Alarm Functions
The alarm system is designed to ensure a safe
separation system.
All alarms are shown on the operator panel
display, and most of them are complemented by
light emitting diodes (LEDs).
The alarms are displayed in order of occurrence.
1.2 Reading Alarm History

List
To read the stored list of alarms, proceed as
follows:
• Push ‘Enter’.
• Push ‘+’ until ‘End’ is displayed.
• Push ‘Enter’ and ‘+’ at the same time.
• Push ‘+’ repeatedly until ‘AL list’ is displayed.
• Go through the list using the ‘+’ pushbutton
until ‘End’ is displayed.
• Push ‘+’ repeatedly until ‘Exit’ is displayed.
• Push ‘Enter’ to return to normal display.
2 1810898-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING 1 ALARMS
1.2.1 Alarm message explanation:

The display shows:
Alarm no. 5 Alarm number

0:13 This alarm occurred 13 minutes ago.
Feed pressure low Type of alarm
P1 60 Parameter Pr 1 was set to 60 minutes.
00:02:13 The alarm was reset after 2 minutes 13 seconds.
1.3 Alarm Reset
ING
WARN
!
Breakdown hazard
Never reset an alarm without first finding and
remedying the cause.
1 Acknowledge the alarm signal by pressing the

alarm push button.
The flashing LED then changes to steady
shine.
G 00 16 4 8A
ALARM
2 Remedy the cause.
3 Reset the alarm function by pressing the

alarm push button a second time.
The LED will go out.
G 00 1 64 9A
ALARM
It is possible to reset the system without

remedying the cause, but the alarm signal will
be repeated.
ON
CAUTI
!
Risk of injury
Never return to the operator panel to acknowledge or
reset an alarm if doing so is by any means
hazardous.
1810898-02 3
1 ALARMS P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING
1.4 Abnormalities not

displayed
There are some abnormalities not shown on the
display. Below are listed the most common:
Why? What to do
Smell • Normal occurrence during start None.

while the friction blocks are
slipping.
• Oil level in oil sump too low. Check oil level and add oil if
necessary.
Noise • Height position of paring disc is Stop the separator, measure and
incorrect. adjust the height.
• Bearing(s) damaged or worn. Renew all bearings.
• Improper bowl assembly Check and reassemble.
Unsatisfactory separation result • Incorrect separation Adjust.

temperature.
• Throughput too high. Adjust.
• Disc stack is clogged. Clean disc stack.
• Sludge space in bowl is filled. Clean and reduce the time

between sludge discharges.
• Bowl speed too low. Examine the motor and power

transmission for correct frequency
parts.
Check belt and coupling pads.
• Bowl rotates in wrong direction Check the electrical connections

to the motor.
4 1810898-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING 2 DISPLAY ALARMS AND ACTIONS
2 Display Alarms and Actions
on page on page
The display The display
shows shows
10 Local OP in control 16
Bowl speed sensor - ERROR
9 NO SIGNAL FROM EXTRA INPUT X6:8 16

Bowl speed - HIGH
9 Oil backpressure PT4 - HIGH 14

Bowl speed - LOW
17 Oil backpressure PT4 - LOW 14

xxxxx board - ERROR
17 Oil feed temperature - HIGHxxxxx 11

Communication - ERROR xxxxx
17 Oil feed temperature - LOWxxxxx 12

Computer board - ERROR
13 OIL PRESSURE PT4 HIGH DURING Ti70 15

Discharge feedback - ERROR
11 Oil pressure sensor PT4 - ERROR 14

Emergency stop - BUTTON PUSHED
13 Parameter xx:xx - ILLEGAL 17

Feed flow PT1 - ERROR DURING Tixx
15 Parameters changes - LOCKED 15

Feed pressure PT1 - HIGH
15 POWER FAILURE 16
Feed pressure PT1 - LOW
15 Pump starter - FAILURE 15

Feed pressure sensor PT1 - ERROR
16 Separator motor - FAILURE 13

Heater - FAULT
17 Separator run-up - TO LONG 10

Heater board - ERROR
7 Series communication - ERROR 13

High frequency xxxx Hz
8 Service alarm 17
High vibration - WARNING
7 Sludge tank level - HIGH 10

High vibration - SHUTDOWN
17 Switch power off/on 17

IO expansion board - ERROR
15 Temperature increase - TOO SLOW 17

IP address - FAULT
17 Temperature alarm sensor - ERROR 12

Level switch - DISABLED
1810898-02 5
2 DISPLAY ALARMS AND ACTIONS P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING
on page
The display
shows
Temperature control sensor - ERROR 13
Vibration board - ERROR 17
Vibration sensor - ERROR 8
6 1810898-02
The display Why? What to do

shows
High vibration - SHUTDOWN • Sludge remaining in part of the Dismantle, clean and check the
bowl bowl before restart. See Service
Manual.
ING
WARN
!
ING
WARN
!
If excessive vibration occurs, stop Disintegration hazard
separator and keep bowl filled with
The separator bowl must be
liquid during rundown.
manually cleaned before starting
The cause of the vibration must be
identified and corrected before the up again.
separator is restarted.
• Bowl wrongly mounted Check assembly. See Service

• Disc stack compression incorrect Manual.
• Bowl assembled with parts from
other separators
• Height position of paring disc is Stop the separator, measure and if

incorrect. necessary adjust the height.
• Bowl spindle bent. Renew the bowl spindle.
• The frame feet are worn out. Renew the frame feet.
• Spindle top bearing spring Renew all springs.

broken.
High frequency xxxx Hz • Frequency deviation more than Check power supply
+ 5%
1810898-02 7

shows
High vibration - WARNING • Sludge remaining in part of the Dismantle, clean and check the
bowl bowl before restart.
ING
WARN
!
The separator bowl must be
manually cleaned before starting
up again.
• Bowl wrongly mounted Check assembly. See Service

• Disc stack compression incorrect Manual.
• Bowl assembled with parts from
other separators
• Height position of paring disc is Stop the separator, measure and if

incorrect. necessary adjust the height.
• Bowl spindle bent. Renew the bowl spindle.
• The frame feet are worn out. Renew the frame feet.
• Spindle top bearing spring Renew all springs.

broken.
Vibration sensor - ERROR • Sensor or cable damaged Replace sensor. If no spare sensor
available, set parameter Fa 16 =
0.0 to be able to run the system.
8 1810898-02

shows
Bowl speed - HIGH • High power (net) frequency Check power supply before
restart.
• Incorrect transmission parts

(50 Hz belt pulley and belt for ING
60 Hz power supply). WARN
!
Stop and change the belt
transmission to suit the power
supply frequency.
Bowl speed - LOW • Slipping belt Change belt.
• Worn coupling pads Check / change pads.
• Speed sensor faulty Check speed sensor
• Bowl not properly closed Check closing water supply (valve

SV 16).
Check bowl operating system for
leakage.
Check nozzle.
• Bowl not properly assembled Check that the lock ring is in

place.
• Low power net frequency Check power.
• Motor failure. Repair the motor.
• Bearing(s) damaged. Renew all bearings.
• Incorrect transmission parts (60

Hz belt pulley and belt for 50 Hz ING
power supply). WARN
!
supply frequency.
1810898-02 9

shows
Bowl speed sensor - ERROR • Sensor or cable damaged Replace sensor. If no spare sensor
available set parameter In 6 = No
to be able to run the system.
Sludge tank level - HIGH • Pump has not drained the tank Check the pump function.
Separator run-up - TO LONG • Separator coupling slipping Check the coupling.
• Belt slipping Check the belt.
• Height position of paring disc is Stop. Check and adjust the height.
incorrect.
• Motor failure Repair the motor.
• Separator start button not Push start button.

pushed.
10 1810898-02

shows
Emergency stop - BUTTON PUSHED • Emergency button pushed Remedy cause for pushing button.
Reset push button.
Oil feed temperature - HIGHxxxxx • Steam supply valve faulty Investigate cause and remedy.
• Faulty triac module(s) in the If relay K11 is on:

power unit or faulty controller in
Disconnect X12:10.
the control unit. (electric heater)
If the temperature is falling,
replace the control module in the
control unit.
If the temperature is not falling,
replace the triac module(s).
If relay K11 is off, but contactor
K12, K16, or K17 is on, and the
temperature is not falling:
Check if power is supplied from
the control unit to the contactor
which is on (X12:6 - X12:12, X12:7
- X12:12 , X12:9 - X12:12). If it is,
replace the control module in the
control unit.
• Broken wiring or defective heater Check adjustment of P and I

resistance, or faulty controller in functions in the control unit.
the control unit.
If contactor sequence correct:
Check wiring and heater
resistance of each block or heater
element. See EHM heater
component booklet.
If contactor sequence not correct:
Replace the control module in the
control unit.
1810898-02 11

shows
Oil feed temperature - LOWxxxxx • Heater clogged Investigate cause and remedy.
• Steam supply insufficient
• Steam trap faulty
• Steam supply valve faulty
• Faulty fuses or burned Check and renew broken fuses.

contactors Reset overcurrent protection
(electric heater) (applicable for 8/7 - 24/22 kW
power unit).
Check wiring and contactor coils.
• Broken wiring or defective heater Check wiring and heater

resistance resistance of each block or heater
(electric heater) element. See the Service Manual
booklet.
Temperature alarm sensor - ERROR • Short circuit / broken sensor or Disconnect cable at sensor.
cable. Measure resistance between 1-3.
Resistance shall be within 100-142
ohms = 0-110 C / 32-230 F.
Test of EPC 50 input:
• Disconnect cables from sensor,
(terminal X 5:1-2-3).
• Move jumpers Xj1 and Xj2
upwards - from Normal to Test.
(The jumpers can be found in
the upper left corner of the I/O
Board)
• Indication within 50-60 C when
OK.
• If no spare sensor available set
parameter Pr 16 = 0, or if control
sensor free, move connection
to that one.
12 1810898-02

shows
Temperature control sensor - ERROR • Short circuit / broken sensor or Disconnect cable at sensor.
cable. Measure resistance between 1-3.
Resistance shall be within 100-142
ohms = 0-110 C / 32-230 F. If no
spare sensor available set
parameter Pr 18 = 0. Heater is then
out of function.
Feed flow PT1 - ERROR DURING Tixx • Pump not working Check pump.
• Pressure in feed line too low Check feed line.
Separator motor - FAILURE • Feedback signal from contactor Check the contactor function.
K 2 missing Input terminal
X 6:5 in EPC 50.
Series communication - ERROR • Communication between Check the Sattbus connection.

separators in series interrupted
Discharge feedback - ERROR If In 6 = yes

Speed not decreased (Fa12) as
discharge feedback.
If In 6 = no
PT1 pressure not decreased (Pr 31)
as discharge feedback.
• Check setting on Fa 12 or Pr 31
• Strainer in the operating water Clean the strainer.

supply is clogged.
• Water flow too low. Check opening water. Valve SV 15
• Hoses between the supply Fit hoses correctly.

valves and separator are
incorrectly fitted.
1810898-02 13

shows
Oil backpressure PT4 - LOW Broken water seal due to:
• Strainer in operating water high Clean strainer.

pressure side clogged, or water Make sure that the water pressure
pressure too low. is 200 - 600 kPa (2 - 6 bar).
• Seal rings in bowl defective. Install new seal rings.
• MV 10 not opening. Examine the electrical system and

correct the fault (open circuit, low
or high voltage or dirt).
• Decreased throughput Check feed pump and adjust flow.
• Regulating valve open too much Adjust back pressure valve
• Change over valve V1 in Check air pressure, solenoid valve

recirculation position SV1 and output from EPC 50
terminal X 8:1-X 41.
Bowl opens unintentionally during

operation because:
• Strainer in the operating water Clean the strainer.

supply is clogged.
• No water in the operating water Check the operating water system

system. and make sure any supply valves
are open.
• Hoses between the supply Fit hoses correctly.

valves and separator are
incorrectly fitted.
• Nozzle in bowl body clogged Clean the nozzle.
• Rectangular ring in discharge Renew the rectangular ring.

slide is defective.
• Valve plugs are defective. Renew all plugs.
• Supply valve SV15 for opening Rectify the leak.

water is leaking.
Oil backpressure PT4 - HIGH • Increased throughput Check. Reduce backpressure.
• Regulating valve too restricted Adjust valve
Oil pressure sensor PT4 - ERROR • Sensor or cable damaged Replace sensor. If no spare sensor
available set parameter Pr 10=0.0
14 1810898-02

shows
OIL PRESSURE PT4 HIGH DURING Ti70 • No decrease in oil pressure Check function of change over
during this timer valve V1.
Feed pressure PT1 - HIGH • Pipe restricted Check recirculation for restriction
Feed pressure PT1 - LOW • Low flow Check pump and flow regulation.
Check heater for fouling.
Feed pressure sensor PT1 - ERROR • Sensor or cable damaged Check cable connections
Replace sensor. If no spare sensor

available set parameter Pr 14=0.0
Pump starter - FAILURE • Feedback signal from contactor Check the contactor function.
K 3 missing
Check input terminal X 9:1 in the
EPC.
Parameters changes - LOCKED • A code has been set to make Unlock the code.
parameter changes not possible
IP address - FAULT • Wrong IP address used in Check the setting.

In 27-30
1810898-02 15

shows
NO SIGNAL FROM EXTRA INPUT X6:8 • Depends on use of the input Depends on use of the input
Heater - FAULT • 0V in cable heater X 12:3 to EPC Check the power supply to the
50 X 51:4 heater.
(electric heater)
• High temp. switch released Check temp. setpoint in the

(electric heater) control unit.
Check the heater and clean if
necessary.
When the alarm is reset, the temp.
switch is also reset.
Local OP in control • Attempt to operate remote OP Not legal when local OP is active.
POWER FAILURE • Black-out has occurred with EPC Check plant conditions and
in operation restart.
16 1810898-02

shows
Parameter xx:xx - ILLEGAL • If parameters are changed Switch EPC50 power off. Move
automatically by "thunderstorm" X J4 on I/O board to position right.
type influence, alarm is given to Switch power on. Parameters are
indicate out of range. now all set to default values. Move
X J4 back to original position.
Adjust all parameter settings to
correct value.
xxxxx board - ERROR • OP (Operator Panel board), Check cables to board or replace
I/O board or OPr (Operator Panel the board (see Change of Circuit
remote board) in EPC not Board in the Service Manual
working booklet).
Computer board - ERROR • Bad connection Check connection
• Board faulty Replace the board
Communication - ERROR xxxxx • Cable errors Check cables to board or replace

the board (see Change of Circuit
Board in the Service Manual
booklet).
Heater board - ERROR • Optional heater board in EPC not Check cables to board or replace
working the board (see Change of Circuit
booklet).
IO expansion board - ERROR • X71:2 and X71:3 are both set to Set one switch to 0, and the other
0 or both set to 1 to 1.
Vibration board - ERROR • Optional vibration board in EPC Check cables to board or replace
not working the board (see Change of Circuit
booklet).
Temperature increase - TOO SLOW • Insufficient heating during start Check heater function.
(Ti 53)
Switch power off/on • Alarm is displayed at standstill Investigate the cause for the stop
after emergency or vibration shut and switch the power off and then
down on to the EPC 50.
Level switch - DISABLED • If Pr 25=0 the high level alarm is Warning to operator only.
disabled
Service alarm • If Pr 5 is used, the text in Pr 6 is Take action according to what the
displayed text means (plant dependant).
1810898-02 17
3 ALARM TESTS PA PURIFIER SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING
3 Alarm Tests
NOTE
If any parameter value is changed to activate an

alarm, do not forget to reset to the original value
before operation.
Alarm message Red Sequence Method Terminal Reaction

diode
Standard functions
POWER FAILURE Start Switch power off / on during
operation
Feed pressure PT1 - HIGH PT1 Start Decrease limit (Pr14)
Feed pressure PT1 - LOW PT1 Start Increase limit (Pr15)
Feed pressure sensor PT1 - PT1 Start Disconnect sensor X5:4
ERROR
Pump starter - FAILURE Pump Start Switch pump off
Oil feed - TEMPERATURE HIGH TT Start Decrease limit (Pr16/Pr19) V1 off.
Heating off.
Oil feed - TEMPERATURE LOW TT Start Increase limit (Pr17/Pr20) or . V1 off
decrease Ti 53
Temperature alarm sensor - TT Start Disconnect sensor X5:2 V1 off
ERROR Heating off.
Oil back pressure PT4 - HIGH PT4 Separation Increase back pressure V1 off
Oil back pressure PT4 - LOW PT4 Separation Decrease back pressure V1 off
Oil pressure sensor PT4 - PT4 Separation Disconnect sensor X5:6
ERROR
Emergency stop - BUTTON Separation Push the button Sep.motor
PUSHED off, heater
off, feed on
for 3 min,
stop.
Optional functions
Temperature control sensor - TT Start Disconnect X51:2
ERROR
Heater - FAULT (Heatpac power Heater Start Disconnect X51:4
unit only)
Temperature increase - TOO TT Start Start separator and EPC but
SLOW not heater, or start system
with Ti 53 set to 1.
18 1810898-02
PA 635 Separation System
Installation System Reference

prior notice.
Alfa Laval company.
SE - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
Contents
1 Technical Data
2 Drawings
2.1 Flow Chart
2.2 Drawings
2.4 Electrical Diagrams
3 Remote Operation Systems
4 Specifications
5 Commissioning and Initial Start
5.1 Completion Check List
5.2 Initial Start-up
5.2.1 Calculating Operating Pressure .............................................................................47
6 Shut-down and Storage

6.1 Shut-down after Use
6.2 Protection and Storage
6.3 Reassembly and Start up
578149-02
PA 635 SEPARATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 1 TECHNICAL DATA
1 Technical Data
Media Fuel oil and lube oils for diesel engines
Feed density, max. 991 kg/m³ at 15 °C
Viscosity, max. 50 cSt at 100 °C (600 cSt at 50 °C)
Pressure:
oil inlet Max. 200 kPa (2 bar) at separator inlet
oil outlet Max. delivery head 250 kPa (2.5 bar)
sludge outlet from separator open outlet
water outlet open outlet
Feed temperature, max. 100 °C
Ambient temperature Min. +5 °C, max. +55 °C
Discharge volume 2.5 litre
Operating water pressure Min 200 kPa (2 bar), max. 600 kPa (6 bar)
Operating water temp. Min. +5 °C, max. +55 °C (unheated water)
Operating water consumption (without make-up water) 2.9 litre/discharge
Make-up water 1.1 litre/hour
Operating water flow from SV 10: 15.0 l/m
from SV 15: 11.0 l/m
from SV 16: 2.8 l/m
Air quality Instrument air
Air pressure Min. 500 kPa (5 bar), max. 700 kPa (7 bar)
Mains supply voltage 3x230/400/440/480/575/690 V ± 10%
EPC supply voltage (from starter) 230 V /110V/115 V/100V ± 10%, max. fuse 10 A
Control voltage, operating 24 V AC
Power consumption, startup 10 kW
Power consumption idling/max. capacity 2.7 kW/6.6 kW
Frequency 50 or 60 Hz ± max. 5%
Enclosure class Min. IP 54
Storage time before use (with bowl removed) max. 6 months
Storage temp. Min. +0 °C, max. +70 °C
Storage humidity Relative humidity (RH) 10% - 95 % Non Condensing
Service intervals: Note! Regularly check connections. Tighten if necessary.
Separator Inspection every 4000 hours or 6 months operation
Overhaul every 12000 hours or 18 months operation
PA 635 SEPARATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 1 TECHNICAL DATA
Separation System Planned Maintenance Kits

Hours Period Separator Ancillary
Equipment
1000
2000
4000 6 months Inspection
12000 18 months Overhaul
24000 3 years Overhaul
As necessary Repair
(components)
With delivery Inspection

Tools
578149-02 7
2 DRAWINGS PA 635 SEPARATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE
2 Drawings
P&ID Drawing
Outline Drawing
Electrical Schematic
Device Interconnect
PA 635 SEPARATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 3 REMOTE OPERATION SYSTEMS
3 Remote Operation Systems
ING
WARN
!
If the system is operated from a position from
which the separator is not visible, a Remote
Operation System must be installed, including
vibration sensor and frame cover interlock switch.
Connection to steering system via

PROFIBUS or MODBUS fieldbus systems.
578149-02 35
PA 635 SEPARATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 4 SPECIFICATIONS
4 Specifications
1.1 Demand Specification Water

Alfa Laval ref. 574487 rev. 0
Poor quality of the operating water may with time cause erosion, corrosion and/or
operating problems. The water shall be treated to meet certain demands.
The following requirements are of fundamental importance:
1 Turbidity-free water, solids content <0,001% by volume.

Max. particle size 50 μm.
Deposits shall not be allowed to form in certain areas in the system.
2 Total hardness less than 180 mg CaCO3 per litre, which corresponds to 10 °dH or 12,5 °E. Hard
water may with time form deposits in the operating mechanism. The precipitation rate is
accelerated with increased operating temperature and low discharge frequency. These effects
become more severe the harder the water is.
3 Chloride content max. 100 ppm NaCl (equivalent to 60 mg Cl/l). Chloride ions contribute to
corrosion on surfaces in contact with the operating water. Corrosion is a process that is
accelerated by increased separating temperature, low pH, and high chloride ion concentration.
4 6,5 < pH < 9
Bicarbonate content (HCO3) min. 70mg HCO3 per litre, which corresponds to 3,2 °dKH.
NOTE
Alfa Laval accepts no liability for consequences

arising from unsatisfactorily purified operating
water supplied by the customer.
1.2 Demand Specifications Air

Specific requirements regarding the quality
of air NOTE
1 Pressure 500 – 700 kPa (5 – 7 bar). Electrical interconnections must be made by
qualified electricians.
2 Free from oil, and solid particles larger than Mechanical interconnections must be made by
0.01 mm. qualified mechanical technicians.
3 Dry, with dew point min. 10 °C below

ambient temperature.
578149-02 37
PA 635 SEPARATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 5 COMMISSIONING AND INITIAL START
5 Commissioning and Initial Start

5.1 Completion Check List
It is essential before starting up the separation
system that all units are in good operating
condition and that all pipelines and control
equipment are properly connected to assure
correct operation.
Use this check list as a guide for completing the
system installation:
ING
WARN
!
Breakdown hazard
Check that the power frequency is in agreement with
the machine plate. If incorrect, resulting overspeed
may cause breakdown.
1 Check that transport seals are removed from

all pipes.
2 Use flushing filters to prevent pipe work debris
from being pumped into the separation
system.
NOTE
The flushing filters must be removed after initial

flushing.
3 Check that all separators are in proper

working condition. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.
4 Make sure that separators are lubricated in
accordance with instructions.
NOTE
Make sure that the spindle bearings are prelubricated

G 08 68 7T 1
Drop some frame oil onto the bearings
5 Separators are delivered without oil in the oil

sump. For information on oil filling and oil type,
see the Separator Manual booklet.
5 COMMISSIONING AND INITIAL START PA 635 SEPARATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE
NOTE
Too much, or too little oil may result in damage to

separator bearings.
Neglecting an oil change may result in damage to
separator bearings.
6 Power on.
ON
CAUTI
!
If power cables have been installed incorrectly, the

parts can unscrew.
7 Check the pump function and direction.
44 578149-02
5.2 Initial Start-up

Use this check list for initial system start up:
1 Check that there is oil in the feed oil tank.
2 Check water and air supply. See ‘‘System
Data” on page 6.
3 Check power supplies to the control unit and
that the voltage is in accordance with data in
‘‘System Data” on page 6.
4 Check all parameter settings in the control
unit. See Installation Parameters in the
Parameter List booklet.
NOTE
The Control Unit is supplied with standard

configuration parameters. You may have to make
some changes to suit your installation.
5 Start the separation system as described in

the Operating Instructions booklet.
6 Start up step by step, checking that the
machine and units function properly.
7 Establish system pressures.
The delivery height pressure is the pressure in
the oil pipe work down stream from the
separation system, due to the pipe bends and
the height (head) to the cleaned oil tank. If the
cleaned oil tank is below the separation
system the delivery height pressure may be
very low. The oil paring disc pressure will have
to be greater than the delivery height pressure
for any oil to flow.
Proceed as follows:
• Ensure the valves in the oil system are in the
correct positions.
• The oil should be at separation temperature.
Cont.
578149-02 45
• Fully open the back pressure regulating valve

RV4.
• Open SV15 for 5 seconds to prime the
operating slide.
• Open SV16 for 15 seconds to close the bowl.
• Open SV10 for 5 seconds to put water into the
bowl.
• Feed oil to the separator at the normal flow
rate by opening SV1.
• Note the pressure in the oil outlet PT4, both on
the pressure gauge and in the EPC50 display.
This pressure is P min.
• Gradually close the back pressure regulating
valve RV4. The pressure on PT4 will increase.
The oil pressure will suddenly drop when oil
passes over to the water outlet. Note the
pressure of PT4 both on the pressure gauge
and in the EPC50 display. This pressure is P
max.
• Open RV4.
• Stop the oil feed to the separator and note the
pressure in the oil outlet. This is the delivery
height pressure P del.
• Stop the heater.
• Stop the separator.
• Stop the feed pump when the heater has
cooled.
46 578149-02
5.2.1 Calculating Operating Pressure

• Calculate the normal back pressure level
during operation as follows:
Pmin + Pmax
= Pnormal
2
• Calculate the value for low pressure alarm

setting (Pr 11) as follows:
Pmin + Pnormal
= Plow press.
2
• Calculate the value for high pressure alarm

setting (Pr 10) as follows:
Pnormal + Pmax
= Phigh press.
2
Adjust the back pressure to Pnormal

Set Pr 11 to give alarm at pressure decreasing
below the Plow press. value.
Set Pr 10 to give alarm at pressure increasing
above the Phigh press. value.
578149-02 47
48 578149-02
PA 635 SEPARATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 6 SHUT-DOWN AND STORAGE
6 Shut-down and Storage

Storage before Installation
If the separation system is stored before
installation, the following safeguards must be
taken:
Storage period < 6 months > 6 months See

Action
Protect from dust, dirt, x x This chapter
water, etc.
Protect with anti-rust x x This chapter
oil
Inspection x x Separator manual
Overhaul x Separator manual
6.1 Shut-down after Use

If the separation system is going to be shut down
for a period of time, the following safeguards
must be taken:
Shut-down < 3 months 3 – 12 > 12 See

period months months
(stand-by)
Action
Remove bowl x x x Dismantling and
Assembly in the
Separator Manual
Protect from dust, dirt, x x x This chapter
water, etc.
Protect with anti-rust x x x This chapter
oil
Inspection x x Separator manual
Overhaul x Separator manual
578149-02 49
6 SHUT-DOWN AND STORAGE PA 635 SEPARATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE
6.2 Protection and Storage

All system equipment, both the separator and
the ancillary equipment, must be stored indoors
at 5 – 55°C, if not delivered in water-resistant
box for outdoor storage.
If there is a risk for condensation of water, the
equipment must be protected by ventilation and
heating above dew point.
The following protection products are
recommended:
• Anti-rust oil with long lasting effective
treatment for external surfaces. The oil should
prevent corrosion attacks and give a waxy
surface.
• Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 40 or equivalent) thin and
lubricating for inside protection. It gives a
lubricating transparent oil film.
• Solvent, e.g. white spirit, to remove the anti-
rust oil after the shut-down.
• If the storage time exceeds 12 months, the
equipment must be inspected every 6 months
and, if necessary, the protection be renewed.
Rubber Parts
• Gaskets, O-rings and other rubber parts
should not be stored for more than two years.
After this time, they should be replaced.
Separator
Dismantle the separator bowl and take out the
O-rings. Clean the bowl with oil and reassemble
without the O-rings. Place in a plastic bag with
silica dessicant bags and seal the plastic bag.
Grease the spindle.
50 578149-02
PA 635 SEPARATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 6 SHUT-DOWN AND STORAGE
Valves, Pipes and Similar Equipment

• Components like valves need to be cleaned
with solvent and treated with anti-rust oil (type
112).
• Water pipes should be drained and treated
with anti-rust oil (type 112).
• Articles made of rubber or plastics (e.g. seals)
must not be treated with anti-rust oil.
6.3 Reassembly and

Start up
• Clean away the anti-rust oil with white spirit.
• Remove the silica gel bags from all units.
• Follow all relevant instructions in the Separator
Manual and Operating Instructions.
578149-02 51
6 SHUT-DOWN AND STORAGE PA 635 SEPARATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE
52 578149-02
SECTION 7
Service Manuals
Separator Manual
High Speed Separator
P 635
Product No. 881202-07-01/1

Book No. 578150-02 Rev. 2
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00
Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40
© Alfa Laval Tumba AB 070327 10.49

This publication or any part there of may not be
reproduced or transmitted by any process or
means without prior written permission of
Alfa Laval Tumba AB.
Contents
1 Read This First .............................................................. .7
2 Safety Instructions ..................................................... .9

2.1 Warning signs in text ............................................. 14
2.2 Environmental issues ............................................ 15
2.3 Requirements of personnel.................................. 16
3 Basic Principles Of Separation ....................... .17

3.1 Separation By Gravity............................................ 17
3.2 Centrifugal Separation .......................................... 18
3.3 Temperatures ........................................................... 18
4 Design ............................................................................... .19

4.1 Overview .................................................................... 19
4.2 The Drive Section.................................................... 20
4.3 The Process Section .............................................. 21
4.3.1 Inlet and outlet............................................................... 21
4.3.2 Separator bowl .............................................................. 23
4.3.3 Selection of gravity disc ................................................ 29
4.4 Sensors (optional) ................................................... 33
4.5 Separating Function ............................................... 34
4.5.1 The liquid balance in the bowl ...................................... 34
4.5.2 Liquid flow ..................................................................... 35
5 Operating Instructions.......................................... .37

5.1 Before First Start-up .............................................. 37
5.2 Before Start............................................................... 38
5.3 Start ............................................................................. 40
5.3.1 Starting and running-up procedure............................... 41
5.4 Operating ................................................................... 44
5.4.1 Sludge discharge .......................................................... 45
5.5 Stopping procedure ................................................ 46
5.6 Emergency stop....................................................... 47
5.7 After Emergency Stop ........................................... 48
6 Service, Dismantling, Assembly..................... .51

6.1 Periodic Maintenance ............................................ 51
6.1.1 Maintenance intervals ................................................... 51
6.1.2 Maintenance procedures .............................................. 51
6.1.3 Tightening of screws ..................................................... 52
6.1.4 Service kits .................................................................... 52
6.2 Maintenance Log ..................................................... 53
6.3 Dismantling ............................................................... 56
6.3.1 Introduction.................................................................... 56
578150-02
6.3.2 Tools............................................................................... 56
6.3.3 Frame hood ................................................................... 58
6.3.4 Bowl ............................................................................... 61
6.3.5 Driving device................................................................ 71
6.3.6 Centrifugal clutch .......................................................... 83
6.4 Actions Before Assembly ..................................... 89
6.4.1 Cleaning ...................................................................... 89
6.4.2 Inspection for corrosion ............................................... 91
6.4.3 Inspection for cracks ................................................... 92
6.4.4 Inspection for erosion .................................................. 93
6.4.5 Exchange of frame feet ................................................. 94
6.4.6 Lubrication of bowl parts ............................................... 95
6.4.7 How to lubricate bowl parts with slide laquer................ 96
6.4.8 Check for galling on operating slide and bowl body ... 97
6.5 Assembly .................................................................... 98
6.5.1 Centrifugal clutch .......................................................... 98
6.5.2 Driving device ............................................................. 104
6.5.3 Bowl ............................................................................. 116
6.5.4 Frame hood ................................................................. 130
6.5.5 Unbalance sensor (optional) ....................................... 133
6.5.6 Speed sensor (optional) .............................................. 134
6.6 Actions After Assembly....................................... 135
6.6.1 Control of machine plates and safety labels .............. 135
6.7 Oil Change ............................................................... 137
6.7.1 Lubricating oil .............................................................. 137
6.7.2 Check oil level ............................................................. 138
6.7.3 Oil change procedure.................................................. 138
6.7.4 Lubrication chart.......................................................... 139
6.7.5 Lubricants.................................................................... 140
6.7.6 Lubricating oils ............................................................ 144
6.8 Lifting instructions ............................................... 146
6.8.1 Lifting the separator..................................................... 146
6.8.2 Lifting the bowl ............................................................ 147
7 Fault Finding ............................................................. .149

7.1 Mechanical Functions.......................................... 149
7.1.1 Separator vibration ...................................................... 149
7.1.2 Smell ............................................................................ 150
7.1.3 Noise............................................................................ 150
7.1.4 Speed too low .............................................................. 150
7.1.5 Speed too high ............................................................ 151
7.1.6 Starting power too high ............................................... 151
7.1.7 Starting power too low ................................................. 151
7.1.8 Starting time too long................................................... 152
7.2 Separating Functions ........................................... 153
7.2.1 Bowl opens accidentally during operation .................. 153
578150-02
7.2.2 Bowl fails to open for sludge discharge153
7.2.3 Unsatisfactory separation result153
7.2.4 Bowl fails to close154
8 Technical Reference.155
8.1 Product description155
8.2 Technical Data156
8.3 Connection List157
8.4 Interface Description159
8.4.1 Scope159
8.4.2 References159
8.4.3 Definitions160
8.4.4 Goal160
8.4.5 Description of separator modes161
8.4.6 Remote start162
8.4.7 Handling of connection interfaces163
8.5 Demand Specification Water169
8.6 Drawings170
8.6.1 Basic size drawing170
8.6.2 Foundation drawing171
8.6.3 Interconnection diagram172
8.6.4 Counter pressure173
8.6.5 Power consumption174
8.6.6 Operating water interface178
8.6.7 Electric motor180
9 Installation.181
9.1 Introduction181
9.2 Upon Arrival At The Storage Area182
9.2.1 Transport182
9.2.2 Protection and storage of goods
183
9.3 Planning of Installation184
9.3.1 Important measurements184
9.3.2 Maintenance service185
9.3.3 Connections to surrounding equipment186
9.4 Storage187
9.5 Before start-up187
578150-02
SEPARATOR MANUAL
6
578150-02
SEPARATOR MANUAL 1 READ THIS FIRST
1 Read This First

This manual is designed for operators,
maintenance personnel and service engineers
working with the Alfa Laval P 635 separator.
If the separator has been delivered and

installed by Alfa Laval as part of a
processing system, this manual should be
viewed as part of the System Documentation.
Study carefully all instructions in any
System Documentation.
In addition to this Separator Manual a

Spare Parts Catalogue, SPC is supplied.
The Separator Manual consists of:
Safety Instructions
Pay special attention to the safety instructions
for the separator. Accidents causing damage to
equipment and/or serious injury to persons or
personnel can result if the safety instructions
are not followed.
Basic Principles of Separation

This chapter describes the purpose of separation
and separation principles.
Design and function

This chapter contains a description of the
separator.
Operating Instructions
This chapter contains operating instructions for
the separator only.
578150-02 7
SEPARATOR MANUAL 1 READ THIS FIRST
Service, Dismantling, Assembly

This chapter gives instructions for the
maintenance procedures. It also contains step-
by-step instructions for dismantling and
assembly of the separator for service and
repair.
Fault Finding
Refer to this chapter if the separator functions
abnormally.
If the separator has been installed as a part of a
processing system, always refer to the trouble-
tracing instructions, in the System
Documentation.
Technical Reference
This chapter contains technical data
concerning the separator and drawings.
Installation
This chapter contains specifications and
recommendations concerning separator
installation.
NOTE
A complete reading of this manual by personnel in

contact with the machine is essential to safety.
Do not allow personnel to clean, assemble, operate
or maintain the separator until they have read and
fully understood this manual.
Ensure that all personnel who operate and service
the separator are well-trained and knowledgeable
concerning the machine and the work to be carried
out.
8
578150-02
The centrifuge includes parts that rotate at high

speed. This means that:
x Kinetic energy is high
x Great forces are generated
G0010421
x Stopping time is long
Manufacturing tolerances are extremely fine.

Rotating parts are carefully balanced to reduce
undesired vibrations that can cause a breakdown.
Material properties have been considered
carefully during design to withstand stress and
fatigue.
The separator is designed and supplied for a
specific separation duty (type of liquid, rotational
speed, temperature, density etc.) and must not be
used for any other purpose.
Incorrect operation and maintenance can result in
unbalance due to build-up of sediment, reduction
of material strength, etc., that subsequently could
lead to serious damage and/or injury.
The following basic safety instructions therefore
apply:
x Use the separator only for the purpose
and parameter range specified by
Alfa Laval.
x Strictly follow the instructions for
installation, operation and maintenance.
x Ensure that personnel are competent and
have sufficient knowledge of maintenance
and operation, especially concerning
emergency stopping procedures.
S0151211
x Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts

and the special tools supplied.
9
x When power cables are connected,

always check direction of motor rotation.
If incorrect, vital rotating parts could
unscrew.
S01512F1
x If excessive vibration occurs, stop
separator and keep bowl filled with
liquid during rundown.
S01512N1
x Use the separator only for the purpose
and parameter range specified by
Alfa Laval.

S01512P1
x Check that the gear ratio is correct for
power frequency used. If incorrect,
subsequent overspeed may result in a
serious break down.
S01512L1
x Welding or heating of parts that rotate
can seriously affect material strength.
S0151241
x Wear on the large lock ring thread must

not exceed safety limit. I-mark on lock
ring must not pass opposite I-mark by
more than specified distance.
S01512G1
x Inspect regularly for corrosion and

erosion damage. Inspect frequently if
process liquid is corrosive or erosive.
S01512H1
10
Entrapment hazards
x Make sure that rotating parts have come

to a complete standstill before starting
any dismantling work.

S01512O1

x To avoid accidental start, switch off and

lock power supply before starting any
dismantling work.

S0151261
Assemble the machine completely
before start. All covers and guards must
be in place.
Electrical hazard
x Follow local regulations for electrical

installation and earthing (grounding).
x To avoid accidental start, switch off and
S0151271
lock power supply before starting any
dismantling work.
Crush hazards
x Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting

instructions.

S01512M1

Do not work under a hanging load.
S01512Y1
11
Noise hazards
x Use ear protection in noisy

environments.
S0151291
Burn hazards
x Lubrication oil and various machine

surfaces can be hot and cause burns.
S01512A1
Skin irritation hazards
x When using chemical cleaning agents,

make sure you follow the general rules
and suppliers recommendation
regarding ventilation, personnel
S01512D1
protection etc.
x Use of lubricants in various situations.
12
Cut hazards
x Sharp edges on bowl discs and threads

can cause cuts.
S01512B1
Flying objects
x Risk for accidental release of snap rings

and springs when dismantling and
assembly.
S01512C1
Health hazard
x Risk for unhealthy dust when handling

friction blocks/pads. Use a dust mask to
make sure not to inhale any dust.
S01512V1
13
2.1 Warning signs in text

Pay attention to the safety instructions in this
manual. Below are definitions of the three grades
of warning signs used in the text where there is a
risk for injury to personnel.
R
! DANGE
DANGER indicates an imminently

hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury.
ING
WARN
!
WARNING indicates a potentially

could result in death or serious injury.
ON
CAUTI
!
CAUTION indicates a potentially

may result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTE
NOTE indicates a potentially hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, may result
in property damage.
14
2.2 Environmental issues
Unpacking
Packing material consists of wood, plastics,
cardboard boxes and in some cases metal straps.
Wood and cardboard boxes can be reused,
recycled or used for energy recovery.
Plastics should be recycled or burnt at a licensed
waste incineration plant.
Metal straps should be sent for material recycling.
Maintenance
During maintenance oil and wear parts in the
machine are replaced.
Oil must be taken care of in agreement with local
regulations.
Rubber and plastics should be burnt at a licensed
waste incineration plant. If not available they
should be disposed to a suitable licensed land fill
site.
Bearings and other metal parts should be sent to
a licensed handler for material recycling.
Seal rings and friction linings should be disposed
to a licensed land fill site. Check your local
regulations.
Worn out or defected electronic parts should be
sent to a licensed handler for material recycling.
15
2.3 Requirements of
personnel
Only skilled or instructed persons are allowed to
operate the machine, e.g. operating and
maintenance staff.
x Skilled person: A person with technical
knowledge or sufficient experience to enable
him or her to perceive risks and to avoid
hazards which electricity/mechanics can
create.
x Instructed person: A person adequately
advised or supervised by a skilled person to
enable him or her to perceive risks and to
avoid hazards which electricity/mechanics
can create.
In some cases special skilled personnel may
need to be hired, like electricians and others. In
some of these cases the personnel has to be
certified according to local regulations with
experience of similar types of work.
16
SEPARATOR MANUAL 3 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF SEPARATION
3 Basic Principles Of Separation

The purpose of separation can be to
x free a liquid of solid particles,

x separate two mutually insoluble liquids
with different densities while removing
any solids present at the same time,
x separate and concentrate solid particles
from a liquid.
3.1 Separation By Gravity

A liquid mixture in a stationary bowl will clear
slowly as the heavy particles in the liquid
mixture sink to the bottom under the influence
of gravity.
A lighter liquid rises while a heavier liquid and
solids sink.
G 08 70 11 1
Continuous separation and sedimentation can be
achieved in a settling tank having outlets
arranged according to the difference in density of
the liquids.
Heavier particles in the liquid mixture will settle Gravity
and form a sediment layer on the tank bottom.
Lighter
liquid
Heavier
liquid Sediment layer of
heavier particles
G 0 87 02 1 1
578150-02 17
SEPARATOR MANUAL 3 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF SEPARATION
3.2 Centrifugal Separation

In a rapidly rotating bowl, the force of gravity
is replaced by centrifugal force, which is many Lighter liquid
times greater. Heavier liquid
Separation and sedimentation is continuous

and takes place very quickly.
The centrifugal force in the separator bowl can
achieve in a few seconds that which takes many
hours in a tank under influence of gravity.
The separation efficiency is influenced by
changes in the oil viscosity, separating
temperatures and in throughput.
G 0 87 03 1 1
Centrifugal force
3.3 Temperatures
For some types of process liquids (e.g.
mineral oils) a high separating temperature
will normally increase the separation
capacity. The temperature influences oil
viscosity and density and should be kept
constant throughout the separation.
Viscosity Density difference

Viscosity is a fluids resistance against movement. Density is mass per volume unit. The greater the density
Low viscosity facilitates separation. Viscosity can be difference between the two liquids, the easier the
reduced by heating. separation. The density difference can be increased by
heating.
Low density difference
G 0 88 6 01 1
G 08 85 91 1
High density difference.

High viscosity Low viscosity
18
578150-02
SEPARATOR MANUAL 4 DESIGN
4 Design
Process section
The feed inlet and outlets
are situated at the top of Electric motor
the separator. The rotating bowl is driven
by the electric motor via a
The liquid is cleaned in the belt transmission.
rotating separator bowl
inside the frame hood.
Sensors (optional)
Drive section
The separator can be
monitored by a speed The rotating separator
sensor, an unbalance bowl is driven by a flat
sensor and an interlocking belt transmission.
switch.
Frame feet
Sludge outlet
The separator rests
on vibration damping Separated solids are discharged at
frame feet. preset intervals.
G 0 8 70 68 1
4.1 Overview The inlet and outlet device contains the
processing parts of the separator; the inlets,
The separator comprises a process section and outlets and piping.
a drive section powered by an electric motor.
The process liquid is cleaned in the separator
The separator frame comprises a lower body bowl. The bowl is fitted on the upper part of a
and a frame hood. The motor is attached to the vertical spindle and rotates at high speed
frame. The frame feet dampen vibration. inside the frame hood. The bowl also contains
the discharge mechanism which empties the
The bottom part of the separator contains a flat
sludge during operation.
belt transmission, a centrifugal clutch and a
vertical spindle. The lower body also contains A speed sensor (option) and an unbalance
an oil sump for lubrication of spindle bearings. sensor (option) are part of the equipment for
monitoring the separator functions.
578150-02 19
4.2 The Drive Section

The separator bowl is driven by an electric
motor via a belt transmission. The belt
pulley on the motor shaft includes a
centrifugal clutch.
Flat belt
The flat belt transmission has a
ratio which increases the bowl
speed several times compared
with the motor speed.
To reduce bearing wear and the

transmission of bowl vibrations to The centrifugal clutch ensures a
the frame and foundation, the top gentle start and smooth acceleration,
bearing of the bowl spindle is and at the same time prevents
mounted in a spring dampened overloading of the belt and motor.
bearing seat.
The bearings on the spindle are

lubricated by the oil spray produced
by an oil pump mounted on the
lower end of the spindle.
G 0 87 07 7 1
20
578150-02
4 DESIGN SEPARATOR MANUAL
4.3 The Process Section

The separation process takes place inside
the rotating separator bowl. The feed and
outlet of process liquid takes place in the
inlet and outlet unit on top of the separator
frame hood.
4.3.1 Inlet and outlet

The inlet and outlet unit consists of the
following parts:
A connecting housing for pipe connections.
A pipe with a paring disc is located inside the
connecting housing. The pipe has channels for
incoming and outgoing process liquid.
The paring disc, pumps the cleaned oil out of
the bowl.
Separated water leaves the bowl through holes
in the bowl hood and is discharged through the
sludge outlet.
The paring disc is located inside and at the top
of the separator bowl.
The inlet and outlet device is held together
against the frame hood by a nut on the end of
the inlet pipe.
Height adjusting rings determine the height
position of the paring disc relative to the bowl.
21
578150-02
Uncleaned oil Pipe
Cleaned oil Water
Paring disc
Connecting housing
G 08 8 61 81
22
578150-02
4.3.2 Separator bowl

The separator bowl, with its sludge discharge
mechanism, is built-up as follows:
The bowl body and bowl hood are held together
by a lock ring (Centrilock). Inside the bowl are
the distributor and the disc stack. The disc
stack is kept compressed by the bowl hood. The
discharge slide forms a separate bottom in the
bowl body.
The upper space between the bowl hood and the
top disc forms the water chamber. From here
the separated water is discharged through
holes in the bowl hood.
The oil paring chamber, with its paring disc, is
located inside the top of the distributor. From
here the cleaned oil is pumped out of the bowl.
The sludge space is in the bowl periphery. The
bowl is kept closed by the discharge slide,
which seals against a seal ring in the bowl
hood.
At fixed intervals, decided by the operator, the
discharge slide drops down to empty the bowl of
sludge.
The sludge discharge mechanism, which
controls the movement of the discharge slide, is
comprised of an operating slide and an
operating water ring. Passive parts are: nozzle
and valve plugs. The operating water cover,
beneath the bowl, supplies operating water to
the discharge mechanism via the operating
water ring.
23
578150-02
Bowl hood
Gravity disc
Top disc
Level ring Oil paring chamber
Disc stack
Bowl body Lock ring
Seal ring
Discharge
slide
Operating slide
Sludge space
Operating water ring
Distributor support
G 08 86 9 91
Nozzle
Holder Distributor
24
578150-02
Purifier bowl
The illustration shows the characteristic part of 0
the purifier bowl, the gravity disc. The disc

should be chosen according to directions in
‘‘4.3.3 Selection of gravity disc” on page 29.
The gravity disc determines the interface
position in a purifier bowl.
A purifier bowl has two liquid outlets, 220 (oil)
and 221 (water).
G 0 6 85 5A 1
Position of interface
An interface (1) is formed between the oil and
water in the bowl. In order to achieve optimum
separation of the oil, the interface must be
maintained in the correct position, which is
between the disc stack and the outer edge of
the top disc. If the interface moves outside the
outer edge of the top disc the water seal will
break and oil will be discharged with the water.
An interface positioned inside the disc stack
G 0 0 47 03 1
will cause bad separation results.
The position of the interface is adjusted by
altering the pressure balance of the liquid
phases oil and water inside the separator,
which is done by exchanging the gravity disc.
For this purpose a number of gravity discs with
various hole diameters are delivered with the
separator.
25
578150-02
A Correct interface position
B. Wrong interface position - broken water seal
G 00 11 72 1
C. Wrong interface position - bad separation
26
578150-02
Factors influencing the interface position

1 Oil viscosity, density and throughput
Oil with high density and/or high viscosity, as
well as high throughput, will position the oil/
water interface closer to the bowl periphery
than for oil with low properties.

G 0 01 18 2 1

A. High viscosity/density/ B. Low viscosity/density/
throughput throughput
2 Gravity disc
To compensate for the above factors the
interface is adjusted to a correct position by
altering the outlet for the water, i.e. exchanging
the gravity disc. Changing to a gravity disc
with a larger hole diameter will move the
interface towards the bowl periphery, whereas,
a disc with a smaller hole diameter will move
the interface closer to the bowl centre.

G 0 0 11 92 1

A. Gravity disc with large B. Gravity disc with small
hole diameter hole diameter
3 Excessive back pressure

Excessively high back pressure in the oil outlet
prevents the oil from being pumped out. The
inner oil level will then move towards centre of
the bowl and, at the same time, push the oil/
water interface outwards towards the bowl
periphery. The effect is a wrong interface
G 0 01 20 2 1
position, which may cause broken water seal.
A. Excessive back pressure B. Normal back pressure
27
578150-02
Clarifier bowl
The illustration shows the characteristic part of 0
the clarifier bowl. In clarification the gravity

disc is replaced by a so called clarifier disc, i.e. a
disc with the smallest possible hole diameter
(Ø) which seals off the water outlet. No liquid
seal is needed when clarifying.
Use the biggest level ring for clarification.
G 0 6 85 5B 1
28
578150-02
4.3.3 Selection of gravity disc

The separator is delivered with a set of gravity 0
discs.
Clarification
When running the separator as a clarifier,
select the gravity disc with the smallest hole
diameter, the so-called clarifier disc. Use the
biggest level ring for clarification. See the
Spare Parts Catalogue for correct hole
diameter.
G 0 68 55 A 1
Purification
A number of gravity discs are delivered for
operating the separator as a purifier. The
diameter of a gravity disc sets the position of
the oil-water interface in the separator. The
separation efficiency can be optimized by
selection of the correct diameter for each
process.
When selecting a gravity disc the general rule
is to use the disc having the largest possible
hole without causing a break of the water seal.
The heavier or more viscous the light phase
(oil) and the larger the liquid feed the smaller
the diameter should be.
To remove more of the light phase (oil) from the
heavy phase (water), the interface should be
placed nearer the bowl centre, however not
inside the outer edge of the discs (too small
gravity disc), as this would prevent the liquid
flow.
For a more detailed description of the interface
position, see ‘‘ Purifier bowl” on page 25.
Some gravity discs have four small holes drilled
outside the large hole. You must pay regard to
these holes when measure the hole diameter Ø,
see the illustration. Measure between the
G 0 73 2 92 1
centres of the holes.

Where to measure the hole diameter of a gravity disc
All gravity discs have their hole diameters
stamped on them. A. Gravity disc without holes
B. Gravity disc with four small holes
29
578150-02
As an aid, use the nomogram on page 31 to find

the correct gravity disc. It can be used when the
density of the oil at a temperature of 15 °C is
known. However, note that the nomogram is
purely theoretical. In practical operation,
practice the following general rule:
1 Fit a gravity disc one size larger than the
recommended in the nomogram.
2 Run the separator.
3 Observe if oil flows through the sludge outlet.
– If Yes, stop the separator and fit the next
smaller gravity disc.
– If No, stop the separator and fit the next
larger gravity disc.
4 Repeat steps 1-3 above until having the
gravity disc with the largest hole diameter
without causing a break of the water seal
30
578150-02
Nomogram, gravity disc

Density above 991 at 15oC not allowed

1,00 1,00
991 52,7 Max

990
54,3
59,5
57,5
0,95 0,95 59
61
950
63,4
66,5
0,90 0,90
70,3
Density Ratio
900
75
0,85 0,85
81
850
0,80 0,80 88
800
0,75 0,75
15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 105 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3
t, °C m /h
G 0 8 69 7A 1
NOTE
Use level ring with 52.
31
578150-02
How to use the nomogram

The presence of salt water may demand the use
of a gravity disc with a larger hole diameter
than indicated in the nomogram (the
nomogram is based on the properties of fresh
water).
Example I in nomogram
Reference in graph:_________________
Oil density:945 kg/m3 at 15 °C
Separating temperature:75 °C
Throughput:3 m3/h
The nomogram indicates that a gravity disc
with a hole diameter of 66,5 mm should be
tried.
r = Density of oil in kg/m3 at 15 °C
Q = Throughput in m3/h
T = Separating temperature in °C or °F
Ø = Gravity disc hole diameter in mm
D = Density ratio
Example II in nomogram
Reference in graph:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Oil density:845 kg/m3 at 15 °C
Separating temperature:55 °C
Throughput:6 m3/h
The nomogram indicates that a gravity disc
with a hole diameter of 81 mm should be tried.
32
578150-02
4.4 Sensors (optional)

The separator can be equipped with a speed
sensor, unbalance sensor, and interlocking
switch.
Speed sensor (option) Unbalance sensor (option)

A speed sensor indicates the speed of the separator. The For indication of any abnormal unbalance, the separator can
correct speed is needed to achieve the best separating be equipped with a sensor monitoring the radial position of
results and for reasons of safety. Refer to type plate for speed the bowl spindle.
particulars.
Cover interlocking switch (option)
When the cover is closed the interlocking circuit in the control
system is closed which makes it possible to start the
separator.
Cover interlocking switch
Unbalance sensor
Speed sensor
G 08 73 47 1
33
578150-02
4.5 Separating Function

The separator separates water and solids
from the uncleaned oil. Water normally
leaves the separator through the sludge
outlet. During sludge discharge, solids
(sludge) and water are removed through the
discharge ports.
4.5.1 The liquid balance in the bowl

The liquid levels in the bowl depend on many
factors (bowl geometry, liquid densities, flow
rates etc.). To get a picture of how the liquids
are distributed in the bowl, imagine that the
bowl is at standstill and turned 90° (only
influenced by gravity). The bowl can now be
compared with a settling tank:
SEPARATOR BOWL TURNED 90°
Level ring
Unseparated oil
Separated oil
G Water
R
Top disc
A Distributor
V
I Oil/water interface
T
Unseparated oil
G 08 86 4 71
Y
Separated oil
Water
SETTLING TANK
34
578150-02
4.5.2 Liquid flow

Unseparated oil is fed into the bowl through
the inlet pipe and travels via the distributor
towards the periphery of the bowl.
When the oil reaches slots in the disc stack, it
rises through the channels formed by the disc
stack, where it is evenly distributed.
The oil is continuously cleaned as it travels
towards the centre of the bowl. When the
cleaned oil leaves the disc stack, it flows
through a number of holes in the distributor
and enters the oil paring chamber, over a level
ring. From here it is pumped by the oil paring
disc, and leaves the bowl through the oil outlet.
Separated water, sludge and solid particles,
which are heavier than the oil, are forced
towards the periphery of the bowl and collect in
the sludge space.
The space between the bowl hood and top disc,
as well as the water chamber, is filled with
water, which flows over the gravity disc
through holes in the bowl hood.
35
578150-02
DISCHARGE OF WATER THROUGH WATER OUTLET
Unseparated oil
Water
Separated oil
Water chamber
Bowl hood
Level ring Water

outlet
Top disc
Oil paring chamber
Sludge
space
Oil/water interface
Uncleaned oil
Cleaned oil
G 0 8 86 28 1
Liquid seal / displacement-

/ separated water
36
578150-02
SEPARATOR MANUAL 5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
5 Operating Instructions
These operating instructions describe routine
procedures to be followed before and during
the start sequence, during the running and
stopping sequence of the separator.
If system documentation is available, always

follow the operating instructions therein. If
there is no system documentation, the
instructions below are to be followed.
5.1 Before First Start-up

Technical demands for connections and
limitations for the separator are listed in chapter
‘‘8 Technical Reference” on page 155:
x Technical data
x Connection list
x Interface description
x Operating water interface
x Basic size drawing
x Foundation drawing.
Before first start:
x Ensure the machine is installed correctly
and that feed lines and drains have been
flushed clean.
x Fill oil in the oil bath. See ‘‘6.7 Oil Change”
on page 137. Quality of oil see ‘‘6.7.6
Lubricating oils” on page 144.
x Check the direction of rotation by doing a
quick start/stop. The motor fan should rotate
clockwise.
x Make sure that the bearings on the spindle
are pre-lubricated.
578150-02 37
5.2 Before Start

Technical demands for connections and logical
limitations for separator are listed in chapter
‘‘8 Technical Reference” on page 155.
1 Ensure that the separator is correctly installed and

that feed lines and drains have been flushed clean.
ING
WARN
!
Breakdown hazard
couplings, covers, and guards must be in place and properly
tightened. Non compliance may lead to breakdown.
ING
WARN
!
Electrical hazard
Follow local regulations for electrical installation and
earthing (grounding).
G 08 70 6B 1
ING
WARN
!
Breakdown hazard
Check that the power frequency is in agreement with the
machine plate. If incorrect, resulting overspeed may cause 50 Hz?
breakdown. 60 Hz?
P0 0 39 92 A
ING
WARN
!
Use the separation system for the purpose, and within the
limits, specified by Alfa Laval. Failure to do so could cause a
violent breakdown.
38
578150-02
5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS SEPARATOR MANUAL
2 Check the oil sump level and top up if

necessary.
x Remove the oil pin and make sure that the oil
level is above the lower end of the pin see
‘‘6.7.2 Check oil level” on page 138.
NOTE
Too much or too little oil can damage the separator

bearings.
NOTE
The separator should be level and at

standstill when oil is filled.
G 08 68 7K 1
39
578150-02
5.3 Start
1 Make sure that the bowl is clean and that the separator is properly assembled and check..
... the direction of rotation by doing a quick

start/stop. The motor fan should rotate
clockwise.
... that all couplings and connections are

securely tightened to prevent leakages.
Leaking hot liquid can cause burns.
ON
CAUTI
!
If power cable polarity has been

reversed, the separator will rotate
... that all frame hood bolts in reverse, and vital rotating parts
as well as the clutch cover can loosen.
are fully tightened
G 0 87 06 B 1
... the oil sump level.
Top up if necessary
ON
CAUTI
!
After change of feed the sludge discharge interval
must be adjusted.
Breakdown may result if the intervals between
discharges are too long.
40
578150-02
5.3.1 Starting and running-up

procedure
1 Start of separator
a Open the water supply valve.

Make sure that the water supply
pressure is 150-600 kPa (1,5-6 bar)
b Start the separator by pushing

the start button at the starter
unit.
G 0 8 71 78 1
41
578150-02
2 Check the separator for vibration
NOTE
Normal vibration
Note the normal occurrence of critical speed periods.
Some vibrations occur for short periods during the
starting cycle, when the separator passes through its
critical speeds. This is normal and passes without
danger. Try to learn the vibration characteristics of
the critical speed pattern.
ING
WARN
!
Excessive vibration
If vibration increases, or
continues at full speed, keep
bowl filled and stop the
separator.
The cause of the vibration must
G 0 8 71 87 1
be determined and corrected
before starting again!
Excessive vibration may be due
to incorrect assembly or
insufficient cleaning of the bowl.
NOTE
Be alert for unusual noises and

any other unusal conditions.
42
578150-02
3 Ensure that the separator is at full speed (after about 190 - 210 seconds).
The time by full speed can be checked by

studying the ammeter
Current increases during

start...
...to decrease to a stable

value when full speed has
been reached.
For normal length of the start-up period
G 08 71 9 21
see ‘‘8.2 Technical Data” on page 156
4 For purification:

Supply water to form the water-seal. The
water should have the same temperature as
the process liquid.
a. Close the water feed when water flows
out through the water outlet.
b. Start the oil feed slowly to avoid
breaking the water seal.
5 For clarification:
a. Start the oil feed with full flow.
6 Adjust to desired throughput.
7 For both purification and clarification modes:

Check the separator inlet and outlet
pressures. See recommended values in your
system documentation.
43
578150-02
5.4 Operating
1 Checkpoints during operation:
a Check all connections for leakage.
b Check that the feed has correct flow and

temperature.
c Check the back pressure.
d Check that the starter ammeter reading

is the normal low and steady value.
e Check for abnormal vibrations

and sounds.
f Check motor current.
ING ING
WARN WARN
! !
Disintegration hazard Burning hazard

Do not discharge a vibrating separator. Lubricating oil and various machine
Vibration can increase if solidified surfaces can be hot and cause burns.
sludge is only partially discharged.
G 08 71 5 81
44
578150-02
5.4.1 Sludge discharge
1 Performing a discharge
a Close the feed (connection 201)
b Perform a displacement (of the

interface) by opening connection
206 for 10 seconds.
c Initiate a discharge by supplying

discharge water (connection 375)
for 3 seconds.
d Pause for 15 seconds.
G08 7 06 C1
NOTE
Before turning on the feed,

make sure that the oil has the
correct temperature.
e Close the bowl by supplying make up

water (connection 375) for 15 seconds.
f Apply liquid seal by opening

connection 206 for 9 seconds.
g Open the feed (connection 201).
45
578150-02
5.5 Stopping procedure
1 Stopping the separator
a Turn off the oil feed.
b Feed displacement water

until water flows out through
the water outlet. Then close
this feed.
c Stop the separator.
d Wait until the separator has

come to a complete
standstill.

Check rotation of motor fan.
G0 87 0 6C1
ING
WARN
!
Entrapment hazard
Make sure that rotating parts have come
to a complete standstill before starting
any dismantling work.
46
578150-02
5.6 Emergency stop
1 If the separator vibrates excessively...
... push the emergency stop button.
G 08 71 27 1
NOTE
Keep the bowl filled during run-down to

minimize the vibrations.
2 Evacuate the room.
ING
WARN
!
Never discharge a vibrating
separator.
G 08 7 13 71
ING
WARN
!
ING
WARN Entrapment hazard
!
Make sure that rotating parts
have come to a complete
Disintegration hazard standstill before starting any
After an emergency stop, the cause of the fault must be dismantling work.
identified.
If all parts have been checked and the cause not found,
contact Alfa Laval for advice before restarting the
separator.
47
578150-02
5.7 After Emergency Stop
Separator standstill
Dismantling work must not be started before all

rotating parts have come to a complete
standstill.
ING
WARN
!
Entrapment hazard
work.
Avoid accidental start
ING
WARN
!
Entrapment hazard
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock power
supply before starting any dismantling work.
Remedy the cause
The cause of the emergency stop must be

remedied before attempting to restart the
separator.
If the cause is not found, an overhaul must be
performed on the separator, and all moving parts
thoroughly checked
ING
WARN
!
Do not start the separator after a emergency stop
without first remedying the cause of the emergency.
Make sure that the bowl is clean before restart.
48
578150-02
Separator reassembled
The separator must be fully reassembled before

unlocking the power supply and restarting the
separator.
ING
WARN
!
Breakdown hazard
All couplings, covers, and guards must be in place
and properly tightened.
If not, a breakdown may result!
G 08 7 06 B1
49
578150-02
50
578150-02
SEPARATOR MANUAL 6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY
6 Service, Dismantling, Assembly

6.1 Periodic Maintenance 6.1.2 Maintenance procedures
Periodic (preventive) maintenance reduces At each Inspection and/or Overhaul, take a

the risk of unexpected stoppages and copy of the maintenance log and use it to make
breakdowns. Follow the maintenance log in notes during the service.
this chapter in order to facilitate the An inspection and overhaul should be carried
periodic maintenance. out as follows:
1 Dismantle the parts as described in ‘‘6.3
6.1.1 Maintenance intervals Dismantling” on page 56.
The following directions for periodic Place the separator parts on clean, soft
maintenance give a brief description of parts to surfaces such as pallets.
be cleaned, checked and renewed at different 2 Inspect and clean the dismantled separator
maintenance intervals. parts according to the maintenance log and
The maintenance log for each maintenance description in ‘‘6.4 Actions Before
interval on page 53 gives a detailed list of Assembly” on page 89.
actions to be performed. 3 Fit all the parts delivered in the service kit
while assembling the separator as
described in chapter ‘‘6.5 Assembly” on
Inspection i i page 98.
An Inspection consists of an overhaul of the
4 When the separator is assembled, make
separator bowl, inlet/outlet and operating
final checks described in ‘‘6.6 Actions After
water device every 6 months or 4000 operating
Assembly” on page 135.
hours.
Seals in bowl and gaskets in inlet/outlet device
are renewed.
ING
WARN
!
Overhaul o
Disintegration Hazards
An Overhaul consists of an overhaul of the Separator parts that are either missing, worn
complete separator (including separator bowl, beyond their safe limits or incorrectly
assembled, may cause severe damage or fatal
inlet/outlet and operating device) every 18
injury.
months or 12000 operating hours. Seals,
bearings, friction blocks and flat belt in the
separator are renewed.
ON
CAUTI
Oil change !
The oil should be changed every 4000 hours, or

at least once every year if the total number of Burn and Corrode Hazards
Escaping hot and/or corroding process
operating hours is less than 4000 hours/year. material, which can be hazardous, may still
remain in the separator after stop.
578150-02 51
6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY SEPARATOR MANUAL
The use of service symbols in the 6.1.4 Service kits

dismantling/assembly instructions
A Commissioning kit is included in the delivery
Parts that have to be renewed from the service
which contain various O-rings that might need
kits (see below) are marked i i and/or o in
to be changed when assembled for the first
the assembly instructions.
time.
Special service kits are available for Inspection
Example: and Overhaul.
a Fit the O-ring ii . For other services, a Support kit is available.
When dismantling and assembling between Spare parts not included in the Support kit
the service periods, some procedures do not have to be ordered separately.
have to be carried out. These procedures are
Note that the parts for Inspection are included
marked i i and/or o .
in the Overhaul kit.
Example:
The contents of the kits are described in the
5 Renew the valve plugs on the operating Spare Parts Catalogue.
slide i i .
All symbols used in the instructions refer to
NOTE
activities mentioned in the maintenance logs.
Always use Alfa Laval genuine parts as
otherwise the warranty may become invalid.
Alfa Laval takes no responsibility for the
6.1.3 Tightening of screws safe operation of the equipment if non-
genuine spare parts are used.
Tightening all screws with the correct torque
value is important.
These figures apply unless otherwise stated:
ING
WARN
Torque !
Metric Stainless steel Carbon steel Disintegration hazards

thread Use of imitation spare parts may cause severe
Nm kpm Ib.ft Nm kpm Ib.ft damage.
M4 1,7 0,17 1,2 2,25 0,25 1,8
M5 3,4 0,34 2,5 4,9 0,49 3,6
M6 7 0,7 5 8 0,8 5,9
M8 17 1,7 13 20 2 14,7
M10 33 3,4 24 39 3,9 28,7
M12 57 5,8 42 68 6,9 50
M16 140 14 100 155 15,8 114
M20 270 28 200 325 33 239
M24 470 48 340 570 58 420
The figures apply to lubricated screws

tightened with a torque wrench.
52 578150-02
6.2 Maintenance Log
Name of ship/plant: Local identification:
Separator: P 635 Manufacture No./Year:
Total running hours: Product No.: 881202-07-01
Date: Signature:
Inspection
Overhaul
Check
Part i o Action Page Note

Frame hood
- All parts x x Clean 89
- All parts x x Check for corrosion 91
- All parts x x Check for cracks 92
- Connecting housing x x Check for erosion damages 93
x x Check for erosion from water spraying
- Frame hood x x Renew O-ring 130
x Control measure of paring disc height 131
x Check height adjusting rings 131
Bowl
- All parts x x Clean and change O-rings 89
- All parts x x Check for corrosion 91
- All parts x x Check for cracks 92
- All parts x x Check for erosion damages 93
- Bowl body x x Check for impact marks and corrosion 116
x x Renew rectangular ring 117
x x Renew O-rings 118, 121
x x Renew holder screws and washers 117
- Operating slide x x Renew rectangular ring 117
x x Renew valve plugs 116
- Discharge slide x x Renew rectangular ring 121
- Inlet and outlet pipe x x Renew O-rings 125
- Gravity disc x x Clean and check
- Distributor x x Change O-ring 122
- Disributor support x x Renew O-rings 122
- Level ring x x Change O-rings 122
- Top disk x x Renew O-rings 126
- Bowl hood x x Renew seal ring 127
x x Renew O-ring 127
- Operating water ring x x Renew seal ring and screws 118
53
578150-02
Inspection
Overhaul
Check
Frame
- Frame feet Renew frame feet (including washers 94 Has to be ordered
and screws) separately
- Drain and oil filling holes x x Renew washers 115
- Oil pin x x Renew O-ring 115
Driving device
- All parts x Clean 89
- All parts x Check for corrosion 91
- All parts x Check for cracks 92
- Bottom bearing housing x Renew O-ring 104
- Labyrinth ring holder x Renew labyrinth ring 105
x Renew O-ring 105
- Top bearing housing x Renew springs 107
- Flat belt x Renew flat belt 111
- Bowl spindle x Pre-lubricate and renew ball bearing 106
x Pre-lubricate and renew self-aligning
roller bearing 108
x Lubricate the spindle
x Measure the radial wobble 114
- Lubricating oil orifice x Renew O-ring 109
- Neck bearing cover x Renew O-ring 113
- Deflector ring x Renew O-ring 113
- Water inlet pipe x Renew O-ring 114
- Operating water cover x Renew seal ring and O-ring 114
- Fan x Renew the O-ring 110
Coupling
- All parts x Clean 89
- All parts x Check for corrosion 91
- All parts x Check for cracks 92
- Coupling hub x Renew single row ball bearings 98
x Renew snap rings 98
- Friction blocks x Renew friction pads (if they are worn) 98
or clean the pads if they are oily
Electrical motor
- Electrical motor x Lubricate if nipples are fitted. See sign ---
on motor
54
578150-02
Inspection
Overhaul
Check
Signs and labels on separator
- Machine plate x Check attachment and legibility 135
- Power supply frequency x Check attachment and legibility 135
- Lifting instructions x Check attachment and legibility 135
- Safety labels x Check attachment and legibility 135
- Name plate x Check attachment and legibility 135
- Representative label x Check attachment and legibility 135
55
578150-02
6.3 Dismantling
6.3.1 Introduction
The frame hood and heavy bowl parts must
be lifted by means of a hoist. Position the
hoist exactly above the bowl centre. Use a
lifting sling and lifting hooks with safety
catches.
The parts must be handled carefully. Don’t

place parts directly on the floor, but on a
clean rubber mat, fibreboard or a suitable
pallet.
NOTE
For safety reasons, it is essential that all personnel

who work with the separator read this manual
thoroughly and completely.
Do not allow personnel to clean, assemble, operate
or maintain the separator until they have read and
fully understood this manual.
Ensure that all personnel who operate and service
the separator are well-trained and knowledgeable
concerning the separator and the work to be
carried out.
6.3.2 Tools
Special tools from the tool kit must be used
for dismantling and assembly, as well as
Standard tools (not included). The special
tools are specified in the Spare Parts Catalogue
and are illustrated at the beginning of each
dismantling section.
ING
WARN
!
Entrapment hazard
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock-
out power supply before starting any
dismantling work.
Make sure that machine has come to a complete

standstill before starting any dismantling work
(takes about 22 minutes from switch off).
56
578150-02
Standard Tools
3 4
1 2 6
7 12
9 11
10
8
13
14
G 09 11 6 61
1 Screwdriver
2 Torque wrench (capacity 0-200 Nm)
3 Drift ( Ø 4 mm)
4 Dial indicator with magnetic base
5 Hexagon head keys, various sizes
6 Heating equipment for bearings
7 Sliding calliper
8 Hammers (standard and soft-faced)
(not lead)
9 Pliers for internal snap rings
10 Pliers for external snap rings
11 T-handle with extension rod, sockets
(various sizes)
12 Spanners (various sizes)
13 Adjustable spanner
14 Shackle
57
578150-02
6.3.3 Frame hood Inlet bend

O-ring
Snap ring
Nut
Safety device
Screw
Connecting housing
O-ring
G 0 8 63 3B 1
Screws
Support ring
Height adjusting rings
G 0 86 05 M
Frame hood
1 Spanner (nut)
ING
WARN
!
G 0 8 63 4B 1
Entrapment hazard
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock- O-ring
out the power supply before starting any
dismantling work.
Make sure that machine has come to a

complete standstill before starting any
dismantling work
(after about 22 minutes from switch off).
58
578150-02
1 Removing the inlet and outlet device.
a Remove the screw holding

NOTE
the safety device.
Remove connections before
starting dismantling.
ON
CAUTI
!
Check, through the hole,

that the bowl has stopped
rotating.
b Detach the snap
ring and remove the
inlet bend.
c Remove the nut.
NOTE
Left hand thread!
d Remove the connecting

housing. G 0 8 63 5A 1
59
578150-02
2 Removing the frame hood.
c Lift off the frame

a Remove the screws holding hood.
the frame hood.
NOTE
Do not place
the hood
upside down.
G 08 6 36 F1
b Loosen the hood
by bending with
a screwdriver in
all grooves in the
hood.
60
578150-02
6.3.4 Bowl Lock ring
Bowl hood
Seal ring
O-ring
Gravity disc
O-rings
Top disc
Level ring
G 0 8 61 66 1
O-ring
O-rings
Inlet and outlet

pipe
O-ring
Bowl disc
(without caulks)
1
2 Bowl discs
O-ring
Distributor
5
O-ring
Distributor support
3
Cap nut
4 Screw
6
Nut
Discharge slide
7
Rectangular ring
8 O-ring
9 Bowl body
10
G 0 86 05 I1
Rectangular ring
O-ring
1 Compressing tool (lock ring) Valve plugs
2 Lifting eyes
3 Spanner for nut (nut/discharge slide) Operating slide
4 Puller (discharge slide) Nozzle
5 Lifting tool (distributor, spindle) Rectangular ring
6 Puller (Bowl body)
7 Screw (lock ring) (M5) O-ring
8 Hexagon head key Holder
9 Chisel (seal ring)
Operating water ring
G 0 8 62 6P 1
10 Pin (distributor/lifting tool)

Screws
Screws & washers Seal ring
61
578150-02
1 Removing the lock ring
a Fit the compressing tool.
b Fit the clamps and the c Compress the disc stack by

screws to stop. alternately tightening the inner
screws on the compressing
NOTE tool to a maximum of 60 Nm.
3 2
Be sure not to
cover the threaded
holes.
4
1
Screw
Clamp d Fit the dismantling screws

to the bowl body and
5
press out the lock ring by
6 tightening the screws
successively according to
the numbering on the
illustration (1-6). Start with
the screw nearest the lock
ring end (1).
The lock ring can be
removed when it has
passed the edge of the
groove.
e Remove the lock ring

from the groove.
NOTE
G 0 86 27 A 1
f Remove the dismantling screws.
62
578150-02
2 Removing the bowl hood.
a Remove the compressing

screws.
b Loosen the screws
on the clamp tool.
Remove the tool.
Remove the lock
ring.
NOTE
The bowl hood must be pulled off

straight up, in order not to get stuck.
Recommendation: Take
measurements with a calliper around
the bowl, between the upper edge of
the bowl body and the bowl hood, to
check that the bowl hood is being
pulled off straight up.
c Fit the compressing tool and the

puller screws.
Pull the bowl hood off by
screwing the screws alternately
(max. 1/2 turn) and gradually
increase the momentum evenly
until the bowl hood come loose.
d Remove the clamps

and attach lifting eyes
to the compressing
tool and lift off the
bowl hood.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
The top disc can adhere to the
bowl hood when lifting. Be
careful not to accidentally drop
G 08 6 28 I1
it.
63
578150-02
3 Removing the top disc, level ring, and inlet and outlet pipe.
a Carefully tap out the top b Carefully prise off the level
disc, together with the ring.
gravity disc, and lift up the
bowl hood.
c Lift out the inlet and outlet

pipe.
G 08 62 9 B1
4 Removing the seal ring.
a Place the bowl hood on a support b Turn the bowl hood upside down
and tap out a piece of the seal ring and remove the seal ring by
using a drift in the holes. carefully knocking pieces of the
seal ring out of the groove, using
the special tool: chisel.
NOTE
It is very important not

to damage the bottom of
the groove!
Seal ring
ING
WARN
!
Risk for eye injury from flying seal ring

parts
The seal ring breaks when removed from the bowl
G 08 6 24 41
hood.
Wear eye protection!
64
578150-02
5 Removing the disc stack.
c Carefully lift off the

a Assemble the lifting tool with the pin. disc stack assembly.
b Fit the assembled tool into the

distributor and ease off the disc stack.
ON
CAUTI
!
Cut hazard
Sharp edges on the bowl
discs may cause cuts
G 0 86 31 A 1
6 Removing the distributor and distributor support.
a Remove the distributor.
b Unscrew the screws and remove the

distributor support.
Distributor support
G 0 8 62 6Q 1
65
578150-02
7 Removing the nut
b Use the T-handle

with extension rod
and socket to
remove the nut.
Nut Sling
Screw
a To prevent the bowl body from rotating

when removing the nut;
Fit one of the clamps (see page 62) to
the bowl body and one of the screws
G 09 23 86 1
for the frame hood in the frame. Fasten
a sling between the clamp and the
screw around the bowl body.
Clamp
66
578150-02
8 Removing the discharge slide.
a Fit the lifting tool by

pressing the puller rods
towards each other and
position them into the
two slots on the bowl b Ease off the discharge slide
bottom. by turning the central screw.
Slide metal ring down
over bowl nave.
NOTE
If discharge slide is
difficult to remove,
tap lightly on outside
edge with a soft
faced hammer.
Ring on tool
Puller rod
Discharge slide
Bowl body
c Lift out the discharge slide.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
The ring on the lifting tool must be
pushed down against the discharge
slide, otherwise the discharge slide
G 0 86 32 7 1
may come loose from the tool.
67
578150-02
9 Removing the cap nut.
a Remove the cap nut
NOTE
Left-hand thread!
G 08 60 6 71
10 Removing the bowl body
a Fit the lifting tool to the bowl body.
b Raise the bowl body off the spindle taper

by turning the lifting eye clock-wise.
c Lift off the bowl body

G 0 8 60 73 1
68
578150-02
11 Turn the bowl body upside down.
ING
WARN
!
G 0 86 08 21
Crush hazard
Support the bowl body when turning to prevent it from rolling.
12 Removing the holder.
a Remove and discard the screws and washers.

New screws and washers are included in the
Inspection kit.
b Lift off the holder.
NOTE
If the ring sticks, use two M8

screws in threaded holes to
raise the operating slide
holder up and away from the
bowl body.
G 0 8 60 92 1
69
578150-02
13 Removing the operating slide.
a Lift off the operating slide.
NOTE

screws in threaded holes to raise
the operating slide holder up and
away from the bowl body.
G 0 86 10 21
14 Removing the operating water ring.
a Remove and discard the screws.
New screws are included in the Inspection kit.
b Lift off the ring.
NOTE

screws in threaded holes to
raise the operating slide
holder up and away from the
bowl body.
G 0 86 11 21
70
578150-02
6.3.5 Driving device 1 3 4 5
G 0 85 79 7 1
G 08 57 85 1
7
1 Puller (spindle pulley, 4 Lifting tool
ball bearing). (spindle assembly)
2 Tool (bearing housing). 5 Drift (bottom bearing).
3 Cover puller 6 Sleeve (ball bearing in
(neck bearing cover). top bearing seat
7 Pin spanner (oil fan).
Seal ring
Air deflector
Operating water cover
O-ring
O-rings Spindle pulley
Deflector ring
Seal ring
Neck bearing cover Belt
O-ring
O-ring
Self-aligning roller
Fan bearing
Lubrication oil orifice
Snap ring
O-ring
Oil pump
Bowl spindle
Ball bearing Labyrinth ring
Top bearing seat Wing insert

Springs
O-ring
Top bearing housing Bottom bearing
holder
Composite springs Screw
O-ring
Plugs
G 08 58 07 1
Strainer
71
578150-02
1 Removing the clutch cover.
a Remove the screws.
b Remove the clutch cover.
G 0 85 8 13 1
2 Empty the oil sump.
Unscrew the oil plug and

empty the oil sump.
G 0 86 85 7 1
72
578150-02
3 Loosen the flat belt, by tilting the motor.
a Loosen, but do not remove, the screws holding

the motor. Start with the two screws at the bottom. Motor
Do not loosen more than shown in the illustration.
Separator frame
Nut
Screw
b Loosen the two upper screws a little bit more so

that the motor can be tilted. Do not loosen more
than shown in the illustration.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
c Remove the flat belt from the motor pulley. The motor will come off if the screws
G 08 58 8A 1
are unscrewed.
73
578150-02
4 Removing the operating water cover.
b Lift off the operating water cover.
NOTE
If the cover sticks, fit

two M8 screws to the
threaded holes and
tighten.
G 0 85 89 3 1
5 Removing the neck bearing cover and deflector ring.
d Lift off the neck bearing cover

together with the deflector ring.
a Attach the neck bearing

cover puller.
b Fasten the tool to

c Ease off the the cover.
cover by
tightening
the screw.
G 08 5 90 51
Cover
Frame
74
578150-02
6 Prepare for removal of spindle assembly.
NOTE
To facilitate later removal

of plugs, loosen (do not
remove) the plugs on the
bearing housing.
a Remove the screws
NOTE
If the cover sticks, fit

two M8 screws to the
threaded holes and
tighten.
G 0 85 91 51
75
578150-02
7 Lifting the spindle assembly from the frame.
a Fit the lifting tool to the spindle end.
b Slowly raise and lift out the spindle

assembly.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
Do not rotate the spindle assembly
during lifting. The spindle
assembly may otherwise come
loose from the lifting tool.
G 09 07 8 31
76
578150-02
8 Place the spindle assembly upside down on a support.
Make a support
~185 mm
~120 mm
~6,5 mm
free space
G 0 85 9 21 1
9 Removing the air deflector.
Remove the screws and the air

deflector.
08 59 24 1
77
578150-02
10 Removing the fan.
a Turn the spindle assembly the right way up.
b Place a spanner (or other

suitable tool) on the spindle
pulley key-grip to stop it from
c Fit the pin spanner and
moving.
remove the fan.
NOTE Key-grip
Left-hand
thread!
G 09 23 9 21
11 Removing the bottom bearing assembly.
a Turn the spindle assembly up-side down and Puller tool

remove the oil pump by using spanners.
b Pull off the belt pulley and the

self-aligning roller bearing using
the puller tool.
NOTE
Always discard a used

bearing.
Lubrication oil orifice c Cover the the oil orifice and blow compressed
air through the bottom hole of the oil pump and
slowly ease out the lubrication oil orifice.
G 08 6 59 81
Compressed air
78
578150-02
12 Removing the top bearing housing.

a Turn the spindle
Composite b Remove the plugs
assembly over.
springs and the composite
springs.
c Carefully remove the spindle

from the top bearing seat.
Plug
NOTE
Be careful not to damage

d Collect the
the vibration indicator.
axial springs.
G 08 5 82 21
79
578150-02
13 Removing the ball bearing.
a Remove the snap ring.
ING
WARN
!
Risk for eye injury from flying snap ring

Use the correct pliers for dismantling of snap
ring to avoid accidental release.
b Fit the cap nut on the spindle to

protect the threads.
c Use the puller tool to remove the

top bearing seat from the spindle.
NOTE
Do not damage threads on

spindle. NOTE
Take care not to damage the

vibration indicator when
separating the top bearing
seat from the spindle.
Vibration indicator
Piece of wood to
protect the spindle
threads.
d Place the top bearing seat on a support to NOTE

protect the vibration indicator.
Remove the bearing. Use a drift in the two Always discard
used bearings.
holes.
NOTE
G 0 85 83 5 1
Be careful not to damage the bearing seat.
80
578150-02
14 Removing the labyrinth ring.
a Remove the ring using a

screwdriver.
NOTE
Be careful not do damage the

groove.
G 0 85 8 6C 1
81
578150-02
15 Removing the bottom bearing holder.
a Fit the tool into the bottom bearing holder and attach the
socket, extension rod and T-handle.
T-handle
Extension rod
Socket
Tool
b Loosen the bottom bearing

holder by turning it anti
clockwise.
Remove it by hand.
c Remove the strainer.

G 0 85 86 D1
82
578150-02
6.3.6 Centrifugal clutch

Snap rings
Ball bearings
Spacing ring
G 08 64 78 1
Belt pulley
Coupling
ING hub
WARN
!
Parallel pin
Entrapment hazard
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock-
out power supply before starting any
dismantling work. Friction blocks
(3=60 Hz)
Make sure that machine has come to a complete Cover
standstill before starting any dismantling work
(takes about 22 minutes from switch off).
Snap ring
G 08 65 1 B1
NOTE
50 Hz = 5 Friction blocks
1
G 0 86 5 04 1
83
578150-02
1 Removing the clutch cover.
b Remove the clutch cover.
G 0 85 81 3 1
2 Loosen the flat belt, by tilting the motor.
a Loosen, but do not remove, the screws holding

the motor. Start with the two screws at the bottom. Motor
Do not loosen more than shown in the illustration.
Separator frame
Nut
Screw
b Loosen the two upper screws a little bit more so

that the motor can be tilted. Do not loosen more
than shown in the illustration.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
G 0 8 58 8A 1
c Remove the flat belt from the motor pulley. The motor will come off if the screws
are unscrewed.
84
578150-02
3 Removing the motor.
a Disconnect the electrical cables.
ING
WARN
!
Electrical hazard
If the cables are not disconnected during lifting
procedures, they may become damaged.
b Fit a sling to the c Tense the lifting sling to support the motor and
motor using a remove the screws. Lift the motor while supported.
shackle on the upper
part.
Weight of motor with
ING
coupling: approx. WARN
!
60 kg.
Crush hazard
If not supported, the motor with
coupling will drop when removing the
screws.
G 0 86 46 A 1
d Lower the motor onto a suitable pallet.
4 Removing the friction blocks.
a Remove the snap ring, cover

and friction blocks.
Friction blocks
(3=60 Hz)
Cover
Snap ring
NOTE
G 0 86 52 3 1
85
578150-02
5 Checking the condition of the friction blocks o .
If the blocks are worn:

Fit new friction blocks.
ON
CAUTI
!
NOTE
Inhalation Replace all blocks, even if only one is
hazard worn.
When handling
friction blocks/
a Clean the pins of coupling hub and apply a thin
pads wear a mask
to avoid inhalation film of lubricating paste to the pins.
of dust.
Do not use
compressed air to
remove dust.
NOTE
Remove dust using
Make sure that there is no oil on the
vacuum or a damp
pads.
cloth.
NOTE
Be sure that the pins on the back of the

blocks project into the grooves in the
clutch hub.
b If only friction block service is to be done,

proceed to ‘‘Assembly of friction blocks” on page
100.
G 08 65 3 31
86
578150-02
Complete dismantling of centrifugal clutch
6 Removing the coupling from the motor.
a Remove the screw, spring washer and washer.
Washer
Spring washer
Screw
Attach a socket with extension

rod and handle to the screw.
Place a piece of wood according
to the illustration. Push the
handle to start the rotor moving,
when the handle hits the piece of
wood, the weight and movement
of the rotor loosens the screw.
Repeat until screw is loose.
Piece of wood
b Check that the brass plug is mounted

on the puller tool.
Fit the tool to the friction clutch.
Puller tool
c Ease off the friction coupling.
Flat areas for spanner.
ING
WARN
!
NOTE Crush hazard

The centrifugal clutch is heavy
See dismantling with optional and can fall, causing injury,
hydraulic puller tool (if when loosened from the motor
G 0 86 5 4G 1
purchased) on next page. shaft.
87
578150-02
7 Dismantling of the coupling assembly.
a Remove the snap rings.
b Drive out the coupling hub.
Wooden support
Support
c Turn the coupling the other way round and

drive out the ball bearings using the
mounting tool.
NOTE
Always discard used bearings.

G 0 86 55 6 1
88
578150-02
6.4 Actions Before

Assembly
6.4.1 Cleaning i o
Clean the separator parts according to the
diagram below. Afterwards, protect all cleaned
carbon steel parts against corrosion by oiling.
Part Procedure Cleaning agents
Frame and The external cleaning of the frame and motor should be Water and de-greasing agent.
motor restricted to brushing, sponging or wiping while the motor is
running or still is hot.
ING
WARN
!
Electrical hazard
Never wash down a separator with a direct
water stream.
Never play a water jet on the motor. Totally
enclosed motors can be damaged by direct
hosing to the same extent as open motors,
resulting in short-circuit and internal corrosion.
Clean the inside of the frame with a clean cloth and remove
visible particles.
89
578150-02
Part Procedure Cleaning agents
Bowl Cleaning of bowl discs A chemical cleaning agent must

Inlet/ outlet Handle the bowl discs carefully in order to avoid damage to dissolve the deposits quickly without
the surfaces during cleaning attacking the material of the separator
parts.
1 Remove the bowl discs from the distributor and place them
individually in the cleaning agent. Fuel oil sludge mainly consists of
complex organic substances such as
2 Allow the discs to remain in the cleaning agent until the asphaltenes. The most important
deposits have been dissolved. This will normally take property of a cleaning liquid for the
between two and four hours. removal of fuel oil sludge is the ability to
3 Lastly, clean the discs with a soft brush. dissolve these asphaltenes.
ON
Cleaning of holder for operating slide, operating water CAUTI
ring and operating slide with nozzle. !
Use 10% acetic acid solution to dissolve lime deposits. The
acid should be heated to 80 °C. Cut hazard
Clean the nozzle on the operating slide using a soft iron wire Sharp edges on the separator
discs may cause cuts.
or a similar object.
Driving device Use a sponge or a soft brush and clean the oil orifice, bearing White spirit, cleaning-grade kerosene
holder and oil pump thoroughly. or diesel oil.
Centrifugal Use a sponge or a soft brush. White spirit, cleaning-grade kerosene

clutch or diesel oil.
Belt pulley Use a steel brush. Solvent
90
578150-02
6.4.2 Inspection for corrosion i

o
Inspect the separator parts for corrosion.
Evidence of corrosion attacks should be looked
for and rectified each time the separator is
dismantled.
Max. 0,2 mm
ING
WARN
!
G 0 2 05 24 1
Always contact your Alfa Laval representative if
you suspect that the depth of the corrosion
damage exceeds 0,2 mm for bowl body and
bowl hood (0,5 for other parts) or if cracks have
been found. Do not continue to use the
separator until it has been inspected and given
clearance for operation by Alfa Laval.
Material Type of corrosive Appearance Measure

environment
Non-stainless steel Water or dampness Rust If damage exceeds 0,5 mm, contact
and cast iron parts Alfa Laval.
Stainless steel Chlorides or acidic Acidic solutions cause general Polish dark-coloured spots and
solutions corrosion. other corrosion marks with a fine
Chloride corrosion begins as small grain emery cloth. This may prevent
dark spots that can be difficult to further damage.
detect, and goes on to local damage If damage exceeds 0,5 mm (0,2 mm
such as pitting, grooves or cracks. for bowl body and bowl hood)
contact Alfa Laval.
Other metal parts “Aggressive” Possible corrosion damage can be If damage exceeds 0,5 mm, contact
environment in the form of pits and/or cracks. Alfa Laval.
ING
WARN
!
Pits and spots forming a line may indicate
cracks beneath the surface.
All forms of cracks are a potential danger and
are totally unacceptable.
Replace any part where corrosion can be
suspected of affecting its strength or function.
91
578150-02
6.4.3 Inspection for cracks i o

Check the separator parts for cracks. It is
particularly important to inspect for cracks in
rotating parts, and especially the pillars
between the sludge ports in the bowl wall.
ING
WARN
!
All forms of cracks are potentially dangerous as
they reduce the strength and functional ability
of components.
Always replace a part if cracks are present.
Cracks can occur from cyclic material stresses

and corrosion. Keeping the separator and its
parts clean and free from deposits will help to
prevent corrosion attacks.
ING
WARN
!
you suspect that the depth of the damage
exceeds 0,2 mm for bowl body and bowl hood
(0,5 for other parts).
Do not continue to use the separator until it
has been inspected and given clearance for
operation by Alfa Laval.
92
578150-02
6.4.4 Inspection for erosion i o

Erosion may occur when particles
suspended in the process liquid slide along
or strike against a surface.
Erosion is characterised by:

Surfaces particularly subjected to erosion are:
1 Burnished traces in the
material.
2 Dents and pits having a
granular and shiny surface.
The sealing edge of the

discharge slide.
Paring disc
Lock ring
Bowl body and holder.
Pillars between the

sludge ports in the
Holder and operating slide.
bowl wall
The sealing edge of the discharge

slide for the seal ring in the bowl
hood
The underside of the distributor in the vicinity of the
G 09 11 8 H1
distribution holes and wings
1 Inspect the bowl and inlet/outlet parts for 2 Replace parts if erosion is suspected.
erosion damages.
ING
NOTE WARN
!
you suspect that the depth of the damage Disintegration hazard
exceeds 0,2 mm for bowl body and bowl hood Erosion damage weakens parts by reducing
(0,5 for other parts). Do not continue to use the the thickness of the material.
separator until it has been inspected and Pay special attention to the pillars between
cleared for operation by Alfa Laval. the sludge ports in the bowl wall.
Replace parts if erosion is suspected of
affecting strength or function.
93 578150-02
6.4.5 Exchange of frame feet

The frame feet have to be changed
occasionally due to rubber deterioration
from age.
When replacing the frame feet, the separator

must be lifted. Follow ‘‘6.8.1 Lifting the
separator” on page 146.
NOTE
Discard the old frame feet, screws and washers.
a Loosen the bolts and prepare to remove

the separator frame
b Lift the separator. See ‘‘Lifting the separator” on

page 146
c Remove the existing frame feet.
d Fit the new feet, screws and washers. Tightening

torque: 160 Nm.
e Place the separator in its original position and

fasten the mounting bolts.
G 08 74 42 1
94
578150-02
6.4.6 Lubrication of bowl parts
a Apply a thin layer of Molykote 1000, or equivalent

lubrication, on all the following contact surfaces. Apply
D321 on the operating slide and the bowl body, guide pin
and bowl hood.
= Molykote 1000
= D321R + Molykote 1000
Bowl hood
(apply D321)
Bowl body
(also apply D321 on guide pin)
Discharge slide
Operating slide
(apply D321)
Screw
Holder
G09 11 7 D1
Operating water ring Nut
95
578150-02
6.4.7 How to lubricate bowl parts

with slide laquer
1
1
NOTE
This instruction is also valid

for the operating slide and the
holder.
a Carefully clean the contact surfaces (1) on bowl body

and bowl hood.
b Apply Molykote D321R on surfaces.
c Air-cure for 15 minutes.
d Use a smooth fibre brush to polish to an even and

homogenous contact film.
e Apply a second layer slide laquer.
f Air-cure for 15 minutes.
g Polish the film to a shiny surface, the film should look

like well-polished leather when properly done.
G 0 8 74 86 1
h Finish the treatment by lubricating the contact surfaces

with Alfa Laval lubricating paste or Molykote 1000
paste. Use a well cleaned brush and rub it into the
surface, do not leave any excessive paste.
96
578150-02
6.4.8 Check for galling on operating

slide and bowl body
1
1
If any friction marks are found on the guide surfaces (1)

of operating slide and bowl body, proceed as follows:
a Clean the surface thoroughly with a degreasing

agent, i.e. white spirit.
This is important!
NOTE
b Using an emery cloth (e.g. No. 320) to smooth the
To avoid the risk of galling,
metal edges. the guiding surface of the
operating slide should be
primed with a slide laquer at
c Finish by polishing the damaged spots with polishing
every inspection service.
paper (e.g No. 600).
d Apply Molykote D321R on surfaces.
e Air-cure for 15 minutes.
f Polish to an even, homogenous surface.
g Apply a second layer.
h Air-cure for 15 minutes.
i Polish to a shiny surface, the surface should look like

well-polished leather when properly done.
j Finish the treatment by lubricating the guiding surfaces

with Alfa Laval lubricating paste or Molykote 1000
paste. Use a well cleaned brush. Rub it into the
surface, do not leave any excessive paste.
G 0 8 74 85 1
97
578150-02
6.5 Assembly
6.5.1 Centrifugal clutch
1 Assembly of the coupling.
a Slip the belt pulley over the coupling hub and place them on a firm and level
foundation.
ING
WARN
!
Disintegration Hazard
If the belt pulley must be renewed, check that the new pulley has
the correct diameter. An incorrect pulley will cause the
separator bowl to run at either an excessive or insufficient
speed. NOTE
d=283 mm 50 Hz
d=235 mm 60 Hz Remove rust from the
belt pulley using a steel
brush.
b Apply a thin film of oil onto the

external and internal surfaces of the
ball bearings o .
Mounting tool
c Press the ball bearings down one at a time into the coupling
hub, preferably using a hydraulic press. Place the spacing
ring between them.
NOTE
Never re-fit used ball bearings.

The ball bearings must not be heated as they
are packed with grease and sealed with plastic
membranes.
d Fit the snap rings.

G 0 86 56 41
98
578150-02
2 Fitting the coupling to the motor.
a Clean the motor shaft and apply a

thin oil film.
NOTE
Make sure that the

b Apply lubricating paste to the tool
key is in place on the
threads (keep lubricated).
motor shaft.
c Remove the brass plug.
d Fasten the sleeve of the tool to the

motor shaft with the same screw that
normally holds the centrifugal clutch
to the motor.
NOTE e Use a spanner to turn the nut on the

tool. This will press the centrifugal
See mounting with optional clutch on to the shaft. Remove the
hydraulic puller tool (if tool.
purchased) on next page.
f Install and tighten the

washer, spring washer and
screw.
Attach a socket with extension rod and handle to the screw.

Place a piece of wood according to the illustration. Push
the handle to start the rotor moving, when the handle hits
the piece of wood, the weight and movement of the rotor
tightens the screw.
Repeat until screw is fastened.
G08 65 4 H1
Piece of wood
99
578150-02
Assembly of friction blocks
3 Fitting the friction blocks.
Guide pin
a Fit the friction blocks onto the

guide pins
NOTE
NOTE
Be sure that the pins on the
back of the blocks project into
the grooves in the clutch hub.
b Place the cover in position and secure it with

the snap ring.
Snap ring
Cover
G 0 86 54 51
100
578150-02
4 Fitting the motor.
a Fit a lifting sling to the motor.

Use a shackle from the
separator lifting tool.
Weight of motor with
coupling: approx. 120 kg.
ING
WARN
b Lower the motor (while !
supported) on to the
separator frame.
It will set on the ledge.
Crush hazard
If not supported, the motor
with coupling may drop
when lifted.
c Fit the screws.

Do not tighten until the
belt has been mounted.
G 0 86 46 A 1
d Connect the electrical cables.
NOTE
If carrying out change of friction blocks only,

continue with steps 5 to 6.
If carrying out a complete machine assembly,
continue with the driving device instructions
on page 104.
101
578150-02
5 Fitting the flat belt.
NOTE
Clean the inside of the frame before

fitting the flat belt, and make sure that
there is no oil on the belt.
a Lift up the belt to the middle (centre) of the

spindle pulley.
NOTE
For correct
position, centre
the belt on the
spindle pulley
Clearance camber.
b Fit the flat belt to the motor belt pulley.
c Tighten the two upper screws.
d Tighten all motor attachment screws.
NOTE
Do not turn the spindle until

the motor is tightened properly
to the frame.
G0 85 8 8D1
102
578150-02
6 Fitting the clutch cover.
b Tighten the screws.
a Fit the clutch cover.
G 0 85 8 14 1
103
578150-02
6.5.2 Driving device
1 Fitting the bottom bearing holder.
a Fit the wing insert, O-rings

and strainer. NOTE
Clean the strainer before fitting.
b Secure the wing insert

with the screw secured d Thread the bottom bearing
with Loctite 243 holder into the frame and fit
c To secure the bottom
the tool into the bottom
bearing holder into the
bearing housing.
frame, apply Loctite
222 on the surfaces
directly above and
below the upper O-
ring.
Socket
Tool
Bottom bearing holder
e Tighten the holder to a torque of 200 Nm.

G 08 66 1 91
104
578150-02
2 Fitting the labyrinth ring.
Frame
a Lubricate and fit the
labyrinth ring o .
G 0 86 63 7 1
105
578150-02
3 Fitting the ball bearing and top bearing seat o to the spindle.
a Heat the top bearing seat in oil to b Fit the ball bearing.
maximum 125 °C.
ING
WARN NOTE
!
Always fit a new bearing.
Burn hazard Pre-lubricate before fitting.
Use protective
gloves when
handling any
heated parts.
c Fit the snap ring.
ING
WARN
!
Risk for eye injury from flying snap ring

Use the correct pliers for assembly of snap ring to
avoid accidental release.
d Heat the top bearing seat Puller

together with the bearing in oil to
maximum 125 °C.
Sleeve
e Wipe off the spindle

and fit the top bearing
seat to the spindle
using the sleeve and
puller.
NOTE
Make sure to fit the bearing

seat correctly or it might get
stuck!
G 0 9 84 83 1
106
578150-02
4 Fitting the top bearing housing.
a Fit the axial springs o to the top

bearing housing.
Axial springs
b Carefully lower the bowl spindle.
Make sure that the springs enter the
recesses on the top bearing seat.
c Lubricate the threads with oil before

assembly.
d Fit the composite springs o and

plugs to the top bearing housing.
Do not tighten the plugs.
Make sure that the springs enter the
recesses in the top bearing seat.
The plugs should be tightened when
the spindle assembly is mounted into
the frame.
G 0 86 66 2 1
~2 mm
107
578150-02
5 Fitting the spindle pulley.
a Turn the spindle assembly

upside down.
b Wipe off the spindle pulley c Fit the spindle pulley

seat on the spindle and nave firmly on the bowl
bore in the spindle pulley with spindle.
a dry cloth.
NOTE
At least 1mm free space between

support and spindle assembly to
protect the bearing.

Mount the cap nut to protect the
threads and support the spindle.
G 0 86 67 31
6 Fitting the self-aligning roller bearing o .
a Heat the bearing in oil to maximum

125 °C.
b Lower the bearing
onto the spindle
NOTE and press down
onto the spindle
Always fit a new bearing.
pulley using the
Pre-lubricate before fitting.
special drift tool.
ING
WARN
!
Burn hazard
Use protective gloves when
handling the heated bearing.
G 0 86 68 41
108
578150-02
7 Fitting the oil pump.
a Fit O-ring o onto lubrication oil orifice. Spread oil c Lubricate all threads before
film on O-ring. assembly.
b Push lubrication oil orifice into oil pump. Be sure to
line up tabs on orifice with slots in pump.
d Fit the oil pump (150 Nm + 10 Nm)

using spanners.
NOTE
Clean the oil pump and make

sure that the bottom hole is not
clogged.
G 08 6 69 61
109
578150-02
8 Fitting the fan
a Turn the spindle assembly up-side down.
NOTE
Ensure that the spindle is seated against

the inner ring of the ball bearing.
b Apply a thin layer of silicone grease to

Silicone grease the O-ring o and fit into the fan.
NOTE
Make sure that the

bearing is pre
lubricated before
fitting the fan.
c Place a spanner (or other suitable tool) on the

spindle pulley key-grip to stop it from moving
and fit the fan. Tighten firmly, by hand, with the
Key-grip pin spanner.
G 0 92 4 03 1
9 Fitting the air deflector.
G 0 85 92 41
110
578150-02
10 Lowering the spindle assembly into the frame.
a Remove the cap nut from the spindle.

Fit the lifting tool to the spindle assembly and lift it.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
Do not rotate the spindle assembly during lifting. The spindle
assembly may otherwise come loose from the lifting tool.
NOTE
Check that the hole at the bottom of the oil pump is clean
before lowering the assembly down.
b Position the flat belt o so

that the spindle assembly can
pass through when lowering.
Check the bottom hole. See note below.
c Carefully lower the spindle assembly and position

the bolt holes over the threaded frame holes.
Make sure that the bottom bearing enters the
bottom bearing holder correctly. Do not use force.
ING
WARN
! Space
Cut hazard
Do not put fingers between the frame
and air deflector while lowering the
assembly.
d Fit and tighten the screws.
NOTE
Check the direction arrows on the belt and

the machine plate for correct position.

Make sure that the belt does not get
G 08 67 9 71
smudged with oil or grease during

e Tighten the plugs firmly.
handling.
111
578150-02
11 Fitting the flat belt.
a Lift up the belt to the middle (centre) of the

spindle pulley.
NOTE
For correct
position, centre
the belt on the
spindle pulley
Clearance camber.
b Fit the flat belt to the motor belt pulley.
c Tighten the two upper screws.
d Tighten all motor attachment screws.
NOTE
Do not turn the spindle until

the motor is tightened properly
to the frame.
G 0 85 8 8B 1
112
578150-02
12 Fitting the neck bearing cover and deflector ring.

a Apply a thin layer of silicone grease to the O-rings and the Deflector ring
seal ring. Fit the O-rings into the deflector ring. Fit the seal
ring into the lower groove of the neck bearing cover. o
b Fit the neck bearing cover.
NOTE Neck bearing cover
The guide pin on the cover should enter

one of the two holes in the bearing
housing.
c Push the deflector ring

down until it stops.
G 08 68 05 1
113
578150-02
13 Fitting the operating water cover.
O-ring
a Lubricate with oil and fit the seal

ring and O-ring o into the
operating water cover.
Renew the O-ring o

b Fit the operating water cover. Fit washers
and tighten the screws.
NOTE
The water pipe in the frame

should enter the hole in the
cover.
G 08 68 14 1
14 Measuring the radial wobble of the bowl spindle.
a Fit a dial indicator in a support

and fasten it in position as
illustrated. Use the flat belt to
turn the spindle. NOTE
Permissible radial wobble: max.

0,04 mm. If the spindle wobble
exceeds this value, contact an
Alfa Laval representative.
Max. 0,04 mm
G 0 85 87 1 1
114
578150-02
15 Fitting the clutch cover.
b Tighten the screws.
G 08 58 1 41
a Fit the clutch cover.
16 Fill oil in the oil sump.
NOTE

a Remove the oil pin, plug and washer. standstill when oil is filled.
b Fit new washer i and refit the drain

plug.
G 0 8 68 7G 1
c Fill with new oil until oil flows out from
the filler hole.
For correct oil volume see ‘‘Technical
Data” on page 156.
NOTE
For grade and quality of oil see

‘‘6.7.6 Lubricating oils” on page
144
d Fit new O-ring i onto the oil pin.
e Refit the plug with new washer i
f Fit the oil pin.
115
578150-02
6.5.3 Bowl
1 Check for impact marks and corrosion in bowl

body nave and on spindle taper i o .
a Remove any impact marks using

ON a scraper and/or a whetstone.
CAUTI
!
Impact marks may cause the separator
to vibrate while running.
b Rust can be removed by using a

fine-grain emery cloth (e.g. No. 320).
c Finish with polishing paper (e.g. No. 600).
d Lubricate to prevent further corrosion.
G 08 74 6 11
2 Fitting new valve plugs on the operating slide i i .
a Remove the valve plugs using b Carefully tap in new valve plugs, using a
a drift. clean, soft-faced hammer.
Drift NOTE
Make sure that the plugs are fitted as

shown in the illustration.
G 0 8 74 84 1
116
578150-02
3 Fitting the operating slide.
a Apply a thin layer of silicone grease to the

rectangular rings and O-ring. Fit one rectangular ring b Fit the operating slide.
onto the operating slide. Fit the other rectangular ring
and O-ring onto the bowl body. i o .
NOTE
The guide pin in the bowl

body should enter the hole in
the operating slide (this hole
is marked with a drill mark).
Nozzle secured with Loctite 222
Alignment hole
Operating slide
Bowl body
Guide pin
G 0 86 12 41
4 Fitting the operating slide holder.
a Fit the holder over the

b Apply a thin layer of molykote grease to
operating slide.
new screws. Fit the screws with washers
i o and tighten to a torque of 30
Nm + 2 Nm.
G 0 8 61 34 1
NOTE
It is very important not to refit used screws

and washers. Always fit new ones included
in the Inspection kit!
117
578150-02
5 Fitting the operating water ring.
NOTE
a Fit the ring and screws i o .
It is very important not to refit used screws.
Always fit new ones included in the
Inspection kit!
b Apply a thin layer of silicone grease to the

O-ring. Fit the O-ring. i o
c Fit the operating water ring.
NOTE
The drilled assembly mark on the water ring

should face the corresponding mark on the
bowl body.
d Grease, fit and tighten the screws to a torque of
G 08 61 44 1
30 Nm + 2 Nm.
118
578150-02
6 Lifting the bowl body onto the spindle taper.
a Put a drop of oil on the spindle taper.
b Wipe off the spindle taper and

nave bore with a dry cloth.
c Turn the bowl body over.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
Support the bowl body when turning to
prevent it from rolling.
d Fit the lifting

tool and lift the
bowl body.
e Carefully lower the bowl body

onto the spindle taper.
f Remove the lifting tool.

G 0 8 61 73 1
119
578150-02
7 Fitting and tightening the cap nut.
a To prevent the bowl body from rotating

when fitting the cap nut; Fit one of the
clamps (see page 62) to the bowl body b Apply a thin layer of
and one of the screws for the frame molykote grease to the cap
hood in the frame. Fasten a sling nut. Fit and tighten the cap
between the clamp and the screw nut to a torque of 50 Nm.
around the bowl body.
NOTE
Left-hand thread!
Sling Screw
Clamp
G 0 86 18 7 1
Cap nut
120
578150-02
8 Fitting the discharge slide.

rectangular ring and fit the rectangular
ring i o .
O-ring
b Apply a thin layer of silicone grease to

the O-ring and fit the O-ring i o .
ING
WARN
!
c Fit the lifting tool and
lower the discharge
slide into the bowl. Crush hazard
The ring on the lifting tool must be
pushed home against the discharge
slide, otherwise it may come loose
from the tool.
d Remove the lifting tool.
e Fit the nut.
f Fit the spanner for nut and

tighten the nut with a torque
wrench to a torque of min.
100 Nm.
G 08 61 9 71
g Remove the spanner for nut.
121
578150-02
9 Fitting the distributor and distributor support.
a Fit the O-ring to the distributor i .
NOTE

All parts have drill marks to b Fit the O-ring to the distributor support
be mounted in line with i .
each other.
c Fit the distributor support and tighten

with the screw.
G 08 62 6 R1
d Fit the distributor.
122
578150-02
10 Assembly of the disc stack.

a Fit the discs one by one onto the distributor.
The distributor has a guide rib for the correct
positioning of the bowl discs. Always end with ING
the disc without caulks. WARN
!
The number of discs may have to be

increased to adjust the disc stack
pressure. Always check before operating
the separator. See ‘‘Checking the disc stack
pressure” on page 129.
ON
CAUTI
!
Cut hazard
Sharp edges on the bowl discs may cause
cuts.
Recess on bowl disc
Guide rib on distributor

G 0 86 20 71
123
578150-02
11 Fitting the disc stack assembly to the bowl body.
a Fit the lifting tool into the

distributor.
b Lower the disc stack into the bowl.
Guide pin on bowl

body
NOTE
The guide pin on the bowl body should

face the drill mark on the distributor.
The guide ribs inside the distributor

support then enter the recesses on the
bowl body nave.
Guide rib on
distributor
Guide ribs inside the distributor

support.
Recesses on the bowl body nave.

G 0 8 62 1C 1
124
578150-02
12 Fitting the inlet and outlet pipe.

a Apply a thin layer of
silicone grease to the
O-rings and fit the
O-rings i o to
the pipe.
b Carefully lower the

inlet and outlet pipe
assembly into the top
of the distributor.
G 0 86 2 2J 1
125
578150-02
13 Fitting the level ring, top disc, and gravity disc.
a Apply a thin layer of silicone

grease the the O-ring and fit
the O-ring onto the level ring. o and
b Fit the O-rings i
Carefully press the level ring
gravity disc to the top disc.
into place.
Gravity disc
Drill mark
Top disc
c Lower the top disc.

Make sure that the drill mark
corresponds to the guide lug
inside the bowl body.
Level ring
Guide lug
G 0 86 23 C1
126
578150-02
14 Fitting the bowl hood.

O-ring and fit the O-ring i o
b Fit the seal ring i o Press

the ring down evenly until bulges
appear.
c Carefully tap down the bulges crosswise with a soft

rubber mallet, until the ring is completely fitted.
d Fit the compressing tool and attach

lifting eyes. Lower the bowl hood so that
its recess fits into the guide pin in the
bowl body.
Recess on bowl hood
Guide pin on bowl body

G 08 62 49 1
e Remove the compressing tool.
127
578150-02
15 Fitting the lock ring.
a Place the lock ring on the bowl hood

with its guide pin close to the
corresponding hole in the bowl
body.
NOTE
Make sure that the groove

in the bowl body which
retains the lock ring is
clean.
b Fit the complete compressing

tool and compress the disc stack
by alternately turning the screws
NOTE
a maximum of 40 Nm at a time
until the lock ring fits into the
bowl body. The lock ring is Check that the lock ring is
correctly fitted when the lock ring correctly positioned all way
ends are facing each other. around!

For correct disc stack pressure
see page 129
c Release the
pressure on the
compressing
NOTE tool and
remove it.

Never remove
any material Lock ring
from the lock
ring. A
hazardous Bowl hood
situation could
result.
Bowl body
8 62 57 1
Before compressing Lock ring in position
128
578150-02
16 Checking the disc stack pressure i i
a Remove bowl hood, top disc and inlet and outlet pipe.
b Add one disc to the disc stack.
c Refit the disc without caulks, the top disc

and bowl hood.
d Fit the lock ring and fully compress
the disc stack with the compressing
tool.
NOTE

Do not use more power than 50

Nm/screw at a time, alternately.
NOTE

Always refit the disc
without caulks on top
of the disc stack!
e If the lock ring enters the groove,

repeat a-d until the lock ring does
not enter the groove.
g Assemble the bowl with

inlet and outlet pipe.
f Dismantle the bowl and remove
one disc to get the correct disc
stack pressure.
G 0 87 49 71
129
578150-02
6.5.4 Frame hood
1 Fitting the frame hood i o .
NOTE
Make sure that the frame

a Apply a thin layer of silicone grease to
hood is mounted in its
the O-ring and fit the O-ring onto the
correct position
frame hood i o
according to the piping
b Lower the frame hood. arrangement.
c Fit and tighten the

screws and washers.
G 0 86 3 7J 1
NOTE
Make sure that the support ring (normally not removed

and mounted on the frame hood) is fitted with its lug into
corresponding groove on the pipe.
130
578150-02
2 Control measurement of paring disc height position o .
a Remove the guide screw A.
b Measure the distance D.

Should be
22,1 + 0,5 mm. Assemble
the correct number of
height adjusting rings (B).
c Refit the guide screw A.
NOTE
Do not mount support ring

upside down!
Support ring A. Guide screw B. Height adjusting rings
G 09 11 5 P 1
131
578150-02
3 Fitting the connecting housing.
a Fit the O-ring i to the connecting

housing and fit the housing over the inlet/
outlet pipe.
NOTE
Make sure that the cylindrical

pin, on top of the frame hood,
enters the guide hole of the
connecting housing.
b Fit the nut.
c Fit the O-ring i ,

snap ring and the
inlet bend.
d Fit the safety device.
NOTE
Fit connections.
G 0 8 63 5B 1
132
578150-02
6.5.5 Unbalance sensor (optional)
1 Fitting the unbalance sensor holder.
a Remove the cover.
b Remove plug, if any.
Sensor holder.
Sensor arm Frame
Screw M8 c Fit the O-ring on the holder.

Fit the screw into the holder and
M10 mount the holder into the
separator frame.
Sensor
holder
O-ring NOTE
If removing the sensor holder;

use a M10 screw as a puller.
NOTE
See next page for fitting and

correct adjustment of the sensor.
G 0 8 73 48 1
133
578150-02
2 Adjusting the unbalance sensor
a Fit the sensor into the holder. Do not forget the nut.
b Adjust the sensor so that a value of 1,5 appears on the display.
Nut
Sensor
Nut.
+ = brown or red
J = black or white G 24 V DC
A
0V = blue
c When correct distance is achieved tighten the nut Adjustment value for the sensor is; 12 mA ± 1mA.
For more details see ‘‘8.3 Connection List” on page 157
against the holder. and ‘‘ 752 Unbalance sensor (option).” on page 165.
Fit the cover (see previous page).
G 0 87 3 4A 1
6.5.6 Speed sensor (optional)
1 Adjusting the speed sensor

a Adjust the speed sensor according to the illustration.
b Fit the sensor to the frame, see ‘‘4.4 Sensors (optional)” on

G 0 87 34 D1
page 33.
81 + 0,1 mm
134
578150-02
6.6 Actions After

Assembly
6.6.1 Control of machine plates and

safety labels o
1 Check that the following signs are attached.
Machine plate
Space for label indicating representative.
Safety label.
Lifting instructions
Space for
additional label as
specified.
S00 50 1 F1
Oil type plate
135
578150-02
2 Check legibility. The following texts should be read on the labels.
Separator
Manufacturing serial No. / Year
Product No.
Inlet and outlet device
Bowl
Machine bottom part
Bowl speed synchronous
Direction of rotation (bowl)

Speed motor shaft
El. current frequency
Recommended motor power
Max. density of feed
Max. density of sediment
Max. density of operating liquid
Process temperature min./max.
WARNING
! WA R N I N G
Read the instruction manuals before installation, operation and maintenance.
Consider inspection intervals.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX XXX
XXXXXXX XXXXX XX
XXXXX XXXXXXX
XXX XXX X XXX XX XXXX
XXXX XX X X XXXXX XXX
X XXX XXXX XXX XX XX X
XX X XXXXX XX X XXXX
XXX XXX X XXXXXX
Failure to strictly follow instructions can lead to fatal injury.
XXXXXXXXX. X XXX X XXX. XXX XXX XXX X XXXXX
XXX X XXXX .
XXXXX XXX XXXX XXX
XXXXX XXXX X XXXX XXX XXXXX X XXXXX XX X
XX. XXX XX XXX XXX XX X.
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator and keep bowl filled with liquid
XXXXXXX/XX,X XX
during rundown.
Out of balance vibration will become worse if bowl is not full.
Separator must stop rotating before any dismantling work is started.
Read instruction manual before lifting.
136
578150-02
6.7 Oil Change

standstill when oil is filled or the oil level is
checked.
6.7.1 Lubricating oil

Do not mix different oil brands.
Always use clean vessels when handling lubricating oil.
Great attention must be paid not to contaminate the lubricating oil. Of
particular importance is to avoid mixing of different types of oil. Even a
few drops of motor oil mixed into a synthetic oil may result in severe
foaming.
Any presence of black deposits in a mineral type oil is an indication that
the oil base has deteriorated seriously or that some of the oil additives
have precipitated. Always investigate why black deposits occur.
If changing from one oil brand to another it is recommended to do this
in connection with an overhaul of the separator. Clean the gear housing
and the spindle parts thoroughly and remove all deposits before filling
with new oil.
NOTE
Always clean and dry parts (also tools) before lubricants are applied.
ON
CAUTI
!
Check the oil level before start and top up if necessary.

Oil volume = see “Technical Data”.
It is of utmost importance to use the lubricants recommended in our
documentation.
This does not exclude, however, the use of other brands, provided they
have equivalently high quality properties as the brands recommended.
The use of oil brands and other lubricants other than recommended, is
done at the full responsibility of the user or oil supplier.
Applying, handling and storing of lubricants

Always be sure to follow lubricants manufacturer's instructions.
137
578150-02
6.7.2 Check oil level

1 Remove the oil pin and make sure that the oil
level is above the lower end of the pin.
6.7.3 Oil change procedure

1 Remove the oil pin, plug and washer.
2 Place a vessel under the drain plug.
3 Remove the drain plug.
ON Oil fill
CAUTI
!
Plug and washer
Burn hazard
The lubricating oil and various machine
surfaces can be sufficiently hot to cause burns.
Oil drain plug

4 Collect the oil in a vessel.
5 Fit and tighten the drain plug. Max. Min.
6 Fill with new oil until oil flows out of oil filler
hole.
G 0 8 68 7K 1
NOTE
See ‘‘6.7.6 Lubricating oils” on page 144. NOTE
For Inspection service procedures; See

“Fill oil in the oil sump.” on page 115.
7 Fit the washer and the oil filling plug. Tighten
the plug.
8 Fit the oil pin.
138
578150-02
6.7.4 Lubrication chart

Alfa Laval ref. 567329-01, rev. 2
Bowl (3), Rubber seal rings (4)
Electric motor (6)

Bowl spindle taper (2)
Plugs (7)
Bowl spindle and bearings (1)

Friction clutch bearings (5)
G 0 87 54 71
Lubricating points Type of lubricant Interval
1 The oil bath. Bowl spindle bearings See ‘‘6.7.1 Lubricating oil” on page Oil change:
are lubricated by oil mist from the oil 137 Volume: ‘‘8.2 Technical Data” on 1. Continous operation: 4000 hours
bath. page 156 2. Seasonal operation:
Ambient temperature 0 to +55°C before every operating period
3. Short periods operation:
12 months even if total numbers of
operating hours is less than stated
above
2 Bowl spindle taper. Lubricating oil, only a few drops for At assembly
rust protection.
3 Bowl: Sliding contact surfaces, thread Pastes specified in ‘‘6.7.5 Lubricants” At assembly.
of lock nut and cap nut. on page 140
4 Rubber seal rings. Grease as specified in ‘‘6.7.5 At assembly
Lubricants” on page 140
5 Friction clutch bearings. The bearings are pre-lubricated with No need for extra lubrication.
grease.
6 Electric motor. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
7 Plug thread Lubricating oil At assembly
(neck bearing assembly)
NOTE ON
CAUTI
!
Check and pre lubricate new spindle bearings
and those that have been out of service for one
month or longer. Check the oil level before start and
If not otherwise specified, follow the suppliers top up if necessary.
instructions about applying, handling and Do not overfill.
storing of lubricants.
139
578150-02
6.7.5 Lubricants
Alfa Laval ref. 553217-01 rev. 10
NOTE
The data in below tables is based on supplier

information in regards to lubrication properties.
Trade names and designations might vary from
country to country, contact your local supplier for
more information.

Brands with Alfa Laval article numbers are
approved and recommended for use.
Pastes for non-food applications:
Manufacturer Designation Alfa Laval No
Fuchs Lubritech Gleitmo 805K

Gleitmo 705
Dow Corning Molykote 1000 (Paste) 537086-02(1000 g)

Molykote 1000 (Paste) 537086-03 (100 g)
Molykote G-rapid plus (Paste) 537086-04 (50 g)
Rocol Dry Moly Paste

MT-LM
Klüber Wolfracoat C (Paste)
Bonded coatings:
Fuchs Lubritech Gleitmo 900 (Varnish or spray)
Dow Corning Molykote D321R (Spray) 535586-01(400 ml)

Molykote D321R (Varnish) 535586-02 (60 ml)
Molykote D321R (Paste) 535586-80 (25 ml)
140
578150-02
Pastes for hygienic applications

(NSF registered H1 is prefered):
Manufacturer Designation Hygienic Comment Alfa Laval No
Fuchs Lubritech Gleitmo 805 DVGW (KTW) approval for

drinking water
(TZW prüfzeugnis)
Geralyn 2 NSF Registered H1 561764-01 (50 g)

(3 sep 2004)
Bremer & Leguil, Rivolta F.L.A NSF Registered H1

Fuchs Lubritech (15 Feb 2003)
German §5 Absatz 1 LMBG
approved
Dow Corning Molykote TP 42

Molykote D
Molykote P1900 NSF Registered H1

(7 Jan 2004)
Klüber Klüberpaste 46 MR 401 White; contains no lead,

cadmium, nickel, sulphur nor
halogens.
Klüberpaste UH1 96-402 NSF Registered H1

(25 Feb 2004)
Rocol Foodlube Multi Paste NSF Registered H1

(13 Apr 2001)
141
578150-02
Silicone grease for rubber rings:
Manufacturer Designation Follows according. to Alfa Laval No

Manufacturer
Dow Corning Molykote 111 Conform to the FDA regulations (21 539474-02 (100 g)
(Compound) CFR 178.3570) for occasional food
Molykote 111 contact. Certified: National Water 539474-03 (25 g)
(Compound) Council UK and WRC, UK.
Certified: food industry as per
Chemical Testing Laboratory Dr.
Böhm, Munich.
Molykote Foodslip SR Former USDA H1 approved. 569415-01 (50 g)
grease
Fuchs Lubritech Chemplex 750 DVGW approved according to the

German KTW-recomendations for
drinking water.
Bremer & Leguil Rivolta NSF Registered H1
F.L.G MD2 (15 Feb 2003)
Klüber Unisilkon L 250 L Complies with German
Environmental Agency on hygiene
requirements for tap water.
Certified by DVGW-KTW, WRC,
AS4020, ACS.
Paraliq GTE 703 NSF Registered H1 (25 Feb 2004)
Complies with LMBG and the
European standard EN 1672,
part2.
Bel-Ray No-Tox Silicone valve NSF Registered H1
seal (19 June 2002)
MMCC ALCO 220 NSF Registered H1
(25 March 2002)
Rocol Foodlube Hi-Temp NSF Registered H1
(18 April 2001)
142
578150-02
Greases for ball and roller bearings:
NOTE
Always follow the specific recommendation for

lubrication as advised by the manufacturer.
BP Energrease MP-MG2
Energrease LS2
Energrease LS-EP2
Castrol APS 2
Spheerol EPL 2
Chevron Texaco Chevron Dura-Lith Grease EP2

Texaco Multifak AFB 2
Dow Corning Molykote G-0101

Molykote Multilub
ExxonMobil Beacon EP2

Unirex N2
Mobilith SHC 460
Mobilux EP2
Fuchs Lubritech Lagermeister EP2
Q8/Kuwait Petroleum Rembrandt EP2
Shell Alvania EP 2
Albida EP2
SKF LGEP 2
LGMT 2
Total Multis EP2
143
578150-02
6.7.6 Lubricating oils

Alfa Laval ref. 567330-01, rev. 2
Paraffinic mineral lubricating oil, category (ISO-L-) HM 68.

Viscosity grade (ISO-3448/3104) VG 68.
The oil shall follow the requirements in one of the standards below
.
Standard Designation
DIN 51524 part 2 or 3* DIN 51524-HLP or HVLP* 68

(German standard)
ISO 11158 (International standard) ISO-L-HM or HV* 68

Viscosity index (ISO 2909) VI>95

The following is the list of recommended oil brands. Trade names and
designations might vary from country to country. Please contact your local oil
supplier for more information.
Manufacturer Designation
Alfa Laval 567334-01 1 litre

567334-02 4 litres
BP Bartran 68
Bartran HV 68*
Castrol Hyspin AWS 68

Hyspin AWH (-M) 68*
Chevrontexaco / FAMM Hydraulic oil AW 68

Rando HD 68 (H2)
Rando HDZ 68 (H2)*
Rykon Premium 68 (H2)*
ExxonMobil Nuto H 68

Univis N 68*
Mobil DTE 16 (ISO VG 68)
Mobil DTE 16M (ISO VG 68)*
Q8/Kuwait Petroleum Haydn 68
Shell Tellus Oil 68

Tellus Oil S 68
Tellus Oil T 68*
Statoil HydraWay HMA 68

Hydra Way HVXA 68*
Total Azolla ZS 68

Elf Lubmarine Visga 68*
* These oils should be used at cold start, i.e.

when the ambient temperature is below 20 oC.
144
578150-02
Paraffinic mineral lubricating oils for food applications (USDA/NSF H1)
Manufacturer Designation
Bel-Ray No-Tox HD hyd oil 68

No-Tox AW Lube 20
ChevronTexaco Lubricating Oil FM 68

Cygnus Oil 68
ExxonMobil Mobil DTE FM 68
Fiske Brothers Lubriplate FMO AW 350
Total Keystone Nevastane AW 68
The list of recommended oil brands is not complete. Other oil brands may
be used as long as the follow the above standards and have equivalent
high quality as the brands recommended. The use of oil brands and other
lubricants other than recommended, is done at the full responsibility of
the user or oil supplier.
145
578150-02
6.8 Lifting instructions
6.8.1 Lifting the separator
Weight to lift 320 kg
Sling length: Min. 750 mm
Fasten all four bolts. Tightening

torque 35 - 45 Nm
G 08 6 84 51
1 Remove the inlet and outlet device, the
frame hood and the bowl according to the
instructions in ‘‘6.3 Dismantling” on page 56.
NOTE
Never lift or transport the separator with the

bowl still inside.
2 Disconnect all connections.

3 Fit the lifting tool (not included in set of tools).
All four bolts on the lifting tool must be
fastened to the frame.
4 Use two lifting slings to lift the separator.

Total length of each loop: minimum 1,5
metres.
146
578150-02
5 Unscrew the foundation bolts.

6 When lifting and moving the separator, follow
normal safety precautions for lifting large
heavy objects.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazards
A falling separator can cause accidents
resulting in serious injury and damage.
Never lift the separator by any other method
other than described in this manual.
NOTE
When lifting parts without weight

specifications, always use lifting straps with
the capacity of at least 500 kg.
6.8.2 Lifting the bowl
When lifting and moving an assembled

bowl, always follow these instructions.
Weight to lift 50 kg
1 Fit the lifting tool with lifting eyes to the bowl
assembly.
2 Check that the lock ring is mounted correctly
before lifting the complete bowl.
3 Lift the bowl using a sling with the proper
rating.
Tightening torque 35 - 45 Nm
NOTE
Never try to lift the bowl while it is still in the

frame. The bowl body is fastened to the frame
Lock ring
with the cap nut.
Make sure that

lock ring is fitted.
G 0 86 84 7 1
147
578150-02
148
578150-02
SEPARATOR MANUAL 7 FAULT FINDING
7 Fault Finding
These fault finding instructions are for the
separator only.
If a fault occurs, study the System

Documentation fault finding section (if
applicable).
7.1 Mechanical Functions
7.1.1 Separator vibration
ING
WARN
!
Disintegration hazards NOTE

If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator
and keep bowl filled with liquid during rundown. Some vibration is normal during the starting
The cause of the vibration must be identified and stopping sequences when the separator
and corrected before the separator is restarted. passes through its critical speed.
Cause Corrective action

Bowl out of balance due to: Dismantle the separator and check the assembly
- poor cleaning and cleaning.
- incorrect assembly
- incorrect disc stack compression
- bowl assembled with parts from other separators
Uneven sludge deposits in the sludge space. Dismantle and clean the separator bowl.
Height position of paring disc is incorrect. Stop the separator, measure, and if necessary,
adjust the height.
Bowl spindle bent. Renew the bowl spindle.
Bearing(s) damaged or worn. Renew all bearings.
The frame feet are worn out. Renew the frame feet.
Spindle top bearing spring broken. Renew all springs.
578150-02 149
7.1.2 Smell
Normal occurrence during start while the friction None.
blocks are slipping. If smell continues when separator is at full speed,
stop the separator and replace friction blocks.
Oil level in oil sump too low. Check oil level and add oil if necessary.
7.1.3 Noise
Height position of paring disc is incorrect. Stop the separator, measure and adjust the height.
7.1.4 Speed too low

Friction blocks are oily or worn. Clean or renew friction blocks.
Bowl is not closed or leaking. Dismantle the bowl and check.
Motor failure. Repair the motor.
Bearing(s) damaged. Renew all bearings.
Incorrect transmission parts (60 Hz belt pulley for
50 Hz power supply).
ING
WARN
!

supply frequency.
150
578150-02
7 FAULT FINDING SEPARATOR MANUAL
7.1.5 Speed too high

ING
WARN
!

supply frequency.
7.1.6 Starting power too high

ING
WARN
!

supply frequency.
Wrong direction of rotation. Change electrical phase connections to the motor.
7.1.7 Starting power too low

ING
WARN
!

supply frequency.
Friction blocks are oily or worn. Clean or renew friction blocks.

151
578150-02
7.1.8 Starting time too long

Friction blocks are oily or worn. Renew or clean friction blocks.
Height position of paring disc is incorrect. Stop, check and adjust the height.
152
578150-02
7 FAULT FINDING SEPARATOR MANUAL
7.2 Separating Functions
7.2.1 Bowl opens accidentally

during operation
Strainer in the operating water supply is clogged. Clean the strainer.
No water in the operating water system. Check the operating water system and make sure
the valve(s) are open.
Hoses between the supply valves and separator are Fit hoses correctly.
incorrectly fitted.
Nozzle in operating slide clogged. Clean the nozzle.
Rectangular ring in discharge slide is defective. Renew the rectangular ring.
Valve plugs are defective. Renew all plugs.
Supply valve for opening water is leaking. Rectify the leak.
Operating water ring leaking Renew operating water ring
7.2.2 Bowl fails to open for sludge

discharge

Strainer in the operating water supply is clogged. Clean the strainer.
Water flow too low. Check the water flow
Hoses between the supply valves and separator are Fit hoses correctly.
incorrectly fitted.
Nozzle in operating slide missing. Fit the nozzle.
Rectangular ring in the operating slide or bowl body Renew the rectangular ring.
is defective.
7.2.3 Unsatisfactory separation

result
Incorrect separation temperature. Adjust separation temperature.
Throughput too high. Adjust throughput.
Disc stack is clogged. Clean disc stack.
Sludge space in bowl is filled. Clean and reduce the time between sludge
discharges.
Bowl speed too low. Examine the motor and power transmission including
the belt transmission (clutch).
Bowl rotates in wrong direction Check the electrical connections to the motor.
Gravity disc hole to small Use a gravity disc with larger hole
153
578150-02
7.2.4 Bowl fails to close

Nozzle in operating slide clogged. Clean nozzle.
Hoses reversed. Adjust.
Rectangular ring in discharge slide is defective Renew rectangular ring.
Valve plugs in operating slide missing or defective. Renew valve plugs.
No water. Turn on water supply.
Operating water ring leaking Renew operating water ring
154
578150-02
SEPARATOR MANUAL 8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE
8 Technical Reference
8.1 Product description
Alfa Laval ref. 576624, rev. 0
NOTE
The separator is a component operating in an

integrated system including a monitoring
system.
If the technical data in the system description
does not agree with the technical data in this
instruction manual, the data in the system
description is the valid one.
Product number. 881202-07-01

Separator type. P 635
Application. Cleaning of fuel and lube oil.
Technical design:
Intended for marine and land installations.
Purifier/Clarifier execution
Total discharge.
No brake
Centrilock® lock ring
Designed in accordance with standards:
98/37EC Machinery directive
89/336EEC EMC and amendments related to said directive.
EN 12547 Centrifuges - Common safety requirements.
Operational limits:
Feed temperature: 0°C to +100°C.

Ambient temperature: +5°C to +55°C.
Discharge intervals: 2 minutes to 4 hours.
Maximum allowed density of operating liquid: 1000 kg/m3
Viscosity max. 600 cSt at 50°C.
Max. light phase density, mineral oil/fresh water separation: 991 kg/m3 at 15°C.
Max. allowed speed: 10700 r/minute.
Not to be used for liquids with flashpoint below 60°C.
Risk for corrosion and erosion has to be investigated in each case by the application centre.
Remote restart allowed under certain conditions, see Interface description.
578150-02 155
8.2 Technical Data

NOTE
The separator is a component operating in an integrated system which includes

a monitoring system.
When the separator is part of a system, the technical data for the system may
differ from the technical data in this instruction manual. If this is the case, the
system data is valid.
Subject Value Unit

General technical data:
Motor power: 50 Hz / 60 Hz 7,5 / 8,6 kW
Gear ratio 292 / 82 50Hz
Gear ratio 243 / 82 60Hz
Alarm levels for vibration monitor,
connection 752, 1st/2nd 0,2 / 0,3 mm
Bowl max. inner diameter 237 mm
Discharge interval, min./max. 2 / 240 minutes
Max. density of operating liquid 1000 kg/m³
Max. density of feed/sediment 1100 / 2752 kg/m³
Min./Max. ratio of density: 0,794 / 0,977
Feed temperature, min./max. 0 / 100 °C
Max. running time without flow,
- empty bowl 60 minutes
- filled bowl 60 minutes
Bowl body material AL 111 2377-02
Other metallic materials other than
stainless steel in bowl: Yes
Operating data:
Bowl speed, synchronous 10683/10668 r/min 50Hz/60Hz
Motor speed synchronous 3000 / 3600 r/min 50Hz/60Hz
Max. allowed speed: 10700 r/min
Power consumption at start-up, max. 10 kW
Power consumption idling/max.
capacity: 2,7 / 6,6 kW
Starting time, min./max. 1,5 / 2 minutes
Stopping time without brake, average 22 minutes
Sound power/Uncertainty 9,2 Bel(A)
Sound pressure/Uncertainty 78 dB(A)
Max. vibration level 9 mm/s
Volume and capacity data:
Bowl liquid volume 2,5 litres
Fixed discharge volume 2,5 litres
Lubricating oil volume: 2,2 litres
Sludge volume, efficient/total 0,32 / 1,03 litres
Weight information:
Motor weight 42 kg
Bowl 49 kg
Separator (without motor) 330 kg
156
578150-02
8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE SEPARATOR MANUAL
8.3 Connection List

No. Description Requirements/limits
206 Inlet for conditioning and displacement liquid

x Flow set value 13,5 - 16,5 litres/minute
x Quality requirements See ‘‘Demand Specification Water” on page 169
222 Outlet for solid phase

x Discharge volume See ‘‘Technical Data” on page 156.
x Interface The outlet from the sludge cover must always be
arranged to prevent the cover from being filled up
with sludge.
(221) Outlet for heavy phase
(377) Outlet for operating liquid
(463) Drain of frame top part, upper
375 Inlet for discharge and make-up liquid See ‘‘Operating water interface” on page 178.
x Discharge water flow, set value 9,9 - 12,1 litres/minute
x Make-up water flow, set value 2,52 - 3,08 litres/minute
x Quality requirements See ‘‘Demand Specification Water” on page 169.
x Temperature < 80 oC
462 Drain of frame top part, lower Should be possible to drain liquids by gravity.
701 Motor for separator

Allowed frequency variation: ± 5%
(momentarily during 5 seconds) ± 10%
740 Speed sensor for bowl spindle See page 159.
x Type Inductive promixly switch
x Supply voltage, nominal 8V
x With sensor activated (near metal) Less or equal to 1 mA.
x With sensor not activated (far from metal) More or equal to 3 mA.
x Number of pulses per revolution 1
752 Position transducer for bearing holder (unbalance sensor) See page 159.
x Type Inductive analogue sensor
x Supply voltage 15 to 30 V DC
x Operation range (mild steel) 2 to 5 mm
x Output current analogue 4 to 20 mA
x Load resistance, RL Max. 1 k:
157
578150-02
760 Cover interlocking switch See page 159

x Type Mechanical limit switch
x Switch rating, resistive load max. 3 A (at 48 V DC)
1 A (at 220 V AC)
158
578150-02
8.4 Interface Description

8.4.1 Scope
This document gives information, requirements,
and recommendations about operational
procedures and signal processing for safe and
reliable operation of the separator. It is intended
to be used for designing auxiliary equipment and
control systems for the separator.
8.4.2 References
This Interface Description is one complementary
document to the separator. Other such documents
that contain necessary information and are referred
to here are:
x Interconnection diagram
x Connection List
x Technical Data
x Operating water interface
Standards referred to are:

x EN 418 Safety of machinery - Emergency stop
equipment, functional aspects - Principles of
design
x EN 1037 Safety of machinery - Prevention of
unexpected start-up
x EN 954-1 Safety of machinery - Safety related
parts of control systems - Part 1 General principles
for design.
159
578150-02
8.4.3 Definitions
For the purpose of this document, the following
definitions apply:
x Synchronous speed: The speed the machine
will attain when it is driven by a three phase
squirrel-cage induction motor and there is no
slip in the motor and the drive system.
x Full speed: The synchronous speed minus
normal slip.
8.4.4 Goal
To eliminate situations that can cause harm,
i.e. injury, damage to health or property and
unsatisfactory process result are e.g.:
Situation Effect
Unbalance caused by uneven sediment Too high stress on bowl and bearing
accumulation in the bowl. system which might cause harm.
Too high bowl speed. Too high stress on bowl which might
cause harm.
Access to moving parts. Can cause injury to person who

accidentally touches these parts.
Insufficient cleaning of separator. Unsatisfactory product quality.
Bowl leakage. Product losses.
Information and instructions given in this

document aim at preventing these situations.
Control and supervision can be more or less
comprehensive depending on the type of control
equipment used. When a simple control unit is
used it would be impossible or too expensive to
include many of the functions specified here
while these functions could be included at
nearly no extra cost when a more advanced
control unit is used. For these reasons functions
that are indispensable or needed for safety
reasons to protect the machine and/or
personnel are denoted with shall while other
functions are denoted with should.
160
578150-02
8.4.5 Description of separator

modes
For control purposes the operation of the
separator should be divided into different
modes.
The normally used modes are described below
but other modes might exist.
It is assumed that:
x The separator is correctly assembled.
x All connections are made according to
Connection List, Interconnection Diagram
and Interface Description.
x The separator control system is activated.
If above conditions are not fulfilled the
separator will be in SERVICE mode.
Stand still means:

x The power to the separator motor is off
x The bowl is not rotating.
Starting means:
x The power to the separator motor is on.
x The bowl is rotating and accelerating
Running means:
x The power to the separator motor is on.
x The bowl is rotating at full speed.
x RUNNING is a collective denomination for a
number of sub modes which e.g. can be:
– STAND BY: Separator is in a waiting mode
and not producing.
– PRODUCTION: Separator is fed with
product and producing.
161
578150-02
Stopping means:
x The power to the separator motor is off.
x The bowl is rotating and decelerating.
x STOPPING is a collective denomination for a
number of sub modes which e.g. can be:
– NORMAL STOP: A manually or
automatically initiated stop.
– SAFETY STOP: An automatically initiated
stop at too high vibrations.
– EMERGENCY STOP: A manually initiated
stop at emergency situations. This stop
will be in effect until it is manually reset.
8.4.6 Remote start

This machine may be started from a remote
location under the following conditions;
x First start after any kind of service or manual
cleaning must be supervised locally in order
to ensure that no mistakes have been made
during assembly.
x The unbalance sensor is mandatory for
remote start.
x The speed sensor is mandatory for remote
start.
x The installation must include equipment to
prevent unintentional start-up from remote
location when the machine is disassembled.
x The installation must include equipment to
prevent unintentional start of process flow
from remote location when the machine is
not properly connected to the piping.
162
578150-02
8.4.7 Handling of connection

interfaces
Electrical connections
701 Separator motor.
The separator is equipped with a 3-phase DOL
- (direct on line) started motor. The separator
can also be started by a Y/D starter, but then
the time in Y-position must be maximised to 5
seconds.
There shall be an emergency stop circuit
designed according to EN 418 and a power
isolation device according to EN 1037.
There shall be a start button close to the
separator that shall be used for first start after
assembly of the separator.
There should be a counter to count number of
running hours.
There should be a current transformer to give
an analogue signal to the control unit about the
motor current.
740 Speed sensor (Option)

A proximity sensor of inductive type according
to DIN 19234 (Namur) standard is giving a
number of pulses per revolution of the bowl (see
Connection List).
Signal processing in STARTING:
x The separator should be stopped
automatically according to NORMAL STOP
procedure and an alarm should be given
when the accumulated time for acceleration
is longer than the maximum time specified in
Technical Data. An abnormal start time
indicates some malfunction of the separator
equipment and should be investigated.
163
578150-02
x When the "Maximum allowed speed" is exceeded an

alarm shall be given initiating a NORMAL STOP.
x The speed monitoring system shall be checked
continuously (e.g by checking that pulses are
coming). In case of failure indication the separator
shall be stopped automatically by NORMAL STOP
with a timer controlled stop sequence and an alarm
for speed monitoring system failure shall be given.
x The acceleration should be supervised to ensure that
a certain speed (e.g 250r/min.) has been reached
within a certain time (e.g 30 seconds).
Signal processing in RUNNING:

x When the "Maximum allowed speed" is exceeded an
alarm shall be given initiating a NORMAL STOP.
x If the speed falls more than 10% below the
synchronous speed for a period longer than 1 minute
or 15% during more than 5 seconds a low speed
alarm should be given. Low speed indicates some
malfunction of the separator equipment and shall be
investigated.
x The speed monitoring system shall be checked
continuously (e.g. by checking that pulses are
coming). In case of a failure indication an alarm for
speed monitoring system failure shall be given. If
there is a risk of too high speed the separator shall be
stopped by NORMAL STOP.
x The speed drop during discharge compared to the
measured speed immediately before, should be
between 3-8% which will indicate a proper discharge.
Signal processing in STOPPING:
x STAND STILL shall be indicated when no pulses are
detected within 30 seconds.
x Stopping the separator when alarm for speed
monitoring system failure is active, shall cause a timer
controlled stop. (See “Stop time” in Technical Data.)
164
578150-02
752 Unbalance sensor (option).

For indication of any abnormal unbalance and
to be able to perform appropriate
countermeasures, the separator has been
equipped with an inductive analogue sensor
monitoring the radial position of the top-
bearing seat on the separator frame. The signal
from the sensor shall be monitored and two
alarm levels according to the vibration alarm
levels in "Technical Data" should be set. The
vibration level shall be high for 3 seconds to
generate an alarm. The first level is only used
to generate an alarm while the second level
shall stop the machine.
The vibration monitor shall include self check
function to be performed at least at initiation of
STARTING.
If vibrations exceed the second alarm level the
separator shall be stopped the quickest way
possible and it shall not been restarted until
the reasons for the unbalance have been found
and measures to remove them have been taken.
If vibrations exceed the second alarm level the
separator shall be stopped automatically by
SAFETY STOP.
If the self check system triggers, an alarm shall
be given and an automatic stop by NORMAL
STOP shall be initiated.
Signal processing in RUNNING:
x If vibrations exceed the first alarm level an
alarm should be given. Vibrations of this
magnitude will reduce the expected life time
of the bearings and should therefore be
eliminated.
x If vibrations exceed the second alarm level
the separator shall be stopped automatically
by SAFETY STOP.
x If the self check system triggers, an alarm
shall be given.
165
578150-02
Signal processing in STOPPING:

x If the self check system triggers, an alarm shall be
given.
Signal processing in NORMAL STOP:
x If vibrations exceed the second level the system shall
turn over automatically to SAFETY STOP.
166
578150-02
760 Cover interlocking switch (option)

The separator is equipped with an interlocking
switch to detect if the cover is mounted.
Signal processing in STAND STILL:

x The circuit is closed when the cover of the
separator is mounted.
x The interlocking switch should be connected in
such a way that starting of the motor is prevented
when the separator cover is not mounted.
Signal processing in STARTING, RUNNING:

x If the circuit is broken the separator should be
stopped automatically by NORMAL STOP. This is
to minimise the risk of having access to moving
parts.
Fluid connections
Complementary information is given in the
document Connection List.
201 Inlet
Processing in STAND STILL:
x Shall be closed.
Processing in STARTING:
x Should be closed. Bowl will be open and empty or
closed and filled depending on if start is done from
STAND STILL or STOPPING.
Processing in RUNNING:
x Could be closed or open (see Operating Water
Interface).
206 Inlet for liquid seal and displacement liquid
x See "Operating Water Interface
220, 221 and 222 Outlets

Processing in STAND STILL:
x Could be closed or open.
Processing in other modes:
167
578150-02
x Shall be open.
375 Inlet for discharge and make-up liquid

Processing in all modes:
x It is recommendable to supervise the supply
pressure to the operating water valve block
(optional). If pressure is too low, start should
be interlocked and if it happens in
PRODUCTION turn over to STAND BY
should take place.
x Below 85% of synchronous bowl speed no
water supply may be made.
x When coming from PRODUCTION a
discharge shall be initiated to remove
sediments from bowl to avoid problems due
to solidification, see Connection List.
Signal processing in PRODUCTION:
x Automatic discharges shall be initiated by
timer (see Operating Water Interface).
Signal processing in NORMAL STOP:
x Discharges should not be made.
Signal processing in SAFETY STOP and
EMERGENCY STOP:
x Discharges should not be made.
168
578150-02
8.5 Demand Specification

Water
Poor quality of the operating water may with time cause erosion,
corrosion and/or operating problems. The water shall be treated
to meet certain demands.
The following requirements are of fundamental importance:
1 Turbidity-free water, solids content <0,001% by volume.

Max. particle size 50 μm.
Deposits shall not be allowed to form in certain areas in the system.
2 Total hardness less than 180 mg CaCO3 per litre, which corresponds
to 10 °dH or 12,5 °E. Hard water may with time form deposits in the
operating mechanism. The precipitation rate is accelerated with
increased operating temperature and low discharge frequency.
These effects become more severe the harder the water is.
3 Chloride content max. 100 ppm NaCl (equivalent to 60 mg Cl/l).
Chloride ions contribute to corrosion on surfaces in contact with the
operating water.Corrosion is a process that is accelerated by
increased separating temperature, low pH, and high chloride ion
concentration.
4 6,5 < pH < 9
Bicarbonate content (HCO3) min. 70mg HCO3 per litre, which
corresponds to 3,2 °dKH.
NOTE
Alfa Laval accepts no liability for

consequences arising from unsatisfactorily
purified operating water supplied by the
customer.
169
578150-02
8.6 Drawings
8.6.1 Basic size drawing

A B
X0 23 81 6 A
Connection house, with connections 201, 220 and 221, turnable in 60° steps all around.
All connections to be installed non-loaded and flexible
All dimensions are nominal. Reservation for individual deviations due to tolerances.
Data for connection, see ‘‘8.3 Connection List” on page 157.
A Maximum horizontal displacement at the inlet and outlet

connections during operation ± 5 mm.
B Maximum horizontal displacement at the sludge
connection during operation ± 2 mm.
C Tightening torque 160 Nm
170
578150-02
8.6.2 Foundation drawing

E
F
I
J
G L
M
H
A N
C
X0 23 8 17 A
B
A Centre of separator bowl.

B Holes for foundation bolts (8x).
C Centre of motor.
D Min. lifting capacity required during service: 300 kg.
E Max. height of largest component incl. lifting tool.
F Service side.
G Foundation bolts.
H Installation according to stated foundation force.
I Recommended free floor space for unloading when
doing service.
J No fixed installation within this area.
K Centre of gravity (complete machine).
L Vertical force not exceeding 10 kN/foot.
M Horizontal force not exceeding 10 kN/foot.
N Total static load max. 4 kN
171
578150-02
8.6.3 Interconnection diagram

Interlocking switch (frame top part)
Unbalance sensor (position trans.

for bearing holder).
Speed sensor (bowl speed).
Junction box
Wiring without
junction box
Wiring of connector “X”: Wire colour codes:
RD=A BK=Black
BU=B BN=Brown
GN=C BU=Blue
YW=D RD=Red
WT=E GN=Green
BK=F PU=Purple
BN=G YW=Yellow
PU=H WT=White
G 0 86 75 61
Demand specification wire

Approval: UL 1007/1569
CSA TR-64 Items showed in this document are not included in all
Area acc. to AWG 18 separators. See product specification.
172
578150-02
8.6.4 Counter pressure

Maximum light phase counter pressure as a
function of throughput and viscosity.
600
500
400
[ kPa ]
300
200
100
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3
[ m /h ]
10 cSt
15 cSt
G 0 96 5 98 1
36 cSt
48 cSt
173
578150-02
8.6.5 Power consumption


Power consumption as a function of throughput
and counter pressure. Viscosity 10 cSt
5
[kW]
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3
[ m /h ]
Min
150 kPa
G 09 6 59 91
300 kPa
Max
174
578150-02

5
[kW]
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3
[ m /h ]
Min
150 kPa
G 0 96 5 9A 1
300 kPa
Max
175
578150-02

5
[kW]
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3
[ m /h ]
Min
150 kPa
G 0 96 5 9B 1
300 kPa
Max
176
578150-02

5
[kW]
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3
[ m /h ]
Min
150 kPa
G 0 96 5 9C 1
300 kPa
Max
177
578150-02
8.6.6 Operating water interface

Proposed operation of operating water

interface.
Connections 372 and 376 from the water block
converge to form connection 375 to the
separator.
Closing the bowl and supplying liquid seal:
1 Close the operating slide valves by supplying discharge water (connection 372) for 5 seconds.
2 Pause for 15 seconds.
3 Close the bowl by supplying make-up water (connection 376) for 15 seconds.
4 Apply liquid seal by opening connection 206 for 9 seconds.
5 Open the feed (connection 201).
Start-up sequence illustrated graphically:
376
372
206
201
G 08 69 7B 1
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
Performing a discharge:

1 Close the feed (connection 201).
2 Perform a displacement (of the interface) by opening connection 206 for 10 seconds.
3 Initiate a discharge by supplying discharge water (connection 372) for 3 seconds.
4 Pause for 15 seconds.
5 Close the bowl by supplying make up water (connection 376) for 15 seconds.
6 Apply liquid seal by opening connection 206 for 9 seconds.
7 Open the feed (connection 201).
Discharge sequence illustrated graphically:
376
372
206
201
G 08 69 7 C1
-5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
178
578150-02
During the separating process the make-up

water supply volume is maintained by opening
connection 376 for 1 second every 5 minutes.
179
578150-02
8.6.7 Electric motor

Casted lifting lugs on

both sides.
Knockout openings
for M25 + M20 cable
glands on both sides. 4 holes M10x18
External earthing bolt
acc. to variant code 067
j6
Note: The motor

bearings are
permanently
lubricated
Note: Drain holes with closable

plugs to be positioned at lowest
G 09 38 2 91
point for IM2111 mounting Metal fan cover acc.
position. to variant code 053
Manufacturer ABB Motors Type of mounting Degree of

Manuf. drawing Cat. GB 08-2001 protection
Standards IEC 34-series, 72, 79 and 85 IEC 34-7 IEC 34-5

Size 132 SB
IM 2111 IP 55
Type M3AA 132 SB
Weight 42 kg
Note!
Poles 2
High output design (Genelec +1)
Insulation class F Cast iron bearing shield at N-end
Bearings D-end 6208-2Z/C3
N-end 6206-2Z/C3 NOTE
Method of cooling IC 411 (IEC 34-6) For complete information about motor variants,
please contact your Alfa Laval representative.
Spec. Totally enclosed three-phase
motor for marine service
Motor with feet and small flange.
180 578150-02
SEPARATOR MANUAL 9 INSTALLATION
9 Installation
9.1 Introduction
These installation specifications are valid for
the P 635 separator.
The installation instructions are specifications,

which are compulsory requirements.
Any specific requirements from classification
societies or other local authorities must be
followed.
NOTE
If the specifications are not followed, Alfa Laval

cannot be held responsible for any
malfunctions related to the installation.
578150-02 181
9.2 Upon Arrival At The

Storage Area
Ensure that the separator delivered is
suitable for the application.
9.2.1 Transport
a When lifting the separator, make sure that tools and lifting
devices are fastened securely. See chapter ‘‘6.8.1 Lifting
the separator” on page 146.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazards
Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting
instructions.
b When lifting the bowl see ‘‘6.8.2 Lifting the bowl” on page
147.
c During transport of the separator, the

inlet and outlet device, frame hood and
bowl must always be removed.
G 0 87 35 61
182
578150-02
9 INSTALLATION SEPARATOR MANUAL
9.2.2 Protection and storage of

goods
a The separator must be stored indoors at 5 -

55 °C, if not delivered in a water-resistant
box, designated for outdoor storage.
The following protection products are b If there is a risk for water condensation, the
recommended: equipment must stand well ventilated and at
1 Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 112 or equivalent) with long a temperature above dew point.
lasting effective treatment for external surfaces.
The oil should prevent corrosion attacks and
leaves a waxy surface.
2 Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 40 or equivalent) is a thin
lubricant for inside protection. It gives a
lubricating transparent oil film.
3 Solvent, e.g. white spirit, to remove the anti-rust c If the storage time exceeds 12 months, the
oil after the storage period. equipment must be inspected every 6
4 Moisture remover to be packed together with months and, if necessary, the protection be
the separator equipment. renewed. G 08 73 65 1
183
578150-02
9.3 Planning of
Installation
9.3.1 Important measurements
G 08 7 37 41
Important measurements are:
- minimum lifting height for lifting bowl parts
- shortest distance between driving motor and wall
- space for control and operation
- free passage for dismantling and assembly
- space for maintenance work
- space on floor for machine parts during maintenance
work
For more detailed information, see ‘‘8.6.1 Basic size

drawing” on page 170 and ‘‘8.6.2 Foundation drawing” on
page 171.
184
578150-02
9.3.2 Maintenance service
A work bench should be installed in the separator room.
Hot water, compressed air and diesel oil should be available

near the work bench to make maintenance work easier.
An overhead hoist with capacity of 300 kg is required for

transport of bowl parts to the working bench. Lifting point should
be above the centre of the separator.
NOTE
When two or more separators are installed, the

lifting height should be increased to enable
bowl parts from one separator to be lifted and
moved over an adjoining separator.
See ‘‘8.6.2 Foundation drawing” on page 171
G 0 87 38 81
185
578150-02
9.3.3 Connections to surrounding

equipment
Local safety regulations

If the local safety regulations prescribe that the
installation has to be inspected and approved by
responsible authorities before the plant is put
into service, consult with such authorities before
installing the equipment and have the projected
G 0 8 73 91 1
plant design approved by them.
Service media
Ensure that all service media (electric power,
operating and safety liquids etc.) required for the
separator have the correct quality and capacity.
G 0 8 74 02 1
Sludge discharge tank
If the sediment from the separator is discharged
into a tank, this tank must be sufficiently
ventilated. The connection between the
separator and the tank must be of the size and
configuration specified.
If the solids are discharged from the separator
bowl casing into a closed system, ensure that
this system cannot be overfilled or closed in such
a way that the solids cannot leave the bowl
casing. This could cause a hazardous situation.
G 0 87 4 31 1
186
578150-02
9.4 Storage
If the separator is out of operation for more
than 1 month:
1 Lift out the bowl.
2 Protect the spindle taper from corrosion by
lubricating it with oil.
3 Keep the separator and bowl well stored, dry
and protected from mechanical damage.
For details see ‘‘9.2.2 Protection and storage of
goods” on page 183
9.5 Before start-up

Before start-up, wipe off the oil from the
spindle taper.
If the separator has been out of operation for:
1 month or longer
x Pre-lubricate the spindle neck bearing.
6 months or longer
x Perform an Inspection service i i and make
sure to pre-lubricate the spindle bearings.
x Change the oil before starting.
G 08 68 7 L1
18 months or longer
x Perform an Overhaul service o and make
sure to pre-lubricate the spindle bearings.
x Change the oil before starting.
187
578150-02
188
578150-02
Component
Description
Oil Feed Pump ACP 45/52
P00 3 07 2B
Product No. 1764187-65 to -90

1764504-65 to -90
1765884-65 to -90
Printed 1765885-65 to -90
Book No.
Oct 2008
1818106-02 V7

Alfa Laval reserve the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
suggestions for improvement of this publication would be gratefully
appreciated.
Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local Alfa Laval
company.
S - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
Study instruction manuals and observe the
warnings before installation, operation,
service and maintenance.
Not following the instructions can result in

serious accidents with fatal injuries.
P000272A
In order to make the information clear only foreseeable conditions have
been considered. No warnings are given, therefore, for situations
arising from unintended usage of the machine and its tools.
Contents
1 Function Description ........................................................................................... 1

1.1 Application ........................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Design .................................................................................................................... 1
1.2.1 Rotors and Casing.................................................................................................... 1
1.2.2 Pressure Relief Valve ................................................................................................ 1
1.2.3 Direction of Rotation ................................................................................................. 1
1.2.4 Parts ........................................................................................................................ 2
1.3 Working Principle .............................................................................................. 3
2 Fault Finding ............................................................................................................. 5
3 Maintenance ............................................................................................................. 7
3.1 Inspection............................................................................................................. 7
3.1.1 Leakage.................................................................................................................... 7
3.1.2 Preliminary Rotor Inspection .................................................................................... 7
3.2 Periodic Maintenance ....................................................................................... 9
3.2.1 Intervals .................................................................................................................... 9
3.2.2 Recommended Greases .......................................................................................... 9
3.3 Dismantling ........................................................................................................ 10
3.3.1 Pump Removal ....................................................................................................... 10
3.3.2 Rotors .................................................................................................................... 11
3.3.3 Ball Bearing ............................................................................................................ 13
3.3.4 Shaft Seal .............................................................................................................. 14
3.3.5 Dismantling & Assembly of Pressure Relief Valve ................................................. 15
3.4 Assembly............................................................................................................. 16
3.4.1 Shaft Seal ............................................................................................................... 16
3.4.2 Front cover ............................................................................................................. 17
3.4.3 Rotors ..................................................................................................................... 19
3.4.4 Refitting the Pump .................................................................................................. 20
4 Technical Data ..................................................................................................... 21

4.1 Specification...................................................................................................... 21
4.1.1 Pump Without Motor ............................................................................................... 22
4.1.2 ACP 45 with Motor ................................................................................................. 23
4.1.3 ACP 52 with Motor .................................................................................................. 25
4.1.4 Capacity at 50 Hz................................................................................................... 27
4.1.5 Capacity at 60 Hz................................................................................................... 27
4.2 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 28
4.2.1 ACP 45 ................................................................................................................... 28
4.2.2 ACP 52 ................................................................................................................... 29
5 Installation and Initial Start ........................................................................ 31

5.1 Installation ......................................................................................................... 31
5.1.1 Piping ..................................................................................................................... 31
1818106-02
5.1.2 Strainer ...................................................................................................................31
5.1.3 Pump ......................................................................................................................32
5.1.4 Gauges ...................................................................................................................32
5.2 Initial Start .........................................................................................................32
6 Spare Parts ............................................................................................................. 35
1818106-02
1 Function Description
1.1 Application 1.2.2 Pressure Relief Valve
The selfpriming ACP screw pump is a positive An integrated pressure relief valve protects the
displacement pump, suitable when a constant pump and motor from overloading. The valve
oil flow is required. opens at a pressure of 0.6 MPa (6 bar).
The pump is used for feeding fuel or lubricating

oil in marine or power applications such as 1.2.3 Direction of Rotation
separation systems, oil heating systems, and oil
conditioning systems. An ACP pump must be rotated in the specified
direction and delivers the oil in one direction
only. The rotational and pumping directions are
indicated by arrows on the pump flange and
1.2 Design casing.
1.2.1 Rotors and Casing

The ACP pump has three intermeshing screws,
shaped so that they form a tight seal in relation
to each other and to the cast iron pump casing.
They are lubricated by the oil moving through
the pump.
The rotors are designed to work at high speed
with no vibrations or noise caused by
imbalance.
The power rotor (the central screw) is made of
steel and driven by an electric motor, connected
by a flexible coupling. Axial forces on the power
rotor are hydraulically counterbalanced.
The two idler rotors, made of high quality cast
iron, are driven by the action of the oil that is
pumped.
NOTE
If the pump is operated without oil the idler rotors

will be driven directly by the power rotor, resulting
in wear to the pump.
1818106-02 1
1 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION OIL FEED PUMP ACP 45/52
1.2.4 Parts
P0 02 4 81 B
1 Retaining ring 18 Valve housing
2 Support ring 19 Screw
3 Retaining ring 20 Plug, inlet pressure gauge connection
4 Ball bearing 21 Sealing washer
5 Distance sleeve 22 Plug, outlet pressure gauge connection
6 Distance washer 23 Retaining ring
7 Support ring 24 Valve cover
8 Screw 25 Sealing washer
9 Front cover 26 O-ring
10 Retaining pin 27 Valve spindle
11 Plug 28 Set screw
12 Sealing washer 29 Valve spring
13 Front cover gasket 30 Valve piston
14 Grease nipple 31 Idler rotor
15 Nipple cover 32 Power rotor
16 Pump casing 33 Shaft key
17 Gasket 34 Shaft seal
2 1818106-02
OIL FEED PUMP ACP 45/52 1 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
P00 25 1 1B
Shaft seal
1 O-ring
2 Seat
3 Bellows unit
1.3 Working Principle
P0 0 30 21 A
A Rotational direction 1 Power rotor
B Outlet 2 Idler rotor
C Inlet
The rotating parts of the pump consist of three

helical screws enclosed in the pump casing.
The threaded surfaces of the screws fit each
other accurately, forming a series of enclosed
cavities. These cavities move axially when the
screws rotate.
When the cavities are filled with oil, the oil is
transported from the pump inlet to the outlet.
This results in the pressure difference required
for continuous feeding of the oil.
1818106-02 3
1 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION OIL FEED PUMP ACP 45/52
When the screws rotate at a constant speed the

oil is pumped at a constant flow rate.
A relief valve is necessary to protect against
harmful pressure levels.
4 1818106-02
OIL FEED PUMP ACP 45/52 2 FAULT FINDING
2 Fault Finding
If a fault cannot be remedied by the actions
suggested below, worn pump parts may need to
be replaced. Dismantling and assembly of the
pump is described in chapter 3 ‘‘Maintenance’’ on
page 7.
Fault Probable cause Remedy

Low capacity, Suction valves shut off, or clogged strainer Open the valves, or clean the strainer
low pressure or
Relief valve opens at too low pressure or Adjust the relief valve or dismantle and check
no flow
does not close properly it (the valve may be situated off the pump)
The pressure relief valve is set below the Readjust the pressure relief valve to a value
counter pressure above the counter pressure
Pump does not Pump too dry Fill the pump housing with oil
prime
Air leak on suction side of the pump Seal off the air leak
Wrong direction of rotation Change the phase order (switch two of the
three motor connections)
The suction height is too high Reinstall the pump at a lower suction height
Drive motor The counter pressure is too high Check the shut-off valves in the delivery line
tends to stop by
The oil is too cold and has too high viscos- Adjust the oil heating
tripping the over-
ity
load relay
The cut-off setting of the motor relay is too Adjust the relay setting according to the motor
low power rating in Amps
Electric power supply faulty Check the motor and motor connection
Incorrect setting of Y/D starter Readjust the setting of the starting sequence.
The time before the motor overload relay is
tripped should not exceed 10-15 seconds.
1818106-02 5
2 FAULT FINDING OIL FEED PUMP ACP 45/52

Pump noisy Heavy wear in the pump Dismantle the pump and replace the worn
when running parts
Suction valves shut off, or clogged strainer Open the valves, or clean the strainer
The pump and motor are not properly Align the pump and motor
aligned
The shaft coupling is worn Check the coupling and replace worn parts
Vapour in pump due to high oil tempera- Adjust the oil heating
ture
The suction height is too high Reinstall the pump at a lower suction height
Air leak on suction side of the pump Seal off the air leak
Pressure too high The pressure relief valve is set to high Readjust the pressure relief valve
The oil is too cold (or has higher viscosity Reduce the pressure setting until operational
than anticipated) temperature has been reached
Counter pressure in the discharge line is Check the discharge line
too high
Wrong direction Electric cables to motor wrongly connected Reverse the terminal connection on electric
of rotation motor
Note! Connecting and disconnecting of elec-

tric cables must be done only by personnel
authorized to do such work
6 1818106-02
OIL FEED PUMP ACP 45/52 3 MAINTENANCE
3 Maintenance
3.1 Inspection
The pump should be inspected on a daily basis.
Check for the following:
• Leakage
• Vibration
• Abnormal noise
• Reduced capacity
• Reduced pressure
For dismantling and assembly of the pump, use
the procedure described in section 3.3
‘‘Dismantling’’ on page 10. Check for wear and
replace worn or damaged parts.
3.1.1 Leakage
The shaft seal is lubricated by the pumped oil.
A little oil will pass the seal. Ten droplets per
hour is considered normal, while a greater
leakage indicates that the seal is worn and must
be replaced.
It is recommended to replace the seal at least
once every three years.
3.1.2 Preliminary Rotor Inspection

If worn or damaged rotors are suspected, a
preliminary inspection may be made after
removing the valve housing.
ING
WARN
!
Entrapment hazard
Do not start maintenance work unless the power is
switched off and the inlet and outlet are shut.
1818106-02 7
3 MAINTENANCE OIL FEED PUMP ACP 45/52
1 Turn the electricity off, and close the shut-off

valves on both sides of the pump.
ON
CAUTI
!
Burn hazard
Allow the pump to cool before starting maintenance
work.
2 Unscrew the valve housing screws and

remove the housing and gasket. Use
appropriate vessels to collect oil spillage.
3 Remove the idler rotors for inspection.
Observe that the rear ends are different from
the front ends.
4 Re-insert the idler rotors in their original
positions.
5 Refit the valve housing, using a new gasket.
Tighten the screws crosswise with a torque of
24 Nm.
If further investigation is needed, the pump
should be properly dismantled as described in
section 3.3 ‘‘Dismantling’’ on page 10.
8 1818106-02
3.2 Periodic Maintenance
3.2.1 Intervals
The only periodic maintenance needed is the
lubrication of the power rotor ball bearing with
grease.
When lubricating the ball bearing, the pump
should be running.
Lubricating intervals in operating hours at
different oil temperatures and pump speeds:
1 700 rpm 1 400 rpm 1 100 rpm 900 rpm
70°C 10 000 hrs 10 000 hrs 10 000 hrs 10 000 hrs
90°C 5 400 hrs 6 000 hrs 6 400 hrs 7 500 hrs
3.2.2 Recommended Greases

BP Energrease LS 3
Esso Beacon 2
Mobilgrease HP 222
Shell Alvania G3
Texaco Multifak EP2
SKF LGMT2
Q8 Rembrandt EP2
Castrol APS2
Elf Rolexa 3
Total Mulitis TIR EP3
Fina Marson L3
1818106-02 9
3.3 Dismantling
ING
WARN
!
Entrapment hazard
Do not start maintenance work unless the power is
switched off and the inlet and outlet are shut.
3.3.1 Pump Removal

1 Turn the electricity off, and close the shut-off
valves on both sides of the pump.
ON
CAUTI
!
Burn hazard
Allow the pump to cool before starting maintenance
work.
2 If the rear cover has been removed, reattach it

to keep the idler rotors in place.
3 Disconnect the pump from the suction and
pressure pipes. Use appropriate vessels to
collect oil spillage when removing and
opening the pump.
4 Unscrew the mounting screws and remove the
pump.
10 1818106-02
3.3.2 Rotors
1 Note the position of the shaft coupling.

2 Loosen the stop screw.
P00 2 81 1A
3 Remove the shaft coupling.
P0 02 53 1A
4 Remove the shaft key.
P0 02 5 41 A
1818106-02 11
5 Remove the front cover screws.
P00 2 55 1B
6 Remove retaining rings (1 and 3) and the
support ring (2).
P0 02 56 1B
7 Remove the front cover (1) from the power
rotor shaft. The rotor remains in the casing.
1
P 00 25 71 A
12 1818106-02
8 Pull out the power rotor.

1
9 Pull out the idler rotors (1). Observe that the
rear ends are different from the front ends.
They must be re-inserted accordingly.
P 00 26 21 A
3.3.3 Ball Bearing
1 Press out the ball bearing (1) and the distance

sleeve (2) from the front cover (5). If 1
necessary, use a mounting sleeve (6) and a
mallet. 2
2 Remove the distance washer (3) and the 3
support ring (4). 4
The removed ball bearing should not be reused.
P0 0 25 81 A
1818106-02 13
3.3.4 Shaft Seal
1 Turn the front cover (4) upside down.

2 Push out the seat (1) from the front cover.
3 Remove the O-ring (2). 1
4 Remove the gasket (3). 2
NOTE 3
Do not use any tool on the face surface of the seat.
The sealing surfaces of the shaft seat should not be
touched with the fingers. 4
P 00 25 91 A
5 Fasten the power rotor (1) between soft jaws
in a vice.
6 To remove the shaft seal (2), use two screw
drivers as shown in the illustration.
P 00 26 0 1B
14 1818106-02
3.3.5 Dismantling & Assembly of

Pressure Relief Valve
The valve housing can be removed with the

pump still attached to the motor and pipes. This
is described in section 3.1.2 ‘‘Preliminary Rotor
Inspection’’ on page 7.
Replacement of O-ring
1 To avoid changing the setting of the valve, use
an Allen key to prevent the spindle (5) to turn.
Unscrew the cover (2) and pull up the units (2
& 5).
2 Remove the retaining ring (1) and pull the
spindle out of the cover.
3 Replace the O-ring (4) and assemble the
spindle and the cover in reverse order.
4 If necessary, replace the retaining ring (1) and
the washer (3).
Replacement of Valve element

1 Release the spring tension by turning the
spindle (5) with an Allen key. Use the Allen
key to prevent the spindle to turn. Unscrew the
cover (2) but do not remove it yet.
2 Remove the set screw (6) by turning the
P0 0 35 55 A
spindle.
3 Pull out the valve piston (8) and spring
unit (7).
4 Fit the valve element in reverse order with a
new washer (3).
5 Turn the spindle until the set screw (6) leaves
enough space for the cover. Use the Allen key
to prevent the spindle to turn further when the
cover is tightened.
6 Adjust the valve setting.
1818106-02 15
3.4 Assembly
3.4.1 Shaft Seal
1 Fasten the power rotor (1) in a vice between

soft jaws.
2 Lubricate the power rotor shaft with medium
grade engine oil.
3 Open a package with a new sealing.
4 Place the bellows unit (2) on the shaft of the
power rotor and press it down against the
balance piston.
P00 2 64 1B
5 Lubricate the O-ring (2) and the recess of the
front cover.
6 Clean the sealing faces and fit the seat (1) into
the front cover. Mind the position of the
1
retaining pin.
2
P00 26 6 1A
16 1818106-02
3.4.2 Front cover
1 Lubricate the balance piston (7) with a thick

oil (ISO VG 460).
Grease
2 Fit the front cover onto the power rotor (6) until
it rests on the bellows unit.
3 Fit the support ring (4) and the distance
washer (3) into the front cover. Mind the
position of the distance washer.
4 Fit the distance sleeve (2) into the front
Mounting kit
cover (5).
5 Fill the ball bearing (1) with appropriate
grease. Recommended grease types are
listed in section 3.2 ‘‘Periodic Maintenance’’
on page 9.
6 Fit the ball bearing onto the shaft.
NOTE
P00 26 7 1B
Put the open side of the bearing towards the cover.
Fit the mounting sleeve and push the bearing to its
final position in the front cover. To do this, some
force is required. Use your column drilling machine
or mounting kit.
Do not use a hammer (or similar) as this might
damage the shaft seal and ball bearing.
7 Fit the support ring (2) and the retaining

ring (1) on to the shaft.
8 Fit the retaining ring (3) into the recess.
P0 02 68 1B
1818106-02 17
9 Fit the shaft key back in position.
P00 2 54 1B
10 Fit the shaft coupling back into place with the
same method used when fitting the ball
bearing.
NOTE
Do not use a hammer (or similar) as this might

damage the shaft seal and ball bearing.
P0 02 81 2 A
P 00 25 72 A
18 1818106-02
3.4.3 Rotors
1 Lubricate the idler rotors (1) with medium

grade engine oil. Insert the rear ends first
(lubricating grooves down) into their borings
in the pump casing.
P0 02 63 1 A
2 Remove the plug (2) and washer (1).
3 Hold the rotor (3) unit horizontally, with the
bore for plug upwards. Carefully fill the space
completely with thin oil, for example ISO VG
46.
4 When the oil is flooding, reassemble the
above parts in reverse order.
P0 02 54 2 A
5 Slowly turn the shaft a few turns to make sure
it moves freely. A certain resistance from the
shaft seal is normal, but it must be the same
during the turns.
6 Place a new gasket (4) on the pump body (5).
7 Lubricate the power rotor (3) and fit the front
cover (2) together with the rotor set into the
pump body. Mind the position of the tension
pin.
8 Fit the cover screws (1).Tighten the screws
crosswise with a torque of 24 Nm.
P00 27 0 1B
1818106-02 19
3.4.4 Refitting the Pump

1 Align the pump to the motor. Make sure the
shaft coupling valves fit each other and
tighten the mounting screws and nuts.
2 Attach the suction and pressure lines to the
pump.
3 For restarting the pump, see chapter 5
‘‘Installation and Initial Start’’ on page 31.
20 1818106-02
OIL FEED PUMP ACP 45/52 4 TECHNICAL DATA
4 Technical Data
4.1 Specification
Media Lubricating and fuel oils
Maximum media temperature 120 °C
Pump type Screw pump, positive displacement
Maximum feeding pressure 0.3 MPa (3 bar)
Suction head - 4 m WG manometric
- 0 m WG manometric (for 2800 rpm and 3400 rpm)
Capacity See sections 4.1.4, 4.1.5
Mounting style Vertically or horizontally
Weight See sections 4.1.1, 4.1.2, 4.1.3
Material
Pump housing Nodular cast iron
Power rotor Steel
Idler rotors Cast iron
Integrated pressure relief valve opens at 0.6 MPa (6 bar)
Motor Three-phase AC, for marine applications
Insulation According to class F
Enclosure IP 55
Speed See sections 4.1.2, 4.1.3
Power consumption See sections 4.1.2, 4.1.3
Ref. 1764187 Rev. 4, 1764504 Rev. 4, 1765884 Rev. 3, 1765885 Rev. 4
1818106-02 21
4 TECHNICAL DATA OIL FEED PUMP ACP 45/52
4.1.1 Pump Without Motor

Pump Article no. Weight, kg
ACP 045 K7 1764504-65 28
ACP 045 N7 1764187-65 28
ACP 052 K7 1765884-65 36
ACP 052 N7 1765885-65 36
22 1818106-02
4.1.2 ACP 45 with Motor

Pump type Pump set Included
article no. motor no. V Hz RPM kW A Tot.kg
ACP 045 K7 1764504-66 551617-11 230 50 900 1,5 6,9 51
1764504-67 551616-11 230 50 1400 2,2 8,7 48,5
1764504-68 565196-09 230 50 2800 4,0 13,0 53
1764504-69 551617-09 230 60 1100 1,5 6,6 51
1764504-70 551616-09 230 60 1700 2,2 8,3 48,5
1764504-71 565196-18 230 60 3400 4,6 14,5 53
1764504-72 551617-10 400 50 900 1,5 4,0 51
1764504-73 551616-10 400 50 1400 2,2 5,0 48,5
1764504-74 565196-02 400 50 2800 4,0 7,5 53
1764504-75 551617-05 440 60 1100 1,8 4,5 51
1764504-76 551616-05 440 60 1700 2,6 5,3 48,5
1764504-77 565196-11 440 60 3400 4,6 7,6 53
1764504-78 551617-07 460 60 1100 1,8 4,3 51
1764504-79 551616-07 460 60 1700 2,6 5,1 48,5
1764504-80 565196-12 460 60 3400 4,6 7,3 53
1764504-81 551617-08 480 60 1100 1,8 4,3 51
1764504-82 551616-08 480 60 1700 2,6 5,1 48,5
1764504-83 565196-13 480 60 3400 4,6 7,0 53
1764504-84 551617-06 575 60 1100 1,8 3,4 51
1764504-85 551617-14 690 50 900 1,5 2,3 51
1764504-86 551616-14 690 50 1400 2,2 2,9 48,5
1764504-87 565196-07 690 50 2800 4,0 4,4 53
1764504-88 551617-18 690 60 1100 1,8 2,9 51
1764504-89 551616-18 690 60 1700 2,6 3,4 48,5
1764504-90 565196-16 690 60 3400 4,6 4,8 53
Ref. 1764504 Rev. 4
1818106-02 23

ACP 045 N7 1764187-66 551617-11 230 50 900 1,5 6,9 51
1764187-67 551616-11 230 50 1400 2,2 8,7 48,5
1764187-68 565196-09 230 50 2800 4,0 13,0 53
1764187-69 551617-09 230 60 1100 1,5 6,6 51
1764187-70 551616-09 230 60 1700 2,2 8,3 48,5
1764187-71 565196-18 230 60 3400 4,6 14,5 53
1764187-72 551617-10 400 50 900 1,5 4,0 51
1764187-73 551616-10 400 50 1400 2,2 5,0 48,5
1764187-74 565196-02 400 50 2800 4,0 7,5 53
1764187-75 551617-05 440 60 1100 1,8 4,5 51
1764187-76 551616-05 440 60 1700 2,6 5,3 48,5
1764187-77 565196-11 440 60 3400 4,6 7,6 53
1764187-78 551617-07 460 60 1100 1,8 4,3 51
1764187-79 551616-07 460 60 1700 2,6 5,1 48,5
1764187-80 565196-12 460 60 3400 4,6 7,3 53
1764187-81 551617-08 480 60 1100 1,8 4,3 51
1764187-82 551616-08 480 60 1700 2,6 5,1 48,5
1764187-83 565196-13 480 60 3400 4,6 7,0 53
1764187-84 551617-06 575 60 1100 1,8 3,4 51
1764187-85 551617-14 690 50 900 1,5 2,3 51
1764187-86 551616-14 690 50 1400 2,2 2,9 48,5
1764187-87 565196-07 690 50 2800 4,0 4,4 53
1764187-88 551617-18 690 60 1100 1,8 2,9 51
1764187-89 551616-18 690 60 1700 2,6 3,4 48,5
1764187-90 565196-16 690 60 3400 4,6 4,8 53
Ref. 1764187 Rev. 4
24 1818106-02
4.1.3 ACP 52 with Motor

ACP 052 K7 1765884-66 551617-11 230 50 900 1,5 6,9 59
1765884-67 552038-15 230 50 1400 3,0 11,1 60
1765884-68 565196-09 230 50 2800 4,0 13,0 61
1765884-69 551617-09 230 60 1100 1,5 6,6 59
1765884-70 552038-12 230 60 1700 3,0 10,4 60
1765884-71 565196-18 230 60 3400 4,6 14,5 61
1765884-72 551617-10 400 50 900 1,5 4,0 59
1765884-73 552038-15 400 50 1400 3,0 6,4 60
1765884-74 565196-02 400 50 2800 4,0 7,5 61
1765884-75 551617-05 440 60 1100 1,8 4,5 59
1765884-76 552038-05 440 60 1700 3,5 6,6 60
1765884-77 565196-11 440 60 3400 4,6 7,6 61
1765884-78 551617-07 460 60 1100 1,8 4,3 59
1765884-79 552038-09 460 60 1700 3,5 6,4 60
1765884-80 565196-12 460 60 3400 4,6 7,3 61
1765884-81 551617-08 480 60 1100 1,8 4,3 59
1765884-82 552038-10 480 60 1700 3,5 6,1 60
1765884-83 565196-13 480 60 3400 4,6 7,0 61
1765884-84 551617-06 575 60 1100 1,8 3,4 59
1765884-85 551617-14 690 50 900 1,5 2,3 59
1765884-86 552038-17 690 50 1400 3,0 3,7 60
1765884-87 565196-07 690 50 2800 4,0 4,4 61
1765884-88 551617-18 690 60 1100 1,8 2,9 59
1765884-89 552038-19 690 60 1700 3,5 4,4 60
1765884-90 565196-16 690 60 3400 4,6 4,8 61
Ref. 1765884 Rev. 3
1818106-02 25

ACP 052 N7 1765885-66 551617-11 230 50 900 1,5 6,9 59
1765885-67 552038-15 230 50 1400 3,0 11,1 60
1765885-68 565196-09 230 50 2800 4,0 13,0 61
1765885-69 551617-09 230 60 1100 1,5 6,6 59
1765885-70 552038-12 230 60 1700 3,0 10,4 60
1765885-71 565196-18 230 60 3400 4,6 14,5 61
1765885-72 551617-10 400 50 900 1,5 4,0 59
1765885-73 552038-15 400 50 1400 3,0 6,4 60
1765885-74 565196-02 400 50 2800 4,0 7,5 61
1765885-75 563290-01 440 60 1100 2,5 5,2 63
1765885-76 552038-05 440 60 1700 3,5 6,6 60
1765885-77 565196-11 440 60 3400 4,6 7,6 61
1765885-78 551617-07 460 60 1100 1,8 4,3 59
1765885-79 552038-09 460 60 1700 3,5 6,4 60
1765885-80 565196-12 460 60 3400 4,6 7,3 61
1765885-81 551617-08 480 60 1100 1,8 4,3 59
1765885-82 552038-10 480 60 1700 3,5 6,1 60
1765885-83 565196-13 480 60 3400 4,6 7,0 61
1765885-84 563290-10 575 60 1100 2,5 4,0 63
1765885-85 551617-14 690 50 900 1,5 2,3 59
1765885-86 552038-17 690 50 1400 3,0 3,7 60
1765885-87 565196-07 690 50 2800 4,0 4,4 61
1765885-88 551617-18 690 60 1100 1,8 2,9 59
1765885-89 552038-19 690 60 1700 3,5 4,4 60
1765885-90 565196-16 690 60 3400 4,6 4,8 61
Ref. 1765885 Rev. 4
26 1818106-02
4.1.4 Capacity at 50 Hz
Pump capacities l/h at 400 kPa (4 bar)
Pump type Viscosity (cSt)
RPM 13 30 40 60 100 180 380 460 700
ACP 045K 2800 9825 10100 10200 10400 10500 10600 10700 10700 10800
1400 4350 4650 4750 4900 5025 5150 5250 5250 5300
900 2400 2700 2800 2925 3075 3175 3300 3300 3350
ACP 045N 2800 12100 12600 12700 12900 13100 13200 13400 13400 -
1400 5275 5700 5850 6050 6225 6375 6525 6550 6625
900 2825 3250 3400 3600 3775 3950 4075 4100 4175
ACP 052K 2800 15600 16100 16200 16400 16600 16800 - - -
1400 6950 7400 7575 7775 7975 8150 8300 8325 8400
900 3850 4300 4475 4675 4875 5050 5200 5250 5300
ACP 052N 2800 19100 19700 19900 20100 20300 - - - -
1400 8525 9075 9275 9500 9750 9975 10200 10200 10300
900 4750 5300 5500 5725 5975 6200 6375 6425 6500
4.1.5 Capacity at 60 Hz
Pump capacities l/h at 400 kPa (4 bar)
Pump type Viscosity (cSt)
RPM 13 30 40 60 100 180 380 460 700
ACP 045K 3400 12200 12500 12600 12700 12800 1300 13100 13100 -
1700 5525 5825 5925 6050 6200 6300 6425 6450 6475
1100 3175 3475 3575 3725 3850 3950 4075 4100 4125
ACP 045N 3400 15100 15500 15600 15800 16000 16200 - - -
170
00
1700 6750 7175 7325 7500 7700 7850 8000 8025 8075
1100 38000 4225 4400 4575 4750 4925 5050 5100 5150
ACP 052K 3400 19300 19800 19900 20100 20300 20500 - - -
1700 8800 9250 9425 9625 9825 10000 10200 10200 10200
1100 5100 5550 5725 5925 6100 6300 6450 6475 6550
ACP 052N 3400 23600 24200 24400 24600 - - - - -
1700 10800 11300 11500 11800 12000 12200 12400 12500 12500
1100 6250 6800 7000 7250 7500 7700 7900 7925 8000
1818106-02 27
4.2 Dimensions
4.2.1 ACP 45
X 02 44 21 A
Ref. 1764504 Rev. 4, Ref. 1764187 Rev. 4
1. Pump A. Rotation arrows H. Flanges acc. to DIN 2633

2. Motor B. Outlet gauge, ISO G3/8 I. Identification plate
C. Inlet gauge, ISO G3/8 J. CE mark (only with motor)
D. Space for dismantling K. Relief valve, sealed by cover
plate
E. ISO G1/4 Drain conn.
F. M12x4
G. Hole Ø28 in coupling for electric
motor axle journal
28 1818106-02
4.2.2 ACP 52
X0 24 43 1 A
Ref. 1765884 Rev. 3, Ref. 1765885 Rev. 4
1. Pump A. Rotation arrows H. Flanges acc. to DIN 2633

2. Motor B. Outlet gauge, ISO G3/8 I. Identification plate
C. Inlet gauge, ISO G3/8 J. CE mark (only with motor)
D. Space for dismantling K. Relief valve, sealed by cover
plate
E. ISO G1/4 Drain conn.
F. M12x4
G. Hole Ø28 in coupling for electric
motor axle journal
1818106-02 29
30 1818106-02
OIL FEED PUMP ACP 45/52 5 INSTALLATION AND INITIAL START
5 Installation and Initial Start

5.1 Installation
5.1.1 Piping
The pipe installation must meet the following
demands:
• The pipes must be installed and supported
with no support from the pump casing.
• The pipe flanges must fit the pump flanges so
that they can be connected without using any
force.
• Before the pipes are connected to the pump
they must be cleaned from particles resulting
from, for example, welding and cutting.
• Shut-off valves must be installed on both sides
of the pump.
• The suction line should be dimensioned for an
oil flow speed between 0.5 and 1.2 m/s, and
the pressure line for 1 to
3 m/s.
• The suction line must be equipped with a port
near the pump, that allows filling the pump
with oil before the initial start.
• The manometric suction head must not
exceed 40 kPa (0.4 bar).
Note! For 2800 and 3400 rpm, the manometric
suction head must not exceed 0 kPa (0 bar).
5.1.2 Strainer
An oil strainer of suitable size should be
installed to protect the pump against damage
and wear from coarse particles.
The pressure drop across the strainer should not
exceed 10 kPa (0.1 bar) at maximum flow rate
and normal viscosity.
1818106-02 31
5 INSTALLATION AND INITIAL START OIL FEED PUMP ACP 45/52
5.1.3 Pump
The pump must be installed to meet the
following demands:
• The pump must be mounted on a solid
foundation and on a drip tray or in a
cofferdam.
• The pump may be installed in a vertical or
horizontal position but must be easily
accessed for inspection and service.
• The pump must be installed so that the oil is
kept in the pump casing when the oil flow is
stopped.
• The pump must be installed as close as
possible to the feed tank in order to avoid
suction losses.
5.1.4 Gauges
Pressure gauges on both the suction and the
pressure side must be connected by 1/2” sockets
and ball valves.
5.2 Initial Start

The initial start procedure must be followed
when the pump is taken into operation after
installation and whenever the pump casing has
been emptied of oil, for example, when the pump
has been dismantled.
ING
WARN
!
Entrapment hazard
Do not start filling the pump unless the power is
switched off.
1 Remove the fan cover from the electric motor.

2 Open the port on the suction pipe near the
pump.
3 Open the shut-off valve on the pressure side
of the pump.
32 1818106-02
OIL FEED PUMP ACP 45/52 5 INSTALLATION AND INITIAL START
4 Fill the pump with oil while rotating the pump

manually. The pump is rotated by turning the
motor fan in the direction indicated by the
rotation arrow on the motor or connection
flange. (There are arrows for inlet and outlet
directions on the pump. Do not mix them up
with the rotation arrow.)
5 When the pump is filled, close the filling port
and refit the fan cover.
6 Check that all valves necessary for operation
are open.
7 Check that the motor rotates in the correct
direction by switching it briefly on and off, and
observing how the fan rotates.
8 Let the motor run for half a minute, and check
that the pressure gauges show normal
operation readings.
9 If the pump does not operate normally within
half a minute, it has to be stopped. Allow the
shaft seal to cool for at least five minutes
before attempting a new start.
10 If the pump does not operate after a few
attempts, see chapter 2 ‘‘Fault Finding’’ on
page 5.
1818106-02 33
5 INSTALLATION AND INITIAL START OIL FEED PUMP ACP 45/52
34 1818106-02
6 Spare Parts
X0 24 4 41 A
For motor
Ref. 571095 Rev. 0
Spare parts kits

Spare part kits, specification Inspection kit Overhaul kit Repair kit
Item Description Qty Qty Qty
1 Washer 2 2 2
2 Shaft seal 1 1
3 Retaining ring 1 1 1
4 O-ring 1 1 1
5 Gasket 1 1 1
6 Ball bearing 1 1 1
7 Gasket 1 1 1
8 Washer 1 1 1
9 Support ring 1 1 1
12 Valve trim 1
13 Rotor set 1
14 Rubber element 1
1818106-02 35
6 SPARE PARTS OIL FEED PUMP ACP 45/52
Spare parts kits, only for original motor

Spare part kits, specification Ball bearing kit,
for el. motor
Item Description Qty
15 Ball bearing, D-end 1
16 Ball bearing, N-end 1
Pump type Inspection Overhaul kit Repair kit Ball bearing Ball bearing
kit kit, kit, for Motor
M 112 M
for Motor M
100
ACP 045 K 571096-80 571096-81 571096-82 571096-96 571096-97
ACP 045 N 571096-80 571096-81 571096-83 571096-96 571096-97
ACP 052 K 571096-84 571096-85 571096-86 571096-96 571096-97
ACP 052 N 571096-84 571096-85 571096-87 571096-96 571096-97
36 1818106-02
Component
Description
Solenoid Valve Block,

Water
X019041A
Product No. 1765927-03
Printed Apr 2005

Book No. 1818120-02 V2

Alfa Laval reserve the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Alfa Laval company.
SE - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
Study instruction manuals and observe the
warnings before installation, operation,
service and maintenance.
Not following the instructions can result in

serious accidents with fatal injuries.
P000272A
In order to make the information clear only foreseeable conditions have
been considered. No warnings are given, therefore, for situations
arising from unintended usage of the machine and its tools.
A summary of the safety information is found in the Safety chapter

under divider 1.
Contents
1 Function Description 1
1.1 Application 1
1.2 Design 1
1.3 Working Principle 2
2 Fault Finding 3
3 Maintenance 5
3.1 Periodic Maintenance 5
3.2 Disassembly and Cleaning 6
4 Technical Data 7
4.1 Specification 7
4.2 Dimensions 8
5 Spare Parts 9
1818120-02
1818120-02
1 Function Description
1.1 Application
The solenoid valve block supplies water for
different functions in a separation system. The
water supply is opened and closed by the
control unit.
1.2 Design
The valve block consists of three solenoid
valves assembled together in a block with
hose connections for each valve outlet.
The valves (3) have a common water supply
channel which is connected to a high pressure
water supply (A) via a strainer (6). A vacuum
breaker (2) protects the supply line from under
pressure.
X019021A
The outlet flow of each of the valves is
controlled by a constant flow valve(4) 1. Coil
2. Vacuum breaker and drain
mounted in the valve outlet. A non-return 3. Solenoid valve
valve is attached to the constant flow valve, 4. Constant flow valve
SV 10. 5. Identification label
6. Strainer
7. Manual valve operation lever
8. AC solenoid indicator
A Water inlet, high pressure
1818120-02 1
1 Function Description Solenoid Valve Block, Water
There is an indicator (8) for each valve which

rotates when the solenoid is energized, i.e. the
valve is open.
All valves can be opened and closed manually

by pushing and turning the lever (7).
P000521A
Left position: Automatic operation
Right position: Manually opened valve
1.3 Working Principle

When a solenoid is energized, it pulls the
valve diaphragm up and lets water out through
the valve outlet. The indicator (8) rotates. The
flow of the outgoing water is determined by
the constant flow valve (4) and is kept
constant even at large variations in water
supply pressure.
When the control unit switches off the voltage

to the solenoid, the diaphragm goes down and
closes the valve outlet. The AC indicator (8)
stops rotating.
The vacuum breaker (2) lets air in if the

pressure in the supply line is lower than
outside. This is to prevent water being sucked
in from the valve outlet and polluting the
supply water line.
2 1818120-02
2 Fault Finding

Insufficient water Valves in supply line closed or partly Check the supply line and open the valves.
flow closed.
Clogged strainer. Remove and clean the strainer.
Excessive water Damaged (or missing) constant flow valve. Replace constant flow valve.
flow
Leakage Broken diaphragm or sticking parts. Disassemble and clean. Replace worn parts
Dirt affecting the solenoid parts. from spare parts kit and re-assemble.
Noise Unsatisfactory movement of solenoid core Disassemble, clean and re-assemble.

due to dirt.
Valve does not Sticking of solenoid core due to dirt. Disassemble, clean and re-assemble.
open
Open circuit due to loose connections or Examine the electrical system and correct the
blown fuses fault.
Low voltage (less than 85% of name plate Examine the power supply to the solenoid
rating). valve and correct the fault.
Coil burned-out (too high voltage). Replace the coil. Examine the power supply
and correct the fault.
1818120-02 3
2 Fault Finding Solenoid Valve Block, Water
4 1818120-02
3 Maintenance
3.1 Periodic Maintenance

• Clean the strainer regularly for trouble-
free operation.
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
If the strainer is clogged, water is not

supplied to the separator bowl for
conditioning of the sludge. This can
lead to breakdown and fatal injury.
• Disassemble and clean the solenoid valve

at regular service intervals or when
required, see below.
• Measure the water flows occasionally to

check if the constant flow valves are worn.
(Manually open the valve for e.g. one
minute and measure the amount of water
flowing out. See the spare parts list for
flow values.)
1818120-02 5
3 Maintenance Solenoid Valve Block, Water
3.2 Disassembly and

Cleaning
NOTE
Switch off electrical power and

depressurize the valve block before
disassembly.
• Make sure the lever for manual operation

is in the left position. Otherwise the
diaphragm spring could be damaged.
P000521A
• Take care not to drop and lose the core
spring when removing the core/diaphragm
subassembly.
• Place the core spring with its wide end

first into the core when assembling the
solenoid. The closed end should protrude
from top of the core.
• Make sure the O- rings are properly placed

in their grooves before assembly.
6 1818120-02
4 Technical Data
4.1 Specification
Media Fresh water, max. 10°dH
Media temperature Max. 85°C
Water pressure 200 – 600 kPa (2 – 6 bar)
Ambient temperature Max. 55 °C
Cable connection Pg11 (for cable Ø 9 – Ø 11)
Material
Body/bonnet Brass
Electrical data
Supply voltage 48 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption 6 – 9 Watts
Enclosure IP 65
Mounting style Upright
Weight 2.8 kg
Ref. 1765927 Rev.4
1818120-02 7
4 Technical Data Solenoid Valve Block, Water
4.2 Dimensions
X019011A
Ref. 1765927 Rev.4
8 1818120-02
5 Spare Parts
X019001A
Ref. 1765993 Rev. 1
Item Qty Article No. Description Remarks

1765993-80 Spare parts repair Kit including
1 3 Retaining clip
2 1 Spring, Core
3 1 Core assembly
4 3 Washer, spring
5 3 O-ring, S.B.S.A
6 1 Piston assembly
7 1 Disc, drain valve
8 1 Non-return valve, complete
9 4 O-ring
10 1 O-ring
1765993-81 Spare parts Coil kit, including:
11 1 Coil, 24V, 50/60 Hz
12 1 Washer, Adhesive tape
13 1 Indicator
1765993-82 Spare parts Coil kit, including:
11 1 Coil, 48V, 50/60 Hz
12 1 Washer, Adhesive tape
13 1 Indicator
1818120-02 9
5 Spare Parts Solenoid Valve Block, Water
10 1818120-02
Service Manual
Flow Control Valve, FCV-1

FCV-1
Article # 7005908
Operating Instructions P/N 7082/040V3520CDT
Typ 7082
Version: 09/2010
Bunsenstrasse D-85053 Ingolstadt
Manual 7082 Tel: (0841) 9654-0 Fax: (0841) 9654-590
www.schubert-salzer.com
Inhalt/Content/Sommaire
1 Operating Instructions Control Valve..................................................3
1.1 Spare Parts List 3
1.2 Technical Data 4
1.3 Installation 4
1.4 Replacing the Positioner 4
1.5 Dismantling and Assembling 5
1.6 Actuator Orientation 12
1.7 Lubrication and Bonding Plan 13
2 Digital Positioner 8049 4-wire...........................................................15

2.1 General 15
2.1.1 Installation 15
2.1.2 Intended use 15
2.1.3 Laws and regulations 15
2.1.4 General safety instructions 15
2.2 Technical Information 16
2.3 Supply Pressure 17
2.4 Electrical Connections 17
2.5 Manual Override 22
2.6 Configuration 23
2.7 Fault messages/Operating modes 25
2.8 Troubleshooting 25
2.9 Mounting On Linear Actuators 26
2.10 Additional Modules 28
2.11 Maintenance and repairs 29
2.12 Dimensions and Weights 29
2
1 Operating Instructions Control Valve
1.1 Spare Parts List
(Use original Schubert & Salzer Control Systems spare parts only!)
positioner
151 angled coupling piece

2 200 008
sensing pin cpl.
4 061 331
152
screw with trench
131 screw pin
8 504 980 8 540 237
90
130 acceptance for positioner NC
4 100 522
screw plug G1/4"
4 100 486
89
87 washer D162
4 100 531
nut M39 x 1,5
4 100 525
88
81 spring f.diaphragm actuator
4 100 541
82 diaphragm shell
4 059 601
83 supporting piston
4 100 521
hexagon cup nut M8
8 540 173
84
bolt
14 stop nut
4 100 527 4 100 543
150
85 diaphragm f. D250
4 100 530
hexagon screw M8x16
2 200 001
106
20 interior lip sealing
4 105 910
diaphragm disc
4 100 526
98
86 lower stop
4 100 524
nut M39 x 1,5
4 100 525
88
90 screw with trench
8 540 237
Bearing
4 100 534
99
78 tube
8 040 060
acceptance flange f. actuator
4 100 523
91
column
110 o-ring seal 40 x 3
4 100 536 4 106 138
100
2 200 009
actuator rod f. NC
4 100 532
92
4 100 535
coupling element
4 106 999
101
93 flange f. column
4 105 109
position indicator
4 105 140
95
94 nut M12
8 504 327
regulating nut
4 100 544
108
threaded pin
34 guide sleeve
4 100 766 8 540 008
102
thrust collar
29 4 100 759 + 4100786
nut G 1 1/4"
4 107 246
103
31 conical seal
4 100 760
adapter f. head section
4 100 539
104
32 supporting ring
4 100 767
head section
4 4100 758
2
40 washer for spring
4 100 752
head section seal
4 104 379
3
28 packing spring
4 100 785
disc
4 100 757
4
34 guide sleeve
4 100 766
body
4 100 803
1
13 piston rod
4 100 768
control cone M8 (lower part)
4 100 788
6a
6 control cone D16 (upper part)
4 100 787
screwed seat
4 100 823
41
5 seating seal
4 101 804
46 screwed seat seal

4 104 379
3
Besides the individual spare parts, repair kits are available for all valves containing all seals and
parts subject to wear.
1.2 Technical Data
Nominal sizes DN 15 up to DN 40
Connections Pipe thread acc. DIN 2999: Rp 1/2" - 1 1/2"
NPT thread: 1/2" - 1 1/2"
Nominal pressure PN40
Fluid temperature -30°C up to + 200°C
1.3 Installation
Remove all packing materials from the valve.
Prior to the installation the pipeline should be checked for contamination and foreign particles
and cleaned if necessary.
The control valve has to be mounted to the pipeline according to the direction of flow which is
indicated by arrows on the valve body.
The pipelines have to be connected stress-free to the installed valve. The pipeline must not be
pulled up to the valve in any case.
Bodies with threaded ends have to be sealed by a suitable sealing material.
Welding work on the pipelines must not be done within 50 cm of the valve. Otherwise valve seat
and seals could be damaged.
The proper function of the completely mounted valve has to be checked prior to putting the
installation into service.
Screwed seat (41) must be retightened with max. 250 Nm when leakage existing.
Mounting position:
The mounting position of valves with digital positioner is arbitrary.
1.4 Replacing the Positioner

1.4.1 Digital Positioner Types 8049
Unscrew supply air from port “P”

Remove positioner cap and disconnect electrical connections
Loosen pipe fitting at tube to actuator
Loosen 3 threaded pins (131) at the fastening ring
Take off positioner and sensing pin
4
1.5 Dismantling and Assembling
1.5.1 Dismantling the valve
1 Remove positioner (see: replacing the positioner).

2 Remove the diaphragm actuator, see 1.6.2 Dismantling the diaphragm actuator
3 Unscrew screwed seat (41).
4 Loosen disc nut (6a).
5 Remove seals (5), disc (4) and disc washer (6).
6 Pull out piston rod (13) from head section.
7 Unscrew head section (2) from body (1) and adapter f. head section (104).
8 Press out guide sleeves (34) and packing with assembly pin (art. no: 4010410).
(Please note sequence of individual parts for later assembly.)
1.5.2 Dismantling the diaphragm actuator
Dismantling the diaphragm actuator
On/Off and control actuator
For NC/NO actuators:
9 Vent actuator and drive into middle position

between upper and lower stop
9 Loosen screws of the coupling element (101)

and remove coupling element and position
indicator (95).
For NC actuators
9 Drive actuator into the lower stop position
For NO actuators
9 Drive actuator into upper stop position
9 Next dismantling step
9 Loosen nuts (94) and lift off actuator.
5
9 Unscrew columns
9 Remove two screws (106) in opposite position

to each other and replace with 2 screws which
are longer than the original screws (106) by at
least 40mm or longer
9 Remove the remaining screws (106) and nuts

(84)
9 By releasing the longer screws, the

compression springs (81) slowly expand
Caution: actuator is under high spring tension
9 Remove remaining screws and nuts
9 Remove compression spring (81), washer (87),

upper diaphragm shell (82)
6
On/Off actuator
9 Loosen nut (88) in the upper diaphragm shell

and remove cover (80)
For NO actuator:
9 Additionally remove o-ring (110)
9 Loosen headless screw (90)
Actuator with stroke adjustment/control actuator

9 Loosen nut (88) in the upper diaphragm shell
and remove acceptance for positioner (130)
For NO actuators:
9 Remove interior lip sealing (120), adjustment
screw (113) and lock nut (112) for adjustment
screw (113)
PRESS
9 Press out bearing (109)
9 Loosen headless screw (90)
On/Off actuator
9 Clamp actuator rod (92) on the spanner flat

and loosen nut (97)
9 Clamp actuator rod (92) on the spanner flat

and loosen stop nut (14)
9 Remove supporting piston (83), diaphragm

(85), diaphragm disc (98) and actuator rod
(92)
For control actuator

9 Remove bolt (150) from the actuator rod (92)
7
9 Loosen nut (88)
9 Remove stop (86) from the diaphragm shell

(82) in downward direction
9 Remove acceptance flange (91) and o-ring

(110)
PRESS
9 Remove o-ring (111), interior lip sealing (20),
9 Press out bearing (99) from stop (86)
9 Remove headless screw (90)
1.5.3 Assembling the Valve
Note lubrication and bonding plan!

Use original Schubert & Salzer Control Systems spare parts only!
1 Clean all parts.

2 Push guide sleeves and packing into the head section (2) in the right order.
The conical seals (31) have to be greased individually.

3 Screw head section (2) to adapter f. head section (104) firmly.
4 Push piston rod (13) with regulation nut (108) and threaded pin (102) carefully into the
head section (from the top).
5 Screw head section (2) and its seal (3) firmly to the body
6 Screw the disc washer (6), seals (5), disc (4), disc nut (6a) to the piston rod (13).
7 Assemble the diaphragm actuator to body, see 1.6.3. Assembling the diaphragm actuator
8 Vent the actuator to upper stop position.
9 Screw the screwed seat (41) and its seal (46) securely to the body.
10 Fit positioner.
11 Check positioner settings (readjust controller if necessary).
8
12
1.5.4 Assembling the diaphragm actuator
Assembling of the diaphragm actuator
9 Clean all parts and check them for damage.
9 Replace damaged parts.
On/Off actuator
9 Screw headless screw (90) into the diaphragm shell
For NC actuator
9 Screw cover (80) and nut (88) to the diaphragm shell
For NO actuator
9 Place o-ring (110) into the cover (80) and tightly screw
together with the diaphragm shell by using nut (88)
PRESS
For NO actuator:
9 Press in bearing (99) flush from above into the
acceptance for the positioner (130)
9 Insert interior lip sealing (120) from below
9 Insert o-ring (110) into the acceptance for the
positioner (130)
9 Screw together headless bolt (90) and diaphragm

shell
9 Screw acceptance for the positioner (130) and nut (88)
to the diaphragm shell (82)
9 Press in bearing (99) flush into the lower stop (86)

9 Insert interior lip sealing (20)
9 Insert o-ring (111) into the radial groove
The o-ring must not be damaged by the thread.

PRESS
9
9 Screw together headless screw (90) and diaphragm

shell (82)
9 Insert o-ring (110) into the acceptance flange (91)
9 Screw together acceptance flange (91) and stop (86)

as well as nut (88) and diaphragm shell
9 Insert actuator rod (92) with bolt (150) (for control

actuators) into the diaphragm shell from below
Caution:
The interior lip sealing (20) must not touch the thread of the
actuator rod (92) as it risks to be damaged. We recommend
the use of a mounting sleeve.
9 Put on actuator rod (92), diaphragm disc (98),
diaphragm (85), supporting piston (83) by using nut
(97) or stop nut (14)
Caution:
the preformed diaphragm must be correctly inserted into the
preformed supporting piston, i.e. the fabric support must be
on the side opposite to the pressurised space (fibre-coated
side on the side of the piston (83)).
9 Clamp actuator rod (92) on the spanner flat and screw

on by means of nut (97) or stop nut (14)
10
9 Insert springs (81) into the supporting piston (83)

9 Place upper diaphragm shell with washer (87) onto the
springs (81)
9 Screw on upper and lower diaphragm shell by using
two opposing screws M8x 50 or longer and nuts M8.
Caution:
tighten screws evenly until both diaphragm shells are
screwed together. If possible, align both shells by using 4
additional alignment pins in order to facilitate an even
tightening.
9 Screw together diaphragm shells by using screws

(106) and nuts (84)
9 Replace the longer screws M8x50 by screws (106)
and nuts (84)
Caution:
tighten screws evenly; avoid excessive pressing of the
diaphragm. Only replace screws M8x50 when all screws
(106) are tightened
9 Screw columns (100) to flange (93)
9 Drive actuator into middle position between upper and

lower stop
11
9 Move piston rod of the valve into the upper position
9 Screw together coupling element (101) and position

indicator (95) by using screws and nuts
Caution:
Check distance between column (100) and flange for column
(93). There must be a distance between 1mm ± 0,3mm.
It could be necessary to readjust this distance while turning

the regulation nut (108). Before turning, the threaded pin (102)
must be unlocked. After adjusting the regulating nut the
threaded pin (102) must be fixed against the regulating nut
(108)
9 Screw together columns (100) and flange (93) by

using nuts (94)
9 Assembly completed
Control actuator
For assembly of the positioner, see “2.9.2 Mounting the

Positioner”
1.6 Actuator Orientation

The valve actuator can be rotated by 360° to fit the specific requirements.
9 Loosen nut (103) in anticlockwise

direction
9 Actuator can now be turned to the

required position
9 Fasten nut (103) in clockwise

direction
12
1.7 Lubrication and Bonding Plan
The lubrication and bonding plan is valid for all standard versions of this valve
type.
Contact the manufacturer for suitable lubricants.
Special versions (e.g. silicon free, oxygen service or food applications) may
require other lubricant qualities.
1.7.1 Lubrication and Boding Plan for lower part of the valve
bonded with Loctite 640

(1 drop) lubricated with grease
lubricated with grease
bonded with Loctite 640
13
1.7.2 Lubrication and Boding Plan for diaphragm actuator
function: spring to open
positioner 90° rotated
lubricated
with grease
sealed
lubricated
with grease
function: spring to close
lubricated
with grease
lubricated
with grease
sealed sealed
lubricated
with grease
14
2 Digital Positioner 8049 4-wire
2.1 General
In addition to the instructions in this publication, the generally applicable safety and
accident prevention regulations must be observed.
If the information in this publication is insufficient in any way, our service organisation
will be happy to provide you with further information.
Before installation and start-up, please read through this publication carefully.
2.1.1 Installation
The positioner can be mounted to any pneumatic control valve with a stroke of 3 to 28 mm
(“top-mounted” design).
To ease mounting the valve various mounting kits are available which contain the required parts
to connect valve actuator and positioner, a feedback pin for sensing the valve stroke and an
optical valve position indicator if required.
As the adaptation of positioner to valve stroke is carried out automatically a standard mounting
kit is used, which can be adapted to the mechanical actuator requirements in case. All other
operation parameters (e.g. “split-range” operation) can be set through configuration software
which is supplied on request.
2.1.2 Intended use

The 8049 positioner is a control device to position pneumatically-controlled actuators. It is
supplied for installation on linear and swivel actuators in accordance with the instructions in this
operating manual.
The device must be used solely for the applications described in this operating manual and in
the data sheets. Any other application will be in breach of its intended use.
2.1.3 Laws and regulations

Legal regulations in force in the country concerned must be observed in connecting, fitting and
starting operation.
In particular, the following examples apply to potentially explosive areas:
IEC 60079-14 (international)
EN 60079-14 (EU, Germany)
The Ordinance on Industrial Safety and Health (Germany)
2.1.4 General safety instructions

The device may be fitted and started in operation only by qualified personnel who are familiar
with the fitting, start up and operation of this product.
Qualified personnel within the meaning of these installation and operating instructions are those
persons who, due to their professional training, knowledge and experience as well as their
knowledge of applicable standards can assess the work assigned to them and recognise
potential dangers.
With regard to devices designed to be explosion-proof, the personnel must be trained or
instructed, or have permission, to work on explosion-proof devices in potentially explosive
plants.
15
Hazards that may arise at the control valve from the flowing medium and the operating
pressure, as well as the actuating force and from moving parts must be prevented by adopting
suitable measures.
If there is a possibility of excessive movements or forces due to the magnitude of the supply air
pressure in pneumatic actuation, the supply air pressure must be limited by a suitable reducing
station.
The exhaust air opening must not be closed by the customer.
Appropriate transportation and proper storage of the device are taken as given.
2.2 Technical Information
Version 8049-4 8049-AS-I

nominal stroke 3 - 28 mm [0.12 - 1.1"]
voltage of the working resistance 3,5V @ 20mA -
auxiliary energy, pneumatic 4 - 6 bar [58 - 87 PSI]
air delivery* linear drive 40 Nl/min.
air delivery* rotory drive 100 Nl/min
ambient temperature -20 up to +75°C [-4 up to +167°F]
control signal 0/4 - 20 mA Single Slave, Slave Profil S - 7.3.4
auxiliary energy, electric 24 VDC supply with AS-I
adjustment of stroke and zero point self-learning
internal air consumption none
configuration with PC-Software
air quality not oiled, dry industrial air, content of solid < 30µ,
pressure dew point 20 K under the lowest ambient temperature
Actuation gas compressed air or non flammable gases (nitrogen, CO2,…)

mounting to control valve standardized mounting kits (also with optical position indicator)
pressure supply port G 1/8" or 1/8" NPT
protection class acc. DIN 40050 IP 65 (additional over pressure in the body with scavenging air)
16
2.3 Supply Pressure
The supply pressure is connected to port "P" (G1/8").

It must not exceed 6 bars, malfunctions might occur
then.
Air quality:
Non-oiled industrial air, solid content < 30 µm (1200
µinch), pressure dew point 20 K below lowest
ambient temperature.
2.4 Electrical Connections

The electrical connection must only be carried through by qualified personnel.
Follow the respective national safety standards (e. g. VDE 0100) for mounting,
start-up and operation.
All actions must only be carried through without voltage connected.
Disregarding the corresponding standard may cause heavy injuries and/or property
damage.
Shielded cables are recommended for the electrical connection. An additionally required voltage
supply should be connected through a separate second cable. After opening the positioner
cover the screw terminals of the connecting block (1) can be accessed.
The maximum connector size is 1.5 mm²
Cable bushings which are not used should be sealed in any case using a suitable
sealing cap to preserve the protection class (IP65).
1 screw terminals
2 key "IN"
3 key "OUT"
4 LED red
5 LED green
6 Function end / shield
7 interface connection
8 plug terminal for additional modules
17
The positioner has to be earthed. An earthing screw is located on the outside of the
casing and on the PCB near the connection terminals.Also, shielded cables must be
used.
2.4.1 Standard version (0/4 … 20mA)
+ 24V DC
1 Positioner
2 8049-4
U - 3
- max 24V AC/DC

# 4
5
+ max 70mA
+ 0/4 ... 20mA

6
I - 7
The positioner needs an external power supply (24 VDC, filtered, ripple 10% max.). The
maximum power consumption is 300mA.
In the standard version, the set point signal current applied is 4-20 mA.
The positioner can also be configured to operate at other set point signals in the 0-20 mA range.
The maximum load voltage is 3.5V
18
2.4.2 Version 0/2 … 10V
+ 24V DC
1 Positioner
2 8049-4
U - 3
(0-10V)
- max 24V AC/DC

# 4
5
+ max 70mA
+ 0/2 ... 10V

6
U - 7
The positioner needs an external power supply (24 VDC, filtered, ripple 10% max.). The
maximum power consumption is 300mA.
In the standard version, the set point signal current applied is 0-10 mA.
The positioner can also be configured to operate at other set point signals in the 0-10 mA range.
The load impedance is approx. 25 kOhm
19
2.4.3 Version with one M12x1 (5-pin) plug connection
Top view of Pin on Terminal

Function
positioner plug plug on PCB
Pin 1 Power supply +24V Terminal 1
4 3
Pin 2 Set point signal (+) Terminal 6
5
Pin 3 Power supply (-) Terminal 3
Pin 4 Alarm output * Terminal 4
1 2
Pin 5 Set point signal (-) Terminal 7
* Alarm output 24V DC. Bridge between +24V (terminal 1) and K1.1 (terminal 5)
2.4.4 Version with two M12x1 (5-pin) plug connections
Top view of Pin on Pin on Terminal

Function
positioner plug plug A plug B on PCB
Pin 1 Alarm K1.1 (In) Terminal 4
Pin 2 Set point signal (+) Terminal 6
Pin 3 Alarm K1.2 (Out) Terminal 5
4 3 Pin 4 Set point signal (-) Terminal 7
5 Pin 5
Pin 1 Power supply +24V Terminal 1
1 2 Pin 2
Pin 3 Power supply (-) Terminal 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
B A
A = Plug connection A
B = Plug connection B
20
2.4.5 Alarm Output
If required an alarm output (terminals 4 and 5) can be monitored to evaluate the valve
performance. It gets active if the positioner is not able to track the stroke value against the set-
point signal (e.g. for failing or too low supply pressure). Inverting the alarm output is possible
through the communication software.
In case of an alarm situation a connected voltage (max. 24V AC/DC) is switched.
The admissible current load is 70 mA, allowing also relays to be operated directly. As shown
below it is convenient to use the supply voltage (24 V) to operate the alarm output.
Examples for a relay connection:
K1.1 +24V
K1.1 +24V
K1.2 0V
K1.2 0V
For inductive loads a recovery diode has to be provided.

With an active alarm output the red LED on the connecting plate is on.
2.4.6 AS-I Version
Positioners in AS-Interface design have an AS-I plug connection on the rear side
of the positioner which connects the positioner to the AS-I control circuit. An
additional voltage supply is not required.
As AS-I is a PELV system, the grounding terminal must not be connected to the
system ground.
For further information, please refer to “Additional modules”
21
2.5 Manual Override
Switching over to manual operation requires an “active” positioner, i.e. the positioner has to be
powered electrically and connected to the supply air.
Switching over to manual operation mode is carried through by pushing button "IN" (2) or "OUT"
(3) on the connecting plate for two seconds approximately. The red LED (4) on the connecting
plate lights up.
Pushing button "IN" (supply air to actuator) or "OUT" (actuator is vented) opens or closes the
valve.
Switching off the manual operation mode is carried through by pushing both buttons for a short
moment. The valve moves back to its initial position corresponding to the valid set-point signal.
If both buttons are actuated more than 2-3 seconds, the positioner switches to self-
adjusting mode.
22
2.6 Configuration
2.6.1 Self Adjusting Mode
The adjustment (self adjusting) of mounted positioners has been carried through in
the factory. Normally it is only required after replacing a positioner or repairing the
valve.
After a new or replaced positioner has been mounted to the valve it has to be adjusted as
follows:
1. Press both buttons "IN" and "OUT" until the green LED lights up (after 2-3 seconds).
2. The valve opens and closes several times, after completion the LED turns off. A lit red
LED indicates an error (e.g. supply air pressure too low!).
3. After completing the adjustment free from errors the positioner return to control mode
automatically.
23
2.6.2 Configuration
Setting the positioner function parameters can be carried out using a PC interface and the
corresponding configuration software “DeviceConfig”.
This software is required if the factory settings of the positioner have to be modified (e.g. setting
up split-range operation, implementation of special flow characteristics).
It is not required for start-up and operation of the 8049 positioner nor adjustment after a
potential replacement if no special local settings were stored.
24
2.7 Fault messages/Operating modes
The operating mode of the positioner is indicated by two LEDs.
The signals are explained in the following table.
LED red LED green Fault Description
x xx 1x + pause (2s)

Positioner is not calibrated Calibration required
x xxxx 2x + pause (2s)

Setpoint fault
No control signal or control signal
out of range
x xxxxx 3x + pause (2s)

Control fault
Valve does not reach target
position
x xxxxxxx 4x + pause (2s)

Operating voltage fault
Supply voltage of positioner too
low
x xx Interval 0.5s

Misc. fault
Operating mode
x OFF Manual mode
OFF
x Positioner is performing self-calibration
xxx Green-Red-Green
Positioner is ready for operation (only at restart)
The operating modes and fault messages that are signalled via the group alarm output can be
configured with the "DeviceConfig" software.
The output of the "Control fault" only is set as default.
2.8 Troubleshooting
Fault / Symptom Possible cause(s) Action

Actuator does not move x Pilot pressure is too low. x Increase pilot pressure to 4-6
bar.
Actuator does not move right x Pilot pressure is too low x Increase pilot pressure.
up to stop (at 20mA). Positioner is not adjusted x Make adjustments.
correctly.
In stationary automatic x Leak in connection from x Find leak and correct.
operation (constant set point positioner to actuator.
signal) the solenoid valves x Leak in actuator. x Change seals in actuator.
continue to operate.
Solenoid valves are not x Faulty solenoid valve x Check solenoid valve plug
operating. connections. connections.
x Contamination (swarf,
particles) in the solenoid x Exchange solenoid valves.
valves.
Valve fails to open. x Feedback pin is loose. x Check feedback pin seat.
Positioner not working. x Polarity of set point signal x Check polarity of set point
has reversed. signal.
25
Fault / Symptom Possible cause(s) Action
Valve positions not reached x Positioner is not adjusted x Run self-adjustment.
correctly. correctly.
Positioner does not respond x Positioner is in manual x Change to automatic mode by
to set point signal. mode. Red LED is on. pressing both buttons (IN and
OUT).
2.9 Mounting On Linear Actuators

2.9.1 Fixing the Mounting Kit
The mounting kit is attached to the upper end of

the valve actuator. This attachment might vary
due to the different actuator designs.
Coupling the positioner to the valve is carried
4 through using a mechanical stopper which is
connected to the valve stem. Feedback pin and
spring are positioned on its flat surface and feed
back the valve position to the positioner.
The stopper has to be adjusted in such a way that
dimension “X“ (measured from the upper edge of
3 the adapting ring to the flat surface of the not
actuated valve) is achieved (see below). The
X
stopper has to be fixed by locking or some

2 adhesive.
Remark: Depending on the actuator design
possibly no position (e.g. diaphragm actuators
with columns). In this case the adaptor ring is
fixed directly to the valve actuator. However the
1 adjustment dimension “X“ remains the same, i.e.
the feedback pin extends into the actuator.
1 valve actuator
2 stopper
3 mounting kit
4 positioner
26
Dimension “X“ is not constant but depends on the valve stroke:
Valid for actuators with

65 springs to close:
60 spring closes
55 X in mm = 50.8 + stroke/2
"X" mm
50
45
Valid for actuators with
40 springs to open:
35 spring opens
30
X in mm = 50.8 - stroke/2
0 5 10 15 20 25
stroke mm
2.9.2 Mounting the Positioner
Put positioner with feedback pin and spring on mounting kit.

Tighten the three threaded pins in the fastening ring.
Connect output "Y1" with valve actuator.

Take care that this connection is sealed properly, as otherwise the solenoid
valves in the positioner will operate permanently.
Connect supply air (port „P“).

Open positioner cover and provide the electrical connections.
Carry through positioner adjustment.
Close positioner cover.
Dismount the positioner correspondingly in reverse order.
27
2.10 Additional Modules
The positioner can be equipped with auxiliary modules (e.g. analogous feedback).
These auxiliary modules are put on to the plug-in place on the connection circuit board.
Please gather the technical data from the operating instructions of the corresponding auxiliary
modules.
2.10.1 AS-I Communication-Module
The optional AS-Interface module allows integrating the digital positioner 8049 in an AS-I circuit
and thus bypassing analogue output modules. This saves time in cabling and maintenance.
If the AS-I module is to be retrofitted to an existing installation the kit contains the AS-I plug-in
plate, 1 connecting cable for M12-connections and a screw cap containing the common AS-I
LED’s for visualisation.
Mounting the AS-I-module:
1. Open casing cover.

2. Connect positioner to Software DevConfig (plug 7).
3. Change set point source to „digital“ (can be found at positioner setting in tab
“Special”).
4. Store data to positioner.
5. Cut positioner from 24 V DC supply.
6. Plug AS-I module to prepared plug connection on connecting plate (8).
7. Remove PG-gland on casing and screw in AS-I connection plug.
8. Mount LED with socket to second screw joint.
9. Connect AS-I and LED cables to AS-I module (plugs vary in pole number and cannot
be connected in the wrong way).
10. Close casing cover.
11. Connect positioner to AS-I circuit.
28
The AS-I module is supplied with AS-I address 0 as a standard. So the device can be fitted to
existing installations without problems.
x Profile 7.3 „Plug and Play“

Supply AS-I
Value range 0 – 10000 (corresponds to 0 – 100%)
AS-I profile 7.3
ID-Code 3hex
ID2-Code 4hex
IO-Code 7hex
Signals
LED green Voltage on AS-I terminals
LED red AS-I communication error, peripheral
error, positioner error
Design current < 350 mA
Design voltage AS-I (30 V DC)
Isolation voltage > 500 V
EMC Acc. EN 50081-2, EN61000-6-2
2.11 Maintenance and repairs

The device is maintenance-free.
A filter element, located at the rear of the underside of the metal body, can be unscrewed and
cleaned or exchanged when necessary.
The maintenance instructions for any in-line connected supply air reducing station must be
observed.
2.12 Dimensions and Weights
M16x1,5 115
121
2 24
G1/8"
A P
8,5
49
56 65 66
Weight 1 kg approx.
29
30
31
Original Schubert & Salzer Produkte werden ausgeliefert über:
Original Schubert & Salzer products delivered by:
Les produits originaux Schubert & Salzer sont livrés par:
32
Valve Sizing Acc. IEC 60534
12.02.2010
Company: Alfa Laval FCV-1
Ref.: maintain 3 psid
Process Data / Medium: Water / Condition Of State: Liquid
State Of Operation: min. norm. max.
Inlet Pressure p1 50 psig

Outlet Pressure p2 47 psig
Temperature T1 20,0 °C
Flow Q 30,00 G.P.M.
Valve Data / 3/2-Way Control Valve 7082, Flow P1->A
Nominal Size 40 mm
Flow characteristic (mod.) linear
Flow Coefficient Kvs 27 (100%)

calculated Kv 14,98
Rangeability 30,0:1
calculated 1,80:1
Valve Opening 60,7 %
Max. Flow (y = 100%) 54,07 G.P.M.

Flow Reserve 80,2 %
Pressure Recovery Factor FL 0,750
Piping
Nominal Size (for optimized flow velocity)

Input 40 mm
Output 40 mm
Flow Velocity
Input 1,51 m/s
Output 1,51 m/s
Noise Pressure Level
Calculation acc. VDMA 24422/79 35 db(A)

Measured correction 0 db(A)
Value to be expected 35 db(A)
Fluid Properties / Medium: Water / Condition Of State: Liquid
Density 999 kg/m3

Saturation pressure 0,0234 bar,abs.
Viscosity 1,01 mm²/s (cSt)
Schubert & Salzer Control Systems GmbH

Bunsenstr. 38 - D 85053 Ingolstadt
Tel. +49 (0) 841 9654-0
www.schubert-salzer.com
ValSize 9.79 / Calculated by M. Sauter info.cs@schubert-salzer.com
SECTION 8
Spare Parts Catalog

PU 635 Commissioning spares
Item Description P/N Qty Unit Price Amount

1 Commissioning Kit 576452‐10 1
2 PA 635 Inspection Kit 563859‐02 1
3 Lubrication oil 1
4 Filter Cartage, 5 micron ‐ CUNO G78B8 1
PU 635 Two (2) year operating spares

1 PA 635 Inspection Kit 563859‐02 4
2 PA 635 Major Service Kit 563869‐06 1
3 ACP045N Overhaul kit 571096‐81 2
4 Valve block, water 1765993‐83 1
5 Connection Hose, Oil 573695‐80 2
6 Connection Hose, Water 1765937‐01 1
7 Connection Hose, Water 1765934‐04 1
8 Lubrication oil , 4 lit 567334‐02 3
9 Filter Cartage, 5 micron ‐ CUNO G78B8 3
PU 635 Critical Insurance spares

1 Pressure transmitter with contact 574840‐02 1
2 A/B Analog Input Card 1769‐IF8 1
3 A/B Analog Output Card 1769‐OF8C 1
4 A/B Power Input Card, Compact Logix 1768‐PB3 1
5 A/B PanelView 700+ 2711P‐B7C4D1 1
6 Level Transmitter, C to C 65.5" ABB 261GS.F.J.T.5.S.H 1
7 Control Valve (FCV‐1) complete 7082/040V3520CD 1
.
Spare parts catalogue, Reservdelskatalog, Ersatzteilkatalog, Catalogue de piéces de rechange, Varaosaluettelo,

Catalogue de piezas de recambio,

, Catalogo parti di ricambio, Reservedelskatalog,
Catalogo de pecas sobressalentes, , Reserveonderdelen-catalogus
P 635
Specication No. 881202-07-01/3

Book No. 578547 02 Rev. 6
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00

Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40
© Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2008-12-18

Contents
1 Read this rst 5
1.1 General information 6
1.2 Translation list 9
2 Machine bottom part 12

2.1 Driving device vertical 14
3 Separator bowl 16
4 Inlet and outlet device 18
5 Belt driving device 20

5.1 Centrifugal clutch 22
6 Set of plates 24
7 Speed sensor kit 26
8 Monitoring kit 28
9 Cover interlocking kit 30
10 Junction box kit 32
11 Set of tools 34
11.1Hydraulic tool kit 36
12 Inspection kit 42
13 Overhaul kit 44
14 Support kit 46
3
15 Lifting tool 48
16 Tool box 50
17 Cross reference list 52
4
1 Read this rst
1 Read this rst
Check the machine unit number on the name-plate before using this catalogue
Kontrollera maskinenhetens nummer på maskinskylten innan du använder katalogen
Das Typenschild - ein Hinweis zur korrekten Ersatzteilnummer
La plaque de la machine, un guide pour trouver le numéro de piéce de rechange correct
La placa-marca de la máquina - guía del número correcto del repuesto
!" # — $"% &

'

La targhetta della macchina - guida al corretto numero dei ricambi
La placa do fabricante da máquina - um guia do número correto das partes sobressalentes
Konekilpi - opastin oikeaan varaosanumeroon
( )*9 ;< =;>?< @* 9;F< G I I
Het gegevensplaatje - een wegwijzer naar het juiste onderdeelnummer
Typeskiltet - en guide til det rette reservedelsnummer
5
P 635
1.1 General information
Safeguard your commitment to quality by always using genuine

Alfa Laval spare parts.
Remember, Alfa Laval cannot accept responsibility for the
failure of a separator equipped with non-original spare parts.
We guarantee the quality and reliability of our products.
Följ ditt kvalitetstänkande genom att endast använda Alfa Laval

originalreservdelar.
Kom ihåg att Alfa Laval inte tar något ansvar för fel på en
separator, som innehåller icke-originaldelar. Vi garanterar
kvaliteten och driftsäkerheten endast hos våra egna produkter.
Aus Rücksicht auf Ihr Bestreben um beste Qualität sollten Sie

nur Alfa Laval Originalersatzteile benutzen.
Vergessen Sie nicht, Alfa Laval kann keine Verantwortung für
das Versagen eines Separators übernehmen, der nicht mit
Originalersatzteilen versehen ist. Wir garantieren Qualität und
Zuverlässigkeit unserer Produkte.
Préservez la qualité de vos équipments en n‘employant que des

pièces de rechange Alfa Laval.
N’oubliez pas q’Alfa Laval décline toute responsabilité en cas
de panne d’un séparateur non équipé de pièces de rechange
d’origine. Nous garantissons la qualité et la abilité de nos
produits.
Mantenga su compromiso con la calidad, al usar siempre piezas

de repuesto Alfa Laval auténticas.
Recuerde que Alfa Laval no acepta responsabilidad por el
fallo de una separadora equipada con piezas de repuesto no
originales. Garantizamos la calidad y abilidad de nuestros
productos.
6
1.1 General information 1 Read this rst
Y$' [\

% "
& &
[
%$
[

] Alfa Laval.
^ , Alfa Laval
&
&

&\[
,
_ [

. ` $ "
% [\
% #
['.
Salvaguardate la vostra garanzia di qualità facendo sempre uso

di parti di ricambio Alfa Laval autentiche.
Tenete presente che la Alfa Laval non può accettare
responsabilità per avaria ad un separatore attrezzato con parti
di ricambio non originali. Noi garantiamo la qualità l’afdabilità
dei nostri prodotti.
Proteja o seu cometimento a qualidade usando sempre peças

sobressalentes genuinas Alfa Laval.
Não esqueça que Alfa Laval não aceita responsabilidade por
falha de uma separadora equipada com peças sobressalentes
não genuinas. Nós garantimos a qualidade e a conança dos
nossos produtos.
Varmistakaa vastuunne laadusta käyttämällä aina alkuperäisiä

Alfa Laval varaosia.
Muistakaa, Alfa Laval ei voi hyväksyä vastuuta ei-alkuperäsillä
varaosilla varustetun separaattorin vaurioista. Me takaamme
tuotteidemme laadun ja käyttövarmuuden.
{|}*@ G~;? )F; >;=)< =F ?

;< Alfa Laval.
>@@ G)F~; F ; Alfa Laval 9@ =@ == @GI;
@< GG=;>?<, ; )* >G @}=@* =?
? . {GF=@ )F; ? @G*
=F 9 =< )F.
7
P 635
Streef naar een zo hoog mogelijke kwaliteit en gebruik

uitsluitend originele Alfa Laval reserveonderdelen. Streef naar
een zo hoog mogelijke kwaliteit en gebruik uitsluitend originele
Alfa Laval reserveonderdelen.
Vergeet niet dat Alfa Laval niet verantwoordelijk is voor een
defecte separator die niet-originele onderdelen bevat. Wij
garanderen de kwaliteit en betrouwbaarheid van onze eigen
produkten.
Hold Dem til den kvalitet, De har valgt at satse på, ved altid at
anvende ægte Alfa Laval reservedele.
Husk, at Alfa Laval ikke kan påtage sig noget ansvar for fejl
på en separator, som indeholder uoriginale dele. Vi kan kun
garantere kvalitet og driftsikkerhed på vore egne produkter.
8
1.2 Translation list 1 Read this rst
1.2 Translation list
Översättningslista
Übersetzungsliste
Liste de traduction
Lista de traducciones
Part no. Reservdelsnummer Teil-Nr. Numéro de pièce Pieza No.
Qty Antal Anzahl Quantité Cantidad
Description Benämning Bezeichnung Dénomination Descripción
Notes Anmärkningar Anmerkungen Remarques Notas
Machine type Maskintyp Maschinentyp Type de machine Tipo de máquina
Product no. Produktnr Produktnummer Numéro de produit Número de producto
Machine unit description Maskinblocksbenämning Bezeichnung des Dénomination de partie Descripción de sección de
Maschinenblocks de machine la máquina
Machine unit no. Maskinblocksnr Maschinenblock Nr. Partie de machine nº No. de sección de
máquina
Subassembly description Undergruppsbenämning Bezeichung der Dénomination de Descripción de

Untergruppe sous-ensemble subconjunto
Subassembly no. Undergruppsnr Untergruppe Nr. Nº de sous-ensemble Número de subconjunto
See page Se sidan Siehe Seite Vòir page Véase la página
Fig. ref. Figurhänvisning Bildhinweise Réf. de g. Referencia de gura
Product name Produktnamn Produktname Nom du produit Nombre del producto
Exchange necessitates Utbyte nödvändiggör Austausch erfordert Le remplacement El racmbio requiere el

rebalancing of bowl ombalansering av kulan Wiederauswuchtung der nécessite le rééquilibrage reequilibrado del rotor
Trommel du bol
See separate spare parts Se separat reservdelslista Siehe separate Voir liste séparée des Véase la lista de piezas
list Ersatzteilliste pièces de rechange separada
Not delivered as spare Levereras ej som Nicht als Ersatzteil Non livré comme piéce de No se entrega como pieza
part reservdel geliefert rechange de recambio
9
P 635

Lista traduzioni
Lista para tradução
Käännösluttelo
Part no. % Nr. parte Numero de peca Varaosanumero
Qty —& Quantita Quantidade Lukumäärä
Description & Descrizione Descricao Nimitys
Notes Note Notas Huomautuksia
Machine type `# Tipo macchina Tipo de maquina Konetyyppi
Product no. "$ Nr.prodotto No. do produto Tuotteen no
Machine unit description & !" Descrizione unita Descricao da unidade da Koneenosan nimitys
# macchina maquina
Machine unit no. " # Nr. unita macchina Numero de unidade da Koneenosan no
maquina
Subassembly description & $ Descrizione sottogruppo Descriao do subconjunto Alaryhmän nimitys
Subassembly no. Y$ Nr. sottogruppo Número de subconjunto Alaryhmän no
See page .

$ Vedi pagina Véase la página Ks sivu
Fig. ref.
"
" Rif. g. Referencia de gura Kuvaviite
Product name & "$ Nome prodotto Nombre del producto Tuotteen nimi
Exchange necessitates ^ !$ La sostituzione comporta El racmbio requiere el Vaihdettaessa kuula
rebalancing of bowl !
&" !! la equilibratura del reequilibrado del rotor tasapainoitettava
tamburo uudelleen
See separate spare parts . [%' % Vedi lista separata delle Véase la lista de piezas Katso erillistä
list

' parti di ricambio separada varaosaluetteloa
Not delivered as spare

& &

Non fornito come parte di No se entrega como pieza Ei toimiteta varaosana
part

ricambio de recambio
10

Vertaallijst
Oversættelseliste
Part no. =F< I Onderdeelnr. Reservedelsnummer
Qty I Hoeveelheid Antal
Description @}? Beschrijving Betegnelse
Notes ;?@< Opmerkingen Bemaerkninger
Machine type I)< =;>?=< Machinetype Maskintype
Product no. =F< )F< Produktnr. Produktnr.
Machine unit description @}? G?=< Machineblokbenaming Maskinbetegnelse

=;>?<
Machine unit no. =F< G?=< Machineblokbenamning Maskinnr.

=;>?<
Subassembly description @}? G)G?=< Subgroepbenamning Undergruppsbetegnelse
Subassembly no. =F< G)G?=< Subgroepnr. Undergruppenr.
See page )@ @*9 Zie blz. Se side
Fig. ref. )=)? @ @F Afb. ref. Figurhenvisning
Product name =* )F< Produktnaam Produktnavn
Exchange necessitates ? )@* Vervangning vereist Udskriftning kraever

rebalancing of bowl @)I=; )*< herbalanceren van de kogel afbalcering af kuglen
G I=)G
See separate spare parts list )@ @9? * Vervangning vereist van de Se spaat reservedelsliste
kogel
Not delivered as spare part @ )9*9@ < Niet geleverd als Levereres ikke som reservedel
F reserveonderdeel
11
P 635
2 Machine bottom part

Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
572704-
Ref Part No Description -02 Notes
Quantity
1 578281 80 Frame bottom part 1
1A 578280 02 Cover 1
1B 223412 45 O-ring 1
1C 223101 49 Washer 6
1D 221045 09 Screw 6
2 560131 02 Frame support 4
3 70490 Washer 4
4 2210462 32 Screw 4
5 552766 07 Washer 2
6 526350 04 Plug 1
7 565378 01 Plug 1
8 223404 05 O-ring 1
9 571743 80 Oil pin 1
10 562992 01 Bottom bearing holder 1
11 2234121 38 O-ring 1
12 562091 01 Strainer 1
13 573035 02 Wing insert 1
14 221706 01 Screw 1
15 2234121 40 O-ring 1
16 562094 01 Labyrinth ring holder 1
17 562095 02 Labyrinth ring 1
18 223412 23 O-ring 1
19 221716 23 Screw 2
20 585653 80 Driving device vertical 1 See page 14
21 221721 24 Screw 3
22 571405 80 Neck bearing cover 1
22A 221711 18 Screw 1
23 223412 46 O-ring 1
24 566788 21 Seal ring 1
25 564773 02 Deector ring 1
26 223406 28 O-ring 1
27 560202 01 Pipe 1
28 223404 20 O-ring 1
29 539418 02 Elbow 1
30 526352 06 Bushing 1
31 564493 02 Operating water cover 1
32 566788 05 Seal ring 1
33 223412 46 O-ring 1
34 41456 Washer 3
35 221040 46 Screw 3
36 221040 08 Screw 2
41 561773 03 Plug 1
42 74067 O-ring 1
43 221716 23 Screw 1
44 578019 80 Front casing 1
44A 578017 02 Holder 1
44B 578019 01 Front casing 1
44C 221716 22 Screw 4
44D 221721 37 Screw 4
45 221126 04 Screw 1
46 532333 03 Clamp 1
47 223101 94 Washer 1
12
2 Machine bottom part
32 35
36 34
31
33
28
26
27
29 25
30 22
24 22A
23
21
20
19
A
16
18
17
13
15
14 10
5
7
11 9
12
8
41 5
6
42
43
4
3 45
47 44C
46
44D
44
1
44A
2 1B
1A 44B
2120P
1C
1D
13
P 635
2.1 Driving device vertical

585653-
Quantity
1 560134 01 Bowl spindle 1
2 548747 08 Ball bearing 1
3 584048 80 Top bearing seat 1
4 223642 36 Snap ring 1
5 580051 02 Top bearing housing 1
6 562109 03 Helical spring 3
7 562110 02 Composite spring 4
8 560406 01 Plug 4
9 581543 01 Spindle pulley 1
10 548744 03 Self-align roller bearing 1
11 563677 02 Lubrication oil orice 1
12 223404 20 O-ring 1
13 562995 01 Oil pump 1
14 571453 02 Fan 1
15 223406 30 O-ring 1
16 580049 01 Air deector 1
17 221716 22 Screw 3
14
2.1 Driving device vertical 2 Machine bottom part
14
15
4
2
3
6
7
8
5
17
16
10
11
12
13
1522Z
15
P 635
3 Separator bowl
576869-
Quantity
1 560634 80 Bowl body 1
1A 560637 01 Guide lug 1
1B 64416 Cylindrical pin 1
2 560638 01 Rectangular ring 1
3 560639 01 Operating slide 1
4 545869 03 Nozzle Ø 1,5 mm 1
6 564478 01 Valve plug 3
7 565217 01 Holder 1
8 223403 61 O-ring 1
9 576173 01 Hexagon head screw 6
10 576279 01 Lock washer 6
11 223406 39 O-ring 1
12 579323 02 Operating water ring 1
13 566788 15 Seal ring 1
14 576173 01 Hexagon head screw 6
15 260104 05 O-ring 1
16 574226 01 Discharge slide 1
18 560649 01 Nut 1
19 578184 01 Cap nut 1
20 578220 80 Distributor 1
21 576884 02 Distributor support 1 Brass
21 576884 04 Distributor support 1 Alternative, Stainless steel
22 223406 23 O-ring 1
23 221716 16 Screw 4
24 223406 22 O-ring 1
25 563089 80 Bowl disc 81
26 563089 80 Bowl disc 2
27 563089 01 Bowl disc 1
28 576987 02 Level ring 1 Brass
28 576987 04 Level ring 1 Alternative, Stainless steel
30 223406 23 O-ring 1
31 576798 80 Top disc 1
32 223406 37 O-ring 1
33 223406 10 O-ring 1
34 576938 03 Gravity disc Ø 81 mm 1
35 576938 80 Set of gravity discs 1
35A 576938 02 Gravity disc Ø 88 mm 1
35B 576938 04 Gravity disc Ø 75 mm 1 Alternative
35C 576938 05 Gravity disc Ø 70,3 mm 1 Alternative
35D 576938 06 Gravity disc Ø 66,5 mm 1 Alternative
35E 576938 07 Gravity disc Ø 63,4 mm 1 Alternative
35F 576938 08 Gravity disc Ø 61 mm 1 Alternative
35G 576938 09 Gravity disc Ø 59 mm 1 Alternative
35H 576938 10 Gravity disc Ø 57,5 mm 1 Alternative
35I 576938 11 Gravity disc Ø 55,9 mm 1 Alternative
35J 576938 12 Gravity disc Ø 54,3 mm 1 Alternative
35K 576938 13 Gravity disc Ø 52,7 mm 1 Alternative
36 576938 01 Gravity disc Ø 40 mm 1 Clarier disc
37 576932 01 Bowl hood 1
38 564403 01 Seal ring 1
39 260247 02 O-ring 1
40 560661 80 Lock ring 1
16
3 Separator bowl
40
19
37 18
38 16
39
34 17
35A-K
33 36 1A
32 15
31
1
27 2
25,26 1B 11
6
3
28
30 4
5
24 8
7
20
12
22 10
14
21 9
13
23
2119B
17
P 635
4 Inlet and outlet device

576874-
Quantity
1 577024 81 Inlet and outlet pipe 1
2 223406 26 O-ring 1
3 588221 80 Frame hood 1
4 561957 01 Height adjusting ring 4
5 576933 01 Support ring 1
6 221716 09 Screw 4
7 521127 11 O-ring 1
8 41456 Washer 6
9 221040 05 Screw 6
10 223406 25 O-ring 1
11 223406 25 O-ring 1
12 576866 02 Connecting housing 1
13 223406 32 O-ring 1
14 552766 09 Washer 1
15 1763780 07 Nipple 1
16 1761834 09 Cu washer 1
17 1766162 01 Non return valve 1
18 567501 02 Nut 1
19 574625 02 Inlet bend 1
20 223406 16 O-ring 1
21 223642 22 Snap ring 1
22 588222 01 Safety device 1
23 221046 22 Screw 1
18
4 Inlet and outlet device
19
20
21
18
23
22
16 17
12 14
15
13 6
5
4
9
8
11
10
2
1
2121B
19
P 635
5 Belt driving device

561118-
Ref Part No Description -01 -02 Notes
Quantity
50 Hz
60 Hz
1 577705 80 Clutch cover 1 1
2 561114 01 Cover support 1 1
3 564095 80 Centrifugal clutch 1 See page 22
3 564095 81 Centrifugal clutch 1 See page 22
4 221045 60 Screw 1 1
5 223107 35 Spring washer 1 1
6 547837 01 Washer 1 1
7 221040 42 Screw 3 3
8 41456 Washer 3 3
9 221721 37 Screw 4 4
10 41456 Washer 8 8
11 221040 58 Screw 4 4
12 35120 Nut 4 4
13 563464 01 Flat belt 1
13 563467 01 Flat belt 1
20
5 Belt driving device
12
11
10
7
8
2
9
13
6
5
4
1
1524D
21
P 635
5.1 Centrifugal clutch

564095-
Quantity
50 Hz
60 Hz
1 560426 02 Motor belt pulley 1
1 560426 04 Motor belt pulley 1
2 548051 49 Ball bearing 2 2
3 547833 01 Spacing ring 1 1
4 66251 Snap ring 1 1
5 564089 80 Coupling hub 1
5 564100 80 Coupling hub 1
6 223641 18 Snap ring 1 1
8 564075 80 Friction block 5 3
9 549325 01 Cover 1 1
10 223641 20 Snap ring 1 1
22
5.1 Centrifugal clutch 5 Belt driving device
1523D
23
P 635
6 Set of plates
549572-
Quantity
3 1270019 Set of safety labels 1
3A 1270018 01 Safety label sv 1
3B 1270018 02 Safety label en 1
3C 1270018 03 Safety label de 1
3D 1270018 04 Safety label fr 1
3E 1270018 05 Safety label es 1
3F 1270018 06 Safety label ru 1
3G 1270018 07 Safety label it 1
3H 1270018 08 Safety label pt 1
3I 1270018 09 Safety label pl 1
3J 1270018 10 Safety label el 1
3K 1270018 11 Safety label 1
3L 1270018 12 Safety label zh 1
3M 1270018 13 Safety label da 1
3N 1270018 14 Safety label ar 1
3O 1270018 15 Safety label nl 1
3P 1270018 16 Safety label cs 1
3Q 1270018 17 Safety label ja 1
3R 1270018 18 Safety label ko 1
3S 1270018 19 Safety label no 1
4 577802 01 Name sign 1
5 66169 Drive screw 4
6 553171 01 Label 50 Hz 1
6 553272 01 Label 60 Hz 1
7 555529 01 Plate with arrow 1
8 1270001 Lifting instruction 1
9 554214 02 Cable tie 1
24
6 Set of plates
1 2 3,3A-S
4 5 6
50 Hz
60 Hz
7 8 9
1. 2.
GB FR
Read instruction manual before lifting. Lire le manuel dínstructions avant de lever le
séparateur.
DE
SE
Vor dem Heben immer erst Anleitungen im Hand-
buch lesen! Läs instruktionsboken före lyft.
IT NL
Prima di sollevare il separatore, leggere il ma- Vordat het produkt wordt opgetild, eerst de in-
nuale dístruzione. structihandleiding lezen.
ES PT
Leia o manual de instruções antes de uma

Lea el manual de instrucciones antes de levantar operaçõo de elevaçõo.
la separadora.
RU JP
aÄ
Oeoednmdyekmk nomvhq lm .
qe hlpqoriuh
FI GR
Lue käyttöohjeet ennen nostamista. Diabaste to egceiridio me tiz odhgiez protou
Bgalete th suskeuh apo to kibwtio.
DK
Læsinstruktionsmanualen, inden separatoren

løftes op.
Art. No. 1270001 Rev. 2
2036C
25
P 635
7 Speed sensor kit
"Junction box kit" recommended

566718-
Quantity
1 562902 80 Sensor with support 1
3 552870 41 Tube gland, angle 90 deg. 1
5 556416 11 Protective tube 1
8 221716 23 Screw 1
26
7 Speed sensor kit
2196B
27
P 635
8 Monitoring kit
Unbalance sensor
566727-
Quantity
1 570142 01 Inductive analogue sensor 1
2 561773 04 Sensor holder 1
4 552870 21 Tube gland, straight 1
28
8 Monitoring kit
2
1
6 4 1769B
29
P 635
9 Cover interlocking kit
"Junction box kit" required

570819-
Quantity
2 566054 01 Limit switch 1
30
9 Cover interlocking kit
1769C
31
P 635
10 Junction box kit
No more than one

566692-
Quantity
1 566692 01 Box 1
2 566682 01 Terminal row 1
3 221115 19 Screw 6
4 566687 80 Connector 1
7 552851 31 Stopping plug 2
9 17812 Screw 2
32
10 Junction box kit
5 9
1
3 2019B
33
P 635
11 Set of tools
561614-
Quantity
Without hydraulic tool for coupling
With hydraulic tool for coupling
1 561593 80 Puller 1 1 Spindle pulley/ Neck bearing
1A 561829 01 Screw 1 1
3 561369 02 Spanner for nut 1 1 Nut/ Discharge slide
4 575055 81 Compressing tool 1 1 Disc stack
4A 575055 80 Compressing tool 1 1
4B 575083 02 Clamp 3 3
4C 575098 01 Screw 3 3
4D 221045 52 Screw 3 3
4E 561551 02 Screw 3 3
5 561584 80 Puller 1 1 Bowl body
6 572730 80 Pin spanner 1 1 Fan
6A 260121 56 Cylindrical pin 2 2
7 561607 80 Puller 1 1 Discharge slide
7A 561610 01 Support ring 1 1
7B 221040 43 Screw 1 1
8 260154 01 Lifting eye bolt 2 2
9 221706 05 Screw 6 6 Lock ring/ Bowl body
10 548457 80 Tool for belt pulley 1
10 574986 04 Hydraulic tool kit 1 See page 36
10A 223406 13 O-ring 1
11 567008 80 Lifting tool 1 1 Distributor/ Bowl spindle
12 561439 01 Drift 1 1 Bottom bearing
13 564679 01 Key 1 1 Bottom bearing housing
14 563084 80 Puller 2 2 Neck bearing cover
14A 221040 05 Screw 1 1
14B 221035 46 Screw 1 1
15 548043 01 Mounting tool 1 1 Coupling bearing
17 548050 04 Spanner 1 1 Nut/ Inlet and outlet pipe
18 66414 Hexagon socket head key 1 1 Lock ring/ Bowl body
19 566441 01 Sleeve 1 1 Neck bearing
20 566614 01 Chisel 1 1 Seal ring
21 577972 01 Pin 1 1 Distributor
99 588067 Exploded view 1
34
11 Set of tools
A D
C A
E
B
A
A
A B
1742R
35
P 635
11.1 Hydraulic tool kit

574986-
Quantity
1 574618 80 Hydraulic components 1 See page 38
2 574626 82 Hydraulic tool 1 See page 40
36
11.1 Hydraulic tool kit 11 Set of tools
2
1
2047D
37
P 635
11.1.1 Hydraulic components

574618-
Quantity
1 574618 01 Pump with hose 1
2 574618 02 Hydraulic cylinder 1
38
2050A
39
P 635
11.1.2 Hydraulic tool

574626-
Quantity
1 571628 01 Stud bolt 1
2 574627 03 Sleeve 1
3 571627 01 Holder 1
4 221803 35 Nut 1
5 574954 01 Sleeve 1
6 571620 01 Plate 1
7 571622 01 Screw 3
40
2047A
41
P 635
12 Inspection kit
563859-
Quantity
1 560638 01 Rectangular ring 1 Bowl body/ Operating slide
2 560638 01 Rectangular ring 1 Operating slide/ Holder
3 564478 01 Valve plug 3 Operating slide/ Bowl body
4 223406 39 O-ring 1 Bowl body/ Operating water ring
5 260104 05 O-ring 1 Bowl body/ Discharge slide
6 565295 01 Rectangular ring 1 Discharge slide/ Bowl body
8 564403 01 Seal ring 1 Bowl hood/ Discharge slide
9 260247 02 O-ring 1 Bowl hood/ Bowl body
14 521127 11 O-ring 1 Frame hood/ Frame bottom part
15 552766 07 Washer 2 Frame bottom part/ Plug
16 537086 06 Lubricating paste 1
17 539474 03 Silicone grease 1
18 223404 05 O-ring 1 Oil pin/ Plug
19 221706 05 Screw 6 Lock ring
20 66414 Hexagon socket head key 1 Lock ring
22 566788 15 Seal ring 1 Operating water cover
23 223403 61 O-ring 1 Bowl body/ Holder
28 576279 01 Lock washer 6 Holder/ Bowl body
29 576173 01 Hexagon head screw 6 Holder/ Bowl body
30 576173 01 Hexagon head screw 6 Operating water ring/ Bowl body
31 223406 23 O-ring 1 Distributor support/ Distributor
32 223406 22 O-ring 1 Distributor/ Disc stack
33 223406 23 O-ring 1 Level ring/ Distributor
34 223406 37 O-ring 1 Top disc/ Bowl hood
35 223406 10 O-ring 1 Top disc/ Gravity disc
36 223406 26 O-ring 1 Inlet and outlet pipe/ Support ring
37 223406 25 O-ring 2 Inlet and outlet pipe/ Connecting housing
38 223406 32 O-ring 1 Connecting housing/ Support ring
39 223406 16 O-ring 1 Inlet bend/ Inlet and outlet pipe
40 535586 80 Anti-friction coating 1
98 575939 Separator checkpoints 1
42
12 Inspection kit
1742M
43
P 635
13 Overhaul kit
563869-
Quantity
50 Hz
60 Hz
1 563859 02 Inspection kit 1 1 See page 42
2 2234121 38 O-ring 1 1 Strainer/ Bottom bearing housing
3 2234121 40 O-ring 1 1 Bottom bearing housing
4 562095 02 Labyrinth ring 1 1 Labyrinth ring holder/ Spindle pulley
5 223412 23 O-ring 1 1 Labyrinth ring holder/ Frame bottom part
6 223412 46 O-ring 1 1 Neck bearing cover/ Frame bottom part
7 566788 21 Seal ring 1 1 Neck bearing cover/ Fan
8 223406 28 O-ring 1 1 Deector ring/ Bowl spindle
9 223404 20 O-ring 1 1 Pipe/ Operating water cover
10 223412 46 O-ring 1 1 Operating water cover
11 566788 05 Seal ring 1 1 Bowl spindle/ Operating water cover
12 544465 10 Locking liquid 1 1 Bottom bearing holder
14 74067 O-ring 1 1 Plug/ Frame bottom part
15 548747 08 Ball bearing 1 1 Bowl spindle/ Top bearing seat
16 223642 36 Snap ring 1 1 Top bearing seat/ Ball bearing
17 562109 03 Helical spring 3 3 Top bearing seat/ Top bearing housing
18 562110 02 Composite spring 4 4 Top bearing seat/ Plug
19 548744 03 Self-align roller bearing 1 1 Bowl spindle/ Bottom bottom housing
20 223404 20 O-ring 1 1 Lubrication oil orice/ Oil pump
21 223406 30 O-ring 1 1 Bowl spindle/ Fan
22 545869 03 Nozzle Ø 1,5 mm 1 1 Operating slide
25 548051 49 Ball bearing 2 2 Coupling hub/ Motor belt pulley
26 66251 Snap ring 1 1 Motor belt pulley/ Ball bearing
27 223641 18 Snap ring 1 1 Coupling hub/ Ball bearing
28 564075 80 Friction block 5 3 Coupling hub/ Motor belt pulley
29 223641 20 Snap ring 1 1 Coupling hub/ Cover
30 223107 35 Spring washer 1 1 Motor shaft/ Screw
31 563464 01 Flat belt 1 Motor belt pulley/ Spindle puley
31 563467 01 Flat belt 1 Motor belt pulley/ Spindle puley
99 578117 Exploded view 1 1
44
11
9 10 21
8 16
1
7
6
27
26
25
25
15
5
4
17
18
3
2 28
22 29
31
14 19
13
20
30
45
Overhaul kit
1742P
P 635
14 Support kit
563877-
Quantity
1 526350 04 Plug 1 Frame bottom part
2 221716 23 Screw 2 Labyrinth ring holder
3 221721 24 Screw 3 Top bearing housing/ Frame bottom
4 221711 18 Screw 1 Neck bearing cover
5 564773 02 Deector ring 1 Bowl spindle
6 41456 Washer 3 Screw/ Operating water cover
7 221040 46 Screw 3 Operating water cover
10 221716 23 Screw 1 Frame bottom part/ Plug
13 221040 41 Screw 3 Top bearing housing/ Air dee.
15 560661 80 Lock ring 1 Bowl body/ Bowl hood
16 561298 01 Cap nut 1 Bowl spindle/ Bowl body
21 561957 01 Height adjusting ring 4 Frame hood/ Support ring
23 221716 09 Screw 4 Height adjusting ring/ Support ring
25 223642 22 Snap ring 1 Inlet bend/ Nut
27 41456 Washer 6 Frame hood/ Frame bottom part
28 221040 05 Screw 6 Frame hood/ Frame bottom part
29 547833 01 Spacing ring 1 Ball bearing/ Ball bearing
30 41456 Washer 8 Motor/ Frame bottom part
31 221040 58 Screw 4 Motor/ Frame bottom part
32 35120 Nut 4 Motor/ Frame bottom part
33 565378 01 Plug 1 Frame bottom part
34 571743 80 Oil pin 1 Frame bottom part/ Plug
35 563677 02 Lubrication oil orice 1 Oil pump
36 561369 02 Spanner for nut 1 Nut/ Discharge slide
37 2210463 22 Screw 1 Safety device/ Connecting housing
46
14 Support kit
1742N
47
P 635
15 Lifting tool
Separator
563453-
Quantity
6 260236 03 Shackle 2
48
15 Lifting tool
1686A
49
P 635
16 Tool box
558533-
Quantity
7 558533 10 Padlock 1
50
16 Tool box
1448A
51
17 Cross reference list
+ Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
1270001 24 8 221716 09 18 6 223406 37 42 34
1270018 01 24 3A 221716 09 46 23 223406 39 42 4
1270018 02 24 3B 221716 16 16 23 223406 39 16 11
1270018 03 24 3C 221716 22 12 44C 223412 23 12 18
1270018 04 24 3D 221716 22 14 17 223412 23 44 5
1270018 05 24 3E 221716 23 26 8 223412 45 12 1B
1270018 06 24 3F 221716 23 12 19 223412 46 12 23
1270018 07 24 3G 221716 23 46 2 223412 46 44 6
1270018 08 24 3H 221716 23 46 10 223412 46 44 10
1270018 09 24 3I 221716 23 12 43 223412 46 12 33
1270018 10 24 3J 221721 24 12 21 2234121 38 12 11
1270018 11 24 3K 221721 24 46 3 2234121 38 44 2
1270018 12 24 3L 221721 37 20 9 2234121 40 12 15
1270018 13 24 3M 221721 37 12 44D 2234121 40 44 3
1270018 14 24 3N 221803 35 40 4 223641 18 22 6
1270018 15 24 3O 223101 49 12 1C 223641 18 44 27
1270018 16 24 3P 223101 94 12 47 223641 20 22 10
1270018 17 24 3Q 223107 35 20 5 223641 20 44 29
1270018 18 24 3R 223107 35 44 30 223642 22 18 21
1270018 19 24 3S 223403 61 42 23 223642 22 46 25
1270019 24 3 223403 61 16 8 223642 36 44 16
1761834 09 18 16 223404 05 12 8 223642 36 14 4
1763780 07 18 15 223404 05 42 18 260104 05 42 5
1766162 01 18 17 223404 20 44 9 260104 05 16 15
17812 32 9 223404 20 44 20 260121 56 34 6A
221035 46 34 14B 223404 20 12 28 260154 01 34 8
221040 05 18 9 223404 20 14 12 260236 03 48 6
221040 05 34 14A 223406 10 16 33 260247 02 16 39
221040 05 46 28 223406 10 42 35 260247 02 42 9
221040 08 12 36 223406 13 34 10A 35120 20 12
221040 41 46 13 223406 16 18 20 35120 46 32
221040 42 20 7 223406 16 42 39 41456 18 8
221040 43 34 7B 223406 22 42 32 41456 20 8
221040 46 46 7 223406 22 16 24 41456 20 10
221040 46 12 35 223406 23 16 30 41456 46 6
221040 58 20 11 223406 23 42 31 41456 46 27
221040 58 46 31 223406 23 42 33 41456 46 30
221045 09 12 1D 223406 23 16 22 41456 12 34
221045 52 34 4D 223406 25 18 10 521127 11 18 7
221045 60 20 4 223406 25 18 11 521127 11 42 14
221046 22 18 23 223406 25 42 37 526350 04 12 6
2210462 32 12 4 223406 26 18 2 526350 04 46 1
2210463 22 46 37 223406 26 42 36 526352 06 12 30
221115 19 32 3 223406 28 44 8 532333 03 12 46
221126 04 12 45 223406 28 12 26 535586 80 42 40
221706 01 12 14 223406 30 44 21 537086 06 42 16
221706 05 34 9 223406 30 14 15 539418 02 12 29
221706 05 42 19 223406 32 18 13 539474 03 42 17
221711 18 12 22A 223406 32 42 38 544465 10 44 12
221711 18 46 4 223406 37 16 32 545869 03 44 22
52
P 635
Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
545869 03 16 4 561439 01 34 12 565378 01 12 7

547833 01 22 3 561551 02 34 4E 565378 01 46 33
547833 01 46 29 561584 80 34 5 566054 01 30 2
547837 01 20 6 561593 80 34 1 566441 01 34 19
548043 01 34 15 561607 80 34 7 566614 01 34 20
548050 04 34 17 561610 01 34 7A 566682 01 32 2
548051 49 22 2 561773 03 12 41 566687 80 32 4
548051 49 44 25 561773 04 28 2 566692 01 32 1
548457 80 34 10 561829 01 34 1A 566788 05 44 11
548744 03 44 19 561957 01 18 4 566788 05 12 32
548744 03 14 10 561957 01 46 21 566788 15 42 22
548747 08 44 15 562091 01 12 12 566788 15 16 13
548747 08 14 2 562094 01 12 16 566788 21 12 24
549325 01 22 9 562095 02 12 17 566788 21 44 7
552766 07 42 15 562095 02 44 4 567008 80 34 11
552766 07 12 5 562109 03 44 17 567501 02 18 18
552766 09 18 14 562109 03 14 6 570142 01 28 1
552851 31 32 7 562110 02 44 18 571405 80 12 22
552870 21 28 4 562110 02 14 7 571453 02 14 14
552870 21 30 1 562902 80 26 1 571620 01 40 6
552870 21 32 5 562992 01 12 10 571622 01 40 7
552870 41 26 3 562995 01 14 13 571627 01 40 3
553171 01 24 6 563084 80 34 14 571628 01 40 1
553272 01 24 6 563089 01 16 27 571743 80 12 9
554214 02 24 9 563089 80 16 25 571743 80 46 34
555529 01 24 7 563089 80 16 26 572730 80 34 6
556416 11 26 5 563464 01 20 13 573035 02 12 13
556416 17 28 6 563464 01 44 31 574226 01 16 16
556416 24 30 3 563467 01 20 13 574618 01 38 1
558533 10 50 7 563467 01 44 31 574618 02 38 2
560131 02 12 2 563677 02 46 35 574618 80 36 1
560134 01 14 1 563677 02 14 11 574625 02 18 19
560202 01 12 27 563859 02 44 1 574626 82 36 2
560406 01 14 8 564075 80 22 8 574627 03 40 2
560426 02 22 1 564075 80 44 28 574954 01 40 5
560426 04 22 1 564089 80 22 5 574986 04 34 10
560634 80 16 1 564095 80 20 3 575055 80 34 4A
560637 01 16 1A 564095 81 20 3 575055 81 34 4
560638 01 42 1 564100 80 22 5 575083 02 34 4B
560638 01 42 2 564403 01 16 38 575098 01 34 4C
560638 01 16 2 564403 01 42 8 575939 42 98
560638 01 16 5 564478 01 42 3 576173 01 42 29
560639 01 16 3 564478 01 16 6 576173 01 42 30
560649 01 16 18 564493 02 12 31 576173 01 16 9
560661 80 16 40 564679 01 34 13 576173 01 16 14
560661 80 46 15 564773 02 12 25 576279 01 42 28
561114 01 20 2 564773 02 46 5 576279 01 16 10
561298 01 46 16 565217 01 16 7 576798 80 16 31
561369 02 34 3 565295 01 42 6 576866 02 18 12
561369 02 46 36 565295 01 16 17 576884 02 16 21
53
Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
576884 04 16 21 74067 44 14
576932 01 16 37 74067 12 42
576933 01 18 5
576938 01 16 36
576938 02 16 35A
576938 03 16 34
576938 04 16 35B
576938 05 16 35C
576938 06 16 35D
576938 07 16 35E
576938 08 16 35F
576938 09 16 35G
576938 10 16 35H
576938 11 16 35I
576938 12 16 35J
576938 13 16 35K
576938 80 16 35
576987 02 16 28
576987 04 16 28
577024 81 18 1
577705 80 20 1
577802 01 24 4
577972 01 34 21
578017 02 12 44A
578019 01 12 44B
578019 80 12 44
578117 44 99
578118 46 99
578119 42 99
578184 01 16 19
578220 80 16 20
578280 02 12 1A
578281 80 12 1
579323 02 16 12
580049 01 14 16
580051 02 14 5
581543 01 14 9
584048 80 14 3
585653 80 12 20
588067 34 99
588069 34 99
588221 80 18 3
588222 01 18 22
64416 16 1B
66169 24 5
66251 22 4
66251 44 26
66414 34 18
66414 42 20
70490 12 3
54
.PA 635
Spare Parts Catalogue
Specication No. 576623-01/0

Book No. 578637 02 Rev. 3
Spare parts catalogue Catalogo parti di ricambio

Reservdelskatalog Catalogo de pecas sobressalentes
Ersatzteilkatalog Varaosaluettelo
Catalogue de piéces de

rechange
Catalogue de piezas de Reserveonderdelen-catalogus
recambio
Reservedelskatalog

Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00

Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40
© Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2008-11-24

Contents
1 Read this rst 5
1.1 General information 6
1.2 Translation list 9
2 Valve block 12
3 Oil ancillary 14
3.1 Temperature sensor 16
3.2 3-way valve complete 18
3.3 Pressure transmitter complete 22
3.4 Regulating valve 24
4 Discharge pipe kit, DIN 28
5 Sludge removal kit 30
6 Control unit 32
7 Buttery valve kit 34
8 Starter 36
8.1 Basic kit for starter 38
8.2 Sep. Start., 690V,6.3-10V 40
8.3 Pump Starter 0,4-0,63 A 42
9 Remote operating system 44
10 ESD relay kit 46
11 Spare parts, operating liquid pipe 48
12 Spare parts, oil ancillary 50
3
13 Spare parts, control unit 52
14 Spare parts, buttery valve 54
15 Slugde pump T70 spare par 56
16 Cross reference list 58
4
1 Read this rst
1 Read this rst
Check the machine unit number on the name-plate before using this catalogue
Kontrollera maskinenhetens nummer på maskinskylten innan du använder katalogen
Das Typenschild - ein Hinweis zur korrekten Ersatzteilnummer
La plaque de la machine, un guide pour trouver le numéro de piéce de rechange correct
La placa-marca de la máquina - guía del número correcto del repuesto

—
La targhetta della macchina - guida al corretto numero dei ricambi
La placa do fabricante da máquina - um guia do número correto das partes sobressalentes
Konekilpi - opastin oikeaan varaosanumeroon
!" #$% &$'(% )! * *"$9;% #*< =>=#*? #@@ # *?
Het gegevensplaatje - een wegwijzer naar het juiste onderdeelnummer
Typeskiltet - en guide til det rette reservedelsnummer
5
PA 635
1.1 General information
Safeguard your commitment to quality by always using genuine

Alfa Laval spare parts.
Remember, Alfa Laval cannot accept responsibility for the
failure of a separator equipped with non-original spare parts.
We guarantee the quality and reliability of our products.
Följ ditt kvalitetstänkande genom att endast använda Alfa Laval

originalreservdelar.
Kom ihåg att Alfa Laval inte tar något ansvar för fel på en
separator, som innehåller icke-originaldelar. Vi garanterar
kvaliteten och driftsäkerheten endast hos våra egna produkter.
Aus Rücksicht auf Ihr Bestreben um beste Qualität sollten Sie

nur Alfa Laval Originalersatzteile benutzen.
Vergessen Sie nicht, Alfa Laval kann keine Verantwortung für
das Versagen eines Separators übernehmen, der nicht mit
Originalersatzteilen versehen ist. Wir garantieren Qualität und
Zuverlässigkeit unserer Produkte.
Préservez la qualité de vos équipments en n‘employant que des

pièces de rechange Alfa Laval.
N’oubliez pas q’Alfa Laval décline toute responsabilité en cas
de panne d’un séparateur non équipé de pièces de rechange
d’origine. Nous garantissons la qualité et la abilité de nos
produits.
Mantenga su compromiso con la calidad, al usar siempre piezas

de repuesto Alfa Laval auténticas.
Recuerde que Alfa Laval no acepta responsabilidad por el
fallo de una separadora equipada con piezas de repuesto no
originales. Garantizamos la calidad y abilidad de nuestros
productos.
6
1.1 General information 1 Read this rst
J UX U
U Y Alfa Laval.

[ , Alfa Laval
XU , \ U
. ] UX ^
U .
Salvaguardate la vostra garanzia di qualità facendo sempre uso

di parti di ricambio Alfa Laval autentiche.
Tenete presente che la Alfa Laval non può accettare
responsabilità per avaria ad un separatore attrezzato con parti
di ricambio non originali. Noi garantiamo la qualità l’afdabilità
dei nostri prodotti.
Proteja o seu cometimento a qualidade usando sempre peças

sobressalentes genuinas Alfa Laval.
Não esqueça que Alfa Laval não aceita responsabilidade por
falha de uma separadora equipada com peças sobressalentes
não genuinas. Nós garantimos a qualidade e a conança dos
nossos produtos.
Varmistakaa vastuunne laadusta käyttämällä aina alkuperäisiä

Alfa Laval varaosia.
Muistakaa, Alfa Laval ei voi hyväksyä vastuuta ei-alkuperäsillä
varaosilla varustetun separaattorin vaurioista. Me takaamme
tuotteidemme laadun ja käyttövarmuuden.
_`={@!*#) <|$@( *;#$# '}$=&**~#% &;* 9(=

#@@ # #$% Alfa Laval.
')#) <;|$ ;# $ Alfa Laval ") @&) && )<?$
9 @)% *<#<}*&$'(%, *#$ **! '*< ){}&*=#)! &(
9(= #@@ # . _99<;&=#) *;#$# @( @)#*<}9!
&;* 9 # " &% }*;#.
7
PA 635
Streef naar een zo hoog mogelijke kwaliteit en gebruik

uitsluitend originele Alfa Laval reserveonderdelen. Streef naar
een zo hoog mogelijke kwaliteit en gebruik uitsluitend originele
Alfa Laval reserveonderdelen.
Vergeet niet dat Alfa Laval niet verantwoordelijk is voor een
defecte separator die niet-originele onderdelen bevat. Wij
garanderen de kwaliteit en betrouwbaarheid van onze eigen
produkten.
Hold Dem til den kvalitet, De har valgt at satse på, ved altid at
anvende ægte Alfa Laval reservedele.
Husk, at Alfa Laval ikke kan påtage sig noget ansvar for fejl
på en separator, som indeholder uoriginale dele. Vi kan kun
garantere kvalitet og driftsikkerhed på vore egne produkter.
8
1.2 Translation list
Översättningslista
Übersetzungsliste
Liste de traduction
Lista de traducciones
Part no. Reservdelsnummer Teil-Nr. Numéro de pièce Pieza No.
Qty Antal Anzahl Quantité Cantidad
Description Benämning Bezeichnung Dénomination Descripción
Notes Anmärkningar Anmerkungen Remarques Notas
Machine type Maskintyp Maschinentyp Type de machine Tipo de máquina
Product no. Produktnr Produktnummer Numéro de produit Número de producto
Machine unit description Maskinblocksbenämning Bezeichnung des Dénomination de partie Descripción de sección de
Maschinenblocks de machine la máquina
Machine unit no. Maskinblocksnr Maschinenblock Nr. Partie de machine nº No. de sección de
máquina
Subassembly description Undergruppsbenämning Bezeichung der Dénomination de Descripción de

Untergruppe sous-ensemble subconjunto
Subassembly no. Undergruppsnr Untergruppe Nr. Nº de sous-ensemble Número de subconjunto
See page Se sidan Siehe Seite Vòir page Véase la página
Fig. ref. Figurhänvisning Bildhinweise Réf. de g. Referencia de gura
Product name Produktnamn Produktname Nom du produit Nombre del producto
Exchange necessitates Utbyte nödvändiggör Austausch erfordert Le remplacement El racmbio requiere el

rebalancing of bowl ombalansering av kulan Wiederauswuchtung der nécessite le rééquilibrage reequilibrado del rotor
Trommel du bol
See separate spare parts Se separat reservdelslista Siehe separate Voir liste séparée des Véase la lista de piezas
list Ersatzteilliste pièces de rechange separada
Not delivered as spare Levereras ej som Nicht als Ersatzteil Non livré comme piéce de No se entrega como pieza
part reservdel geliefert rechange de recambio
9
PA 635

Lista traduzioni
Lista para tradução
Käännösluttelo
Part no. Nr. parte Numero de peca Varaosanumero
Qty — Quantita Quantidade Lukumäärä
Description Descrizione Descricao Nimitys
Notes
Note Notas Huomautuksia
Machine type ] Tipo macchina Tipo de maquina Konetyyppi
Product no. Nr.prodotto No. do produto Tuotteen no
Machine unit description Descrizione unita Descricao da unidade da Koneenosan nimitys
macchina maquina
Machine unit no. Nr. unita macchina Numero de unidade da Koneenosan no
maquina
Subassembly description Descrizione sottogruppo Descriao do subconjunto Alaryhmän nimitys
Subassembly no. J Nr. sottogruppo Número de subconjunto Alaryhmän no
See page . Vedi pagina Véase la página Ks sivu
Fig. ref. Rif. g. Referencia de gura Kuvaviite
Product name Nome prodotto Nombre del producto Tuotteen nimi
Exchange necessitates [ La sostituzione comporta El racmbio requiere el Vaihdettaessa kuula

rebalancing of bowl la equilibratura del reequilibrado del rotor tasapainoitettava
tamburo uudelleen
See separate spare parts . U Vedi lista separata delle Véase la lista de piezas Katso erillistä
list ^ parti di ricambio separada varaosaluetteloa
Not delivered as spare Non fornito come parte di No se entrega como pieza Ei toimiteta varaosana
part
ricambio de recambio
10

Vertaallijst
Oversættelseliste
Part no. }&;% #@@ # *? Onderdeelnr. Reservedelsnummer
Qty ?*@* Hoeveelheid Antal
Description )}9}{( Beschrijving Betegnelse
Notes }#$}(=)% Opmerkingen Bemaerkninger
Machine type ?*% &$'(&#*% Machinetype Maskintype
Product no. }&;% }*;#*% Produktnr. Produktnr.
Machine unit description )}9}{( =<9 }*#(&#*% Machineblokbenaming Maskinbetegnelse

&$'(%
Machine unit no. }&;% =<9 }*#(&#*% Machineblokbenamning Maskinnr.

&$'(%
Subassembly description )}9}{( <*=<9 }*#(&#*% Subgroepbenamning Undergruppsbetegnelse
Subassembly no. }&;% <*=<9 }*#(&#*% Subgroepnr. Undergruppenr.
See page @) =)@!" Zie blz. Se side
Fig. ref. }*&( =) ) ; Afb. ref. Figurhenvisning
Product name *&=! }*;#*% Produktnaam Produktnavn
Exchange necessitates #@@9( #)! Vervangning vereist Udskriftning kraever

rebalancing of bowl )}}?&=$ =*}}*!% herbalanceren van de kogel afbalcering af kuglen
#*< #?&*<
See separate spare parts list @) )" ( @!=# Vervangning vereist van de Se spaat reservedelsliste
#@@ # ~ kogel
Not delivered as spare part ) }"!")# >% Niet geleverd als Levereres ikke som reservedel
#@@ # ; reserveonderdeel
11
PA 635
2 Valve block
567940-
Quantity
1 1765927 01 Valve block, water 1
2 1766037 09 Flow valve 15.0 l/min 1
3 1766037 02 Flow valve, 11.0 l/min 1
4 1766037 03 Flow valve, 2.8 l/min 1
5 551228 13 Connecting for solenoid valve 3
8 1765934 04 Flexible connection 1
9 1765937 01 Flexible connection 1
12
2 Valve block
2123A
13
PA 635
3 Oil ancillary
574090-
Ref Part No Description -80 -81 -82 -83 -88 -89 Notes
Quantity
DO, 30 - 180, DIN
DO, 30 - 180, JIS
HFO 380 - 600, DIN
HFO 380 - 600, JIS
LO, DIN
LO, JIS
1 1764439 80 Temperature sensor 1 1 1 1 1 1 See page 16
2 573699 80 3-way valve complete 1 1 1 See page 18
2 573699 81 3-way valve complete 1 1 1 See page 18
3 1760926 01 Nipple 1 1 1
3 573690 80 Connection ange JIS 1 1 1
4 573695 80 Flexible hose 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 546229 35 Rectangular ring 2 2 2 2 2 2
6 574849 80 Pressure transmitter complete 1 1 1 1 1 1 See page 22
7 1766811 12 Throttle washer 1 1
7 1766811 16 Throttle washer 1 1
8 573695 80 Flexible hose 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 546229 35 Rectangular ring 2 2 2 2 2 2
10 574849 80 Pressure transmitter complete 1 1 1 1 1 1 See page 22
11 1760926 01 Nipple 1 1 1
11 573690 80 Connection ange JIS 1 1 1
12 1762570 80 Regulating valve 1 1 1 See page 24
12 1762570 84 Regulating valve 1 1 1 See page 24
14
3 Oil ancillary
1 2
3 11 5 9 7
3 11
4
6 10 12
2106A
15
PA 635
3.1 Temperature sensor

1764439-
Quantity
01 1764391 01 Temperature sensor 1
02 1761814 80 Spring pocket 1
16
3.1 Temperature sensor 3 Oil ancillary
2107A
17
PA 635
3.2 3-way valve complete

573699-
Quantity
DIN
JIS
2 574409 80 3-way solenoid valve 1 1 See page 20
3 1763491 03 Nipple 1 1
4 1761834 05 Washer 2 2 Cu Washer
18
3.2 3-way valve complete 3 Oil ancillary
2182B
19
PA 635
3.2.1 3-way solenoid valve

574409-
Quantity
1 574409 01 3-way electric valve 1
1 574409 04 3-way solenoid valve 1
2 574409 02 Coil 1
2 574409 05 Coil 1
3 569712 01 Rectangular connector 1
3 569712 03 Rectangular connector 1
4 574413 01 Silencer, Air M5 1 1
20
3.2 3-way valve complete 3 Oil ancillary
3
2200V
21
PA 635
3.3 Pressure transmitter complete

574849-
Quantity
1 574840 02 Pressure transmitter with contact 1
2 1763903 03 Needle valve 1
3 53551716 02 Washer 2
4 1765082 09 Nipple 1
5 1761834 06 Washer 1
22
3.3 Pressure transmitter complete 3 Oil ancillary
2123F
23
PA 635
3.4 Regulating valve

1762570-
Quantity
DIN
JIS
02 1761731 80 Insert 1 1 DN25
See page 26
Z 1761995 80 Regulating valve spare parts
24
3.4 Regulating valve 3 Oil ancillary
2221A
25
PA 635
3.4.1 Insert
1761731-
Quantity
1 1761880 80 Spindle 1
2 1761895 01 Gasket 1
3.1 1761894 01 Stufng box nut 1
3.2 1761482 13 O-ring 1
3.3 1761887 01 Gasket 3
3.4 1761888 01 Sleeve 1
3.5 1761996 01 Washer 1
3.6 1761890 01 Spring 1
4 1761885 01 Dome-shaped part 1
5 1761886 01 Lock nut 1
6 1761891 80 Locking device 1
7 53500185 01 Wheel 1
8 53500432 01 Washer 1
9 53500239 01 Nut 1
26
3.4 Regulating valve 3 Oil ancillary
9
8
7
6
3.2
3.1
3.3
3.4
3.6
3.5
4
5
2
1
2103B
27
PA 635
4 Discharge pipe kit, DIN

578518-
Quantity
DIN
JIS
1 578519 80 Outlet pipe 1 1
2 1762017 05 Hose 1 1
3 573625 80 Outlet ange JIS 1
3 573625 81 Outlet ange DIN 1
4 1762020 03 Hose clip 2 2
5 1766096 01 Plug 1 1
6 561339 01 Gasket 1 1
7 41456 Washer 4 4
8 221040 08 Screw 4 4
28
4 Discharge pipe kit, DIN
2104C
29
PA 635
5 Sludge removal kit

577837-
Quantity
DIN
JIS
1 1766869 80 Tank 1 1
2 1766704 01 Level switch 1 1
3 1766699 01 Sludge pump T70 1 1
4 574409 81 3-way solenoid valve 1 1 See page 20
5 1763491 02 Nipple 1 1
6 1763911 03 Flexible connection 1 1
7 1765974 01 Elbow pipe 1 1
8 1763780 02 Nipple 1 1
9 574351 01 Flexible hose L=480 1 1
10 1766002 01 Non-return valve 1 1
11 1765962 80 Flange 1 DN25, DIN
11 1765962 81 Flange 1 DN25, JIS
13 1762672 01 Hexagon plug 1 1
15 221035 07 Screw 4 4
17 70560 Washer 4 4
19 1766080 01 Distance nipple 1 1
20 526352 01 Bushing 1 1
21 1766308 01 Packing 1 1
23 1766789 80 Cover 1 1
24 1766788 01 Gasket 1 1
25 1766715 01 Inlet pipe 1 1
26 1761482 06 O-ring 1 1
27 1766081 01 Regulating valve 1 1
30 1766893 01 Plug 2 2
38 574386 01 Extention Pipe 1 1
39 1761834 11 Cu washer 1 1
40 1765957 80 Outlet 1 1
41 561339 01 Gasket 1 1
42 41456 Washer 4 4
43 221040 08 Screw 4 4
30
5 Sludge removal kit
2124K
31
PA 635
6 Control unit
568303-
Quantity
1 568304 04 EPC 50 P-Controller 1
3 1767199 80 8-pole connector 1
32
6 Control unit
2099M
33
PA 635
7 Buttery valve kit

568399-
Quantity
1 1766007 01 Buttery valve 1
2 568304 03 Sludge valve interlock 1 Mounted in Control unit
34
7 Buttery valve kit
2108A
35
PA 635
8 Starter
575362-
Quantity
60 575362 01 Basic kit for starter 1 See page 38
61 568022 32 Sep. Start., 690V,6.3-10V 1 See page 40
61 575362 10 Sep. Starter 2,5-4 A 1 See page 38
61 575362 11 Sep. Starter 4-6,3 A 1 See page 38
61 575362 12 Sep. Starter 6,3-10 A 1 See page 38
61 575362 13 Sep. Starter 10-16 A 1 See page 38
61 575362 14 Sep. Starter 16-20A 1 See page 38
62 575362 20 Pump Starter 0,4-0,63 A 1 See page 42
62 575362 21 Pump Starter 0,63-1 A 1 See page 42
62 575362 22 Pump Starter 1-1,6 A 1 See page 42
62 575362 23 Pump Starter 1,6-2,5 A 1 See page 42
62 575362 25 Pump Starter 4-6,3 A 1 See page 42
36
8 Starter
2109I
37
PA 635
8.1 Basic kit for starter

575362-
Ref Part No Description -01 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14 Notes
Quantity
1 575542 01 Cabinet 1
2 568026 02 Wall mounting kit 1
3 1764728 01 Label 1
4 1761990 02 Product label 1
5 53500125 01 Label 1
7 53500452 01 Moisture Absorptive 1
8 53500453 01 Ground connection 1
8F 53500167 02 Fuse 1
2K 53500460 02 Contactor 1 1 1
2K 53500460 04 Contactor 1 1
2.1K 53500461 01 Aux. contact block 1 1 1 1 1
2.2K 53500461 02 Aux. contact block 1 1 1 1 1
2P 53500006 01 Ammeter 1 1
2P 53500006 02 Ammeter 1 1
2P 53500006 04 Ammeter 1
1Q 1764712 05 Switch 1
2Q 53500098 28 Circuit breaker 1
8T 568027 01 Transformer 1
1X 53500402 11 Terminal 55
2X 53500257 01 Bus bar 1
8XE 53500141 04 Earth Terminal 1
8XF 53500402 18 Fuse terminal 1
8XT 53500202 04 Terminal 1
38
8.1 Basic kit for starter 8 Starter
2105A
39
PA 635
8.2 Sep. Start., 690V,6.3-10V

568022-
Quantity
2K 53500460 04 Contactor 1
2.1K 53500461 01 Aux. contact block 1
2.2K 53500461 02 Aux. contact block 1
2P 53500006 04 Ammeter 1
40
8.2 Sep. Start., 690V,6.3-10V 8 Starter
2105C
41
PA 635
8.3 Pump Starter 0,4-0,63 A

575362-
Ref Part No Description -20 -21 -22 -23 -24 -25 -26 Notes
Quantity
3K 53500460 02 Contactor 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3.1K 53500461 01 Aux. contact block 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3.2K 53500461 02 Aux. contact block 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
42
8.3 Pump Starter 0,4-0,63 A 8 Starter
2105D
43
PA 635
9 Remote operating system

575017-
Ref Part No Description -02 -04 -01 Notes
Quantity
I/O expansion board
Probus
Modbus
1 31830 4584 1 EPC 50 I/OExpansion Board 1
1 31830 6558 1 EPC 50 ModBus board 1
1 31830 6559 1 EPC 50 Probus Board 1
2 575362 50 Remote Start Interlock 1 1 1 Mounted in Starter
3 568304 02 Separator interlock 1 1 1 Mounted in Control unit
4 3183095331 Selector switch + wires 1 1 1
44
9 Remote operating system
t i n g
p eraem
e o st
t y
mo s
Re
781Z
45
PA 635
10 ESD relay kit
Mounted in starter
575362-
Quantity
112K 53500028 09 Relay 1
112.1K 53500028 08 Relay socket 1
2.1Q 53500098 38 Trip contact block 1
3.1Q 53500098 38 Trip contact block 1
46
10 ESD relay kit
2105C
47
PA 635
11 Spare parts, operating liquid pipe
Not included elewhere

1765993-
Quantity
1 1765993 01 Retaining clip 1
2 1765993 02 Spring 1
3 1765993 03 Core 1
4 1765993 04 Spring washer 1
5 1765993 05 O-ring 1
6 1765993 06 Piston 1
7 1765993 07 Disc 1
8 1765993 08 Non-return valve 1
9 1765993 09 O-ring 1
10 1765993 10 O-ring 1
11 1765993 11 Coil, 24 V 1
12 1766004 07 Washer adhesive tape 1
13 1766004 08 Indicator 1
14 1765993 13 Drain valve 1
15 1765993 16 Strainer 1
48
11 Spare parts, operating liquid pipe
2094D
49
PA 635
12 Spare parts, oil ancillary

1764734-
Quantity
01 1764734 04 Diaphragm 0
02 1764734 05 Stufng box kit 0
03 1764734 06 Stem/disc kit 0
50
12 Spare parts, oil ancillary
1823C
51
PA 635
13 Spare parts, control unit

568452-
Quantity
1 31830 6245 1 EPC 50 OP Front Module 1
2 3183068651 EPC 50 I/O Board P-prog 1
3 31830 6346 1 Cable 1
4 31830 6241 1 EPC 50 Transformer 1
9 53500462 01 Push button 1
10 53500201 03 Switch 1
11 53500201 10 Sealing 1
12 53500201 11 LED bulb, white, 24VAC 1
15 53500201 30 Selector switch 1
16 53500201 31 Legend plate 1
18 53500451 02 Pilot lamp 1
21 31830 6373 1 Fuse kit 1
22 31830 6372 1 EPC 50 Board Mounting Kit 1
23 53500462 03 Protection 1
52
13 Spare parts, control unit
2124F
53
PA 635
14 Spare parts, buttery valve

1766161-
Quantity
1 1766161 01 Seat 1
2 1766161 05 Limit switch 1
54
14 Spare parts, buttery valve
2123D
55
PA 635
15 Slugde pump T70 spare par

1766702-
Quantity
1 1766702 01 O-ring/packing kit 4
2 1766702 02 Diaphragm 2
3 1766702 03 O-ring 6
4 1766702 04 Air valve complete 1
5 1766702 05 Mufer 1
56
15 Slugde pump T70 spare par
2123N
57
+ Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
1760926 01 14 3 1765993 05 48 5 41456 28 7
1760926 01 14 11 1765993 06 48 6 41456 30 42
1761482 06 30 26 1765993 07 48 7 526352 01 30 20
1761482 13 26 3.2 1765993 08 48 8 53500006 01 38 2P
1761731 80 24 02 1765993 09 48 9 53500006 02 38 2P
1761814 80 16 02 1765993 10 48 10 53500006 04 38 2P
1761834 05 18 4 1765993 11 48 11 53500006 04 40 2P
1761834 06 22 5 1765993 13 48 14 53500028 08 46 112.1K
1761834 11 30 39 1765993 16 48 15 53500028 09 46 112K
1761880 80 26 1 1766002 01 30 10 53500098 24 42 3Q
1761885 01 26 4 1766004 07 48 12 53500098 25 42 3Q
1761886 01 26 5 1766004 08 48 13 53500098 26 42 3Q
1761887 01 26 3.3 1766007 01 34 1 53500098 27 42 3Q
1761888 01 26 3.4 1766037 02 12 3 53500098 28 38 2Q
1761890 01 26 3.6 1766037 03 12 4 53500098 28 42 3Q
1761891 80 26 6 1766037 09 12 2 53500098 29 38 2Q
1761894 01 26 3.1 1766080 01 30 19 53500098 29 42 3Q
1761895 01 26 2 1766081 01 30 27 53500098 30 38 2Q
1761990 02 38 4 1766096 01 28 5 53500098 30 40 2Q
1761995 80 24 Z 1766161 01 54 1 53500098 30 42 3Q
1761996 01 26 3.5 1766161 05 54 2 53500098 31 38 2Q
1762017 05 28 2 1766308 01 30 21 53500098 32 38 2Q
1762020 03 28 4 1766699 01 30 3 53500098 36 38 8Q
1762570 80 14 12 1766702 01 56 1 53500098 38 46 2.1Q
1762570 84 14 12 1766702 02 56 2 53500098 38 46 3.1Q
1762672 01 30 13 1766702 03 56 3 53500125 01 38 5
1763491 02 30 5 1766702 04 56 4 53500141 04 38 8XE
1763491 03 18 3 1766702 05 56 5 53500167 02 38 8F
1763780 02 30 8 1766704 01 30 2 53500185 01 26 7
1763903 03 22 2 1766715 01 30 25 53500201 03 52 10
1763911 03 30 6 1766788 01 30 24 53500201 10 52 11
1764391 01 16 01 1766789 80 30 23 53500201 11 52 12
1764439 80 14 1 1766811 12 14 7 53500201 30 52 15
1764712 05 38 1Q 1766811 16 14 7 53500201 31 52 16
1764728 01 38 3 1766869 80 30 1 53500202 04 38 8XT
1764734 04 50 01 1766893 01 30 30 53500239 01 26 9
1764734 05 50 02 1767199 80 32 3 53500257 01 38 2X
1764734 06 50 03 221035 07 30 15 53500402 11 38 1X
1765082 09 22 4 221040 08 28 8 53500402 18 38 8XF
1765927 01 12 1 221040 08 30 43 53500432 01 26 8
1765934 04 12 8 31830 4584 1 44 1 53500451 02 52 18
1765937 01 12 9 31830 6241 1 52 4 53500452 01 38 7
1765957 80 30 40 31830 6245 1 52 1 53500453 01 38 8
1765962 80 30 11 31830 6346 1 52 3 53500460 02 38 2K
1765962 81 30 11 31830 6372 1 52 22 53500460 02 42 3K
1765974 01 30 7 31830 6373 1 52 21 53500460 04 38 2K
1765993 01 48 1 31830 6558 1 44 1 53500460 04 40 2K
1765993 02 48 2 31830 6559 1 44 1 53500461 01 38 2.1K
1765993 03 48 3 3183068651 52 2 53500461 01 40 2.1K
1765993 04 48 4 3183095331 44 4 53500461 01 42 3.1K
58
PA 635
Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
53500461 02 38 2.2K 575362 25 36 62

53500461 02 40 2.2K 575362 26 36 62
53500461 02 42 3.2K 575362 50 44 2
53500462 01 52 9 575542 01 38 1
53500462 03 52 23 578519 80 28 1
53551716 02 22 3 70560 30 17
546229 35 14 5
546229 35 14 9
551228 13 12 5
561339 01 28 6
561339 01 30 41
568022 32 36 61
568026 02 38 2
568027 01 38 8T
568304 02 44 3
568304 03 34 2
568304 04 32 1
569712 01 20 3
569712 03 20 3
573625 80 28 3
573625 81 28 3
573690 80 14 3
573690 80 14 11
573695 80 14 4
573695 80 14 8
573699 80 14 2
573699 81 14 2
574351 01 30 9
574386 01 30 38
574409 01 20 1
574409 02 20 2
574409 04 20 1
574409 05 20 2
574409 80 18 2
574409 81 30 4
574413 01 20 4
574840 02 22 1
574849 80 14 6
574849 80 14 10
575362 01 36 60
575362 10 36 61
575362 11 36 61
575362 12 36 61
575362 13 36 61
575362 14 36 61
575362 20 36 62
575362 21 36 62
575362 22 36 62
575362 23 36 62
575362 24 36 62
59
Spare Parts
Pump, P-1A & P-1B

6 Spare Parts
X0 24 4 41 A
For motor
Ref. 571095 Rev. 0
Spare parts kits

Spare part kits, specification Inspection kit Overhaul kit Repair kit
Item Description Qty Qty Qty
1 Washer 2 2 2
2 Shaft seal 1 1
4 O-ring 1 1 1
5 Gasket 1 1 1
6 Ball bearing 1 1 1
7 Gasket 1 1 1
8 Washer 1 1 1
9 Support ring 1 1 1
12 Valve trim 1
13 Rotor set 1
14 Rubber element 1
1818106-02 35
6 SPARE PARTS OIL FEED PUMP ACP 45/52
Spare parts kits, only for original motor

Spare part kits, specification Ball bearing kit,
for el. motor
Item Description Qty
15 Ball bearing, D-end 1
16 Ball bearing, N-end 1
Pump type Inspection Overhaul kit Repair kit Ball bearing Ball bearing
kit kit, kit, for Motor
M 112 M
for Motor M
100
ACP 045 K 571096-80 571096-81 571096-82 571096-96 571096-97
ACP 045 N 571096-80 571096-81 571096-83 571096-96 571096-97
ACP 052 K 571096-84 571096-85 571096-86 571096-96 571096-97
ACP 052 N 571096-84 571096-85 571096-87 571096-96 571096-97
36 1818106-02
Spare Parts
Flow Control Valve, FCV-1

1 Operating Instructions Control Valve
1.1 Spare Parts List
(Use original Schubert & Salzer Control Systems spare parts only!)
positioner

2 200 008
sensing pin cpl.
4 061 331
152
screw with trench
131 screw pin
8 504 980 8 540 237
90
130 acceptance for positioner NC
4 100 522
screw plug G1/4"
4 100 486
89
87 washer D162
4 100 531
nut M39 x 1,5
4 100 525
88
81 spring f.diaphragm actuator
4 100 541
82 diaphragm shell
4 059 601
83 supporting piston
4 100 521
hexagon cup nut M8
8 540 173
84
bolt
14 stop nut
4 100 527 4 100 543
150
85 diaphragm f. D250
4 100 530
hexagon screw M8x16
2 200 001
106
20 interior lip sealing
4 105 910
diaphragm disc
4 100 526
98
86 lower stop
4 100 524
nut M39 x 1,5
4 100 525
88
90 screw with trench
8 540 237
Bearing
4 100 534
99
78 tube
8 040 060
acceptance flange f. actuator
4 100 523
91
column
4 100 536 4 106 138
100
2 200 009
actuator rod f. NC
4 100 532
92
4 100 535
coupling element
4 106 999
101
93 flange f. column
4 105 109
position indicator
4 105 140
95
94 nut M12
8 504 327
regulating nut
4 100 544
108
threaded pin
34 guide sleeve
4 100 766 8 540 008
102
thrust collar
29 4 100 759 + 4100786
nut G 1 1/4"
4 107 246
103
31 conical seal
4 100 760
adapter f. head section
4 100 539
104
32 supporting ring
4 100 767
head section
4 4100 758
2
40 washer for spring
4 100 752
head section seal
4 104 379
3
28 packing spring
4 100 785
disc
4 100 757
4
34 guide sleeve
4 100 766
body
4 100 803
1
13 piston rod
4 100 768
control cone M8 (lower part)
4 100 788
6a
6 control cone D16 (upper part)
4 100 787
screwed seat
4 100 823
41
5 seating seal
4 101 804
46 screwed seat seal

4 104 379
3
SECTION 9
Bill of Materials / Catalog - Auxiliary Equipment

Fuel Oil Treatment System
Solar Turbines - Titan 130
BOM No: 393952EQ-As Built
Item Qty Per

No. P&ID Tag # Size Item Description Assembly Component Supplier Component Supplier Part #
1 CG-1 Centrifuge P 635 1 Alfa Laval Inc. 881202-07-01
2 CGM-1 Centrifuge motor, 3455RPM, 8.6kW, 480VAC, 3Ph, 60Hz 1 Alfa Laval Inc. 561356-12
3 SV10, 15, 16 Solenoid valve Block - Water 1 Alfa Laval Inc. 567940-08
4 SV1 Solenoid valve - Feed 1 Alfa Laval Inc. 574409-81
5 SV6 Solenoid valve - Sludge pump 1 Alfa Laval Inc. 574409-81
6 V1 3-Way valve assembly 1 Alfa Laval Inc. 573699-80
7 PT1, PT4 Pressure Transmitter 1 Alfa Laval Inc. 574840-02
8 TT-1 Temperature sensor 1 Alfa Laval Inc. 1764439-80
9 SS Cover Interlocking kit 1 Alfa Laval Inc. 570819-02
10 YT Monitoring kit (Unbalanced sensor) 1 Alfa Laval Inc. 566727-02
11 ST Speed Sensor Kit 1 Alfa Laval Inc. 566718-02
12 LS Level switch, Sludge tank 1 Alfa Laval Inc. 1766704-01
13 P-1 Sludge Pump 1 Alfa Laval Inc. 1766699-01
14 RV-4 Backpressure Control Valve (Manual) 1 Alfa Laval Inc. 1762570-80
15 P-1A, 1B DIN 50 Feed Pump - PD type; Model ACP045N 2 Alfa Laval Inc. 1764187-65
16 PM-1A, 1B Feed Pump Motor, 1755RPM, 2.6kW, 480VAC, 3Ph, 60Hz 2 Alfa Laval Inc. 551616-08
17 N/A Motor Starter/Controls Panel 1 ABB E-00004297
18 N/A Junction Box - JB 1, Interconnect - Centrifuge devices 1 Hoffman A1210CHNF
19 N/A Junction Box - JB 2, Train coupler 1 Hoffman A1210CHNF
20 N/A Junction Box - JB 3, Interconnect - Fuel tanker, Transfer valve, Air compressor 1 Hoffman A1008CHNF
21 N/A Train Coupler, 27 Pins 1 Patton & Cookes RT27F-M-ER
22 RV-5 Flow Control Valve (Manual) 1 Alfa Laval Inc. 1762570-80
23 PRV-1 DIN 25 Pressure Relief Valve 1 Alfa Laval Inc. 574093
24 PRV-2 1-1/2" FNPT Pressure Regulating Valve 1 Cashco / Miller Energy 8B8-1B47-1A000000B
25 FCV-1 1-1/2" FNPT Flow Control Valve, Normally closed - Grafoil gasket, 7082/040V3520CDT 1 Schubert & Salzer Article # 7005908
26 CV-3A, 3B 1-1/2" SW Check Valve - 1-1/2", SS 2 Schubert & Salzer 4000 Series
27 FI 1" FNPT Flow Indicator 0 to 50 GPM - Calibrated for 70 F liquid temp 1 Edrco / F.S. Welsford 341206T5-12
28 LS 3/" MNPT Level Switch, 24 VDC 1 Magnetrol / Miller Energy 910-A1A2-002
29 PS 1/2" FNPT Pressure Switch 1 Neo-Dyne / J Koch Associates 100P41C3BX, 35 PSIG
30 LT 1/2"MNPT Level Transmitter, Center to Center Dim 65.5" 1 ABB 261GS.F.J.T.5.S.H
31 TK-1 Storage Tank - 350 Gallon 1 Highland / TJ Equipment DWG No. 68439 AS BUILT
3
32 C
CPI 1/2"
/ MNPT Co pou d Pressure
Compound essu e Indicator
d cato - 30"
30 HG-0-15
G 0 5 PISG,
SG, 4" Dial;
a ; Model 3 5
ode 232.54 1 Wikaa 9 5556
9745556-BAR
33 PI 1/2" MNPT Pressure Indicator 0-100 PSI/BAR - 4" Dial; Model 232.54 3 Wika 9734729
34 TI Temperature Indicator 0-200 F/C - 5" Dial; Model TI.53 1 Wika 53040D005G4
35 N/A 1/2" Thermowell 1 Wika 75TH2R025CC
# HGVS8
N/A 1/2" Gauge Valve - 1/2" FNP 5 PARKER WITH # BCS8N BLEED VALVE
36 AND # 8PH-SS PLUG
37 BV-1, BV-2A, 2B 2" SW Ball Valve, CS - 2", SW 3 INLINE 302F-D2266-RTSS-2S
38 BV-3A, 3B, 4 1-1/2" SW Ball Valve CS - 1-1/2", SW 3 INLINE 302F-C2266-RTSS-2S
39 BV-5,6,7,8,9 1/2" NPT Ball Valve, SS - 1/2", NPT 5 INLINE 304F-56666-CTTT-2S
40 S-1 2" FNPT Simplex Strainer, CS - 2", NPT 1 ISLIP 2"B300TSB2
41 CV-1 Check Valve - 1-1/2" 1 Check-All F6JSSMT.500SS
42 CV-2 Check Valve - 1-1/2" 1 Check-All F1JSSMT.500SS
43 FW-1 3/4" FNPT Water Filter, 3/4" SS 1 CUNO 44152-01
44 N/A Filter Cartage, 5 micron 3 CUNO G78B8
45 FA-1/PRV-3 1/2" FNPT Air Filter & Regulator with Pressure Gauge 1 Norgren B73G-4AKQP1RMG
46 N/A 10" Ventilation Fan with Motor & Mounting Accessories 1 McMaster MCM # 2187K29
47 N/A 24" x 12" Inlet Louver 1 McMaster MCM # 19605K781
48 N/A 12" x 12" Outlet Louver 1 McMaster MCM # 2047K312
49 N/A AC Light 1 CROUSE HINDS VXHF25GP
50 N/A AC Light Switch 1 HUBBELL 1221
51 N/A Emergency Stop Switch, external 1 SQUARE D 9001KR9RH13
Fuel Oil Treatment System

Solar Turbines - Titan 130
BOM No: 393952EQ-As Built
RV-5
PRV-1
PRV-2
TECHNICAL BULLETIN 123-TB
02-09
MODEL 123
BACK PRESSURE/RELIEF REGULATOR
The Model 123 is a relief regulator suitable as a back

pressure regulator or bypass valve for controlling inlet
pressure between 2 and 350 psig (.14 to 24.2 Barg) (525
psig (36.2 Barg) at 50% build-up). The body has an angle
configuration with a side inlet and a bottom outlet. Sizes
are 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/2" and 2" (DN15, 20, 25, 40 and
50). Available options include cryogenic construction,
NACE construction and a large selection of trim, body
and diaphragm materials. It is the most adaptable back
pressure/relief regulator Cashco manufactures.
FEATURES
Versatile: Four body materials and twenty one trim

material combinations allow compat-
ibility with most fluids.
Controlled Four composition seat materials are

Compression available and all use controlled com-
Composition pression with metal to metal back up
Seats: for long, trouble free life.
High Capacity: A large orifice and diaphragm provide

sensitivity with high capacity.
MODEL 123 APPLICATIONS
Designed for controlling a wide range of fluids includ-

ing air, inert gases, cryogenic gas or liquids, sour gas,
chemicals, water, fuel oil and steam. See Table 1 for
more information.
CAUTION
This is not a safety device and must not be sub-
stituted for a code approved pressure safety relief
valve or rupture disc.
STANDARD/GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Body Sizes: 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/2" and 2" sizes Range Springs: Standard: Epoxy coated steel.
(DN15,20, 25,40 and 50). Includes Cryogenic: SST.
one side inlet and a bottom outlet, i.e.
Standard Cryogenic
angle configuration. Valve Steel Range Spring SST Range Spring
Size
psig (Barg) psig (Barg)
End Connections: Standard: NPT female pipe thread. 2 - 30 (.14 - 2.1) 2 - 30 (.14 - 2.1)
Alternate: See Opt-30, -32 or -39 for 25 - 50 (1.7 - 3.4) 20 - 60 (1.4 - 4.1)
flanged, extended nipples or socket 1/2" 40 -100 (2.8 - 6.9) 50 -110 (3.4 - 7.6)
weld end connections. See Opt -33 (DN15) 80 -150 (5.5 -10.3) 90 -150 (6.2 -10.3)
for a third body connection. 120 -215 (8.3 -14.8) 120 -245 (8.3 -16.9)
150 -350 (10.3 -24.1) 220 -300 (15.2 -20.7)
Body/Spring CI/CI, BRZ/CI, BRZ/BRZ, CS/CI, CS/CS, 2 - 20 (.14 - 1.4) 2 - 25 (.14 - 1.7)
Chamber SST/CI, SST/BRZ,SST/CS, SST/SST. 15 - 40 (1.0 - 2.8) 20 - 45 (1.4 - 3.1)
CI – Cast grey iron 3/4"-1" 30 - 80 (2.1 - 5.5) 35 -100 (2.4 - 6.9)
Material (DN20-25) 65 -160 (4.5 -11.0) 80 -210 (5.5 -14.5)
Combinations: BRZ – Cast bronze
130 -205 (9.0 -14.1)
CS – Cast carbon steel 170 -300 (11.7 -20.7)
165 -350 (11.4 -24.1)
SST – Cast stainless steel 2 - 15 (.14 - 1.0) 2 - 15 (.14 - 1.0)
All spring chambers furnished with 1/4" 10 - 25 (.69 - 1.8) 10 - 30 (.69 - 2.1)
(DN8) tapped vent hole. See Table 2 for 1-1/2"-2" 20 - 55 (1.4 - 3.8) 25 - 55 (1.7 - 3.8)
further material specifications. (DN40-DN50) 45 -105 (3.1 - 7.2) 45 - 95 (3.1 - 6.6)
85 -220 (5.9 -15.1) 75 -130 (5.2 - 8.7)
Operating See Tables 2, 3 and 4. 180 -350 (12.4 -24.1) 110 -300 (7.6 -20.7)
Temperature:
Capacities: Up to 7 Cv; See Tables 6 and 7 for
Inlet Pressure: See Tables 2 and 5. Cv vs. Set pressure. Use for fluids
other than water, air or steam, or
Trim Design: Metal seated or composition seated when the outlet pressure is other than
brass or SST materials. See Figures atmospheric pressure.
1 and 2, and Tables 3 and 4.
See Tables 8, 9 and 10 for water, air
Flange Bolting: Standard: Plated Steel or saturated steam, respectively.
Cryogenic: SST.
Capacities are for 10, 20, 30, 40 and
Gaskets: Standard: Non-asbestos. NOT SUIT- 50% build up over the set pressure.
ABLE FOR OXYGEN SERVICE. The set pressure is made at ap-
Alternate: See Opt-45 or Opt.-46G. proximately 2% of the flow capacity
shown in the 20% build up columns.
Diaphragms: SST, Neoprene (BC), Fluorocarbon The flow rate is different for each size
Elastomer (FKM), Phosphor Brz., and set pressure. Example: 100 psig
EPDM, TFE Coated SST, Buna-N. (6.9 Barg) set pressure and a 20%
(NBR) build-up = 120 psig (8.3 Barg) flowing
pressure for the capacity listed.
Painting: Standard: All non-corrosion resistant

portions to be painted with corrosion
resistant epoxy paint per Cashco
Spec #S-1606.
Alternate: See Opt-95.
Figure 1: Model 123-33 – Metal Seat Design Figure 2: Composition Seat

2 123-TB
OPTION SPECIFICATIONS
OPTION-1: CLOSING CAP. Covers the adjusting OPTION-15: STELLITED SEAT SURFACES. Stellite
screw to discourage tampering with the faced seating. Available only on 316
spring setting or for remote venting of SST metal seat with S1 trim. Includes
the spring chamber. Includes a cast a stellite faced valve seat pressed into
iron or steel spring chamber, a ductile the cylinder plus a stellite faced seat
iron closing cap, a gasket for sealing cone screwed into the piston. NOT
the closing cap to the spring chamber, SUITABLE FOR NACE SERVICE.
a sealing lock nut on the adjusting
screw and an NPT vent connection in OPTION-30: FLANGED END CONNECTIONS.
the spring chamber. 150# or 300# raised face flanges
available on all sizes. The body has
OPTION-1+6: DIFFERENTIAL CONSTRUCTION:
screwed-in Schedule 80 pipe nipples
For differential pressure service. NOT
which are seal welded. The raised face
available in body/spring chamber ma-
flange is welded to the nipple using a
terial combinations of BRZ/BRZ, SST/
socket weld connection. Steel bodies
BRZ or SST/SST. Includes closing cap,
have steel nipples and flanges. 316
larger pusher plate, an extra diaphragm
SST bodies have 316 SST nipples
gasket (for metal diaphragms), a spe-
and flanges. See Tables 2, 3, and 4
cial grooved adjusting screw, a 1/4"
for maximum operating temperatures
(DN8) NPT female loading pressure
and pressures. With 150# flanges, the
connection in spring chamber, and
flange pressure rating is the pressure
an adjusting screw sealing lock nut.
limiting factor. For 300# flanges, the
Limited for use on lower range springs
body rating is the pressure limiting fac-
indicated below and maximum pressure
tor. Standard is two flanges; with Opt-
containment levels indicated in Table
30+33, a third flange is available.
2. (See Model 123-1+6+S Technical
Bulletin for alternate design.)
OPTION-32: EXTENDED P.E. NIPPLES. Schedule
Body Size Range Spring 80 plain end pipe nipples used for field
inches psid
(DN) (Bard)
butt or socket welding into pipeline.
Pipe nipples of same general chemistry
1/2" 2-30, 25-50, 40-100, 80-150
as body material. Short threaded pipe
(15) (.14-2.1, 1.7-3.4, 2.7-6.9, 5.5-10.3)
nipples seal welded to body. Use for
3/4" & 1" 2-20, 15-40, 30-80, 65-160 socket weld pipe systems.
(20 & 25) (.14-1.4, 1.0-2.7, 2.1-5.5, 4.5-11.0)
1-1/2" & 2" 2-15, 10-25, 20-55, 45-105 OPTION-33: THIRD BODY CONNECTION. This
(40 & 50) (.14-1.0, .69-1.7, 1.4-3.8, 3.1-7.2) option eliminates a pipe tee when the
• Consult factory for sizing and selection of Differential Model 123's. •
Model 123 is installed in the pump
outlet piping. The bottom connection
OPTION-5: CRYOGENIC CONSTRUCTION. For handles the discharge fluid. NPT and
cryogenic service. Available in 1/2", Opt -30, -32 and -39 can be furnished
3/4", 1", 1-1/2" and 2" (DN15, 20, 25, on the third body connection.
40, and 50) sizes with NPT end con-
nections. Trim B5 is standard with this OPTION-36: SST CRYOGENIC CONSTRUC-
construction. All other wetted parts are TION. Same specifications as Opt.-5
brass. Non-wetted metal parts are of except:
brass or SST to operate at tempera- a. For SST/SST body/spring cham-
tures from -325° to +150°F (-198° to ber materials.
+66°C). The spring chamber has a b. S1 and S36 only available trim
1/4" (DN8) NPT vent connection for selections.
purge gas and a 1/8" (3.2mm) diam- c. Opt-30 flanged ends avail-
eter drain hole. Mount in horizontal able.
piping with adjusting screw below the
piping. Cleaned and packaged for OPTION-39: SOCKET WELD END CONNEC-
oxygen service per Cashco specifica- TIONS. Available on all sizes of CS
tion #S-1134. and 316 SST bodies.
123-TB 3
OPTION-40: NACE CONSTRUCTION: Internal Option -46G: HIGH TEMPERATURE GASKETS.
wetted portions meet NACE standard CS or SST body/spring chamber
MR0175 for application in sour gas materials only. Standard diaphragm
service. Exterior of the unit not to be and pusher plate gasket for units
directly exposed to a sour gas environ- with metal diaphragms replaced
ment, buried, insulated or otherwise with carbon graphite gaskets. Op-
denied direct atmospheric exposure. erating temperature -20° to +600° F
CS/CS body/spring chamber materials (-29° to +315°C).
ONLY. Acceptable ONLY with S40,
OPTION-55: SPECIAL CLEANING: BRZ or SST
S40T and S40V trim. NPT connections
body materials only. Cleaning per
ONLY. Not available with Opt-15.
Cashco Spec. #S-1134. Acceptable
OPTION-40SST: SST NACE CONSTRUCTION. Same cleaning level for oxygen service.
as Opt.-40, except uses SST/SST or
OPTION-56: SPECIAL CLEANING: All body
SST/CS body/spring chamber con- materials. Cleaning per Cashco
struction. Spec.#S-1542. Not suitable for oxygen
OPTION-45: ALTERNATE NON-ASBESTOS service.
GASKETS. Primarily for oxygen ser- OPTION-95: EPOXY PAINT: Special epoxy painting
vice. Utilizes TFE/Silicate diaphragm of all non-corrosion resistant external
gaskets and closing cap (Opt-1) surfaces per Cashco Spec #S-1547.
gaskets. Limits temperature range to Utilized in harsh atmospheric condi-
-20° to +400°F (-29° to +205°C). Not tions.
required when using a composition
diaphragm.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE 1- Applications
Fluid Recommended Construction Trim Designation Number
Composition Seat and Diaphragm B2, B3, B4, BB, S3, S3N, SB
Air or Inert Gases
Metal Seat and Composition Diaphragm S2N
Metal Seat and Diaphragm S0, S1, S2
Metal Seat and Composition Diaphragm S2N, S5, S40

Chemicals
Composition Seat and Diaphragm S3, S3N, SB, S40T, S40V
Composition Seat and Metal Diaphragm S9, S36
Metal Seat and Composition Diaphragm S40

Sour Gas
Composition Seat and Diaphragm S40T, S40V
Metal Seat and Diaphragm S1

Cryogenic Gas or Liquids
Composition Seat and Metal Diaphragm B5 or S36
Fuel Oil‡ Composition Seat and Diaphragm BB, B4, B7, S3, S3N, SB
Hydrocarbon Gas or Liquids‡ Composition Seat and Diaphragm BB, B4, B7, S3, S3N, SB
Metal Seat and Diaphragm B1, S1, S2
Saturated Steam, Low Pressures up to 50 psig (3.4 Barg) Composition Seat and Diaphragm B6
Composition Seat and Metal Diaphragm B5, S36

Saturated Steam, Pressures up to 100 psig (6.8 Barg), 50 psid
Composition Seat and Metal Diaphragm B5, S36
Steam Pressures above 100 psig (6.9 Barg) Saturated or Superheated Metal Seat and Diaphragm S1 or S2
Metal Seat and Composition Diaphragm S2N

Water and Condensate, Low Temperature 32-180°F (0-83°C)
Composition Seat and Diaphragm BB, B2, B3, S3, S3N, SB

Water and Condensate, High Temperature 180-300°F (83-149°C)
Composition Seat and Diaphragm B6
‡ In accordance with ASME B31.3 “process piping”, do not use Cast Iron Body for hydrocarbon or flammable fluid service with
inlet pressures greater than 150 psig (10.3 Barg) or temperatures greater than 300° F (149° C).
4 123-TB
TABLE 2
BODY AND SPRING CHAMBER
MAXIMUM PRESSURE WITH TEMPERATURE RATINGS
Material Specifications Inlet

(Body / Spring Chamber)
Description Pressure Temperature

ASTM No.
(Abbr.) psig (barg) °F (°C)
300 ** (20.7) -20 to +400 (-29 to +205)
CI/CI A126, Class B 250 (17.2) -20 to +450 (-29 to +232)
B62 Alloy C83600/
BRZ/CI 300 ** (20.7) -20 to +350 (-29 to +177)
A126, Class B
400 (27.6) -20 to +200 (-29 to +93)
BRZ/BRZ * B62, Alloy C83600 300 (20.7) -20 to +350 (-29 to +177)
250 (17.2) -20 to +400 (-29 to +205)
A216, Gr. WCB/ 300 ** (20.7) -20 to +400 (-29 to +205)
CS/CI A126, Class B 250 (17.2) -20 to +450 (-29 to +232)
A216, Gr. WCB/
CS/CS 525 (36.1) -20 to +450 (-29 to +232)
A216, Gr. WCB
A351, Gr. CF8M/ 300 ** (20.7) -20 to +400 (-29 to +205)
SST/CI A126, Class B 250 (17.2) -20 to +450 (-29 to +232)
400 (27.6) -20 to +200 (-29 to +93)

A351, Gr. CF8M/
SST/BRZ 300 (20.7) -20 to +350 (-29 to +177)
B62, Alloy C83600 250 (17.2) -20 to +400 (-29 to +205)
A351, Gr. CF8M/

SST/CS A216, Gr. WCB
525 (36.1) -20 to +450 (-29 to +232)
A351, Gr. CF8M/
SST/SST * A351, Gr. CF8M
* For operating temperatures between -325 to +150F (-198 to +66°C), specify Opt -5 with trim B5 or Opt-36 with trim S1 or S36.
** For Opt-1+6 with Cast Iron Spring Chamber - Max. Inlet Pressure Rating is de-rated to 250 psig (17.2 Barg).
TABLE 3
BRASS TRIM MATERIAL COMBINATIONS
Brass Trim Designations

Metal Seat Composition Seat
Part
B1 B2 B3 B4 *B5 B6 B7 BB
Phosphor
Diaphragm 302 SST BC BC FKM EPDM FKM NBR
Brz
Cylinder Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass
Valve Seat 316 SST Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass
Plug 416 SST Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass
Seat Disc None (metal) NBR TFE TFE TFE EPR FKM NBR
Seat Disc Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass
None
Screw
Temperature -20 to +400 -20 to +180 -20 to 180 -20 to +400 -20 to +200 -20 to +300 -20 to +400 -20 to +180
°F (°C) (-29 to 205) (-29 to +83) (-29 to +83) (-29 to 205) (-29 to +93) (-29 to +149) (-29 to 205) (-29 to +83)
* For operating temperatures between -325° and +150°F (-198 and +66°C), specify Opt-5 and trim designation B5.
BC = Neoprene; NBR = Buna-N; FKM = Fluorocarbon elastomer; EPDM = Ethylene Propylene; TFE = Polytetrafluoroethylene
5 123-TB
TABLE 4 (a)
STAINLESS STEEL TRIM MATERIAL COMBINATIONS – METAL SEAT
Stainless Steel Trim Designations - Metal Seat
Part S0 *S1 S2 S2N S5 **S40
TFE Coated
Diaphragm 302SST 302SST BC FKM BC
302SST
Cylinder 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST
Valve Seat 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST
Plug 316SST 316SST 416SST 416SST 416SST 316SST
Seat Disc None (metal) None (metal) None (metal) None (metal) None (metal) None (metal)
Seat Disc None None None None None None
Screw
Temperature °F -20 to +450 -20 to +450 -20 to +450 -20 to +180 -20 to +400 -20 to +180
(°C) (-29 to +232) (-29 to +232) (-29 to +232) (-29 to +83) (-29 to +205) (-29 to +83)
* Available with stellited plug and valve seat (see Opt-15). Includes a screwed in seat cone.
*For Operating temperatures between -325° and +150°F (-198 and +66°C), specifiy Opt-36, S1trim.
** Trim Options for NACE service
TABLE 4 (b)
STAINLESS STEEL TRIM MATERIAL COMBINATIONS – COMPOSITION SEAT
Stainless Steel Trim Designations - Composition Seat
Part S3 S3N S9 *S36 **S40T **S40V SB
TFE Coated
Diaphragm BC BC 302SST FKM FKM NBR
302SST
Cylinder 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST
Valve Seat 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST
Plug 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST
Seat Disc TFE NBR TFE TFE TFE FKM NBR
Seat Disc
316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST 316SST
Screw
Temperature -20 to +180 -20 to +180 -20 to +400 -20 to +400 -20 to +400 -20 to +400 -20 to+180
°F (°C) (-29 to +83) (-29 to +83) (-29 to +205) (-29 to +205) (-29 to +205) (-29 to +205) (-29 to +83)
* For operating temperatures between -325° and +150°F (-198 and +66°C), specify Opt-36, S36 trim.
** Trim Options for NACE service.
BC = Neoprene; NBR = Buna-N; FKM = Fluorocarbon elastomer; TFE = Polytetrafluoroethylene
TABLE 5
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE PRESSURE DROPS
Pressure Drop1
Fluid Seat Material Trim Material Trim Designation No.
psid (Bard)
350 (24.14) Stellite SST S1

350 (24.14) Comp SST S9 or S36
Liquid 350 (24.14) Comp SST - Comp S3, S3N, SB, S40T or S40V
250 (17.25) Metal BR B1
250 (17.25) Comp BR - Comp B2, B3, B4, B6, B7 or BB
B1, S0, S1 or S2
Metal BR or SST
Metal SST - Comp S2N, S5 or S40

Gases 350 (24.14)
Comp SST S9 or S36
Comp SST - Comp S3, S3N, SB,S40T or S40V
Comp BR - Comp B2, B3, B4, B6, B7 or BB
350 (24.14) Stellite SST S1
300 (20.7) Metal SST S1 or S2
Steam
200 (13.8) Metal BR B1
50 (3.45) Comp BR - Comp B6
1 Maximum pressure drops are with the plug on the seat; i.e. no flow.
123-TB 6
TABLE 6
CAPACITY TABLES - Cv — METAL DIAPHRAGM
Set Point 1/2" (DN15) Body 3/4" (DN20) Body 1" (DN25) Body 1-1/2" (DN40) Body 2" (DN50) Body
(Inlet)
Pressure P1 % Build % Build % Build % Build % Build
psig (Barg) 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%
5 (.34) 0.22 0.44 0.67 0.89 1.11 0.50 1.00 1.44 1.77 2.05 0.50 1.00 1.44 1.77 2.05 1.50 2.89 3.57 3.92 4.28 1.74 3.32 4.11 4.59 4.90
10 (.69) 0.37 0.76 1.14 1.52 1.90 0.72 1.45 2.05 2.56 3.07 0.72 1.45 2.05 2.56 3.07 1.55 2.94 3.84 4.38 4.40 1.78 3.36 4.47 5.10 5.15
15 (1.0) 0.41 0.84 1.26 1.67 2.09 0.80 1.64 2.38 2.95 3.54 0.80 1.64 2.38 2.95 3.54 1.60 3.02 4.00 4.40 4.40 1.81 3.44 4.66 5.15 5.15
25 (1.7) 0.49 0.98 1.50 2.00 2.14 0.77 1.57 2.31 2.84 3.34 0.77 1.57 2.31 2.84 3.34 1.71 3.18 4.21 4.40 4.40 1.94 3.62 4.90 5.15 5.15
35 (2.4) 0.54 1.09 1.63 2.14 2.14 0.80 1.79 2.61 3.18 3.78 0.80 1.79 2.61 3.18 3.78 0.93 1.78 2.70 3.48 4.20 1.04 2.10 2.85 4.10 4.93
50 (3.4) 0.67 1.32 1.98 2.14 2.14 0.72 1.43 2.15 2.84 3.38 0.72 1.43 2.15 2.84 3.38 1.15 2.25 3.36 4.28 4.40 1.33 2.62 3.95 5.00 5.15
75 (5.2) 0.59 1.19 1.78 2.14 2.14 1.07 2.15 3.04 3.38 3.38 1.07 2.15 3.04 3.38 3.38 1.28 2.44 3.56 4.40 4.40 1.42 2.80 4.17 5.15 5.15
100 (6.9) 0.74 1.45 2.14 2.14 2.14 0.69 1.25 1.88 2.52 3.38 0.69 1.25 1.88 2.52 3.38 1.40 2.65 3.83 4.40 4.40 1.56 3.05 4.47 5.15 5.15
150 (10.3) 0.59 1.19 1.78 2.14 2.14 0.88 1.76 2.66 3.38 3.10 0.88 1.76 2.66 3.38 3.10 1.28 2.52 3.64 4.40 4.40 1.48 2.90 4.14 5.15 5.15
200 (13.8) 0.74 1.45 2.14 2.14 2.14 0.98 1.90 2.81 3.38 3.38 0.98 1.90 2.81 3.38 3.38 1.69 3.26 4.40 4.40 4.40 1.95 3.2 5.15 5.15 5.15
300 (20.7) 0.81 1.62 2.14 2.14 2.14 1.11 2.15 3.33 3.38 3.38 1.11 2.15 3.33 3.38 3.38 1.62 3.14 4.40 4.40 4.40 1.77 3.61 5.15 5.15 5.15
350 (24.1) 0.85 1.70 2.14 2.14 2.14 1.27 2.55 3.38 3.38 3.38 1.27 2.55 3.38 3.38 3.38 1.80 3.50 4.40 4.40 4.40 2.08 4.00 5.15 5.15 5.15
Metric Conversion Factor: Cv / 1.16 = kv
TABLE 7
CAPACITY TABLES - Cv — COMPOSITION DIAPHRAGM
Set Point 1/2" (DN15) Body 3/4" (DN20) Body 1" (DN25) Body 1-1/2" (DN40) Body 2" (DN50) Body
(Inlet)
Pressure % Build % Build % Build % Build % Build
P1
psig (Barg) 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%
5 (.34) 0.37 0.73 1.12 1.48 1.85 0.83 1.67 2.40 2.95 3.42 0.83 1.67 2.40 2.95 3.42 2.50 4.82 5.95 6.53 6.70 2.90 5.53 6.85 7.00 7.00
10 (.69) 0.62 1.27 1.90 2.53 3.04 1.20 2.42 3.42 4.27 5.10 1.20 2.42 3.42 4.27 5.10 2.58 4.90 6.40 6.70 6.70 2.97 5.60 7.00 7.00 7.00
15 (1.0) 0.68 1.40 2.10 2.78 3.04 1.33 2.73 3.97 4.92 5.10 1.33 2.73 3.97 4.92 5.10 2.67 5.00 6.67 6.70 6.70 3.02 5.73 7.00 7.00 7.00
25 (1.7) 0.82 1.63 2.50 3.04 3.04 1.28 2.62 3.85 4.73 5.10 1.28 2.62 3.85 4.73 5.10 2.85 5.30 6.70 6.70 6.70 3.23 6.03 7.00 7.00 7.00
35 (2.4) 0.90 1.82 2.72 3.04 3.04 1.33 2.98 4.35 5.10 5.10 1.33 2.98 4.35 5.10 5.10 1.55 2.97 4.50 5.80 6.70 1.73 3.50 4.75 7.00 7.00
50 (3.4) 1.12 2.20 3.04 3.04 3.04 1.20 2.38 3.58 4.73 5.10 1.20 2.38 3.58 4.73 5.10 1.92 3.75 5.60 6.70 6.70 2.22 4.37 6.58 7.00 7.00
75 (5.2) 0.98 1.98 2.97 3.04 3.04 1.78 3.58 5.07 5.10 5.10 1.78 3.58 5.07 5.10 5.10 2.13 4.07 5.93 6.70 6.70 2.37 4.67 6.95 7.00 7.00
100 (6.9) 1.23 2.42 3.04 3.04 3.04 0.99 1.79 2.69 3.60 4.43 0.99 1.79 2.69 3.60 4.43 2.00 3.79 5.47 6.70 6.70 2.23 4.36 6.39 7.00 7.00
150 (10.3) 0.84 1.70 2.54 3.04 3.04 1.26 2.51 3.80 4.96 5.10 1.26 2.51 3.80 4.96 5.10 1.83 3.60 5.20 5.63 6.70 2.11 4.14 5.91 7.00 7.00
200 (13.8) 1.06 2.07 3.04 3.04 3.04 1.40 2.71 4.01 5.10 5.10 1.40 2.71 4.01 5.10 5.10 2.41 4.66 6.47 6.70 6.70 2.79 5.31 7.00 7.00 7.00
300 (20.7) 1.16 2.31 3.04 3.04 3.04 1.59 3.07 4.75 5.10 5.10 1.59 3.07 4.75 5.10 5.10 2.31 4.49 6.36 6.70 6.70 2.53 5.16 7.00 7.00 7.00
350 (24.1) 1.21 2.43 3.04 3.04 3.04 1.81 3.64 5.10 5.10 5.10 1.81 3.64 5.10 5.10 5.10 2.57 5.00 6.70 6.70 6.70 2.97 5.71 7.00 7.00 7.00
Metric Conversion Factor: Cv / 1.16 = kv
7 123-TB
123-TB
TABLE 8
WATER CAPACITY - GPM S.G. = 1.0 T = 60°F FL = 0.945
All Sizes - COMPOSITION DIAPHRAGM ONLY
Set 1/2" (DN15) Body 3/4" (DN20) Body 1" (DN25) Body 1-1/2" (DN40) Body 2" (DN50) Body
Outlet Point
Pressure Pres- % Build % Build % Build % Build % Build
(psig) sure
(psig) 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%
5 0.9 1.8 2.9 3.9 5.1 1.9 4.1 6.1 7.8 9.4 1.9 4.1 6.1 7.8 9.4 5.9 11.8 15.2 17.3 18.3 6.8 13.5 17.5 18.5 19.2
10 2.1 4.4 6.9 9.5 11.8 4.0 8.4 12.3 16.0 19.8 4.0 8.4 12.3 16.0 19.8 8.6 17.0 23.1 25.1 25.9 9.9 19.4 25.2 26.2 27.1
15 2.8 5.9 9.3 12.7 14.4 5.4 11.6 17.5 22.5 24.2 5.4 11.6 17.5 22.5 24.2 10.8 21.2 29.5 30.7 31.8 12.3 24.3 30.9 32.1 33.2
25 4.3 8.9 14.3 17.8 17.8 6.7 14.4 21.9 27.8 29.9 6.7 14.4 21.9 27.8 29.9 14.9 29.0 38.2 39.3 39.3 16.9 33.0 39.9 41.1 41.1
35 5.6 11.8 17.9 20.0 20.0 8.3 19.3 28.6 33.5 33.5 8.3 19.3 28.6 33.5 33.5 9.6 19.2 29.6 38.1 44.0 10.7 22.7 31.2 46.0 46.0
50 8.3 16.5 22.8 22.8 22.8 8.9 17.9 26.9 35.5 38.3 8.9 17.9 26.9 35.5 38.3 14.2 28.1 42.0 50.3 50.3 16.5 32.8 49.4 52.5 52.5
0
75 8.7 17.5 26.3 26.9 26.9 15.7 31.7 44.8 45.1 45.1 15.7 31.7 44.8 45.1 45.1 18.8 36.0 52.4 59.2 59.2 21.0 41.3 61.5 61.9 61.9
100 12.3 24.2 30.4 30.4 30.4 9.9 17.9 26.9 36.0 44.3 9.9 17.9 26.9 36.0 44.3 20.0 37.9 54.7 67.0 67.0 22.3 43.6 63.9 70.0 70.0
150 10.1 20.4 30.5 36.4 36.4 15.1 30.1 45.6 59.5 61.1 15.1 30.1 45.6 59.5 61.1 21.9 43.2 62.3 78.3 80.3 25.3 49.6 70.9 83.9 83.9
200 14.5 28.3 41.6 41.6 41.6 19.2 37.1 54.9 69.8 69.8 19.2 37.1 54.9 69.8 69.8 33.0 63.8 88.6 91.7 91.7 38.2 72.7 95.8 95.8 95.8
300 19.2 38.3 50.4 50.4 50.4 26.4 50.9 78.8 84.6 84.6 26.4 50.9 78.8 84.6 84.6 38.3 74.4 105.4 111.1 111.1 41.9 85.6 116.1 116.1 116.1
350 21.6 43.4 54.3 54.3 54.3 32.3 65.0 91.0 91.0 91.0 32.3 65.0 91.0 91.0 91.0 45.9 89.2 119.6 119.6 119.6 53.0 101.9 124.9 124.9 124.9
5 0.6 1.4 2.2 3.1 4.1 1.4 3.1 4.8 6.3 7.6 1.4 3.1 4.8 6.3 7.6 4.3 9.0 11.9 13.9 15.0 5.0 10.3 13.7 14.8 15.7
10 1.8 3.9 6.2 8.6 10.7 3.5 7.5 11.1 14.5 18.0 3.5 7.5 11.1 14.5 18.0 7.5 15.1 20.7 22.7 23.7 8.7 17.3 22.7 23.7 24.7
15 2.5 5.5 8.7 12.0 13.6 5.0 10.7 16.4 21.2 22.8 5.0 10.7 16.4 21.2 22.8 10.0 19.7 27.5 28.8 30.0 11.3 22.6 28.9 30.1 31.3
25 4.1 8.5 13.7 17.3 17.8 6.4 13.7 21.1 27.0 29.9 6.4 13.7 21.1 27.0 29.9 14.3 27.8 36.7 38.2 39.3 16.2 31.6 38.3 39.9 41.1
35 5.4 11.4 17.8 20.0 20.0 8.0 18.7 28.5 33.5 33.5 8.0 18.7 28.5 33.5 33.5 9.3 18.6 29.5 38.1 44.0 10.4 22.0 31.1 46.0 46.0
50 8.1 16.5 22.8 22.8 22.8 8.7 17.9 26.9 35.5 38.3 8.7 17.9 26.9 35.5 38.3 13.9 28.1 42.0 50.3 50.3 16.1 32.8 49.4 52.5 52.5
2.5
75 8.7 17.5 26.3 26.9 26.9 15.7 31.7 44.8 45.1 45.1 15.7 31.7 44.8 45.1 45.1 18.8 36.0 52.4 59.2 59.2 21.0 41.3 61.5 61.9 61.9
100 12.3 24.2 30.4 30.4 30.4 9.9 17.9 26.9 36.0 44.3 9.9 17.9 26.9 36.0 44.3 20.0 37.9 54.7 67.0 67.0 22.3 43.6 63.9 70.0 70.0
150 10.1 20.4 30.5 36.4 36.4 15.1 30.1 45.6 59.5 61.1 15.1 30.1 45.6 59.5 61.1 21.9 43.2 62.3 78.3 80.3 25.3 49.6 70.9 83.9 83.9
200 14.5 28.3 41.6 41.6 41.6 19.2 37.1 54.9 69.8 69.8 19.2 37.1 54.9 69.8 69.8 33.0 63.8 88.6 91.7 91.7 38.2 72.7 95.8 95.8 95.8
300 19.2 38.3 50.4 50.4 50.4 26.4 50.9 78.8 84.6 84.6 26.4 50.9 78.8 84.6 84.6 38.3 74.4 105.4 111.1 111.1 41.9 85.6 116.1 116.1 116
350 21.6 43.4 54.3 54.3 54.3 32.3 65.0 91.0 91.0 91.0 32.3 65.0 91.0 91.0 91.0 45.9 89.2 119.6 119.6 119.6 53.0 101.9 124.9 124.9 124.9
10 1.5 3.4 5.4 7.6 9.6 2.9 6.4 9.7 12.8 16.1 2.9 6.4 9.7 12.8 16.1 6.3 13.0 18.1 20.1 21.2 7.3 14.8 19.8 21.0 22.1
15 2.3 5.0 8.0 11.1 12.7 4.5 9.8 15.1 19.7 21.3 4.5 9.8 15.1 19.7 21.3 9.1 18.0 25.4 26.8 28.0 10.2 20.7 26.7 28.0 29.3
25 3.9 8.2 13.1 16.7 17.3 6.1 13.1 20.2 25.9 29.1 6.1 13.1 20.2 25.9 29.1 13.5 26.5 35.1 36.7 38.2 15.3 30.2 36.7 38.3 39.9
35 5.2 11.1 17.3 20.0 20.0 7.7 18.1 27.7 33.5 33.5 7.7 18.1 27.7 33.5 33.5 9.0 18.0 28.6 38.1 44.0 10.0 21.3 30.2 46.0 46.0
50 7.9 16.3 22.8 22.8 22.8 8.5 17.7 26.9 35.5 38.3 8.5 17.7 26.9 35.5 38.3 13.6 27.8 42.0 50.3 50.3 15.7 32.4 49.4 52.5 52.5
5 75 8.6 17.5 26.3 26.9 26.9 15.7 31.7 44.8 45.1 45.1 15.7 31.7 44.8 45.1 45.1 18.8 36.0 52.4 59.2 59.2 20.9 41.3 61.5 61.9 61.9
100 12.3 24.2 30.4 30.4 30.4 9.9 17.9 26.9 36.0 44.3 9.9 17.9 26.9 36.0 44.3 20.0 37.9 54.7 67.0 67.0 22.3 43.6 63.9 70.0 70.0
150 10.1 20.4 30.5 36.4 36.4 15.1 30.1 45.6 59.5 61.1 15.1 30.1 45.6 59.5 61.1 21.9 43.2 62.3 78.3 80.3 25.3 49.6 70.9 83.9 83.9
200 14.5 28.3 41.6 41.6 41.6 19.2 37.1 54.9 69.8 69.8 19.2 37.1 54.9 69.8 69.8 33.0 63.8 88.6 91.7 91.7 38.2 72.7 95.8 95.8 95.8
300 19.2 38.3 50.4 50.4 50.4 26.4 50.9 78.8 84.6 84.6 26.4 50.9 78.8 84.6 84.6 38.3 74.4 105.4 111.1 111.1 41.9 85.6 116.1 116.1 116.1
350 21.6 43.4 54.3 54.3 54.3 32.3 65.0 91.0 91.0 91.0 32.3 65.0 91.0 91.0 91.0 45.9 89.2 119.6 119.6 119.6 53.0 101.9 124.9 124.9 124.9
10 1.2 2.7 4.5 6.5 8.3 2.2 5.1 8.0 10.9 14.0 2.2 5.1 8.0 10.9 14.0 4.8 10.4 15.0 17.1 18.3 5.6 11.9 16.4 17.8 19.2
15 2.0 4.5 7.3 10.2 11.8 4.0 8.8 13.8 18.1 19.8 4.0 8.8 13.8 18.1 19.8 8.0 16.2 23.1 24.6 25.9 9.1 18.6 24.2 25.7 27.1
25 3.7 7.7 12.5 15.9 16.7 5.7 12.4 19.3 24.8 27.9 5.7 12.4 19.3 24.8 27.9 12.7 25.1 33.5 35.1 36.7 14.4 28.6 35.0 36.7 38.3
35 5.0 10.7 16.8 19.6 20.0 7.4 17.5 26.8 32.9 33.5 7.4 17.5 26.8 32.9 33.5 8.6 17.4 27.7 37.4 44.0 9.6 20.6 29.3 45.1 46.0
50 7.7 15.9 22.8 22.8 22.8 8.3 17.2 26.9 35.5 38.3 8.3 17.2 26.9 35.5 38.3 13.2 27.2 42.0 50.3 50.3 15.3 31.7 49.4 52.5 52.5
7.5 75 8.5 17.5 26.3 26.9 26.9 15.4 31.7 44.8 45.1 45.1 15.4 31.7 44.8 45.1 45.1 18.4 36.0 52.4 59.2 59.2 20.5 41.3 61.5 61.9 61.9
100 12.3 24.2 30.4 30.4 30.4 9.9 17.9 26.9 36.0 44.3 9.9 17.9 26.9 36.0 44.3 20.0 37.9 54.7 67.0 67.0 22.3 43.6 63.9 70.0 70.0
150 10.1 20.4 30.5 36.4 36.4 15.1 30.1 45.6 59.5 61.1 15.1 30.1 45.6 59.5 61.1 21.9 43.2 62.3 78.3 80.3 25.3 49.6 70.9 83.9 83.9
200 14.5 28.3 41.6 41.6 41.6 19.2 37.1 54.9 69.8 69.8 19.2 37.1 54.9 69.8 69.8 33.0 63.8 88.6 91.7 91.7 38.2 72.7 95.8 95.8 95.8
300 19.2 38.3 50.4 50.4 50.4 26.4 50.9 78.8 84.6 84.6 26.4 50.9 78.8 84.6 84.6 38.3 74.4 105.4 111.1 111.1 41.9 85.6 116.1 116.1 116.1
350 21.6 43.4 54.3 54.3 54.3 32.3 65.0 91.0 91.0 91.0 32.3 65.0 91.0 91.0 91.0 45.9 89.2 119.6 119.6 119.6 53.0 101.9 124.9 124.9 124.9
15 1.7 4.0 6.5 9.2 10.7 3.4 7.7 12.2 16.3 18.0 3.4 7.7 12.2 16.3 18.0 6.8 14.1 20.6 22.2 22.2 7.7 16.2 21.6 23.2 24.7
25 3.4 7.3 11.9 15.2 15.9 5.4 11.7 18.3 23.7 26.7 5.4 11.7 18.3 23.7 26.7 11.9 23.7 31.8 33.5 33.5 13.5 27.0 33.2 35.0 36.7
35 4.8 10.3 16.2 19.0 19.8 7.1 16.9 25.9 31.8 33.2 7.1 16.9 25.9 31.8 33.2 8.3 16.8 26.8 36.2 43.7 9.2 19.8 28.3 43.7 45.6
50 7.5 15.6 22.5 22.8 22.8 8.0 16.8 26.5 35.5 38.3 8.0 16.8 26.5 35.5 38.3 12.9 26.5 41.5 50.3 50.3 14.9 30.9 48.8 52.5 52.5
75 8.3 17.5 26.3 26.9 26.9 15.2 31.7 44.8 45.1 45.1 15.2 31.7 44.8 45.1 45.1 18.1 36.0 52.4 59.2 59.2 20.2 41.3 61.5 61.9 61.9
10
100 12.3 24.2 30.4 30.4 30.4 9.9 17.9 26.9 36.0 44.3 9.9 17.9 26.9 36.0 44.3 20.0 37.9 54.7 67.0 67.0 22.3 43.6 63.9 70.0 70.0
150 10.1 20.4 30.5 36.4 36.4 15.1 30.1 45.6 59.5 61.1 15.1 30.1 45.6 59.5 61.1 21.9 43.2 62.3 78.3 78.3 25.3 49.6 70.9 83.9 83.9
200 14.5 28.3 41.6 41.6 41.6 19.2 37.1 54.9 69.8 69.8 19.2 37.1 54.9 69.8 69.8 33.0 63.8 88.6 91.7 91.7 38.2 72.7 95.8 95.8 95.8
300 19.2 38.3 50.4 50.4 50.4 26.4 50.9 78.8 84.6 84.6 26.4 50.9 78.8 84.6 84.6 38.3 74.4 105.4 111.1 111.1 41.9 85.6 116.1 116.1 116.1
350 21.6 43.4 54.3 54.3 54.3 32.3 65.0 91.0 91.0 91.0 32.3 65.0 91.0 91.0 91.0 45.9 89.2 119.6 119.6 119.6 53.0 101.9 124.9 124.9 124.9
Flow capacities in black shaded areas within the above table indicate that th water has reached full cavitation, and the flow is choked.
Flow capacities in gray shaded areas within above table indicate that flow has reached or exceeded the velocities in the table to the right; based on Schedule 40 pipe.
Metric Conversion Factors: psig/14.5 = Barg; GPM x 3.785 = LPM.
8
9
TABLE 9
AIR CAPACITY - SCFH S.G. = 1.0 T= 60°F FL = 0.945
All Sizes - COMPOSITION DIAPHRAGM ONLY

1/2" (DN15) Body 3/4" (DN20) Body 1" (DN25) Body 1-1/2" (DN40) Body 2" (DN50) Body
Outlet Set Point
Pressure Pressure % Build % Build % Build % Build % Build
(psig) (psig)
10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%
5 270 540 850 1140 1460 600 1230 1810 2280 2710 600 1230 1810 2280 2710 1800 3560 4490 5050 5300 2090 4080 5170 5410 5540
10 570 1210 1880 2590 3220 1100 2300 3380 4370 5400 1100 2300 3380 4370 5400 2360 4660 6320 6850 7090 2720 5330 6910 7160 7410
15 760 1630 2560 3540 4030 1480 3180 4840 6260 6760 1480 3180 4840 6260 6760 2970 5830 8130 8520 8880 3360 6680 8530 8900 9280
25 1230 2600 4210 5380 5660 1930 4170 6480 8380 9490 1930 4170 6480 8380 9490 4290 8440 11270 11870 12460 4860 9610 11780 12400 13020
35 1710 3680 5840 6900 7280 2520 6020 9330 11580 12220 2520 6020 9330 11580 12220 2940 6000 9660 13170 16050 3280 7070 10190 15890 16770
50 2780 5860 SONIC SONIC SONIC 2980 6340 10170 14280 SONIC 2980 6340 10170 14280 16310 4770 9990 15910 20230 21430 5520 11640 18700 21140 22390
0
75 3400 7390 SONIC SONIC SONIC 6170 13370 SONIC SONIC SONIC 6170 13370 20280 21770 23130 7380 15190 23720 28600 30390 8210 17430 27810 29880 31750
100 5470 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 4400 8600 13880 SONIC SONIC 4400 8600 13880 19860 SONIC 8890 18210 28230 36970 39360 9920 20950 32980 38620 41120
150 5390 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 8080 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 8080 17430 SONIC SONIC SONIC 11730 25010 38900 52350 SONIC 13530 28760 44210 56110 59860
200 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 11720 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 11720 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 20180 42350 SONIC SONIC SONIC 23360 48260 68610 73610 78600
300 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 19560 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 28420 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 31120 69000 SONIC SONIC SONIC
350 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 36660 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 42370 88590 SONIC SONIC SONIC
5 250 510 790 1070 1370 560 1160 1700 2140 2540 560 1160 1700 2140 2540 1690 3330 4220 4740 4970 1960 3830 4850 5080 5190
10 570 1210 1870 2580 3210 1100 2300 3370 4360 5390 1100 2300 3370 4360 5390 2360 4650 6310 6840 7080 2720 5320 6900 7150 7400
15 760 1630 2560 3540 4030 1480 3180 4840 6260 6760 1480 3180 4840 6260 6760 2970 5830 8130 8520 8880 3360 6680 8530 8900 9280
25 1230 2600 4210 5380 5660 1930 4170 6480 8380 9490 1930 4170 6480 8380 9490 4290 8440 11270 11870 12460 4860 9610 11780 12400 13020
35 1710 3680 5840 6900 7280 2520 6020 9330 11580 12220 2520 6020 9330 11580 12220 2940 6000 9660 13170 16050 3280 7070 10190 15890 16770
50 2780 5860 8640 9180 9720 2980 6340 10170 14280 16310 2980 6340 10170 14280 16310 4770 9990 15910 20230 21430 5520 11640 18700 21140 22390
2.5
75 3400 7390 SONIC SONIC SONIC 6170 13370 SONIC SONIC SONIC 6170 13370 2080 21770 23130 7380 15190 23720 28600 30390 8210 17430 27810 29880 31750
100 5470 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 4400 8600 13880 SONIC SONIC 4400 8600 13880 19860 26020 8890 18210 28230 36970 39360 9920 20950 32980 38620 41120
150 5390 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 8080 17430 SONIC SONIC SONIC 8080 17430 SONIC SONIC SONIC 11730 25010 38900 52350 57290 13530 28760 44210 56110 59860
200 8880 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 11720 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 11720 24630 SONIC SONIC SONIC 20180 42350 63420 SONIC SONIC 23360 48260 68610 73610 78600
300 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 19560 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 28420 60040 SONIC SONIC SONIC 31120 69000 101100 108590 SONIC
350 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 25820 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 36660 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 42370 88590 SONIC SONIC SONIC
10 530 1130 1760 2430 3020 1030 2160 3170 4100 5060 1030 2160 3170 4100 5060 2220 4370 5920 6430 6650 2550 5000 6480 6710 6950
15 750 1610 2530 3500 3980 1460 3140 4780 6190 6680 1460 3140 4780 6190 6680 2930 5760 8030 8430 8780 3320 6600 8430 8800 9170
25 1230 2600 4210 5380 5660 1930 4170 6480 8380 9490 1930 4170 6480 8380 9490 4290 8440 11270 11870 12460 4860 9610 11780 12400 13020
35 1710 3680 5840 6900 7280 2520 6020 9330 11580 12220 2520 6020 9330 11580 12220 2940 6000 9660 13170 16050 3280 7070 10190 15890 16770
50 2780 5860 8640 9180 9720 2980 6340 10170 14280 16310 2980 6340 10170 14280 16310 4770 9990 15910 20230 21430 5520 11640 18700 21140 22390
5 75 3400 7390 SONIC SONIC SONIC 6170 13370 SONIC SONIC SONIC 6170 13370 20280 21770 23130 7380 15190 23720 28600 30390 8210 17430 27810 29880 31750
100 5470 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 4400 8600 13880 19860 SONIC 4400 8600 13880 19860 26020 8890 18210 28230 36970 39360 9920 20950 32980 38620 41120
150 5390 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 8080 17430 SONIC SONIC SONIC 8080 17430 28430 SONIC SONIC 11730 25010 38900 52350 57290 13530 28760 44210 56110 59860
200 8880 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 11720 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 11720 24630 SONIC SONIC SONIC 20180 42350 63420 70450 75230 23360 48260 68610 73610 78600
350 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 25820 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 36660 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 42370 88590 117340 SONIC SONIC
10 430 910 1410 1940 2410 820 1730 2530 3280 4050 820 1730 2530 3280 4050 1770 3500 4740 5140 5320 2040 4000 5180 5370 5560
15 710 1530 2400 3320 3780 1390 2980 4540 5870 6340 1390 2980 4540 5870 6340 2780 5460 7620 7990 8330 3150 6260 8000 8350 8700
25 1230 2580 4180 5350 5620 1910 4150 6430 8320 9430 1910 4150 6430 8320 9430 4260 8390 11200 11790 12380 4830 9540 11700 12320 12940
35 1710 3680 5840 6900 7280 2520 6020 9330 11580 12210 2520 6020 9330 11580 12210 2940 6000 9650 13170 16050 3280 7070 10190 15890 16770
50 2780 5860 8640 9180 9720 2980 6340 10170 14280 16310 2980 6340 10170 14280 16310 4770 9990 15910 20230 21430 5520 11640 18700 21140 22390
7.5 75 3400 7390 11880 SONIC SONIC 6170 13370 20280 21770 SONIC 6170 13370 20280 21770 23130 7380 15190 23720 28600 30390 8210 17430 27810 29880 31750
150 5390 11810 SONIC SONIC SONIC 8080 17430 SONIC SONIC SONIC 8080 17430 28430 SONIC SONIC 11730 25010 38900 52350 57290 13530 28760 44210 56110 59860
200 8880 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 11720 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 11720 24630 SONIC SONIC SONIC 20180 42350 63420 70450 75230 23360 48260 68610 73610 78600
350 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 25820 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 36660 77570 SONIC SONIC SONIC 42370 88590 117340 126090 134830
15 630 1360 2130 2940 3360 1230 2650 4030 5210 5630 1230 2650 4030 5210 5630 2470 4850 6770 7100 7390 2800 5560 7100 7410 7730
25 1200 2530 4090 5240 5510 1870 4060 6310 8160 9240 1870 4060 6310 8160 9240 4170 8220 10970 11550 12140 4730 9350 11460 12070 12680
35 1700 3660 5810 6870 7250 2510 5990 9290 11530 12160 2510 5990 9290 11530 12160 2930 5970 9610 13110 15970 3270 7040 10140 15820 16690
50 2780 5860 8640 9180 9720 2980 6340 10170 14280 16310 2980 6340 10170 14280 16310 4770 9990 15910 20230 21430 5520 11640 18700 21140 22390
75 3400 7390 11880 12980 13790 6170 13370 20280 21770 23130 6170 13370 20280 21770 23130 7380 15190 23720 28600 30390 8210 17430 27810 29880 31750
10
150 5390 11810 SONIC SONIC SONIC 8080 17430 SONIC SONIC SONIC 8080 17430 28430 39760 SONIC 11730 25010 38900 52350 57290 13530 28760 44210 56110 59860
200 8880 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 11720 24630 SONIC SONIC SONIC 11720 24630 39300 SONIC SONIC 20180 42350 63420 70450 75230 23360 48260 68610 73610 78600
300 14270 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 19560 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 19560 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 28420 60040 91860 SONIC SONIC 31120 69000 101100 108590 116090
350 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 25820 SONIC SONIC SONIC SONIC 36660 77570 SONIC SONIC SONIC 42370 88590 117340 126090 134830
Flow capacities in shaded areas within above table indicate that flow has reached or exceeded a velocity of March 0.35, an accepted limit for expanded air on the downstream side. Use of higher velocities normally generate high noise levels.
Metric Conversion Factors: psig/14.5 = Barg; SCFH/35.31 = Sm3/Hr; SCFH/37.32 = Nm3/Hr.
123-TB
TABLE 10
STEAM CAPACITY - LBS/HR
S.G. = Actual T = Saturated FL = 0.945
123-TB
All Sizes - METAL DIAPHRAGM
1/2" (DN15) Body 3/4" (DN20) Body 1" (DN25) Body 1-1/2" (DN40) Body 2" (DN50) Body
Outlet Set Point
Pressure Pressure % Build % Build % Build % Build % Build
(psig) (psig) 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%
5 6 13 20 26 33 14 29 42 52 61 14 29 42 52 61 43 83 104 115 128 49 96 120 135 146
10 15 32 49 67 85 30 61 89 112 137 30 61 89 112 137 64 125 166 192 197 74 142 193 224 230
15 22 45 70 94 120 42 89 131 166 204 42 89 131 166 204 84 163 221 248 253 95 186 257 291 297
25 36 73 116 158 173 56 118 178 225 271 56 118 178 225 271 125 238 324 348 357 141 271 378 407 417
35 50 103 159 215 221 73 170 255 319 390 73 170 255 319 390 85 169 263 349 433 95 199 278 412 508
0 50 80 163 252 281 289 86 176 274 373 457 86 176 274 373 457 137 277 428 562 595 158 323 503 657 696
75 97 203 314 389 401 175 366 536 615 634 175 366 536 615 634 210 415 627 801 825 233 476 735 937 966
100 154 314 481 497 513 144 271 422 585 810 144 271 422 585 810 292 574 861 1022 1055 325 661 1004 1196 1235
150 175 368 572 712 735 262 545 855 1124 1065 262 545 855 1124 1065 381 780 1169 1463 1511 440 898 1330 1713 1769
200 286 583 894 926 956 378 764 1173 1462 1511 378 764 1173 1462 1511 652 1311 1837 1903 1966 753 1496 2150 2227 2302
300 463 966 1327 1375 1422 635 1282 2064 2172 2245 635 1282 2064 2172 2245 927 1873 2728 2827 2923 1013 2153 3193 3309 3421
350 555 1157 1514 1569 1623 829 1735 2391 2479 2563 829 1735 2391 2479 2563 1175 2382 3113 3226 3336 1357 2722 3643 3779 3905
5 5 10 15 20 25 11 22 32 39 46 11 22 32 39 46 32 62 78 87 96 37 72 90 102 110
10 14 29 45 61 78 27 56 81 103 125 27 56 81 103 125 59 114 151 176 180 68 130 176 205 210
15 21 43 67 90 115 40 85 126 159 195 40 85 126 159 195 81 156 211 237 242 91 178 246 278 284
25 35 72 114 156 171 55 116 175 221 267 55 116 175 221 267 123 235 319 343 351 139 267 372 401 411
35 49 103 158 214 219 73 169 253 317 388 73 169 253 317 388 85 168 262 347 431 95 198 277 409 505
50 80 163 252 281 289 86 176 274 373 457 86 176 274 373 457 137 277 428 562 594 158 323 503 656 696
2.5
75 97 203 314 389 401 175 366 536 615 634 175 366 536 615 634 210 415 627 801 825 233 476 735 937 966
100 154 314 481 497 513 144 271 422 585 810 144 271 422 585 810 292 574 861 1022 1055 325 661 1004 1196 1235
150 175 368 572 712 735 262 545 855 1124 1065 262 545 855 1124 1065 381 780 1169 1463 1511 440 898 1330 1713 1769
200 286 583 894 926 956 378 764 1173 1462 1511 378 764 1173 1462 1511 652 1311 1837 1903 1966 753 1496 2150 2227 2302
300 463 966 1327 1375 1422 635 1282 2064 2172 2245 635 1282 2064 2172 2245 927 1873 2728 2827 2923 1013 2153 3193 3309 3421
350 555 1157 1514 1569 1623 829 1735 2391 2479 2563 829 1735 2391 2479 2563 1175 2382 3113 3226 3336 1357 2722 3643 3779 3905
10 12 25 39 52 67 23 48 69 88 108 23 48 69 88 108 50 98 130 151 154 58 112 151 176 180
15 19 41 62 84 108 38 79 118 149 182 38 79 118 149 182 75 146 197 222 227 85 166 230 260 265
25 34 71 111 152 167 54 113 171 216 261 54 113 171 216 261 120 230 312 335 343 136 261 363 392 402
35 49 102 157 212 217 72 167 251 314 384 72 167 251 314 384 84 166 260 344 427 94 196 274 405 501
50 80 162 251 280 288 86 176 273 372 455 86 176 273 372 455 137 277 427 560 593 158 322 502 655 694
5 75 97 203 314 389 401 175 366 536 615 634 175 366 536 615 634 210 415 627 801 825 233 476 735 937 966
100 154 314 481 497 513 144 271 422 585 810 144 271 422 585 810 292 574 861 1022 1055 325 661 1004 1196 1235
150 175 368 572 712 735 262 545 855 1124 1065 262 545 855 1124 1065 381 780 1169 1463 1511 440 898 1330 1713 1769
200 286 583 894 926 956 378 764 1173 1462 1511 378 764 1173 1462 1511 652 1311 1837 1903 1966 753 1496 2150 2227 2302
300 463 966 1327 1375 1422 635 1282 2064 2172 2245 635 1282 2064 2172 2245 927 1873 2728 2827 2923 1013 2153 3193 3309 3421
350 555 1157 1514 1569 1623 829 1735 2391 2479 2563 829 1735 2391 2479 2563 1175 2382 3113 3226 3336 1357 2722 3643 3779 3905
10 9 19 29 39 49 17 36 51 65 80 17 36 51 65 80 37 72 96 112 114 43 83 112 130 134
15 17 37 56 76 97 34 72 106 134 165 34 72 106 134 165 68 132 178 201 205 77 150 208 235 240
25 33 69 108 147 162 52 110 166 209 252 52 110 166 209 252 116 222 302 324 332 132 253 352 380 389
35 48 100 154 209 214 71 165 247 310 379 71 165 247 310 379 83 164 256 339 421 93 193 270 400 494
50 79 162 250 279 287 85 175 272 370 453 85 175 272 370 453 136 275 425 558 590 157 321 499 652 691
7.5 75 97 202 314 389 401 175 366 536 615 634 175 366 536 615 634 210 415 627 801 825 233 476 735 937 966
100 154 314 481 497 513 144 271 422 585 810 144 271 422 585 810 292 574 861 1022 1055 325 661 1004 1196 1235
150 175 368 572 712 735 262 545 855 1124 1065 262 545 855 1124 1065 381 780 1169 1463 1511 440 898 1330 1713 1769
200 286 583 894 926 956 378 764 1173 1462 1511 378 764 1173 1462 1511 652 1311 1837 1903 1966 753 1496 2150 2227 2302
300 463 966 1327 1375 1422 635 1282 2064 2172 2245 635 1282 2064 2172 2245 927 1873 2728 2827 2923 1013 2153 3193 3309 3421
350 555 1157 1514 1569 1623 829 1735 2391 2479 2563 829 1735 2391 2479 2563 1175 2382 3113 3226 3336 1357 2722 3643 3779 3905
15 15 31 48 65 83 29 61 90 114 140 29 61 90 114 140 58 112 152 171 174 66 128 177 200 204
25 32 66 103 141 155 50 105 158 200 242 50 105 159 200 242 111 213 290 311 318 126 242 337 364 373
35 47 98 152 205 210 70 162 243 304 371 70 162 243 304 371 81 161 251 333 413 91 190 265 392 484
50 79 160 249 277 285 85 174 270 368 450 85 174 270 368 450 135 274 422 554 586 156 319 496 647 686
75 97 202 313 389 401 175 366 535 614 633 175 366 535 614 633 210 415 627 800 825 233 476 734 936 965
10
100 154 314 481 497 513 144 271 422 585 810 144 271 422 585 810 292 574 861 1022 1055 325 661 1004 1196 1235
150 175 368 572 712 735 262 545 855 1124 1065 262 545 855 1124 1065 381 780 1169 1463 1511 440 898 1330 1713 1769
200 286 583 894 926 956 378 764 1173 1462 1511 378 764 1173 1462 1511 652 1311 1837 1903 1966 753 1496 2150 2227 2302
300 463 966 1327 1375 1422 635 1282 2064 2172 2245 635 1282 2064 2172 2245 927 1873 2728 2827 2923 1013 2153 3193 3309 3421
350 555 1157 1514 1569 1623 829 1735 2391 2479 2563 829 1735 2391 2479 2563 1175 2382 3113 3226 3336 1357 2722 3643 3779 3905
Flow capacities in shaded areas within above table indicate that flow has reached or exceeded a velocity of March 0.35, an accepted limit for expanded air on the downstream side. Use of higher velocities normally generate high
noise levels.
Metric Conversion Factors: psig/14.5 = Barg; LBS/HR X 0.4536 = KG/Hr.
10
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Regula- ENGLISH (in)

Shipping
tor
Weight
Size A B B1 C C2 D E F F3 G lbs.4
(inch)
1/2 4.32 5.16 8.16 9.00 9.59 6.00 1.88 4.88 7.88 2.50 20
3/4 5.00 6.19 8.50 9.75 10.28 7.38 1.75 5.56 7.75 3.50 30
1 5.00 6.19 8.50 9.75 10.28 7.38 1.75 5.56 7.75 3.50 30
1-1/2 6.24 6.88 9.12 9.87 10.78 8.50 2.19 5.94 8.19 3.88 38
2 6.00 7.19 9.00 9.75 10.85 8.50 2.19 6.38 8.19 4.31 48
Regula- METRIC (mm)
Shipping
tor
Weight
Size A B B1 C C2 D E F F3 G kgs.4
DN
15 110 131 207 229 243 152 48 124 200 63 9.1
20 128 157 216 248 261 187 44 141 197 89 13.6
25 128 157 216 248 261 187 44 141 197 89 13.6
40 158 175 232 250 273 216 56 151 208 98 17.2
50 152 183 229 247 275 216 56 162 208 109 21.2
1 CL of body to extended P.E. nipple (not shown), Opt-32
2 CL of body to top of Closing Cap, Opt-1
3 Cl of body to end of extended P.E. nipple (not shown), Opt.-32
4 Weights do not include flanges.
MODEL 123 Cryogenic PRODUCT CODE
8C Table
1
Table
2
Table
3
Table
4
Table
5
Table
6
Table
7
Table
7
Table
7
Table
7
Table
7
Table
7
C
TABLE 1 - SZE TABLE 2 - BODY & SPRING TABLE 4 - Product Classification
Size CHAMBER MATERIALS Under European "Pressure Equipment Directive"
CODE Body/Sp.Ch. Option CODE
inch (DN) PRODUCT HAZARD CATEGORY CODE
1/2" (15) 4 BRZ/BRZ -5 3
Standard N/A 7
SST/SST -36 A
3/4" (20) 5
EUROPEAN 1 Sound Engineering Practice
S
1" (25) 6 TABLE 3 - TRIM DESIGNATION NO. Consult Factory for Special (SEP)
1-1/2" (40) 8 STAINLESS STEEL Code
Brass Trim (PED does not apply to CE Marked Hazard Cat
2" (50) 9 TRIM E
(OPTION-5) DN25 and below) I or II
(OPTION-36)
1 For products to be placed in service in Europe
Desig. CODE Desig. CODE
(See Cashco Spec. # 7E13)
S1 S1
B5 B5
S36 36
TABLE 5 - END CONNECTIONS TABLE 6 - RANGE SPRING TABLE 7 - OPTIONS

Description CODE SST Range Spring Description Option CODE
NPT Screwed 1 Range No Option — 0
OPT-30 - 150 LB RF Flg * SS Bodies ONLY 6 Size CODE
psig (Barg) 1. NUMERIC digits assigned first in “ascending”
OPT-30 - 300 LB RF Flg * SS Bodies ONLY 7
2-30 (.14-2.1) 3 order.
* Nipples and Flanges of same material as body. 20-60 (1.4-4.1) 6 2. ALPHA designations are assigned second
50-110 (3.4-7.6) A in "alphabetical order”.
1/2"
3. Left justify.
(DN15) 90-150 (6.2-10.3) C
4. Add “0” to all unused squares.
120-245 (8.3-16.9) E 5. For Special construction other than the above,
220-300 (15.2-20.7) H contact Cashco for Special Product Code
2-25 (.14-1.7) 2
3/4" & 1" 20-45 (1.4-3.1) 5
(DN20) 35-100 (2.4-6.9) 9
(DN25) 80-210 (5.5-14.5) D
170-300 (11.7-20.7) G
2-15 (.14-1.0) 1
10-30 (.69-2.1) 4
1 1/2" & 2" 25-55 (1.7-3.8) 7
(DN40)
(DN50) 45-95 (3.1-6.6) 8
75-130 (5.2-9.0) B
110-300 (7.6-20.6) F
123-TB 11
MODEL 123 Basic & Differential PRODUCT CODE 02/02/09
Table
1
Table
2
Table
3
Table
4
Table
5
Table
6
Table
7
Table
8
Table
9
Table
9
Table
9
Table
9
Table
9
Table
9 C
TABLE 2 - SERVICE & GASKETS
TABLE 1- MODEL Ò Service - Gasket Options CODE
CODE Description Standard: Non-Asbestos / Non-Oxygen -- B
8 MODEL "123" BACK PRESSURE RELIEF REGULATOR Non-Asbestos TFE / Oxygen -45 * D
MODEL "123-1+6" BACK PRESS. RELIEF REGULATOR- Carbon graphite -46G ** G
9 DIFFERENTIAL CONSTRUCTION, W/ CLOSING CAP
Refer to Tech bulletin for suitable gasket temperature range.
* Not available with Option -1+6.
** Only Available with CS or SST Body & Spring Chamber
TABLE 3 - SIZES TABLE 4 - BODY & SP. TABLE 5 - TRIM DESIGNATION NUMBERS
Size CHAMBER MATERIALS
CODE Brass Trim Stainless Steel Trim
inch (DN) Body/Sp. Ch. CODE
1/2" (15) 4 CI/CI 1 Body Material Body Mat'l
3/4" (20) 5 BRZ/CI 2 Desig. CI OR BRZ CODE CS CODE Desig. CI, CS & SST CODE
1" (25) 6 BRZ/BRZ * 3
1-12" (40) 8 B1 B1 B1 S0 S0
CS/CI 4
B2 B2 B2 S1 S1
2" (50) 9 CS/CS 5
B3 B3 -- S2 S2
SST/CI 7
B4 B4 -- S2N SN
SST/BRZ * 8
B5 B5 -- S3 S3
SST/CS 9 B6 B6 -- S3N SC
SST/SST * A B7 B7 -- S5 S5
* Not available w/ 1+6 variation.
BB BB BB S9 S9
S36 36
S40 40
S40T 4T
S40V 4V
SB SB
TABLE 6 - Product Classification TABLE 7 - END CONNECTIONS

Under European "Pressure Equipment Directive" Description CODE
PRODUCT HAZARD CATEGORY CODE NPT Screwed 1
Standard N/A 7
OPT-30 - 150 LB RF Flgs* 6
OPT-30 - 300 LB RF Flgs* 7
EUROPEAN 1 Sound Engineering Practice
(SEP)
S OPT-32 - SCH. 80 PE EXT. Nipples* E
Consult Factory for Special
Code
OPT-33 - Third Body CONN (NPT) 4
(PED does not apply to CE Marked Hazard Cat
E
OPT-39 - Socket Weld CONN* 2
DN25 and below) I or II OPT-30 +33 - 150 LB RF Flgs (3 CONN)* C
1 For products to be placed in service in Europe OPT-30 +33 - 300 LB RF Flgs (3 CONN)* D
(See Cashco Spec. # 7E13) OPT-32 +33 - SCH. 80 PE EXT. Nipples(3 CONN)* F
OPT-39 +33 - Socket Weld (3 CONN)* G
TABLE 8 - RANGE SPRINGS * Nipples & Flanges of same material as body.
Range Spring - STD & "1+6" Option CS or SST BODIES ONLY.
Range
SIZE
psig (Barg)
CODE
2-30 * (.14-2.1) 3 TABLE 9 - OPTIONS
25-50 * (1.7-3.4) 6 Description Option CODE
1/2" 40-100 * (2.8-6.9) 9 No Option — 0
(DN15) 80-150 * (5.5-10.3) C
DI Closing Cap
120-215 (8.3-14.8) F
CI or CS Spring Chamber -1 1
150-350 ** (10.3-24.1) G (Included with "1+6" Variation)
2-20 * (.14-1.4) 2 Stellited Seat Surface
15-40 * (1.0-2.8) 5 S1 Trim Only
-15 A
3/4" & 1"
30-80 * (2.1-5.5) 8 NACE Construction: CS/CS/XX
(DN20)
65-160 * (4.5-11.0) B Per MR0175, NPT Body
(DN25)
S40, S40T, or S40V Trims
-40 J
130-205 (9.0-14.1) E
165-350 ** (11.4-24.1) H (NOT Available with "1+6" Variation)
NACE Construction: SS/SS/XX OR SS/CS/XX
2-15 * (.14-1.0) 1 Per MR0175, NPT Body
10-25 * (.69-1.7) 4 S40, S40T, or S40V Trims
-40SST K
1-1/2" & 2"
20-55 * (1.4-3.8) 7 (NOT Available with "1+6" Variation)
(DN40)
(DN50)
45-105 * (3.1-7.2) A Special Cleaning: Per Cashco Spec #S-1134.
85-220 (5.9-15.1) D BRZ or SST body/sp.ch. mat'ls only. -55 M
180-350 ** (12.4-24.1) J (Not Available w/ "1+6" Variation)
Special Cleaning: Per Cashco Spec #S-1542.
* Range springs for use with Opt-1+6. All body/sp.ch. materials. -56 N
** Not recommeded for CI and BRZ body-spring chamber Not suitable for oxygen service.
material combinations, when set point pressure plus percent Epoxy Painted Per Cashco Spec #S-1547 -95 W
of build pressure exceed ratings per Table 2.
For Special Construction other Than Above
Cashco, Inc Contact Cashco for Special Product Code
P.O. Box 6
Ellsworth, KS 67439-0006 1. NUMERIC digits assigned first in “ascending” order.
PH (785) 472-4461 • Fax # (785) 472-3539 2. ALPHA designations are assigned second in “alphabetical” order.
www.cashco.com 3. Left justify.
E-mail: sales@cashco.com • exportsales@cashco.com 4. Add “0” to all unused squares.
Printed in U.S.A. 123-TB 5. If insufficient quantity of squares, consult factory for proper code.
PRV-2
CV-3A, 3B
Check Valve 4000
3/8" up to 2"
Non-return valve for backflow prevention
• All wetted parts stainless steel

• Compact design
• Sealing material PTFE
Technical Information
Nominal sizes 3/8" - 2"
Body material stainless steel 316 L
Material inner parts stainless steel 316 Ti
Material seating seal teflon (PTFE)
NPT-thread 3/8" - 2"
Connections
(welding ends on request)
Pressure class 580 psi
Cracking/lifting pressure 3 psi
Temperature range -4°F up to +392°F
Operating Pressures
adm. differential pressure (backpressure) psi
Nominal size seating seal
inch PTFE FKM / EPDM / NBR

3/8" 580 230
1/2" 580 230
3/4" 580 230
1" 580 230
1 1/4" 580 230
1 1/2" 510 230
2" 390 230
2 1/2" 290 230
Check Valve 4000
Dimensions and Weights
Body with threaded ends Body with welded ends
DN A H D S Lg Ls SW1 SW2 Cv value Weight Ordering

Rp lbs number
3/8" NPT 3/8" 1.71 - - 2.36 - 1.06 0.91 1.2 0.5 7005544
1/2" NPT 1/2" 1.67 0.84 0.08 2.56 3.15 1.06 0.98 3.02 0.5 7005545
3/4" NPT 3/4" 1.93 1.06 0.09 2.95 3.54 1.26 1.22 6.96 1 7005546
1" NPT 1" 2.26 1.33 0.1 3.54 3.94 1.61 1.54 13.34 1.5 7005547
1 1/4" NPT 1/ 1/4" 2.56 1.68 0.1 4.33 4.33 1.97 1.89 21.46 2.5 7005548
1 1/2" NPT 1 1/2" 2.91 1.9 0.1 4.72 4.72 1.06 2.17 32.48 2.5 7005549
2" NPT 2" 3.74 2.37 0.11 5.91 5.91 2.36 2.68 47.56 5 7005550
Dimension in inch
FI
LS
Echotel
®
Model 910
Installation
Installation and
and Operating
Operating Manual
Manual
Ultrasonic
Level
Switch
Read this Manual Before Installing WARNING! Explosion hazard. Do not connect or
This manual provides information on the Echotel Model disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off
910 Ultrasonic Liquid Level Switches. It is important that or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
all instructions are read carefully and followed in
sequence. Detailed instructions are included in the Low Voltage Directive
Installation section of this manual. For use in Category II installations. If equipment is used
in a manner not specified by manufacturer, protection
Conventions Used in this Manual provided by equipment may be impaired.
Certain conventions are used in this manual to convey
specific types of information. General technical material, Notice of Trademark, Copyright, and Limitations
support data, and safety information are presented in
narrative form. The following styles are used for notes, Echotel is a registered tradename of Magnetrol
cautions, and warnings. International.
Copyright © 2005 Magnetrol International,
Notes Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Notes contain information that augments or clarifies Magnetrol/STI reserves the right to make changes to the
an operating step. Notes do not normally contain product described in this manual at any time without
actions. They follow the procedural steps to which notice. Magnetrol/STI makes no warranty with respect to
they refer. the accuracy of the information in this manual.
Cautions Warranty
Cautions alert the technician to special conditions that All Magnetrol/STI Model 910 Level Switches are
could injure personnel, damage equipment, or reduce warranted free of defects in materials or workmanship for
a component’s mechanical integrity. Cautions are also two full years from the date of original factory
used to alert the technician to unsafe practices or the shipment.
need for special protective equipment or specific mate-
rials. In this manual, a caution box indicates a poten- If returned within the warranty period; and, upon
tially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may factory inspection of the control, the cause of the claim is
result in minor or moderate injury. determined to be covered under the warranty; then,
Magnetrol/STI will repair or replace the control at
Warnings no cost to the purchaser (or owner) other than
Warnings identify potentially dangerous situations or transportation.
serious hazards. In this manual, a warning indicates an
imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, Magnetrol/STI shall not be liable for misapplication,
could result in serious injury or death. labor claims, direct or consequential damage or expense
arising from the installation or use of equipment.
Safety Messages There are no other warranties expressed or implied,
The Echotel Model 910 is designed for use in Category II, except special written warranties covering some
Pollution Degree 2 installations. Follow all standard Magnetrol/STI products.
industry procedures for servicing electrical and computer
equipment when working with or around high voltage. Quality Assurance
Always shut off the power supply before touching any
components. Although high voltage is not present in this The quality assurance system in place at Magnetrol/STI
system, it may be present in other systems. guarantees the highest level of quality throughout the
company. Magnetrol/STI is committed to providing
Electrical components are sensitive to electrostatic full customer satisfaction both in quality products and
discharge. To prevent equipment damage, observe quality service.
safety procedures when working with electrostatic
sensitive components. Magnetrol’s quality assurance system is
registered to ISO 9001 affirming its
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. commitment to known international
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: quality standards providing the
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, strongest assurance of product/service
and (2) This device must accept any interference quality available.
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
51-604 Echotel Model 910

1.0 Introduction
Echotel Model 910 Level Switches utilize ultrasonic
contact technology for measuring level in clean liquid
applications.
1.1 Principle of Operation
The Model 910 Level Switch uses ultrasonic energy to

detect the presence or absence of liquid in a transducer
gap. The basic principle behind ultrasonic contact tech-
Ultrasonic
transducer
nology is that high-frequency sound waves are easily
transmitted across a transducer gap in the presence of a
liquid medium, but are severely attenuated when the gap
is dry. The Model 910 uses an ultrasonic frequency of
3 MHz to perform this liquid level measurement in a
wide variety of process media and application conditions.
The transducer uses a pair of piezoelectric crystals that are
Transmit Receive encapsulated in epoxy at the tip of the 316 stainless steel
crystal crystal
transducer. The crystals are made of a ceramic material,
that vibrates at a given frequency when subjected to an
applied voltage. The transmit crystal converts an electrical
signal from the Model 910 electronics into an ultrasonic
signal. When liquid is present in the gap, the receive
crystal is able to sense the ultrasonic signal from the
transmit crystal and convert it back to an electrical signal.
This signal is sent to the electronics to indicate the pres-
Ultrasonic signal transmission ence of liquid in the transducer gap. When there is no
across transducer gap
liquid present, the ultrasonic signal is attenuated, and is
Figure 1 not detected by the receive crystal.
2.0 Installation
2.1 Unpacking
Unpack the instrument carefully. Inspect all units for

damage. Report any concealed damage to carrier within
24 hours. Check the contents of the packing slip and
purchase order. Check and record the serial number for
future reference when ordering parts.
51-604 Echotel Model 910 1

2.2 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Handling Procedure
Magnetrol/STI’s electronic instruments are manufactured

to the highest quality standards. These instruments use
electronic components that may be damaged by static elec-
tricity present in most work environments.
The following steps are recommended to reduce the risk of

component failure due to electrostatic discharge.
CAUTION • Ship and store circuit boards in anti-static bags. If an anti-
SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC DEVICES static bag is not available, wrap the board in aluminum
DO NOT SHIP OR STORE NEAR STRONG
ELECTROSTATIC, ELECTROMAGNETIC,
foil. Do not place boards on foam packing materials.
MAGNETIC, OR RADIOACTIVE FIELDS
• Use a grounding wrist strap when installing and removing
circuit boards. A grounded workstation is recommended.
• Handle circuit boards only by the edges. Do not touch
components or connector pins.
• Make sure that all electrical connections are completely
made and none are partial or floating. Ground all equip-
ment to a good, earth ground.
2.3 Preliminary Operational Check
After unpacking and before installation, perform the

following operational check on the unit in a non-
hazardous area:
1. Apply proper operating voltage to terminals L1 and L2/N.
Power supply ground should be connected to the green
ground screw in housing base.
2. Fill a suitable container with liquid.
3. Place transducer gap in the liquid. The relay output should
actuate.
4. Remove transducer from the liquid. The relay output
should de-actuate. In case of malfunction, consult
Section 3.1, Troubleshooting on page 6.
Caution: This unit contains CMOS electronics which may become
damaged by static electricity. Do not touch any semicon-
ductor devices unless you are properly grounded.
2 51-604 Echotel Model 910

2.4 Mounting
Filling line
High alarm Low alarm
Gap must be High alarm

turned vertical
Pump protection
Top View of
Horizontal Mounting
Pump
Low alarm
Figure 2
Typical Mounting Orientations
Conduit
connection
Model 910 level switches are shipped as integral units with

Never tighten by
turning housing the electronics assembled to the transducer. They may be
3 4 " NPT
mounted in a variety of positions as shown in Figures 2
Use wrench here
thread through 5.
Figure 3
Vertical Mounting
Proper orientation of the transducer gap will provide
maximum performance in difficult applications. When
Gap must be
turned vertical Install so that the switch is mounted horizontally, the transducer gap
to allow medium wrench flats must be turned vertical to allow proper drainage of the
to fall through are vertical
liquid media. See Figures 2 and 4.
Screw transducer into the opening using pipe compound

or thread tape. If flanged, bolt unit to mating flange with
proper gasket.
Tank wall
Caution: Never tighten unit on the tank connection by turning the
Figure 4 housing. Use a wrench on the transducer mounting nut
Horizontal Mounting flats. Use thread tape or suitable pipe compound on the
threads. Do not overtighten.
Gap must
extend 1" (25 mm)
beyond When installed in a nozzle or pipe, the transducer gap
end of must extend into the tank at least one inch beyond the
nozzle
inside tank wall. Refer to Figure 5.
Figure 5
Nozzle Mounting

2.5 Wiring
2.5.1 Power
Power connections are made at the two-position terminal
block labeled TB1 within the electronics enclosure. Use of
14–22 AWG twisted shielded pair wire is recommended.
NOTE: Observe all applicable electrical codes and proper wiring
procedures.
1. Make sure the power is turned off.

2. Unscrew and remove the housing cover.
3. Prevent moisture seepage into housing by installing an
approved seal-drain fitting in the conduit run leading to
the unit.
4. Route wires into housing.
5. Connect ground wire to green ground screw located in
the base of the housing. DO NOT proceed until ground
connection is made.
6. After grounding is complete, connect the power leads to
proper terminals as follows:
VAC Units VDC Units
L1, L2/N +, –
Caution: In hazardous areas, do not power the unit until the
conduit is sealed and the enclosure cover is screwed
down securely.
7. Dress wiring to ensure no interference or contact with

cover or circuit board components.
TB1 Power Wiring

2.5.2 Relay
Model 910 switches have a number of possible relay

wiring options. The table below lists the relay contact
positions for all possible combinations of power failure,
condition of the transducer gap, and fail-safe jumper
position. The user must decide which combinations
constitute fail-safe and alarm conditions, and then select
the appropriate relay wiring and fail-safe position.
1. Run relay output wiring to the terminal blocks labeled
TB2 and TB3. Ensure that the load to be controlled is
within the relay’s rated capacity as shown in Section 3.3.2,
Electrical on page 6.
2. Select high or low fail-safe using the P1 jumper.
P1 Fail-safe Line Transducer Relay Terminals
Jumper Position Power Gap CM to NC CM to NO
Dry Closed Open
On
Wet Open Closed
Low level
Dry Closed Open
Failure
Wet Closed Open
Dry Open Closed
On
Wet Closed Open
High level
Dry Closed Open
Failure
Relay Output Wiring Wet Closed Open
3. Replace housing cover. Installation is complete.
Caution: Never tighten unit to the tank connection by turning the

housing. Use a wrench on the transducer mounting nut
P1 flats. Use thread tape or suitable pipe compound on
threads. Do not over tighten.
P1
LL HL
P1 Fail-safe Jumper

3.0 Reference Information
3.1 Troubleshooting
Caution: In hazardous areas, do not remove housing cover until power is disconnected and atmosphere is deter-
mined to be safe.
3.1.1 No signal with level change

a. Verify power and control circuit wiring.
b. Make sure liquid is filling the transducer gap.
c. Check for dense foam on surface or dried product in the gap. Unit will not function properly if
either condition exists.
d. Check transducer phone plugs for proper insertion in J1 and J2.
e. If control circuit does not actuate, consult factory.
3.1.2 Calibration
Model 910 switches do not require field calibration. The set point is not adjustable.
3.1.3 Switch chatter
a. Check voltage to make sure it is within tolerances shown in Section 3.3.2.
b. Check for turbulence. Relocate control or isolate from turbulence.
c. Check for excessive aeration.
d. Consult factory.
3.1.4 Control output will not de-actuate
a. Check transducer for plugged gap.
b. Check for dense foam or liquid in gap.
c. If control circuit does not de-actuate, consult factory.
3.2 Agency Approvals

AGENCY APPROVED MODEL PROTECTION METHOD AREA CLASSIFICATION
FM 910-XXXX-XXX Explosion Proof Class I, Div. 1; Groups C & D

Class II, Div. 1; Groups E, F, & G
Class III, NEMA Type 4X
910-XXXX-XXX Non-Incendive Class I, Div. 2; Groups A, B, C, & D
Class II, Div. 2; Groups F & G
Class III, NEMA Type 4X
CSA 910-XXXX-XXX Explosion Proof Class I, Div. 1; Groups C & D
Class II, Div. 1; Group E, F, & G
Class III, Type 4X
910-XXXX-XXX Non-Incendive Class I, Div. 2; Groups A, B, C, & D
Class II, Div. 2; Groups E, F, & G
Class III, Type 4X
ATEX 910-5XXX-XXX II 1/2 G EEx d II C T6/EEx e II T6
910-PXXX-XXX
These units have been tested to EN 50081-2

and EN 50082-2 and are in compliance with
the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.

3.3 Specifications
3.3.1 Physical
inches (mm)
4.63 4.63
(117) Dia. (117) Dia.
3.00 Rotation 3.44 (87)
(76) clearance Rotation clearance
3/4"NPT
2.75 2.75
4.48 plugged (70)
(70) 4.48
(113) (113)
6.25 6.25 3/4" NPT
(158) 3/4" NPT (158)
3.50 3.50
Optional (88) Optional (88)
mounting mounting
flange flange
3/4" NPT 3/4" NPT
tank connection Actuation length ➀➁ tank connection Actuation length ➀➁
Actuation point .25 (6) Actuation point .25 (6)
.875 (22) Dia. .875 (22) Dia.
316 stainless steel housing Aluminum sand cast housing

(Single 3⁄4" NPT conduit) (Dual 3⁄4" NPT conduits)
4.63
(117) Dia.
3.44 (87) 4.63
Rotation clearance (117) Dia. 3.44 (87)
3/4"NPT Rotation clearance
2.75
plugged (70)
3/4" NPT
4.48 (plugged) 2.75
(113) 4.48 (70)
6.25 (113)
3/4" NPT
(158)
3/4" NPT
.25 (6)
1" BSP Actuation length ➁
process connection Actuation length ➀➁
Actuation point .25 (6) Actuation point .25 (6)
.875 (22) Dia. .875 (22) Dia.
Aluminum sand cast housing Aluminum sand cast housing

(Dual 3⁄4" NPT conduit w/1" BSP process connection) (Dual 3⁄4" NPT conduit with sanitary flange)
➀ 1" (Code 001) minimum with NPT threaded process connections.

2" (Code 002) minimum with sanitary or ANSI flanged process connections.
➁ 25 (Code 003) mm minimum with NPT threaded process connections.

50 (Code 005) mm minimum with 1" BSP, and sanitary or ANSI flanged process connections.

3.3.2 Electrical
Power Supply: 120 VAC (+10%/-15%), 50/60 Hz

240 VAC (+10%/-15%), 50/60 Hz
24 VDC (±10%)
Power Consumption: 2.5 VA nominal
Relay Output: Gold flash DPDT relay: 10 amps @ 120 VAC, 240 VAC, 24 VDC ➀
Hermetically sealed DPDT relay: 5 amps @ 120 VAC, 24 VDC, and
3 amps @ 240 VAC
Repeatability: 0.078" (2 mm)
Fail-safe Configuration: Field selectable high or low
Calibration: None required
Ambient Temperature: Electronics: -40° to +160° F (-40° to +71° C)
Process Temperature: Transducer: -40° to +250° F (-40° to +121° C)
Operating/Non-Operating Pressure: 800/1500 psig (55/103 bar)
Shock ANSI/ISA-S71.03 Class SA1
Vibration ANSI/ISA-S71.03 Class VC2
➀ Gold flash DPDT relay is rated at 8 amps when used with Housing codes 5 or P
3.4 Replacement Parts
No. Description Part Number

120 VAC w/10 amp relay Z30-2043-003
240 VAC w/10 amp relay Z30-2043-004
24 VDC w/10 amp relay Z30-2043-002
1 PC Board
3 120 VAC w/5 amp HS relay Z30-2043-011
1 240 VAC w/3 amp HS relay Z30-2043-012
4
24 VDC w/5 amp HS relay Z30-2043-010
Aluminum w/FM and CSA 004-9182-002
Aluminum w/all 3 approvals 004-9182-008
2 Housing
2 Base 316 SS w/FM and CSA 004-9140-001
316 SS w/CENELEC 004-9140-001
Aluminum w/FM and CSA 004-9105-001
Aluminum w/all 3 approvals 004-9105-005
5 3 Housing
Cover 316 SS w/FM and CSA 004-9142-001
316 SS w/CENELEC 004-9142-001
4 O-Ring 012-2101-345
5 Transducer Consult factory
WARNING! Explosion hazard — Substitution of com-

ponents may impair suitability for Class 1,
Division 2 rating.
WARNING! Explosion hazard — Do not disconnect

equipment unless power has been switched
off, or the area is known to be non-
hazardous.

3.5 Model Numbers
3.5.1 Model 910
HOUSING
A Aluminum sand cast with 3⁄4" NPT dual conduit, FM and CSA approvals
Y 316 stainless steel with 3⁄4" NPT single conduit, FM and CSA approvals
P Aluminum sand cast with 3⁄4" NPT dual conduit, FM, CSA and ATEX approvals
5 316 stainless steel with 3⁄4" NPT single conduit, ATEX approval
TRANSDUCER UNIT OF LENGTH

1 English (actuation length in inches)
M Metric (actuation length in centimeters)
PROCESS CONNECTION
A 3
⁄4" NPT
2 1" NPT
9 1" BSP
3 11⁄2" sanitary flange, 16 amp (Compatible with Tri-Clover Tri-Clamp® fittings)
4 2" sanitary flange, 16 amp (Compatible with Tri-Clover Tri-Clamp® fittings)
1 1" 150 lb. ANSI raised face flange
C 11⁄2" 150 lb. ANSI raised face flange
D 2" 150 lb. ANSI raised face flange
E 1" 300 lb. ANSI raised face flange
F 11⁄2" 300 lb. ANSI raised face flange
G 2" 300 lb. ANSI raised face flange
INPUT POWER
0 120 VAC with 10 amp DPDT gold flash relay
1 240 VAC with 10 amp DPDT gold flash relay
2 24 VDC with 10 amp DPDT gold flash relay
H 120 VAC with 5 amp DPDT hermetically sealed relay
J 240 VAC with 3 amp DPDT hermetically sealed relay
K 24 VDC with 5 amp DPDT hermetically sealed relay
ACTUATION LENGTH
1" to 96" in 1" increments (with Transducer Unit of Length
code 1) Example: 4 inches = 004 ➀ ➂
3 cm to 244 cm in 1 cm increments (with Transducer Unit
of Length code M) Examples: 6 centimeters = 006 ➁ ➂
002
9 1 0
➀ 1" (code 001) minimum with NPT process connections, 2" (code 002) minimum with sanitary or ANSI flanged process connections.
➁ 2.5 cm (code 003) minimum with NPT process connections, 5 cm (code 005) minimum with 1" BSP, or sanitary or ANSI flanged
process connections.
➂ Consult factory for longer lengths.

ASSURED QUALITY & SERVICE COST LESS
Service Policy Return Material Procedure

Owners of Magnetrol/STI controls may request the return So that we may efficiently process any materials that are
of a control or any part of a control for complete rebuild- returned, it is essential that a “Return Material
ing or replacement. They will be rebuilt or replaced Authorization” (RMA) number be obtained from the
promptly. Controls returned under our service policy factory, prior to the material's return. This is available
must be returned by Prepaid transportation. through Magnetrol/STI’s local representative or by
Magnetrol/STI will repair or replace the control at no cost contacting the factory. Please supply the following
to the purchaser (or owner) other than transportation if: information:
1. Returned within the warranty period; and 1. Company Name
2. The factory inspection finds the cause of the claim 2. Description of Material
to be covered under the warranty. 3. Serial Number
If the trouble is the result of conditions beyond our con- 4. Reason for Return
trol; or, is NOT covered by the warranty, there will be 5. Application
charges for labor and the parts required to rebuild or Any unit that was used in a process must be properly
replace the equipment. cleaned in accordance with OSHA standards, before it is
In some cases it may be expedient to ship replacement returned to the factory.
parts; or, in extreme cases a complete new control, to A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) must accompany
replace the original equipment before it is returned. If material that was used in any media.
this is desired, notify the factory of both the model and All shipments returned to the factory must be by prepaid
serial numbers of the control to be replaced. In such transportation.
cases, credit for the materials returned will be determined
on the basis of the applicability of our warranty. All replacements will be shipped F.O.B. factory.
No claims for misapplication, labor, direct or consequen- NOTE: See Electrostatic Discharge Handling Procedure
tial damage will be allowed. on page 2.
5300 Belmont Road • Downers Grove, Illinois 60515-4499 • 630-969-4000 • Fax 630-969-9489 • www.magnetrol.com
145 Jardin Drive, Units 1 & 2 • Concord, Ontario Canada L4K 1X7 • 905-738-9600 • Fax 905-738-1306
Heikensstraat 6 • B 9240 Zele, Belgium • 052 45.11.11 • Fax 052 45.09.93
Regent Business Ctr., Jubilee Rd. • Burgess Hill, Sussex RH15 9TL U.K. • 01444-871313 • Fax 01444-871317
5300 Belmont Road • Downers Grove, Illinois 60515-4499 • 630-969-4028 • Fax 630-969-9489 • www.sticontrols.com
Copyright © 2005 Magnetrol International, Incorporated. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.
Magnetrol and Magnetrol logotype are registered trademarks of Magnetrol International.
STI and STI logotype are registered trademarks of Magnetrol International. BULLETIN: 51-604.14
EFFECTIVE: January 2005
Performance specifications are effective with date of issue and are subject to change without notice.
The brand and product names contained within this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. SUPERSEDES: July 2004
PS
Neo-Dyn®
by Aerospace Controls
®
Neo-Dyn Series 100P Pressure Switch / Internal Adjustment
®
Versatile Nega-Rate Belleville disc spring pressure switch for a wide range of applications. Series 100P (diaphragm
sensor) for pneumatic and low impulse hydraulics up to 3000 psig system pressure.
Operating Pressure Data
Adjustable Adjustable Set Point Range
Range Deadband Maximum Recommended Proof
Number Increasing Decreasing (approximate) System Pressure Pressure
1 5 to 75 2.3 to 72.3 2.7 600 1000
2 15 to 150 9 to 144 6 3000 5000
4 50 to 300 36 to 286 14 3000 5000
5 125 to 600 100 to 575 25 3000 5000
7 500 to 1500 440 to 1440 60 3000 5000
8 800 to 2800 675 to 2675 125 3000 5000
All values given in psig.
Standard Specifications Ordering Sequence — Select desired option for each category
Electrical OPTIONS
Wetted Material
Snap action electrical switch 1 Aluminum port, Teflon coated polyimide diaphragm and Buna-N O-Ring
recognized by Underwriters’ 4 316 stainless steel port, Teflon coated polyimide diaphragm and Buna-N O-Ring
Laboratories, Inc. and CSA 5 316 stainless steel port and diaphragm heliarc welded
International 7 Hastelloy C port and diaphragm, heliarc welded (Except Range 1)
9 Monel port and inconel diaphragm heliarc welded (Except Range 1)
Electrical Connection Adjustable Range
¹⁄₂ NPT female conduit connection 1 2.3 psig dec. to 75 psig inc. (0.2 bar dec. to 5.2 bar inc.)
with terminal block 2 9 psig dec. to 150 psig inc. (0.6 bar dec. to 10.3 bar inc.)
4 36 psig dec. to 300 psig inc. (2.5 bar dec. to 20.7 bar inc.)
Pressure Connection 5 100 psig dec. to 600 psig inc. (6.9 bar dec. to 41.4 bar inc.)
7 440 psig dec. to 1500 psig inc. (30.3 bar dec. to 103.4 bar inc.)
Wetted Material 1 8 675 psig dec. to 2800 psig inc. (46.5 bar dec. to 193.1 bar inc.)
¹⁄₄ NPT Female Electrical Form
C 15 amp at 125 or 250 VAC; ¹⁄₈ hp at 125 VAC; ¹⁄₄ hp at 250 VAC; .5 amp resistive,
Wetted Material 4, 5, 7 and 9 .04 amp inductive at 125 VDC
¹⁄₂ NPT Female CC 11 amp, ¹⁄₄ hp at 125 or 250 VAC; 5 amp resistive, 3 amp inductive at 28 VDC;
.5 amp resistive at 125 VDC
Temperature Range Z 15 amp at 125 or 250 VAC; ¹⁄₄ hp at 125 VAC; ¹⁄₂ hp at 250 VAC; 1 amp resistive,
Ambient: - 40°F to + 180°F .5 amp inductive at 125 VDC
(- 40°C to + 82°C) Enclosure
3 Meets or exceeds the requirements of NEMA Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X and 13
Media: - 40°F to + 300°F Miscellaneous
(- 40°C to + 149°C) A Epoxy paint exterior — extra protection for severe environments
B Viton O-Ring
Media temperature limits change C EPR O-Ring
with O-Ring selection E ⁷⁄₁₆" - 20 SAE port (Wetted Material 1 Only)
F Fire fuse — for fire-tested equipment (Wetted Material 4 & 5 only)
Adjustment J Annealed stainless steel port screws for H2S environments (Wetted Materials 4 and 5 only)
Concealed wrench flat adjustment — Consult factory for reduced system and proof pressure
with range scale L Neon indicator light — 115 VAC
M Gold electrical contacts for extremely low current applications
Shipping Weight P 5-Pin Brad Harrison connector (Reduce AC electrical rating to 8 amps — (Not for CC3 Electrical)
S Stainless steel diaphragm (Wetted Material 4 only)
Approximately 3 pounds W Stainless steel screws — exterior (Standard with Wetted Materials 4, 5, 7 and 9)
X UL and CSA Approved and CE Mark (Not available with L or P option)
Y 2" NPT Female port for viscous medias. Port Material is carbon steel (Wetted Material “3”)
— Order as 100P3xxxxY
Special (Consult representative or factory)

Non-catalog adjustable range and/or set point, deadband and proof pressure
Media temperature capability from -65°F to +400°F
Chemical seals installed
Manual reset — decreasing only (available in C3 only)
10 amps 125 VDC electrical rating
Ordering Procedure Example
When factory presetting is desired, Series
stipulate set point, increasing or Wetted Material
decreasing Adjustable Range
Electrical Form
Insert available option number or Enclosure
Weather Proof letter designation as required Miscellaneous
(NEMA 4 and 13)
100P 1 2 C 3 _
Field Adjustable
2.3 to 2800 psig Series 100P
Envelope Dimensions
3.50 Max. (range 1)

3.31 Max. (range 2-8)
(range 2-8)
Electrical Form
FORM "C" FORM "CC" FORM "Z"

(SPDT) INC (DPDT) (DOUBLE BREAK)
INC INC
P P P
RED NC1 RED NC1 RED NC NC BLK
BRN C1 BRN C1
BLU NO1 BLU NO1
GRN BLK NC2 BLU NO NO VIO
SCREW
YEL C2 GRN
SCREW
VIO NO2
GRN
SCREW
Basic Principles of Design
28150 Industry Drive, Valencia, CA 91355 Tel: 661-295-4000 Fax: 661-294-1750

Form #108-rev.d
LT
TK-1

»¹¾·Ä¿¹·ÂÈ»ÉÉËÈ»̑ÄºËÉÊÈ¿·Â
·Ë½»É̑ʹʺƔʼʻ
CPI
ÏÆ»ʹʺƔʼʻ PI

ÏÆ» ʹʺʹƔʼʻƺÈÏƻ
¿Ð» ʻͲ
ÅÄÄ»¹Ê¿ÅÄ
ÅÄÄƔ¿Ð» ʸƭʻͲ ʸƭʹͲ ʸƭʹͲ
È»ÉÉƔ¹·Â» ƭ ƭ
ƭˆ ƭ
ʺʷͲ½ ˀʾʻʼʺʷʷ ˀʾʻʼʼʻʿ ˀʾʺʻʿʹʽ ˀʽˀʻˀʺʷ ˀʾʻʼʾʿʼ ˀʾʺʻˀʽʽ
ʺʷͲƖʷƖʸʼÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʺʸˀ ˀʾʻʼʼʼʽ ˀʽˀʻˀʻʿ ˀʾʻʼʾˀʺ
ʺʷͲƖʷƖʺʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʺʹʾ ˀʾʻʼʼʽʻ ˀʽˀʻˀʼʽ ˀʾʻʼʿʷʾ
ʺʷͲƖʷƖʽʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʺʺʼ ˀʾʻʼʼʾʹ ˀʽˀʻˀʽʼ ˀʾʻʼʿʸʼ
ʺʷͲƖʷƖʸʷʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʺʻʺ ˀʾʻʼʼʿʷ ˀʽˀʻˀʾʺ ˀʾʻʼʿʹʺ
ʺʷͲƖʷƖʸʽʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʺʼʸ ˀʾʻʼʼˀˀ ˀʾʻʼʿʺʸ
ʺʷͲƖʷƖʹʷʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʺʽʷ ˀʾʻʼʽʷʹ ˀʾʻʼʿʻʷ
ʸʼÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʺʾʿ ˀʾʻʼʽʸʷ ˀʾʺʻʽˀˀ ˀʽˀʻˀʿʸ ˀʾʻʼʿʼʿ ˀʾʺʻʿʺʼ
ʺʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʺʿʽ ˀʾʻʼʽʹˀ ˀʾʺʻʾʷʺ ˀʽˀʻˀˀˀ ˀʾʻʼʿʽʽ ˀʾʺʻʿʻʺ
ʽʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʺˀʻ ˀʾʻʼʽʺʾ ˀʾʺʻʾʸʸ ˀʽˀʼʷʷʽ ˀʾʻʼʿʾʻ ˀʾʺʻʿʼʸ
ʸʷʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʻʷʿ ˀʾʻʼʽʻʼ ˀʾʺʻʾʹˀ ˀʽˀʼʷʸʼ ˀʾʻʼʿʿʹ ˀʾʺʻʿʽˀ
ʸʽʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʻʸʽ ˀʾʻʼʽʼʺ ˀʾʺʻʾʺʾ ˀʽˀʼʷʹʺ ˀʾʻʼʿˀʷ ˀʾʺʻʿʾʾ
ʹʷʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʻʹʻ ˀʾʻʼʽʽʸ ˀʽˀʼʷʺʸ ˀʾʻʼˀʷʻ
ʺʷʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʻʺʹ ˀʾʻʼʽʾʷ ˀʾʺʻʾʻʼ ˀʽˀʼʷʻˀ ˀʾʻʼˀʸʹ ˀʾʺʻʿʿʼ
ʻʷʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʻʻʷ ˀʾʻʼʽʿʿ ˀʽˀʼʷʼʾ ˀʾʻʼˀʹʷ
ʽʷʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʻʼˀ ˀʾʻʼʽˀʽ ˀʾʺʻʾʼʻ ˀʽˀʼʷʽʼ ˀʾʻʼˀʺˀ ˀʾʺʻʿˀʻ
ʿʷʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʻʽʾ ˀʾʻʼʾʷʷ ˀʽˀʼʷʾʻ ˀʾʻʼˀʻʾ
ʸƑʷʷʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʻʾʼ ˀʾʻʼʾʸʿ ˀʾʺʻʾʽʹ ˀʽˀʼʷʿʹ ˀʾʻʼˀʼʼ ˀʾʺʻˀʷʾ
ʸƑʼʷʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʻʿʺ ˀʾʻʼʾʹʽ ˀʾʺʻʾʾʷ ˀʽˀʼʷˀʷ ˀʾʻʼˀʽʺ ˀʾʺʻˀʸʼ
ʹƑʷʷʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʻˀʸ ˀʾʻʼʾʺʻ ˀʽˀʼʸʷʻ ˀʾʻʼˀʾʸ
ʺƑʷʷʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʼʷʼ ˀʾʻʼʾʻʹ ˀʾʺʻʾʿʿ ˀʽˀʼʸʸʹ ˀʾʻʼˀʿʷ ˀʾʺʻˀʹʻ
ʼƑʷʷʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʼʸʺ ˀʾʻʼʾʼʷ ˀʾʺʻʾˀʽ ˀʽˀʼʸʹʷ ˀʾʻʼˀˀʿ ˀʾʺʻˀʺʹ
ʸʷƑʷʷʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʼʹʸ ˀʾʻʼʾʽˀ ˀʾʺʻʿʷʷ ˀʽˀʼʸʺʿ ˀʾʻʽʷʷʼ ˀʾʺʻˀʻʷ
ʸʼƑʷʷʷÆÉ¿ ˀʾʻʼʼʺʷ ˀʾʻʼʾʾʾ ˀʾʺʻʿʸʿ ˀʽˀʼʸʻʽ ˀʾʻʽʷʸʺ ˀʾʺʻˀʼʿ
¹¹»ÉÉÅÈÏÅÈº»È¹Åº»Éƺ¿ÄÉÊ·ÂÂ»º·Ê¼·¹ÊÅÈÏƻ
ÈÅÄÊŲ·Ä½»Ƒ ƖƖ ̊
ʻ̄ͲÆ·Ä»ÂÁ¿Ê ƖƖ ̊
Ɩ¹Â·ÃÆƑÉÊ»»Â ƖƖ ̊
Ɩ¹Â·ÃÆƑ ƖƖ ̊
»·ÈŲ·Ä½»Ƒ ̊
»ÉÊÈ¿¹ÊÅÈ ̊

ÂÏ¹»È¿Ä»ŰÂÂ ÏÆ»ʹʺʺƔʼʻ
ÊÅ¹Á¿Ê»ÃÉÉ¾ÅÍÄ¿Ä¸ÂË»ÆÈ¿ÄÊƔ
¸¸È»Ì¿·Ê¿ÅÄÉ
ƖÅÍ»ÈÃÅËÄÊ
ƖÅÍ»È¸·¹ÁÃÅËÄÊ
ƖÊ·¿ÄÂ»ÉÉÉÊ»»Â
ʹʿ ÅÈ·ºº¿Ê¿ÅÄ·Â¿Ä¼ÅÈÃ·Ê¿ÅÄƑÆÂ»·É»¹·ÂÂʼƖ˃˃˃Ɩ˄ʿˀƖʽ˃˂ʽÅÈÌ¿É¿ÊÍÍÍƔÍ¿Á·Ɣ¹ÅÃƔ
Mechanical
Pressure Measurement
Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauges
Industrial Stainless Steel Gauge
Type 232.54 - Dry Case
Type 233.54 - Liquid-filled Case
WIKA Datasheet 23X.54
Applications
Intended for adverse service conditions where pulsating

or vibration exists
Process industry: chemical/petrochemical, power sta-
tions, mining, on and offshore, environmental technol-
ogy, mechanical engineering and plant construction
Suitable for gaseous or liquid media that will not ob-
struct the pressure system
Special features
Vibration and shock resistant (with liquid filling)

All stainless steel construction
Pressure ranges up to 15,000 psi
Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge Model 232.54

Standard Features
Design Temperature error

ASME B40.100 & EN 837-1 Additional error when temperature changes from reference
temperature of 68°F (20°C) ±0.4% for every 18°F (10°C) rising
Sizes or falling. Percentage of span.
2½” & 4” (63 & 100 mm)
Weather protection
Accuracy class Weather tight (NEMA 4X / IP 65)
2½”: ± 2/1/2% of span (ASME B40.100 Grade A)
4”: ± 1% of span (ASME B40.100 Grade 1A) Pressure connection
Material: 316L stainless steel
Ranges Lower mount (LM) or center back mount (CBM) - 2½”
Vacuum / Compound to 200 psi Lower mount (LM) or lower back mount (LBM) - 4”
Pressure from 15 psi to 15,000 psi 1/4” NPT or 1/2” NPT limited to wrench flat area
or other equivalent units of pressure or vacuum
Bourdon tube
Working pressure Material: 316L stainless steel
2½”: Steady: 3/4 scale value 2” & 2½”: 1,000 PSI: C-type,
Fluctuating: 2/3 full scale value 1,500 PSI: helical type
Short time: full scale value 4”: 1,500 PSI: C-type,
2,000 PSI: helical type
4”: Steady: full scale value
Fluctuating: 0.9 x full scale value Movement
Short time: 1.3 x full scale value 300-series stainless steel
Operating temperature Dial
Ambient: -40°F to +140°F (-40°C to +60°C) - dry White aluminum with black lettering; 2½” size with stop pin
-4°F to +140°F (-20°C to +60°C) - glycerine filled
-40°F to +140°F (-40°C to +60°C) - silicone filled
Medium: +212°F (+100°C) maximum
WIKA Datasheet 23X.54 07/2007 Page 1 of 2
Pointer Optional extras
Black aluminum, friction adjustable 316SS restrictor
Accuracy ±1.0% of full scale (2½” size)
Case
Stainless steel front or rear flange
304 stainless steel with vent plug and polished stainless
Zinc-plated steel or SS u-clamp bracket (field installable)
steel bayonet ring. Suitable for liquid filling. Welded case/
Red drag pointer or mark pointer
socket connection
Silicone or fluorolube case filling
Window Special connections limited to wrench flat area
Laminated safety glass with Buna-N gasket Custom dial layout
Other pressure scales available
Case fill bar, kPa, MPa, kg/cm² and dual scales
Glycerine 99.7% - Type 233.54
Dimensions
Size
A B C D E G H J M N P R S T W Weight
2.5” mm 70 54 33.5 62 13 55.5 - 3.6 85 75 87 72 12 14 0.36 lb. dry
in 2.75 2.13 1.32 2.44 0.51 2.19 - 0.14 3.35 2.95 3.43 2.83 0.47 1/4” 0.55 0.44 lb. filled
4” mm 110 87 49.5 100 15.5 81 30 4.8 132 116 125 110 15 22 1.10 lb. dry
in 4.30 3.43 1.95 3.94 0.61 3.19 1.18 0.19 5.20 4.57 4.92 4.33 0.59 1/2” 0.87 1.76 lb. filled
Recommended panel cutout is dimension D + 1 mm
Page 2 of 2 WIKA Datasheet 23X.54 07/2007
Ordering information
Pressure gauge model / Nominal size / Scale range / Size of connection / Optional extras required
Specifications and dimensions given in this leaflet represent the state of engineering at the time of printing.
Modifications may take place and materials specified may be replaced by others without prior notice. WIKA Instrument Corporation
1000 Wiegand Boulevard
Lawrenceville, GA 30045
Tel (770) 513-8200 Toll-free 1-888-WIKA-USA
Fax (770) 338-5118
E-Mail info@wika.com
www.wika.com
Operating 1. Safety * "
GB "

Q
Instructions WARNING!
# !"

- k
!!"
ing and operation, ensure that the !
! ' Q #
Pressure Gauges appropriate pressure gauge has J

!"
-

-
** *

CLOSE to OPEN.

!"

# !
{
"
!

_H"~ $

!

#

' " !-
"

*# Requirements for the installation point
<
= "
! !"
$!
!

"

*
'

" "'"" Q
* !"# ! " * H -
Model 732.14, " #$*

"*

<*" >!? !H
-
!!

= '
up to 400 bar
H =

! #^!

!
Model 432.36,
"
"#

protected against coarse dirt and wide fluctua-
<*" addition to all standard regulations, the appro-
up to 400 bar

"#
" H

followed.
Model 213.40 3. Permissible ambient and operating
J
H
"
Q temperatures
" Y
#J
!Q

" !

!"

!"
# ensured that, taking into consideration the influ-
[
' *
!" *

*

!

* -
Notes in accordance with Pressure Equipment

Y
\
* !"

Directive 97/23/EC = "
# "
#^!

"
! "
The pressure gauges are "pressure accessories"
2. Mechanical connection *#
in accordance with Article 1, Paragraph 2.1.4
^!*!"
!
In accordance with the general technical regula-
WIKA pressure gauges is < 0.1 L 4. Storage
tions for pressure gauges (e.g. EN 837-2). When
^!"_Q
>
!
!=
"

!J
H|^ The pressure gauge should be kept in its original

!
"" !!! packing until installation. The gauge should be
!
! " Q
"
H!
!!!"

exceeds 200 bar "H

#
"* ! ""
}"
~'###{#
]!
!_Q tool). ]!!
#

!J
Paragraph 3 "Sound engineering practice". Mounting with 5. Maintenance / Repairs
Applied standards spanner
_[`{'
"

^!

'#!Q
=

should be carried out on a regular basis to
_[`{'| }

Correct sealing of pressure gauge connections
!
!"
for pressure gauges with parallel threads c
#^!!Q

_[`{' "!
"" suitable sealing rings, sealing washers or WIKA = Q "
!

=

profile seals. The sealing of tapered threads (e.g. !""" = "
#
testing []^! "*
!! !

!"

}"
~!
# Q# d !

! ** * #
H"]^>_"_[`{'|#
} Y!

# WARNING!
$JJH

}_#|

Spanner flats }
pressure gauges can result in a risk
WIKA Alexander Wiegand SE & Co. KG the thread d "
!
*

Alexander-Wiegand-Straße 30
Sealing face c = "
#^Q
"-

#
Tel. (+49) 93 72/132-0 ^!="

!#
-
Fax (+49) 93 72/132-406
!
"Q

E-Mail info@wika.de

!

!#!
'
2408976.03 02/2010
www.wika.de

Ɩ
»¹¾·Ä¿¹·Â»ÃÆ»È·ÊËÈ»̑¿Ã»Ê·Â¾»ÈÃÅÃ»Ê»ÈÉ̑ƔʺʺƭƔʺʻƑƔʼʺƭƔʼʻ

TI
ÏÆ»ƔʺʺƭƔʺʻƑƔʼʺƭƔʼʻ
ƑƔʼʺƭ
ƠÉ¿ÄºËÉÊÈ¿·Â½È·º»¸¿Ã»Ê·Âº¿·ÂÊ¾»ÈÃÅÃ»Ê»ÈÉƑƔʺʺƑʺʻƑʼʺƑʼʻ
·È»·Ä¿º»·Â¹¾Å¿¹»Í¾»È»·Í»·Ê¾»ÈƖÈ»É¿ÉÊ·ÄÊƑÊ·ÃÆ»ÈƖÆÈÅÅ¼Ê¾»ÈƖ
ÃÅÃ»Ê»È¿ÉÄ»»º»ºƔ¾»È»¿É·ʸÏ»·ÈÍ·ÈÈ·ÄÊÏƔ
Ê·Äº·Èº »·ÊËÈ»É
·É»Ɠ ʺʷʻÉÊ·¿ÄÂ»ÉÉÉÊ»»Â ¾¿ÆÆ¿Ä½»¿½¾ÊƓ ÏÆ»ʺʺųʺʻƓÉÊ»ÃÂ»Ä½Ê¾Ɩ
¿·ÂƓ ÄÊ¿ƖÆ·È·ÂÂ·ÎƑ¾»·ÌÏ½·Ë½» ʹ̄ƢƖˀƢ̏ʸʹÅÐƔ
·ÂËÃ¿ÄËÃÍ¿Ê¾Ã·ÊÊ»ŰÄ¿É¾ ÏÆ»ʼʺƓÉÊ»ÃÂ»Ä½Ê¾Ɩ
¿ÄºÅÍƓ ËÂÂÏ½·ÉÁ»Ê»º½Â·ÉÉ ʹ̄ƢƖˀƢ̏ʸÂ¸ƔʿÅÐƔ
»ÈÃ»Ê¿¹»·ÂƓ »ÈʻʷƔʺƑʽʼƑʻ ÏÆ»ʼʻƓÉÊ»ÃÂ»Ä½Ê¾Ɩ
Ê»ÃƓ ̂Ƣº¿·Ã»Ê»ÈƒʺʷʻÉÊ·¿ÄÂ»ÉÉ ʹ̄ƢƖˀƢ̏ʸʹÅÐƔ
ÉÊ»»ÂƑ
Í»Âº»º·ÊÊ¿Æ·Äº¹·É» ƺǆǆÍ»¿½¾ÊÉÅ¼¿Äº¿Ì¿ºË·Â
¹ÅÄÄ»¹Ê¿ÅÄƔʺƭʿƢº¿·Ã»Ê»È·Ì·¿Â·¸Â» Ê¾»ÈÃÅÃ»Ê»ÈÉƻ
¹¹ËÈ·¹ÏƓ ̊ʸ̈Å¼¼ËÂÂÈ·Ä½»ÉÆ·ÄÆ»È

È·º»ƑʻʷƔʺ ÅÊ»Ɠ¿Â¿¹ÅÄ»ƖŰÂÂ»ºƑº·ÃÆ»Ä»ºÃÅÌ»Ã»ÄÊƑÃ¿Äƭ
Ã·ÎÆÅ¿ÄÊ»ÈƑºÈÏÍ¿Ê¾ÆÂË½ƑƔʺʾʼÉÊ»Ã·ÄºʺʸʽÍ»ÊÊ»º
Ì»È·Ä½»Ɠ »ÃÆÅÈ·ÈÏÅÌ»ÈÅÈËÄº»ÈÈ·Ä½» Æ·ÈÊÉÄÅÊ·Ì·¿Â·¸Â»
ÊÅÂ»È·Ä¹»Å¼ʼʷ̈Å¼É¹·Â»

ËÆÊÅʼʷʷͮ ƺʹʽʷͮƻ
ÅÈ¼ËÂÂÉÆ»¹¿Ű¹·Ê¿ÅÄÉ·Äºº¿Ã»ÄÉ¿ÅÄ·ÂºÈ·Í¿Ä½ÉƑÌ¿É¿ÊÍÍÍƔÍ¿Á·Ɣ¹ÅÃÊÅºÅÍÄÂÅ·ºº·Ê·É¾»»ÊÉƔʺʺƑƔʺʻƑƔʼʺƑƔʼʻƔ
ÏÆ» Ɣʺʺ Ì·¿Â·¸Â»ÆÊ¿ÅÄÉ

ÅÄÄ»¹Ê¿ÅÄ ʸƭʹͲ¸·¹Á Ϯ Ê»ÃÂ»Ä½Ê¾É¼ÈÅÃʹ̄ƢÊÅʹʻƢ
Ϯ ·Ä½»É¼ÈÅÃƖʸʷʷͮ ƺƖʾʷͮƻ
¿·Â¿Ð» ʺͲ ÊÅʸƑʷʷʷͮ ƺʼʼʷͮƻ
Ê»Ã»Ä½Ê¾ ʹ̄Ͳ ʻͲ ʽͲ ˀͲ
Ϯ Æ»¹¿·ÂÈ·Ä½»ÉƑ¹ËÉÊÅÃº¿·ÂÉƑÉÊ»ÃÉƑ
ʷƭʹʼʷͮ ʺʺʷʹʼʹʷʽ
ʻ ʺʺʷʻʷʹʷʽ
ʻ ʺʺʷʽʷʹʷʽ
ʻ ʺʺʷˀʷʹʷʽ
ʻ
¹ÅÄÄ»¹Ê¿ÅÄÉ·ÄºÍ¿ÄºÅÍÉ
ʼʷƭʼʼʷͮ ʺʺʷʹʼʹʸʽ
ʻ ʺʺʷʻʷʹʸʽ
ʻ ʺʺʷʽʷʹʸʽ
ʻ ʺʺʷˀʷʹʸʽ
ʻ
Ϯ ¿ÄºÅÍƓ»Î·ÄƑ·¹ÈÏÂ¿¹ƑÉ¾·ÊÊ»ÈÆÈÅÅ¼
ÊÅ¹Á¿Ê»ÃÉÉ¾ÅÍÄ¿Ä¸ÂË»ÆÈ¿ÄÊƔ Ϯ ¾·ÈÆÊ¿Æ
ÏÆ»»É¹È¿ÆÊ¿ÅÄÉ
ÏÆ»ʺʺƺƔʺʺƻ̏ʺͲ¸·¹Á¹ÅÄÄ»¹Ê¿ÅÄ
ÏÆ»ʺʻƺƔʺʻƻ̏ʺͲ¸ÅÊÊÅÃ¹ÅÄÄ»¹Ê¿ÅÄ
ÏÆ»ʼʺƺƔʼʺƻ̏ʼͲ¸·¹Á¹ÅÄÄ»¹Ê¿ÅÄ
ÏÆ»ʼʻƺƔʼʻƻ̏ʼͲ¸ÅÊÊÅÃ¹ÅÄÄ»¹Ê¿ÅÄ
ʸʺʹ ÅÈ·ºº¿Ê¿ÅÄ·Â¿Ä¼ÅÈÃ·Ê¿ÅÄƑÆÂ»·É»¹·ÂÂʼƖ˃˃˃Ɩ˄ʿˀƖʽ˃˂ʽÅÈÌ¿É¿ÊÍÍÍƔÍ¿Á·Ɣ¹ÅÃƔ
Mechanical
Temperature Measurement
Bimetal Thermometer TI
Model TI.53, All Stainless Steel Construction
Datasheet TI.53
Applications
Suitable for fluid medium which does not corrode 304

stainless steel
Special features
Industrial design
Back connection without external reset
All Stainless steel construction
Standard version
Size Thermometer TI.53
5” (127mm)
Case
Accuracy
Material: 304 stainless steel
+ 1.0% full scale value (ASME B40.3)
Hermetically sealed
Ingress protection IP 65
Ranges
-100 oF to 1000 oF (and equivalent Celsius)
Pointer
Black aluminum
Working Range
Steady: full scale value
Standard Scales
Short time: 110% of full scale value
Single: Fahrenheit or Celsius
Dual: Fahrenheit (outer) and Celsius (inner)
Under/Over Range Protection
Temporary over or under range tolerance of 50% of scale
Window Gasket
up to 500 oF. (260°C). For ranges above 500°F, maximum
Neoprene
over range is 800°F; continous. 1000°F intermittent.
Silicone (-100 oF and over 550 oF)
Connection
Window
Flat instrument glass
Center back mount (CBM) - Type TI.53
1/2” NPT Connection Weight
16 oz. (Type TI.53)
Stem
Add 1 oz. for every 2” of stem length
Diameter: 1/4” (6.35 mm)
Dampening
Length: 2½” to 24” (63.5 mm to 609.6 mm)
Inert gel to minimize pointer oscillation
Measuring Element
Warranty
Bi-metal helix
Limited one year warranty as stated in WIKA’s Terms &
Dial Conditions of Sale
White aluminum, dished, with black markings
!^$#`\| Page 1 of 2
R
Optional Extras STANDARD RANGES
Fahrenheit Dual Scale F & C Celsius
Thermowells Single Scale F Outer, C Inner Single Scale
Special scales and dial markings -100/150 F -100/150 F & -70/70 C -50/50 C
Acrylic and safety glass windows -40/120 F 40/120 F & -40/50 C -20/120 C
Calibration certification traceable to NIST 0/140 F 0/140 F & -20/60 C 0/50 C1
0/200 F 0/200 F & -15/90 C 0/100 C
0/250 F 0/250 F & -20/120 C 0/150 C
20/240 F 20/240 F & -5/115 C 0/200 C
25/125 F 25/125 F & -5/50 C1 0/250 C
50/300 F 50/300 F & 10/150 C 0/300 C
50/400 F 50/400 F & 10/200 C 0/450 C1
50/550 F 50/500 F & 10/260 C 100/550 C1
150/750 F 150/750 F & 65/400 C
200/1000 F1 200/1000 F & 100/540 C1
1
Not recommended for continous service over 800°F (425°C)
Dimensions
Standard versions
WIKA Type DIAL SIZE A B C S (Stem Length)

53 5” (127 mm) 5-1/4” (8133.4 mm) 15/16” (23.8 mm) 5/16” (7.9 mm) As Specified
Note: Thermowells for temperature instruments are recommended for all process systems where pressure, velocity, or viscous, abrasive and corrosive materials are present individually or in
combination. A properly selected thermowell protects the temperature instrument from possible damage resulting from these process variables. Furthermore, a thermowell permits removal of
the temperature instrument for replacement, repair or testing without effecting the process media or the system.
Ordering information
State computer part number (if available) /type number/size/range/connection size and locations/options required. WIKA reserves the right to make changes without prior notice.
Page 2 of 2 !^$#`\|
WIKA Instrument Corporation

1000 Wiegand Boulevard
Lawrenceville, GA 30043
1-888-WIKA-USA /770-513-8200 (in GA)
Fax 770-338-5118
info@wika.com www.wika.com

Ɩ
»¹¾·Ä¿¹·Â»ÃÆ»È·ÊËÈ»̑¿Ã»Ê·Â¾»ÈÃÅÃ»Ê»ÈÉ̑¿Ã»Ê·Â¾»ÈÃÅÃ»Ê»ÈÆÊ¿ÅÄÉ

¿Ã»Ê·Â¾»ÈÃÅÃ»Ê»ÈÉÆÊ¿ÅÄÉ
·ÃÆ»Ä»ºÅÌ»Ã»ÄÊ Ä¿ÅÄÅ¹ÁËÊ
Ä½¿Ä»»È»ºÉÅÂËÊ¿ÅÄÆÈÅÌ¿º¿Ä½¸»Ä»ŰÊÉÅ¼¹·É»ŰÂÂ ¾»Ä¿ÅÄÅ¹ÁËÊÆÈÅƖ
¿Ä·ºÈÏ¹ÅÄŰ½ËÈ·Ê¿ÅÄƔ¾¿ÉÉ¿Â¿¹ÅÄ»Ɩ¼È»»ÅÆÊ¿ÅÄ Ì¿º»É·É¿ÃÆÂ»·Äº¿Ä»ÎÆ»ÄƖ
ÆÈÅÌ¿º»Éº·ÃÆ»Ä¿Ä½¿ÄÊÅË½¾»ÄÌ¿ÈÅÄÃ»ÄÊÉ·Ê·ÂÂ É¿Ì»Ã»·ÄÉÊÅÃÅËÄÊ
·Ì·¿Â·¸Â»Ê»ÃÆ»È·ÊËÈ»È·Ä½»ÉƔÌ·¿Â·¸Â»¿Ä·ÂÂ ¸¿Ã»Ê·ÂÊ¾»ÈÃÅÃ»Ê»ÈÉÍ¿Ê¾̄Ͳ
ÆÈÅ¹»ÉÉ½È·º»ÃÅº»ÂÉƔ ÉÅÊ¾·ÊÊ¾»
º¿·Â¿ÉÅÈ¿»ÄÊ»º¼ÅÈÆÈÅÆ»È
Ì¿»Í¿Ä½Ɣ ÅÈÃÅÈ»
Ɩʿʼ¾»ÈÃÅÍ»ÂÂÅÄÌ»ÈÉ¿ÅÄ¿Ê ¿Ä¼ÅÈÃ·Ê¿ÅÄƑÆÂ»·É»¹ÅÄÉËÂÊ
¾¿É¹ÅÄÌ»ÈÉ¿ÅÄÁ¿ÊÅŮ»ÈÉ·Ä»·ÉÏƑ ¼·¹ÊÅÈÏƔÅÅÈº»ÈƑÉÆ»¹¿¼ÏÆ·ÈÊ
¿Ä»ÎÆ»ÄÉ¿Ì»Í·ÏÊÅ¿ÄÉÊ·ÂÂ·¸¿Ã»Ê·Â ÄËÃ¸»ÈʽʷʷƖʷʸʸʸƔ
Ê¾»ÈÃÅÃ»Ê»È¿Ä·½Â·ÉÉ¿ÄºËÉÊÈ¿·Â
Ê¾»ÈÃÅÃ»Ê»ÈͱÉÊ¾»ÈÃÅÍ»ÂÂƔ ÅÈÃÅÈ»
¿Ä¼ÅÈÃ·Ê¿ÅÄƑÆÂ»·É»¹ÅÄÉËÂÊ¼·¹ÊÅÈÏƔÅ
ÅÈº»ÈƑÉÆ»¹¿¼ÏÆ·ÈÊÄËÃ¸»ÈʿʷʷƖʷʿʼƔ
·Î¿ÃËÃÅÈ¿Ä¿ÃËÃ
Äº¿¹·Ê¿Ä½Å¿ÄÊ»È
¾¿ÉÅÆÊ¿ÅÄ·ÂÂÅÍÉÅÆ»È·ÊÅÈÊÅÌ¿»ÍÍ¾·ÊÊ¾»¾¿½¾»ÉÊ
ÅÈÂÅÍ»ÉÊÊ»ÃÆ»È·ÊËÈ»¾·É¸»»Ä¿ÄÊ¾»ÆÈÅ¹»ÉÉƔ¿½¾
Ì¿¸È·Ê¿ÅÄ»ÄÌ¿ÈÅÄÃ»ÄÊÉ·È»ÄÅÊÈ»¹ÅÃÃ»Äº»ºƔ

ºÀËÉÊ·¸Â»Ä¿ÅÄÅÄÄ»¹Ê¿ÅÄ
¾»ºÀËÉÊ·¸Â»Ä¿ÅÄ
ÅÄÄ»¹Ê¿ÅÄ·ÂÂÅÍÉ¼ÅÈÊ¾»¿ÄÉÊ·ÂÂ·Ê¿ÅÄ
Å¼·ÏÆ»ʺʹÅÈʼʹ·ºÀËÉÊ·¸Â»·Ä½Â»
Ê¾»ÈÃÅÃ»Ê»ÈÍ¿Ê¾ÅËÊÈÅÊ·Ê¿Ä½Ê¾»¹·É»Ɣ
º»·Â¼ÅÈËÉ»¿Ä·¹ÅÄŰÄ»ºÉÆ·¹»Ɣ
»¼ÊƑ¿½¾ÊÅÈÅÆÅÄÄ»¹Ê¿ÅÄ
ÂÂʺͲ·ÄºʼͲÅÊÊÅÃÅÄÄ»¹Ê»ºÊ¾»ÈÃÅÃ»Ê»ÈÉ·È»·Ì·¿Â·¸Â»Í¿Ê¾Ê¾»
¹ÅÄÄ»¹Ê¿ÅÄÅÈ¿»ÄÊ»ºÊÅÊ¾»Â»¼ÊƑÈ¿½¾ÊÅÈÊÅÆƔÂ»·É»É»»ͲÅÍÊÅÈº»ÈͲÅÄ
Ä»ÎÊÆ·½»¼ÅÈÊ¾¿ÉÅÆÊ¿ÅÄƔ
ÅÊ¾ÅÍÄ
»·ÌÏºËÊÏʺƭʿͲÉÊ»ÃÉ·ÄºʺƭʿͲÉÊ»ÃÉÍ¿Ê¾ ¹ÈÏÂ¿¹Ƒ»Î·ÄƑÉ¾·ÊÊ»ÈÆÈÅÅ¼·Äº½Â·ÉÉÍ¿ÄºÅÍÉ
ʹ̄ͲÎ̂ͲÉ»ÄÉ¿Ê¿Ì»ÆÅÈÊ¿ÅÄ·Ì·¿Â·¸Â» Ê·¿ÄÂ»ÉÉÉÊ»»ÂÊ·½É·È»·Ì·¿Â·¸Â»ÅÆÊ¿ÅÄÉ
¾»ÈÃÅÃ»Ê»ÈÉÃ·Ï¸»ÅÈº»È»ºÍ¿Ê¾É¾·ÈÆÊ¿ÆÉ¼ÅÈ ¿Â¿¹ÅÄ»ŰÂÂ
Æ¿»È¹¿Ä½Ã»º¿·ÊÅ¸»Ã»·ÉËÈ»º »ÈÊ¿Ű¹·Ê»ÉÅ¼ÅÄ¼ÅÈÃ·Ä¹»ƑÈ¿½¿Ä·Äº·Â¿¸È·Ê¿ÅÄ·Ì·¿Â·¸Â»
ʺʸʽÉÊ·¿ÄÂ»ÉÉÉÊ»»ÂÍ»ÊÊ»ºÆ·ÈÊÉ·È»·Ì·¿Â·¸Â» Â»·É»É»»Ê¾»É»ÅÆÊ¿ÅÄÉÅÄ·¸Â»ʿÅ¼ͲÈº»È¿Ä½¿Ã»Ê·Â
̄ͲºË¹ÊŲ·Ä½» ¾»ÈÃÅÃ»Ê»ÈÉͲÅÄÆ·½»ÉʺˀʸƑʺˀʹ
Ê¾»ÈÅÆÊ¿ÅÄÉ·È»·Ì·¿Â·¸Â»ƔÂ»·É»¹ÅÄÉËÂÊ¼·¹ÊÅÈÏ
ÅÈ·ºº¿Ê¿ÅÄ·Â¿Ä¼ÅÈÃ·Ê¿ÅÄƑÆÂ»·É»¹·ÂÂʼƖ˃˃˃Ɩ˄ʿˀƖʽ˃˂ʽÅÈÌ¿É¿ÊÍÍÍƔÍ¿Á·Ɣ¹ÅÃƔ ʸʺʼ
BV-1, BV-2A, 2B
BV-3A, 3B, 4
BV-5,6,7,8,9
S-1
S-1
CV-1, CV-2
CT Series
CT SERIES FW-1 HS.CT3.1093

REPLACES
HS.CT3.0890
Cartridge Filter Housings

DESIGN FEATURES BENEFITS
n Construction: Rugged, three-piece, all metal.
n Choice of Materials: Forged brass and n Choice of
stainless steel or all stainless steel. Materials for
n Design Flexibility: 1-, 2-, or 3-high cartridge Versatile
Models. Applications
n Drilled and Tapped Mounting Pads: Ready
for mounting bracket installation.
n Easy to
Options Mount -
n Choice of gasket materials.
Saves Time
n Mounting bracket available as accessory and Labor
equipment.
APPLICABLE FILTER
CARTRIDGES n Robust, All
Micro-Klean®III (U78 & G78 Series) Metal
Micro-Wynd®II Construction
Activated Carbon
Betapure® n Long Service

Betafine ® Life
The CT Series Cartridge Filter Housings are three-piece, MPF® II

all-metal housings with ring-nut closures. These housings
are designed to meet general industrial filtration needs. Zetapor® (70006 Series)
The CT Models offer a choice in construction materials
n Easy
and are available with a forged brass head and 304 stain- STANDARD MODEL Maintenance
less steel sump or in all-316 stainless steel in one-high SPECIFICATIONS and Clean-Up
(CT101), two-high (CT102), or three-high (CT103) de- Table 1 lists the specifications for the CT Series hous-
signs. The heads on all CT Models have tapped mounting ings. Note that the maximum operating pressure listed in
pads. Mounting brackets are available as an accessory. table 1 is the rating for the housing only. Actual filter op-
The CT Models have flow rates of up to 26 GPM, and a erating temperature is dependent on the temperature
maximum operating pressure of 300 psi at 200oF. capability of the filter cartridge.
MODEL CT101 CT102 CT103 CT101 CT102 CT103 CT101A CT102A CT103A
Maximum Operating Pressure & o
300 psig @ 200 F
Temperature
Maximum Flow Rate (GPM) See Table 2.
Materials of Construction
Head Forged Brass 316 S.S. 316 S.S.
Ring Nut Forged Brass Nickel Plated Brass Nickel Plated Brass
Sump 304 S.S. 304 S.S. 316 S.S. 316 S.S. 316 S.S.
Centerpost NA 304 S.S. 316 S.S. NA 316 S.S. 316 S.S. 316 S.S.
Seal Plate 304 S.S. 304 S.S. 316 S.S. 316 S.S 316 S.S. 316 S.S 316 S.S.
Head Gasket Nitrile
Connection Sizes
Inlet/Outlet (NPT) 3
4 " & 1" 3 "
4 1"
Vent Plug - 1 8" NPT NA NA 316 S.S.
Vent Plug - 1 4" NPT NA 316 S.S. NA
Vent Plug Gasket NA Fiber NA*
Drain Plug - 1 4 NPT NA NA 316 S.S. 316 S.S. 316 S.S.
Mounting Bracket Kit Zinc Plated Steel
Options (order separately) Optional Gasket material: fluorocarbon, neoprene, or EPR .
* Two piece assembly with metal to metal seal, vent o-ring not required.
TABLE 1. - CT SERIES HOUSINGS SPECIFICATIONS
sizing. Once the flow rate for a selected cartridge is
CARTRIDGE REQUIREMENTS known, then use Table 2 to check whether the housing’s
The CT101, 102, and 103 Series Cartridge Filter Hous- flow rates fall within the recommended guidelines.
ings can use one, two, or three 9 3 4 “ equivalent When sizing a filter, the amount of contaminant to be re-
single-length filter cartridges, respectively. The CT102 moved needs to be considered in addition to the flow rate
and 103 Series can also use one 19 1/2" and one 29 1/4" and pressure drop. Low initial pressure drop enhances
filter cartridge respectively. Applicable CUNO filter car- filter cartridge life.
tridges include:
Micro-Klean®III - Rigid, resin bonded filter featuring Housing
Model
Inlet/
Outlet Water 80 SSU
150
SSU
300
SSU
600
SSU
1000
SSU
graded density design, broad chemical compatibility, and 3 " 16 14 13 12 10 8
a broad range of removal ratings. CT
1"
4
26 22 20 18 16 13
Micro-Wynd®II - Blanket media filter cartridge with high
TABLE 2 - MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED FLOW RATES
flow rates, low extractable levels, choice of materials, and (GPM)
cleaner, more durable, construction than conventional
wound filters. SPARE PARTS LIST
PolyPro-Klean® - Precision engineered, absolute rated CUNO distributors stock spare parts for convenience and
filter cartridges featuring 100% non-woven, melt-blown customer service. To order, specify a description of the
polypropylene media designed for optimum efficiency, part, its material, and the part number.
service life, and flow characteristics..
Description Material Part No.
Nitrile 34737-13
Activated Carbon - Self contained activated carbon filter
EPR 89305-235
with built-in prefilter for sediment removal and post-car- Head Gasket
Neoprene 89120-235
bon filter to remove carbon fines. Ideal for the removal of
Fluorocarbon 33733-13
chlorine, color, and odors caused by dissolved organics.
TABLE 3 - SPARE PARTS LIST
Betapure® - Rigid, uniform density, filter cartridge avail-
able with bi-component fibers of polyethylene and STANDARD MODEL
polypropylene, or polyester and co-polyester. DIMENSIONS
Betafine®- Pleated, 100% polypropylene filter cartridge Table 4 lists dimensions in inches and shipping weights in
with large surface area for increased dirt holding, flow and pounds for the CT Models. To find a dimension, locate
filtration efficiency. the model and part number in the Part Number column of
Table 4 and the selected dimension symbol (A through C)
Zetapor® - Pleated Nylon 66 absolute rated membrane from Figure 1.
cartridges in both charge modified and non-charged ver- NOTE: All o-rings, ring nuts, and drain plugs are inter-
sions for submicron absolute particle removal. Ideal for changeable. However, CT-A components should not be
critical use applications. used with CT components.
FLOW RATES
Table 2 lists the maximum recommended flow rates in
Gallons Per Minute (GPM) for the CT Series filter hous-
ings. Use the data on Table 2 only as a guide in
establishing housing flow capability; do not use it for filter
Housing Model Part Number A B C Shipping Weight
CT101 44153-01 11 3 8 12 7
32 3 1
2 6
CT101 44153-03 11 11 16 12 1
2 3 1
2 6
CT101 44152-01 11 133 16 12 11 16 2 155 16 6
CT101A 47310-01 11 3 4 12 9 16 3 9 16 6
CT102 44153-02 21 3 16 22 1
32 3 1
2 7 1
2
CT102 44153-04 21 1
2 22 5
16 3 1
2 7 1
2
CT102 44152-02 21 5
16 22 3 16 2 15 16 7 12
CT102A 47310-02 21 1 2 22 5
16 3 9 16 7 1
2
CT103 44153-08 31 15 16 31 25 32 3 1
2 9
CT103 44153-09 31 1 4 32 1 16 3 1
2 9
CT103 44152-03 31 1 16 31 15 16 2 15 16 9
CT103A 47310-03 31 1 4 32 1 16 3 9 16 9
TABLE 4 -DIMENSIONS
FIGURE 1 — CT MODEL
CT SERIES ORDERING GUIDE
Plant Code 01 Product Code 021
Housing Model Basic Catalog Number Inlet/Outlet NPT Housing Material Mounting Bracket Kit
CT101 44153-01 3
4 "
CT101 44153-03 1" Brass Head & 304 S.S. Sump
CT102 44153-02 3
4 " without Vent
CT102 44153-04 1"
CT103 44153-08 3
4 " Brass Head & 316 S.S. Sump 35581-001*
35581-01
CT103 44153-09 1" without Vent
CT101 44152-01
" All 316 S.S. (wetted
( parts)
CT102 44152-02 3
4
with Vent
CT103 44152-03
CT101A 47310-01
66984-01*
All 316 S.S. (wetted parts)
CT102A 47310-02 1"
with Vent
CT103A 47310-03
*Order Separately.
WARRANTY
Seller warrants its equipment against defects in workmanship Seller to be defective. THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ANY
and material for a period of 12 months from date of shipment OTHER WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, AS
from the factory under normal use and service and otherwise TO DESCRIPTION, QUALITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
when such equipment is used in accordance with instructions FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, OR ANY OTHER
furnished by Seller and for purposes disclosed in writing at the MATTER. Under no circumstances shall Seller be liable to
time of purchase, if any. Any unauthorized alteration or modifi- Buyer or any third party for any loss of profits or other direct or
cation of the equipment by Buyer will void this warranty. Seller’s indirect costs, expenses, losses or consequential damages aris-
liability under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement or ing out of or as a result of any defects in or failure of its products
repair, F.O.B. point of manufacture, of any defective equipment or any part or parts thereof or arising out of or as a result of
or part which, having been returned to the factory, transportation parts or components incorporated in Seller’s equipment but not
charges prepaid, has been inspected and determined by the supplied by the Seller.
Your Area Distributor Is:
© CUNO INCORPORATED, 1994 - ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

Installation and Operating Instructions
Model CT Series Filter Housing Fluid Purification
READ ME FIRST!
CAUTION! Always use the appropriate safety gear (i.e., goggles, glasses, etc.) when in-
stalling the filter housing or changing the filter cartridge. Ensure that system pressure has
been relieved or the filter pressure isolated from the system prior to opening the housing.
Never exceed the maximum operating pressure/temperature of the housing.
Liquid Service: 300 psi @ 200 F
Air/Gas Service: 180 psi @ 200 F
NOTE: Filter housings are normally shipped OPTIONAL MOUNTING

BRACKET
without cartridges. Before putting filter in serv-
ice, be certain that the proper filter cartridges
are installed.
HOUSING INSTALLATION
Note ARROW marking on filter head which in-
dicates direction of flow through the filter. DO
NOT install filter housing backwards. Install fil- DRAIN LOCATION
ter vertically with pipe connections at the top. BY PART NUMBER
NO DRAIN
47783-01
FILTER CARTRIDGE INSTALLATION AND 47783-02
47783-03
47783-04
REPLACEMENT
CENTER DRAIN
44152-01
A. Relieve pressure in filter housing:
1. If the outlet line can be opened to atmo- OFF-SET DRAIN
44152-02
spheric pressure, shut off the inlet line 44152-03

44152-04
44152-05
and open the outlet line. 44152-06
2. If the outlet line must remain pressurized,

shut-off the upstream and downstream
isolation valves and bleed-off pressure in
the section isolated. (This can be done
easily by installing an isolation valve with C. (Cartridge Replacement only) Empty liquid
a bleed-off.) from shell, retaining old cartridge. Then
NOTE: Some models are equipped with a take out old cartridge(s). Clean all parts
vent plug on head to permit bleeding off and replace the sump-to-head o-ring
the pressure. gasket if necessary.
B. Unscrew ring nut from head and slide D. Install new cartridges on top of the seal
sump down off the head. Some models are plate in models that have the seal plate
equipped with drain plugs to allow draining welded to the inside bottom of the sump.
the filter prior to dismantling. For all other models, slide the cartridge(s)
LITHSCT.0802 REPLACES LITHSCT.0302 © CUNO INCORPORATED, 1993 - ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

over post and seal plate assembly. Place REPLACEMENT PARTS
new cartridge(s) into sump and
Your CUNO Distributor stocks replacement
reassemble sump to head.
parts for your convenience. To order, specify
E. Hand-tighten the ring nut. After filter catalog number, description of part, ma-
hand-tighten, insert the ring nut tool (pin terial and quantity required.
wrench) into the ring-nut and tighten an
additional one-half turn. DO NOT operate
without meeting this minimum thread
engagement.
STARTING OPERATION
Slowly open the inlet valve to fill the filter.
Check for leaks. If the filter leaks, shut off the
inlet valve and relieve system pressure. Re-
move the ring nut. Inspect the o-ring for dirt,
contamination, or damage. Clean or replace
the o-ring if necessary. Check the seal areas
for damage. If o-ring and seal surfaces are in
good condition, re-tighten ring nut. Again,
check for leaks. Then open the inlet and the
outlet valves fully. Filter is now in operation.
CARTRIDGE LIFE
The period at which cartridges should be re- Your CUNO Master Distributor is:
placed can only be determined by actual ex-
perience in your own system. However, it is
generally recommended that cartridges be re-
placed when differential pressure across the
filter reaches 25--35 psi, or if the filter has
been in service for six months.
Service Worldwide
Visit us at www.cuno.com Fluid Purification
CUNO Pacific Pty Ltd CUNO GmbH CUNO Srl CUNO Filtration Asia Pte Ltd
140 Sunnyholt Road Wihl-Th-Römheld-Str. 32 Via Zara, 38 18 Tuas Link 1 (3rd Floor) CUNO Incorporated
Blacktown, NSW 2148 55130 Mainz 20032 Cormano (Mi) Singapore 638597
Australia Germany Italy 400 Research Parkway
CUNO Latina Ltda CUNO Europe SA CUNO K.K. CUNO Ltd
Meriden, CT 06450, U.S.A.
Rua Amf Do Brasil 251 19 Avenue de la Sablière Hodogaya Station 21 Woking Business Park Tele: (800) 243-6894
18120 Mairinque-Sp ZI de la Sablière Building 6F Albert Drive (203) 237-5541
Brazil BP 81 - 94372 Sucy en Brie Cedex 1-7 Iwai-cho, Hodogaya-ku Woking, Surrey GU215JY
France Yokohama 240 Japan United Kingdom Fax: (203) 238-8977
LITHSCT.0802 REPLACES LITHSCT.0302 © CUNO INCORPORATED, 1993 - ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

FA-1/PRV-3
Excelon® modular system

B72G, B73G, B74G Filter/Regulators
Excelon® design allows in-line
installation or modular installation
with other Excelon® products
High efficiency water and particle
removal
Quick release bayonet bowl
Push to lock adjusting knob with
tamper resistant accessory
Optional patented quarter turn
manual drain
Technical data
Fluid:
Compressed air
Maximum pressure:
Transparent bowl: 150 psig (10 bar)
Metal bowl: 250 psig (17 bar) B72G B73G B74G
B72G metal bowl w/ auto drain:
AIR LINE EQUIPMENT
150 psig (10 bar) Ordering Information

Models listed include PTF threads, knob adjustment, automatic drain, metal bowl with liquid level indicator, 40 μm element, relieving
Operating temperature*: diaphragm, 5 to 150 psig (0.3 to 10 bar) outlet pressure adjustment range* with gauge.
Transparent bowl: Port Size Model Flow† scfm (dm3/s) Weight lb (kg)
-30° to 125°F (-34° to 50°C) 1/4" B72G 2AK AE3 RMG 80 (38) 1.3 (0.59)
Metal bowl: 3/8" B73G 3AK AD3 RMG 123 (58) 1.76 (0.82)
(72) -30° to 150°F (-34° to 66°C) 1/2" B73G 4AK AD3 RMG 123 (58) 1.76 (0.82)
1/2" B74G 4AK AD3 RMG 212 (100) 2.59 (1.17)
(73, 74) -30° to 175°F (-34° to 80°C) 3/4" B74G 6AK AD3 RMG 212 (100) 2.55 (1.16)
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at
temperatures below 35°F (2°C). *Outlet pressure can be adjusted to pressures in excess of, and less than, those specified. Do not use these units to control pressures outside of the specified ranges.
Materials † Typical flow with 150 psig (10 bar) inlet pressure, 90 psig (6.3 bar) set pressure and a 15 psig (1 bar) droop from set.
B72G Options selector B7˙G ˙˙˙ ˙˙˙ ˙˙˙

Body: zinc Series Substitute Gauge Substitute
Bonnet: acetal (Zinc on 250 psi model) 72 2 With G
73 3 Without N
Valve: brass
74 4 Outlet pressure adjustment range* Substitute
Transparent bowl: polycarbonate
Port size Substitute 5 to 60 psig (0.3 to 4 bar) F
Metal bowl: zinc
1/4" (72 & 73) 2 5 to 150 psig (0.3 to 10 bar) M
Liquid level indicator lens (metal bowl): 3/8" (72, 73, 74) 3 10 to 250 psig (0.7 to 17 bar)** S
transparent nylon 1/2" (73 & 74) 4
Diaphragm Substitute
Element: sintered polypropylene 3/4" (74) 6
Relieving R
Elastomers: neoprene & nitrile Threads Substitute
PTF A Element Substitute
B73G & B74G: 5 μm 1
ISO G parallel G
Body & bonnet: aluminum 40 μm 3
Transparent bowl: polycarbonate Adjustment Substitute
Knob K Bowl Substitute
Guarded transparent bowl: T-bar T Metal w/ liquid level indicator (72, 73, 74) D
polycarbonate with steel Long metal w/ liquid level indicator (72) E
Metal bowl: aluminum Drain Substitute Long transparent (72) L
1/4 turn manual Q Transparent with guard (73, 74) P
Liquid level indicator lens (metal bowl): Auto drain* A Transparent bowl (72, 73) T
transparent nylon (Pyrex optional) *72 Series auto drain is available only with long bowl option.
Element: sintered polypropylene
*Outlet pressure can be adjusted to pressures in excess of, and less than, those specified. Do not use these units to control pressures outside
Elastomers: neoprene & nitrile of the specified ranges.
** 250 psig (17 bar) outlet pressure range units are available with t-handle adjustment only and standard metal bowl options.
ISO Symbols
Automatic and Automatic and Manual Drain Manual Drain

Semi Automatic Drain Semi Automatic Drain Relieving Non Relieving
Relieving Non Relieving
ALE-14 www.norgren.com/info/US-ALE-14
Excelon® modular system
B72G, B73G, B74G Filter/Regulators
Accessories Dimensions in inches.
Wall mounting Neck mounting Gauge Panel Tamper resistant Pipe adapters Quikclamp® and Replacement
bracket* bracket 0 ... 160 psig nut cover and seal wire (quantity of 1) (NPT) Quikclamp® wall bracket elements
B72G 4224-50 74316-50 18-013-212 4248-89 4255-51 4215-02 (1/4) 4214-51 4214-52 5925-03 (5μm)
4215-03 (3/8) 5925-02 (40μm)
B73G 4424-50 4461-50 18-013-209 5191-88 4455-51 4315-01 (1/4) 4314-51 4314-52 4438-01 (5μm)
4315-02 (3/8) 4438-03 (40μm)
4315-03 (1/2)
4315-04 (3/4)
B74G 4324-50 4368-51 18-013-209 4348-89 4355-51 4315-02 (3/8) 4314-51 4314-52 4338-04 (5μm)
4315-03 (1/2) 4338-05 (40μm)
4315-04 (3/4)
* Bracket kit does not include wall mounting screws.
Mounting bracket Neck mounting brackets

B B72
K
AIR LINE EQUIPMENT

F
Service Kits
M
Item Type Part Number
A
L
F
Port CL
72G Relieving 4383-500
Port CL
G
T
V
S
G
E
P
H
H
*
J
Port CL
D
B73 K B74
Series A B C D E F G H
L
L
72 2.36 1.65 1.54 0.73 0.16 1.50 0.24 2.01
C
M
M
73 2.64 2.36 1.89 0.75 0.28 1.50 0.24 2.40
74 3.11 2.72 1.97 0.79 0.20 2.01 0.24 2.40
N
P
N J
J
R
Series Drain type A B C E F G H Panel Ø Panel depth
72 Auto 5.51 7.52 1.02 2.87 1.97 1.89 1.38 1.57 0 to .16
P
R
Manual 5.83 7.83 1.02 2.87 1.97 1.89 1.38 1.57 0 to .16
S
K
A
B#
73 Auto 5.80 8.15 1.22 3.78 2.68 2.44 2.20 1.89 .07 to .25
Manual 6.15 8.50 1.22 3.78 2.68 2.44 2.20 1.89 .07 to .25 Series J K L M N P R S T V
74 Auto 6.35 9.06 1.22 5.00 3.15 2.91 2.20 2.05 .07 to .25 72 0.31 1.93 1.50 2.50 1.18 0.94 – 0.17 0.31 0.59
Manual 6.95 9.69 1.22 5.00 3.15 2.91 2.20 2.05 .07 to .25 73 0.67 2.52 1.50 2.76 1.50 1.50 0.98 0.28 – –
74 0.94 3.50 2.05 3.39 2.20 1.38 0.91 0.28 – –
*Optional gauge.
# Minimum clearance required to remove bowl.
Typical Performance Characteristics

B74 FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
B72 FLOW CHARACTERISTICS B73 FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
bar g
psig
bar
psig
bar g
psig
PORT SIZE: 3/8" PORT SIZE: 1/2", ELEMENT: 40 μm

PORT SIZE: 1/4" ELEMENT: 40 μm ELEMENT: 40 μm INLET PRESSURE: 100 psig (7 bar g)
12 INLET PRESSURE: 150 psig (10 bar g) INLET PRESSURE: 100 psig (7 bar) RANGE: 5 to 150 psig (0.3 to 10 bar)
RANGE: 5 to 150 psig (0.3 to 10 bar) RANGE: 5 to 150 psig (0.3 to 10 bar)
150 100 100
OUTLET PRESSURE
OUTLET PRESSURE
OUTLET PRESSURE
9 6 6
120 80 80
90 4 60 4 60
6
60 40 40
3 2 2
30 20 20
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 scfm 0 20 40 60 80 100 scfm 0 40 80 120 160 200 scfm
0 10 20 30 40 50 dm3/s 0 10 20 30 40 50 dm3/s 0 20 40 60 80 100 dm3/s

AIR FLOW AIR FLOW AIR FLOW
ALE-15
VENTILATION FAN
INLET
Door Louvers & Exhaust Fans LOUVER
Door Louvers Wind-Driven Turbine Exhaust Fans
Designed to spin freely with the slight-
est breeze, these fans create a vacuum
that draws out stale air and fumes from
buildings and ventilation systems. No
electricity is required. Mount fans on your
roof away from wind obstructions. Maxi-
mum temperature is 150° F.
A B For information about exhaust fans,
see page 642.
Steel exhaust fans have a zinc and alu-
minum coating for added corrosion resis-
Dia.
tance except 1992K25 and K27, which
are galvanized with a gray painted finish.
O’all cfm @ Steel Type 304 SS
Dia. Ht. 8 mph Ga. Each Each
6⬙ ..... 113⁄4⬙..... 170 ........26 ...... 1992K12 .... $60.84 1992K43 .. $112.08
C D 8⬙ ..... 13⬙ ........ 303 ........26 ...... 1992K14 .... 61.26
10⬙ ..... 141⁄2⬙..... 472 ........26 ...... 1992K16 .... 71.13
1992K45 .. 116.19
1992K47 .. 127.18
12⬙ ..... 151⁄2⬙..... 680 ........24 ...... 1992K17 .... 74.72 1992K48 .. 147.90
14⬙ ..... 171⁄2⬙..... 927 ........24 ...... 1992K18 .... 83.69 1992K49 .. 179.33
Let air in while keeping prying eyes out with these through-the-door 16⬙ ..... 201⁄4⬙..... 1212 ........24 ...... 1992K21 .... 106.52 1992K52 .. 215.88
louvers. They have fixed blades and include mounting hardware. 18⬙ ..... 221⁄2⬙..... 1533 ........24 ...... 1992K22 .... 123.50 1992K53 .. 262.05
Indoor 20⬙ ..... 241⁄2⬙..... 1888 ........24 ...... 1992K23 .... 133.36 1992K54 .. 282.97
24⬙ ..... 29⬙ ........ 2719 ........24 ...... 1992K24 .... 175.41 1992K55 .. 372.34
Louvers have a 20-ga. frame and 24-ga. blades. Style A fit 13⁄8⬙-13⁄4⬙ 30⬙ ..... 32⬙ ........ 4252 ........22 ...... 1992K25 .... 419.55 1992K56 .. 899.04
thick doors. Overall size is 2⬙ larger than the opening size. Style B fit 36⬙ ..... 38⬙ ........ 6123 ........22 ...... 1992K27 .... 571.67 ..
1 ⁄8⬙-21⁄4⬙ thick doors. Overall size is 11⁄2⬙ larger than the opening size.
3
Fits Opening Fits Opening

Size, Wd.× Ht. Each Size, Wd.× Ht. Each Bases for Wind-Driven Exhaust Fans
(A) Steel (B) Steel (Cont.) A A
12 ⁄2⬙ × 12 ⁄2⬙ .. 1911K31 .... $33.33
1 1 16 ⁄2⬙ × 10 ⁄2⬙ .. 2037K651 .. $61.60
1 1
A
181⁄2⬙ × 121⁄2⬙ .. 1911K32 .... 49.59 161⁄2⬙ × 121⁄2⬙ .. 2037K661 .. 61.18
241⁄2⬙ × 121⁄2⬙ .. 1911K33 .... 55.87 161⁄2⬙ × 161⁄2⬙ .. 2037K671 .. 71.20
241⁄2⬙ × 181⁄2⬙ .. 1911K34 .... 75.28 181⁄2⬙ × 121⁄2⬙ .. 2037K68 .... 64.24
24 ⁄2⬙ × 24 ⁄2⬙ .. 1911K35 .... 83.09
1 1
181⁄2⬙ × 241⁄2⬙ .. 2037K831 .. 96.31 Ht. Ht. Ht.
(B) Steel 201⁄2⬙ × 81⁄2⬙ .. 2037K691 .. 61.18
8 ⁄2⬙ × 8 ⁄2⬙ .. 2037K511 .. 42.87
1 1 201⁄2⬙ × 101⁄2⬙ .. 2037K711 .. 64.24
101⁄2⬙ × 41⁄2⬙ .. 2037K521 .. 41.82 201⁄2⬙ × 121⁄2⬙ .. 2037K721 .. 67.30
101⁄2⬙ × 61⁄2⬙ .. 2037K531 .. 42.87 201⁄2⬙ × 141⁄2⬙ .. 2037K731 .. 67.79
B
12 ⁄2⬙ × 6 ⁄2⬙ .. 2037K541 .. 45.89
1 1 201⁄2⬙ × 161⁄2⬙ .. 2037K741 .. 69.95 B B
121⁄2⬙ × 81⁄2⬙ .. 2037K551 .. 46.87 201⁄2⬙ × 201⁄2⬙ .. 2037K751 .. 68.80 Flat Base Curb Base Slope Base
121⁄2⬙ × 121⁄2⬙ .. 2037K561 .. 48.97 241⁄2⬙ × 61⁄2⬙ .. 2037K761 .. 64.24 Made of corrosion-resistant galvanized steel, these bases have a
141⁄2⬙ × 81⁄2⬙ .. 2037K581 .. 47.80 241⁄2⬙ × 101⁄2⬙ .. 2037K771 .. 67.79 square bottom and round top. Flat bases have a 4⬙ wide flashing
141⁄2⬙ × 101⁄2⬙ .. 2037K591 .. 48.97 241⁄2⬙ × 121⁄2⬙ .. 2037K781 .. 69.95 flange to simplify installation.
14 ⁄2⬙ × 12 ⁄2⬙ .. 2037K611 .. 59.07
1 1 241⁄2⬙ × 161⁄2⬙ .. 2037K791 .. 89.88
16 ⁄2⬙ × 6 ⁄2⬙ .. 2037K631 .. 48.85
1 1 241⁄2⬙ × 181⁄2⬙ .. 2037K811 .. 96.31 For slope bases,
161⁄2⬙ × 81⁄2⬙ .. 2037K641 .. 54.23 241⁄2⬙ × 241⁄2⬙ .. 2037K821 .. 99.93 please specify pitch. To de-
termine pitch, calculate rise
Rise
Indoor/Outdoor divided by run. To do so, 90°
Louvers resist corrosion and fit 13⁄4⬙ thick doors. Style C louvers are measure the run in any incre-
made of 0.04⬙ thick anodized aluminum. Overall size is 21⁄4⬙ larger than ment of 12⬙. Then measure
Run
the opening size. Style D louvers have an 18-ga. frame and 22-ga. the rise (see illustration).
blades spaced 1⬙ apart. Overall size is 7⁄8⬙ larger than the opening size. Flat Bases Curb Bases Slope Bases
Fits Opening Fits Opening (A) (B) Ht. Each Each Each
Size, Wd.× Ht. Each Size, Wd.× Ht. Each 8⬙ .. 10⬙ .. 10⬙ .. 2003K91 ... $33.06 2003K51 ... $33.06 2003K31 ... $51.44
(C) Aluminum (C) Aluminum (Cont.) 10⬙ .. 12⬙ .. 10⬙ .. 2003K92 ... 34.30 2003K52 ... 34.30 2003K32 ... 53.88
8⬙ × 8⬙ ...... 19605K511 ... $63.08 20⬙ × 16⬙ ...... 19605K741 $118.62 12⬙ .. 14⬙ .. 10⬙ .. 2003K93 ... 35.51 2003K53 ... 35.51 2003K33 ... 56.33
10⬙ × 4⬙ ...... 19605K521 ... 57.38 20⬙ × 20⬙ ...... 19605K751 129.82 14⬙ .. 16⬙ .. 10⬙ .. 2003K94 ... 56.33 2003K54 ... 56.33 2003K34 ... 80.83
12⬙ × 8⬙ ...... 19605K551 ... 70.14 24⬙
24 × 12⬙
12 ......
... 19605K781 107.87 16⬙ .. 18⬙ .. 10⬙ .. 2003K95 ... 75.93 2003K55 ... 75.93 2003K35 ... 119.80
12⬙ × 12⬙ ...... 19605K561 ... 74.38 24⬙ × 16⬙ ...... 19605K791 132.41 18⬙ .. 22⬙ .. 10⬙ .. 2003K96 ... 80.83 2003K56 ... 80.83 2003K36 ... 127.45
14⬙ × 8⬙ ...... 19605K581 ... 72.80 24⬙ × 18⬙ ...... 19605K811 139.17 20⬙ .. 24⬙ .. 10⬙ .. 2003K97 ... 88.18 2003K57 ... 88.18 2003K37 ... 141.73
14⬙ × 12⬙ ...... 19605K611 ... 87.31 24⬙ × 24⬙ ...... 19605K821 167.78 24⬙ .. 30⬙ .. 12⬙ .. 2003K98 ... 116.42 2003K58 ... 117.26 2003K38 ... 170.90
16⬙ × 8⬙ ...... 19605K641 ... 76.07 (D) Type 304 Stainless Steel 30⬙ .. 36⬙ .. 12⬙ .. 2003K99 ... 172.31 2003K59 ... 172.31 2003K39 ... 247.73
16⬙ × 16⬙ ...... 19605K671 ... 107.76 12⬙ × 12⬙ ...... 19475K72 .... 159.72
18⬙ × 12⬙ ...... 19605K891 ... 86.64 18⬙ × 12⬙ ...... 19475K74 .... 186.36
20⬙ × 10⬙ ...... 19605K711 ... 99.74 24⬙ × 12⬙ ...... 19475K76 .... 223.62 Adjustable Bases
20⬙ × 12⬙ ...... 19605K721 ... 103.36
20⬙ × 14⬙ ...... 19605K731 ... 111.05
24⬙ × 18⬙ ...... 19475K78 .... 255.92
24⬙ × 24⬙ ...... 19475K82 .... 310.32
for Wind-Driven Exhaust Fans
A
Fire-Rated Door Louvers
A spring-loaded, fusible link locks the blades Ht. Round Octagonal
in the closed position if the temperature reaches Flange Flange
165° F. These louvers are UL classified for a 90-
minute fire rating. They’re 16-ga. powder-
coated steel and fit 13⁄4⬙ thick doors. Overall size
is 13⁄8⬙ larger than the opening size. Mounting B
hardware is included. Use these galvanized steel bases on flat and single-slope roofs with
a pitch up to 7⁄12. To install, place the flange flush with the roof. Then
rotate the top section until it is parallel with the ground. An integral
Fits Opening Fits Opening locking clip maintains the slope adjustment.
Size, Wd.× Ht. Each Size, Wd.× Ht. Each Flange (A) (B) Ht. Each
12⬙ × 12⬙ ............ 1157T3 ... $192.65 24⬙ × 12⬙ ............ 1157T7 ... $242.43 Round ............................ 6⬙ ............ 14⬙ ............ 7⬙ .......... 2231K55 ... $19.96
18⬙ × 12⬙ ............ 1157T4 ... 216.02 24⬙ × 18⬙ ............ 1157T8 ... 266.99 Round ............................ 8⬙ ............ 16⬙ ............ 7⬙ .......... 2231K56 ... 20.11
18⬙ × 18⬙ ............ 1157T5 ... 237.14 24⬙ × 24⬙ ............ 1157T9 ... 271.69 Round ............................ 10⬙ ............ 18⬙ ............ 7⬙ .......... 2231K57 ... 20.25
18⬙ × 24⬙ ............ 1157T6 ... 266.99 Round ............................ 14⬙ ............ 22⬙ ............ 7⬙ .......... 2231K59 ... 28.10
Replacement Fusible Link .................................... 1157T11 Each $13.65 Octagonal ..................... 12⬙ ............ 20⬙ ............ 7⬙ .......... 2231K58 ... 20.53
648
OUTLET
Wall Louvers LOUVER
Heavy Duty Movable-Blade Wall Louvers
Surface Mount Recessed Mount Drop-In Mount
Built to last, these louvers have 24-ga. aluminum blades except louvers 30⬙ and wider, which have 22-ga. blades. Maximum air velocity is
2500 fpm. Temperature range is −10° to +200° F except motorized units, which have a maximum temperature of 130° F.
Please specify mounting style: surface mount, recessed Aluminum frame is 0.063⬙ thick and 17⁄8⬙ deep except for drop-in
mount, or drop-in mount. mount louvers smaller than 50⬙ wide, which are 0.05⬙ thick and have
Surface Mount Frame and flange mount outside the wall. Flange a frame depth of 11⁄2⬙.
has 1⁄4⬙ dia. mounting holes (fasteners not included). Overall size is 3⬙ Galvani ed steel frame is 14 ga. Surface and recessed mount are
larger than opening size. 23⁄8⬙ deep; drop-in mount are 11⁄2⬙ deep.
Recessed Mount Frame rests in the wall. The flange has 1⁄4⬙ dia. Gravity Operated Also called automatic, these louvers stay open
holes for mounting to the outside of the wall (fasteners not included). as long as air flows.
When the blades close, they’re flush with the wall surface. Overall size Pull Chain Also called manual, these louvers open and close with
is 27⁄8⬙ larger than opening size. a tug on the chain.
Drop In Mount Fit inside a wall or duct. Overall size is 1⁄8⬙ smaller Motori ed A motor opens and closes these louvers. It’s single
than opening size. phase, operates on 120/240 VAC, 60 Hz, and has leads for hardwiring.
WITH ALUMINUM FRAME WITH GALVANIZED STEEL FRAME
Fits Opening Gravity Operated Pull Chain Motori ed Gravity Operated Pull Chain Motori ed
Size, Wd.× Ht. Each Each Each Each Each Each
Single-Panel Louvers
10⬙× 10⬙ ............ 2047K311 .... $33.25 2047K411 .... $89.60 2047K511 .. $136.22 2030K111 .... $63.61 2030K211 .. $117.14 2030K311 .. $169.71
12
12⬙
12⬙×× 12
12⬙ ............
... 2047K312 .... 37.60 2047K412 .... 99.74 2047K512 .. 140.79 2030K112 .... 65.09 2030K212 .. 123.90 2030K312 .. 175.05
14⬙× 14⬙ ............ 2047K336 .... 43.55 2047K436 .... 99.12 2047K536 .. 149.33 2030K142 .... 70.71 2030K242 .. 126.55 2030K342 .. 184.41
16⬙× 16⬙ ............ 2047K313 .... 48.02 2047K413 .... 112.10 2047K513 .. 153.02 2030K113 .... 76.34 2030K213 .. 134.22 2030K313 .. 188.37
18⬙× 18⬙ ............ 2047K314 .... 52.27 2047K414 .... 114.50 2047K514 .. 155.65 2030K114 .... 89.51 2030K214 .. 144.87 2030K314 .. 195.23
20⬙× 20⬙ ............ 2047K315 .... 54.59 2047K415 .... 127.90 2047K515 .. 166.89 2030K115 .... 104.04 2030K215 .. 159.04 2030K315 .. 209.36
22⬙× 22⬙ ............ 2047K316 .... 65.97 2047K416 .... 129.02 2047K516 .. 169.38 2030K116 .... 115.50 2030K216 .. 171.49 2030K316 .. 217.53
24⬙× 24⬙ ............ 2047K317 .... 68.98 2047K417 .... 140.24 2047K517 .. 173.17 2030K117 .... 127.51 2030K217 .. 180.73 2030K317 .. 220.29
26⬙× 26⬙ ............ 2047K318 .... 83.31 2047K418 .... 152.30 2047K518 .. 177.80 2030K118 .... 139.42 2030K218 .. 182.81 2030K318 .. 256.93
28⬙× 28⬙ ............ 2047K319 .... 88.44 2047K419 .... 162.25 2047K519 .. 185.46 2030K119 .... 152.32 2030K219 .. 199.90 2030K319 .. 285.68
30⬙× 30⬙ ............ 2047K321 .... 90.20 2047K421 .... 164.18 2047K521 .. 188.69 2030K121 .... 155.12 2030K221 .. 198.78 2030K321 .. 304.36
32⬙× 32⬙ ............ 2047K322 .... 109.04 2047K422 .... 161.76 2047K522 .. 214.52 2030K122 .... 171.65 2030K222 .. 215.96 2030K322 .. 319.64
34⬙× 34⬙ ............ 2047K337 .... 121.46 2047K437 .... 175.29 2047K537 .. 215.19 2030K143 .... 187.06 2030K243 .. 228.20 2030K343 .. 299.29
36⬙× 24⬙ ............ 2047K339 .... 101.77 2047K439 .... 168.33 2047K539 .. 229.27 2030K145 .... 154.72 2030K245 .. 191.66 2030K345 .. 299.29
36⬙× 36⬙ ............ 2047K323 .... 130.74 2047K423 .... 190.02 2047K523 .. 221.29 2030K123 .... 196.65 2030K223 .. 244.30 2030K323 .. 340.91
38⬙× 38⬙ ............ 2047K324 .... 139.77 2047K424 .... 202.84 2047K524 .. 256.85 2030K124 .... 205.01 2030K224 .. 248.73 2030K324 .. 342.02
Double-Panel Louvers
40⬙× 40⬙ ............ 2047K325 .... 172.92 2047K425 .... 231.56 2047K525 .. 266.23 2030K125 .... 275.47 2030K225 .. 308.91 2030K325 .. 394.32
42⬙× 42⬙ ............ 2047K326 .... 175.26 2047K426 .... 233.23 2047K526 .. 275.01 2030K126 .... 284.25 2030K226 .. 313.64 2030K326 .. 373.94
44⬙× 44⬙ ............ 2047K327 .... 199.74 2047K427 .... 239.03 2047K527 .. 297.47 2030K127 .... 298.74 2030K227 .. 337.77 2030K327 .. 396.63
48⬙× 48⬙ ............ 2047K328 .... 218.12 2047K428 .... 252.78 2047K528 .. 307.25 2030K128 .... 341.82 2030K228 .. 368.16 2030K328 .. 431.09
50⬙× 50⬙ ............ 2047K329 .... 236.82 2047K429 .... 259.35 2047K529 .. 317.10 2030K129 .... 340.54 2030K229 .. 372.72 2030K329 .. 474.42
54⬙× 54⬙ ............ 2047K331 .... 241.11 2047K431 .... 350.35 2047K531 .. 391.09 2030K131 .... 369.12 2030K231 .. 392.29 2030K331 .. 496.38
56⬙× 56⬙ ............ 2047K333 .... 270.19 2047K433 .... 359.17 2047K533 .. 422.08 2030K133 .... 390.61 2030K233 .. 405.42 2030K333 .. 522.50
60⬙× 60⬙ ............ 2047K334 .... 279.78 2047K434 .... 369.43 2047K534 .. 417.80 2030K134 .... 408.14 2030K234 .. 434.58 2030K334 .. 552.76
Triple-Panel Louvers
66⬙× 66⬙ ............ 2047K335 .... 378.70 2047K435 .... 503.94 2047K535 .. 581.09 2030K135 .... 545.00 2030K235 .. 604.58 2030K335 .. 748.30
Light Duty Fixed-Blade Wall Louvers

You can surface or recess mount these economical louvers. All have a 1⬙ wide flange and a 0.04⬙ thick frame.
White plastic louvers have 1⁄16⬙ thick blades and 13⁄8⬙ deep frame. Aluminum louvers have 0.013⬙ thick blades and a
1 ⁄ ⬙ deep frame.
78
WHITE PLASTIC ALUMINUM

Fits Opening O’all Size, O’all Size, Plain White Painted
Size, Wd.× Ht. Wd.× Ht. Each Wd.× Ht. Each Each
8⬙ × 8⬙ .....................................10 ⁄2⬙ × 10 ⁄2⬙ ..... 2038K1 ........ $6.83
1 1 ..... .... ....
12⬙ × 12⬙ .....................................141⁄2⬙ × 141⁄2⬙ ..... 2038K2 ........ 8.19 141⁄2⬙ × 145⁄8⬙ ..... 2038K14 .... $12.53 2038K61 .... $14.10
12⬙ × 18⬙ .....................................141⁄2⬙ × 201⁄2⬙ ..... 2038K3 ........ 10.98 141⁄2⬙ × 201⁄2⬙ ..... 2038K16 .... 15.49 2038K62 .... 17.56
14⬙ × 24⬙ .....................................163⁄4⬙ × 263⁄4⬙ ..... 2038K6 ........ 15.75 161⁄2⬙ × 263⁄8⬙ ..... 2038K59 .... 20.88 2038K63 .... 24.16
18⬙ × 24⬙ .....................................203⁄4⬙ × 263⁄4⬙ ..... 2038K7 ........ 20.18 201⁄2⬙ × 263⁄8⬙ ..... 2038K21 .... 25.87 2038K64 .... 27.47
24⬙ × 30⬙ ..................................... ..... ........ 261⁄2⬙ × 321⁄4⬙ ..... 2038K23 .... 36.79 2038K65 .... 42.43
Low-Profile Fixed-Blade Wall Louvers

Perfect in openings that are too short to accommodate most louvers, these are commonly installed in block and brick
walls. They’re made of 1⁄8⬙ thick extruded aluminum, 11⁄2⬙ deep, and have an insect screen.
Fits Opening O’all Size, Replaces No. of
Size, Wd.× Ht. Wd.× Ht. Blocks Bricks Each
81⁄8⬙ × 73⁄4⬙ ....................................101⁄8⬙ × 93⁄4⬙ .......................... 1⁄2 ...........................3 ............................................. 19715K76 .... $52.34
155⁄8⬙ × 73⁄4⬙ ....................................175⁄8⬙ × 93⁄4⬙ .......................... 1 ...............................6 ............................................. 19715K78 .... 69.20
161⁄2⬙ × 73⁄4⬙ ....................................181⁄2⬙ × 93⁄4⬙ .......................... .............................. 6 ............................................. 19715K79 .... 69.20
646
1L VAPORGARD™ Incandescent Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D
Wet Locations
Luminaires NEMA 3, 3R
Enclosed and Gasketed AC LIGHT
Pendant Mount –
VDA Series
Luminaire Components Cat. #s
Hub Max. Complete Cat. # Pendant
Size Series Lamp Size with globe/guard Body Globe Guard
1
/2" 150 VDA15GP VDA15 G54 P50
150 watt
3
/4" 150 VDA25GP VDA25 G54 P50
1" 150 A-21 VDA35GP VDA35 G54 P50
/2"
1
200 VDA12GP VDA12 G24 P21
200 watt
/4"
3
200 VDA22GP VDA22 G24 P21
1" 200 A-23 VDA32GP VDA32 G24 P21
/2"
1
300 VDA13GP VDA13 G34/G251 P22
300 watt
/4"
3
300 VDA23GP VDA23 G34/G251 P22
PS-25 & PS-30
1" 300 VDA33GP VDA33 G34/G251 P22
Thru-Feed –
VDC Series
Hub Max. Complete Cat. # Thru-Feed
Size Series Lamp Size with globe/guard Body Globe Guard
150 watt
1
/2 or /4"
3
150 VDC25GP VDC25 G54 P50
A-21
200 watt
1
/2 or 3/4" 200 VDC22GP VDC22 G24 P21
A-23
300 watt
1
/2 or /4"
3
300 VDC23GP VDC23 G34/G251 P22
PS-25 & PS-30
Ceiling Mount for

Recessed 4" Round
Box – VXH Series
Max. Complete Cat. # Lamp
Series Lamp Size with globe/guard Socket Body Globe Guard
1L
150 watt
150 VXH15GP VXH15 G54 P50
A-21
200 watt
200 VXH12GP VXH12 G24 P21
A-23
300 watt
300 VXH13GP VXH13 G34/G251 P22
PS-25 & PS-30
Ceiling Mount with

Junction Box –
VXHF Series
Hub Max. Complete Cat. # Lamp Junction
Size Series Lamp Size with globe/guard Socket Body Globe Guard Box
150 watt
1
/2 or 3/4" 150 VXHF25GP VXH15 G54 P50 VXF20
A-21
200 watt
1
/2 or 3/4" 200 VXHF22GP VXH12 G24 P21 VXF20
A-23
300 watt
1
/2 or 3/4" 300 VXHF23GP VXH13 G34/G251 P22 VXF20
PS-25 & PS-30
Note: All fixtures supplied with 1/2" reducers, except for pendant mount.
854 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds
9/14/2010 Product Datasheet -- HBL1221
Product Datasheet
AC LIGHT
HBL1221 -- Industrial Series Switch SWITCH
Single Pole, 20A 120/277V AC, Brown Toggle
Product Specifications
Product Type
Switch Type Single Pole

Switch Handle Positions 2
Switch Grade Industrial
Amperage 20A
Voltage 120/277V AC
Color
Wiring Style Back and Side Wired

Operating Temperatures Max Continuous- 75 Degrees C, Minimum- -40 Without Impact
Listing and Certifications UL Fed Spec Listed and CSA Certified
Weight in LBs 0.2
UPC Number 783585431321
Wiring Diagram
hubbellcatalog.com/…/section-c-datas… 1/2
3URGXFW'DWD6KHHW

!#

E - STOP

$
' +'

$ +
+' <
='
< > ?#=
[\
\
]
'
^_``j{
++
+<

+=
+'|
]
'
\<`j_{#
+
='J
!`??
#!

+^
'}
$

'
?~!

'
]
'
+>
<|'
' {##?+###?
+
+ |>' ?
~~?
~+~
+
' J'
=
^ '
'
>

>
''
^ '
< > ^=
_?!

<

>
< > ##
>

>
=
'
|
'' ?
'
|
`
''
=

''

'
'
+
!#

[
+>' =+?j

+?!

+>' `?_`

$
!#

<

+?
='
' j{#?`?#{#
}>
?
> #~!?
~
=J
+ }

'
}

'
'
|~
<'
'
#j``##{
?_`?!

`##{
'
^'~
=
'>
''J~ ?

Solar Turbines: Liquid Fuel Oil Treatment System System Operation and Maintenance Manual

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Solar Turbines: Liquid Fuel Oil Treatment System System Operation and Maintenance Manual

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Liquid Fuel Oil Treatment System

System Operation and Maintenance Manual

Gas Turbine Model: Titan 130

CUSTOMER PURCHASE ORDER NO:

ALFA LAVAL CO NO: 393052

Failure to follow the centrifuge maintenance schedule

Parts & Service

ALFA LAVAL INC. USA

Table of Contents and Revision Status CO 393052

Pradeep Shah Project Manager 09/01/10

SECTION 2: System Description

SECTION 3: Operating Instructions

SECTION 4: Parameter List

SECTION 5: Alarms and Fault Finding

SECTION 6: Installation System Reference & Drawings

SECTION 7: Service Manual

SECTION 8: Spare Parts Catalog

SECTION 9: Bill of Materials / Catalog - Auxiliary Equipment

Rev Date Page Paragraph Nature of change

0 09/01/10 Original Issue.

Important – read this!

The centrifugal separator includes parts

1.1 Key Factors for Safe

The following is compulsory for safe

1.2 Warning Sign Definitions

This type of safety sign or instruction

Warning – serious injury or death Example:

This type of safety sign or instruction indicates

Caution – minor or moderate injury Example:

This type of safety sign or instruction indicates

‘CAUTION’ used without the safety alert Burn hazard

1.3 Summary of Safety Hazards

Continued on next page

If power cable polarity has been reversed, the

Never attempt to clean the bowl by manual discharge

© Alfa Laval Tumba AB 26 October 2005

The PA Purifier System is designed for cleaning The system comprises:

1.1 The Oil Flow Backpressure

during alarm conditions.

1.2 System Layout

Heater Temperature Pressure transmitter, Pneumatically controlled Separator

Solenoid valve block, water Sludge outlet

Distributes separator opening/

Control unit Pressure transmitter, oil Regulating valve (RV4)

PT Clean oil outlet

1.5 System Components, PA 625/635

Clean oil outlet

2.2 Definition of Terms

1 Check that the separator is correctly

Use the separation system for the purpose, and

2 Check the oil sump level and top up if

• For P 600, P 605, P 610, and P 615:

Too much or too little oil can damage the separator

Check the rotation of the bowl by doing a quick

If power cable polarity has been reversed, the

Air Valve Block (PA 600, 610)

Use the pressure gauge situated in the air valve

1.2 Operator Panel

ABB Automation Products Inc. 09/12/10 (1) Of (22)

Liquid Fuel Treatment System Operating Descriptions

Operator Instruction Manual

Turbine Model: Titan 130

Basic Operating Instructions